]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispintro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
Merge branch 'master' of git.sv.gnu.org:/srv/git/emacs
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispintro / emacs-lisp-intro.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @comment %**start of header
3 @setfilename ../../info/eintr.info
4 @c setfilename emacs-lisp-intro.info
5 @c sethtmlfilename emacs-lisp-intro.html
6 @settitle Programming in Emacs Lisp
7 @include docstyle.texi
8 @syncodeindex vr cp
9 @syncodeindex fn cp
10 @finalout
11
12 @include emacsver.texi
13
14 @c ================ How to Print a Book in Various Sizes ================
15
16 @c This book can be printed in any of three different sizes.
17 @c Set the following @-commands appropriately.
18
19 @c 7 by 9.25 inches:
20 @c @smallbook
21 @c @clear largebook
22
23 @c 8.5 by 11 inches:
24 @c @c smallbook
25 @c @set largebook
26
27 @c European A4 size paper:
28 @c @c smallbook
29 @c @afourpaper
30 @c @set largebook
31
32 @c (Note: if you edit the book so as to change the length of the
33 @c table of contents, you may have to change the value of 'pageno' below.)
34
35 @c <<<< For hard copy printing, this file is now
36 @c set for smallbook, which works for all sizes
37 @c of paper, and with PostScript figures >>>>
38
39 @set smallbook
40 @ifset smallbook
41 @smallbook
42 @clear largebook
43 @end ifset
44
45 @c ================ Included Figures ================
46
47 @c If you clear this, the figures will be printed as ASCII diagrams
48 @c rather than PostScript/PDF.
49 @c (This is not relevant to Info, since Info only handles ASCII.)
50 @set print-postscript-figures
51 @c clear print-postscript-figures
52
53 @comment %**end of header
54
55 @c per rms and peterb, use 10pt fonts for the main text, mostly to
56 @c save on paper cost.
57 @c Do this inside @tex for now, so current makeinfo does not complain.
58 @tex
59 @ifset smallbook
60 @fonttextsize 10
61
62 @end ifset
63 \global\hbadness=6666 % don't worry about not-too-underfull boxes
64 @end tex
65
66 @c These refer to the printed book sold by the FSF.
67 @set edition-number 3.10
68 @set update-date 28 October 2009
69
70 @c For next or subsequent edition:
71 @c create function using with-output-to-temp-buffer
72 @c create a major mode, with keymaps
73 @c run an asynchronous process, like grep or diff
74
75 @c For 8.5 by 11 inch format: do not use such a small amount of
76 @c whitespace between paragraphs as smallbook format
77 @ifset largebook
78 @tex
79 \global\parskip 6pt plus 1pt
80 @end tex
81 @end ifset
82
83 @c For all sized formats: print within-book cross
84 @c reference with ``...'' rather than [...]
85
86 @c This works with the texinfo.tex file, version 2003-05-04.08,
87 @c in the Texinfo version 4.6 of the 2003 Jun 13 distribution.
88
89 @tex
90 \if \xrefprintnodename
91 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{\unskip, ``#1''}
92 \else
93 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{ ``#1''}
94 \fi
95 % \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{, ``#1''}
96 @end tex
97
98 @c ----------------------------------------------------
99
100 @dircategory Emacs lisp
101 @direntry
102 * Emacs Lisp Intro: (eintr). A simple introduction to Emacs Lisp programming.
103 @end direntry
104
105 @copying
106 This is an @cite{Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp}, for
107 people who are not programmers.
108 @sp 1
109 @iftex
110 Edition @value{edition-number}, @value{update-date}
111 @end iftex
112 @ifnottex
113 Distributed with Emacs version @value{EMACSVER}.
114 @end ifnottex
115 @sp 1
116 Copyright @copyright{} 1990--1995, 1997, 2001--2015 Free Software
117 Foundation, Inc.
118 @sp 1
119
120 @iftex
121 Published by the:@*
122
123 GNU Press, @hfill @uref{http://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/}@*
124 a division of the @hfill email: @email{sales@@fsf.org}@*
125 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @hfill Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942@*
126 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor @hfill Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652@*
127 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
128 @end iftex
129
130 @ifnottex
131 Printed copies available from @uref{http://shop.fsf.org/}. Published by:
132
133 @example
134 GNU Press, http://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/
135 a division of the email: sales@@fsf.org
136 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942
137 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652
138 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
139 @end example
140 @end ifnottex
141
142 @sp 1
143 ISBN 1-882114-43-4
144
145 @quotation
146 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
147 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
148 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; there
149 being no Invariant Section, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU
150 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of
151 the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free
152 Documentation License''.
153
154 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to
155 copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF
156 supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
157 @end quotation
158 @end copying
159
160 @c half title; two lines here, so do not use 'shorttitlepage'
161 @tex
162 {\begingroup%
163 \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{An Introduction to}%
164 \endgroup}%
165 {\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 0.25in \chaprm%
166 \centerline{Programming in Emacs Lisp}%
167 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
168 @end tex
169
170 @titlepage
171 @sp 6
172 @center @titlefont{An Introduction to}
173 @sp 2
174 @center @titlefont{Programming in Emacs Lisp}
175 @sp 2
176 @center Revised Third Edition
177 @sp 4
178 @center by Robert J. Chassell
179
180 @page
181 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
182 @insertcopying
183 @end titlepage
184
185 @iftex
186 @headings off
187 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
188 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
189 @end iftex
190
191 @ifnothtml
192 @c Keep T.O.C. short by tightening up for largebook
193 @ifset largebook
194 @tex
195 \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
196 \global\advance\baselineskip by -1pt
197 @end tex
198 @end ifset
199 @end ifnothtml
200
201 @shortcontents
202 @contents
203
204 @ifnottex
205 @node Top
206 @top An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp
207
208 @ifset WWW_GNU_ORG
209 @html
210 <p>The homepage for GNU Emacs is at
211 <a href="/software/emacs/">http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/</a>.<br>
212 To view this manual in other formats, click
213 <a href="/software/emacs/manual/eintr.html">here</a>.
214 @end html
215 @end ifset
216
217 @insertcopying
218
219 This master menu first lists each chapter and index; then it lists
220 every node in every chapter.
221 @end ifnottex
222
223 @c >>>> Set pageno appropriately <<<<
224
225 @c The first page of the Preface is a roman numeral; it is the first
226 @c right handed page after the Table of Contents; hence the following
227 @c setting must be for an odd negative number.
228
229 @c iftex
230 @c global@pageno = -11
231 @c end iftex
232
233 @set COUNT-WORDS count-words-example
234 @c Length of variable name chosen so that things still line up when expanded.
235
236 @menu
237 * Preface:: What to look for.
238 * List Processing:: What is Lisp?
239 * Practicing Evaluation:: Running several programs.
240 * Writing Defuns:: How to write function definitions.
241 * Buffer Walk Through:: Exploring a few buffer-related functions.
242 * More Complex:: A few, even more complex functions.
243 * Narrowing & Widening:: Restricting your and Emacs attention to
244 a region.
245 * car cdr & cons:: Fundamental functions in Lisp.
246 * Cutting & Storing Text:: Removing text and saving it.
247 * List Implementation:: How lists are implemented in the computer.
248 * Yanking:: Pasting stored text.
249 * Loops & Recursion:: How to repeat a process.
250 * Regexp Search:: Regular expression searches.
251 * Counting Words:: A review of repetition and regexps.
252 * Words in a defun:: Counting words in a @code{defun}.
253 * Readying a Graph:: A prototype graph printing function.
254 * Emacs Initialization:: How to write a @file{.emacs} file.
255 * Debugging:: How to run the Emacs Lisp debuggers.
256 * Conclusion:: Now you have the basics.
257 * the-the:: An appendix: how to find reduplicated words.
258 * Kill Ring:: An appendix: how the kill ring works.
259 * Full Graph:: How to create a graph with labeled axes.
260 * Free Software and Free Manuals::
261 * GNU Free Documentation License::
262 * Index::
263 * About the Author::
264
265 @detailmenu
266 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
267
268 Preface
269
270 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
271 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
272 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
273 * Lisp History::
274 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
275 * Thank You::
276
277 List Processing
278
279 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
280 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
281 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
282 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
283 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
284 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
285 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
286 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
287 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
288 * Summary:: The major points.
289 * Error Message Exercises::
290
291 Lisp Lists
292
293 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
294 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
295 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
296 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
297
298 The Lisp Interpreter
299
300 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
301 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
302
303 Evaluation
304
305 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
306 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
307
308 Variables
309
310 * fill-column Example::
311 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
312 without a function.
313 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
314
315 Arguments
316
317 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
318 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
319 of a variable or list.
320 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
321 variable number of arguments.
322 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
323 to a function.
324 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
325
326 Setting the Value of a Variable
327
328 * Using set:: Setting values.
329 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
330 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
331
332 Practicing Evaluation
333
334 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
335 causes evaluation.
336 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
337 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
338 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
339 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
340 the buffer.
341 * Evaluation Exercise::
342
343 How To Write Function Definitions
344
345 * Primitive Functions::
346 * defun:: The @code{defun} macro.
347 * Install:: Install a function definition.
348 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
349 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
350 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
351 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
352 * if:: What if?
353 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
354 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
355 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point and buffer.
356 * Review::
357 * defun Exercises::
358
359 Install a Function Definition
360
361 * Effect of installation::
362 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
363
364 Make a Function Interactive
365
366 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
367 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
368
369 @code{let}
370
371 * Prevent confusion::
372 * Parts of let Expression::
373 * Sample let Expression::
374 * Uninitialized let Variables::
375
376 The @code{if} Special Form
377
378 * if in more detail::
379 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
380
381 Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
382
383 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
384
385 @code{save-excursion}
386
387 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
388 * Template for save-excursion::
389
390 A Few Buffer-Related Functions
391
392 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
393 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
394 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
395 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
396 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
397 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
398 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
399 * Buffer Exercises::
400
401 The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
402
403 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
404 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
405
406 The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
407
408 * append-to-buffer overview::
409 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
410 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
411 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
412
413 A Few More Complex Functions
414
415 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
416 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
417 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
418 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
419 * Second Buffer Related Review::
420 * optional Exercise::
421
422 The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
423
424 * insert-buffer code::
425 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
426 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
427 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
428 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
429 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
430 * New insert-buffer::
431
432 The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
433
434 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
435 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
436
437 Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
438
439 * Optional Arguments::
440 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
441 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
442
443 @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
444
445 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
446 * Large buffer case::
447 * Small buffer case::
448
449 Narrowing and Widening
450
451 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
452 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
453 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
454 * narrow Exercise::
455
456 @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
457
458 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
459 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
460 * cons:: Constructing a list.
461 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
462 * nth::
463 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
464 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
465 * cons Exercise::
466
467 @code{cons}
468
469 * Build a list::
470 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
471
472 Cutting and Storing Text
473
474 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
475 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
476 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
477 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
478 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
479 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
480 * cons & search-fwd Review::
481 * search Exercises::
482
483 @code{zap-to-char}
484
485 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
486 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
487 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
488 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
489 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
490 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
491
492 @code{kill-region}
493
494 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
495 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
496 * Lisp macro::
497
498 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
499
500 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
501 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
502
503 The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
504
505 * last-command & this-command::
506 * kill-append function::
507 * kill-new function::
508
509 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
510
511 * See variable current value::
512 * defvar and asterisk::
513
514 How Lists are Implemented
515
516 * Lists diagrammed::
517 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
518 * List Exercise::
519
520 Yanking Text Back
521
522 * Kill Ring Overview::
523 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
524 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
525
526 Loops and Recursion
527
528 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
529 * dolist dotimes::
530 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
531 * Looping exercise::
532
533 @code{while}
534
535 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
536 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
537 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
538 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
539 * Incrementing Loop Details::
540 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
541
542 Details of an Incrementing Loop
543
544 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
545 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
546 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
547
548 Loop with a Decrementing Counter
549
550 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
551 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
552 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
553
554 Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
555
556 * dolist::
557 * dotimes::
558
559 Recursion
560
561 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
562 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
563 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
564 * Recursive triangle function::
565 * Recursion with cond::
566 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
567 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
568 * No deferment solution::
569
570 Recursion in Place of a Counter
571
572 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
573 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
574
575 Recursive Patterns
576
577 * Every::
578 * Accumulate::
579 * Keep::
580
581 Regular Expression Searches
582
583 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
584 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
585 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
586 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
587 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
588 * Regexp Review::
589 * re-search Exercises::
590
591 @code{forward-sentence}
592
593 * Complete forward-sentence::
594 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
595 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
596
597 @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
598
599 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
600 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
601 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
602
603 Counting: Repetition and Regexps
604
605 * Why Count Words::
606 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
607 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
608 * Counting Exercise::
609
610 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
611
612 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
613 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
614
615 Counting Words in a @code{defun}
616
617 * Divide and Conquer::
618 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
619 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
620 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
621 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
622 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
623 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
624 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
625 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
626 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
627
628 Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
629
630 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
631 * append:: Attach one list to another.
632
633 Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
634
635 * Data for Display in Detail::
636 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
637 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
638 * Counting function definitions::
639
640 Readying a Graph
641
642 * Columns of a graph::
643 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
644 * recursive-graph-body-print::
645 * Printed Axes::
646 * Line Graph Exercise::
647
648 Your @file{.emacs} File
649
650 * Default Configuration::
651 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
652 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
653 * Beginning init File:: How to write a @file{.emacs} init file.
654 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
655 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
656 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
657 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
658 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
659 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
660 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
661 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
662 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
663 * Miscellaneous::
664 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
665
666 Debugging
667
668 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
669 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
670 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
671 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
672 * Debugging Exercises::
673
674 Handling the Kill Ring
675
676 * What the Kill Ring Does::
677 * current-kill::
678 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
679 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
680 * ring file::
681
682 The @code{current-kill} Function
683
684 * Code for current-kill::
685 * Understanding current-kill::
686
687 @code{current-kill} in Outline
688
689 * Body of current-kill::
690 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
691 * Determining the Element::
692
693 A Graph with Labeled Axes
694
695 * Labeled Example::
696 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
697 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
698 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
699 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
700
701 The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
702
703 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
704 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
705 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
706 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
707 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
708 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
709
710 The @code{print-X-axis} Function
711
712 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
713 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
714
715 Printing the Whole Graph
716
717 * The final version:: A few changes.
718 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
719 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
720 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
721 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
722 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
723 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
724
725 @end detailmenu
726 @end menu
727
728 @node Preface
729 @unnumbered Preface
730
731 Most of the GNU Emacs integrated environment is written in the programming
732 language called Emacs Lisp. The code written in this programming
733 language is the software---the sets of instructions---that tell the
734 computer what to do when you give it commands. Emacs is designed so
735 that you can write new code in Emacs Lisp and easily install it as an
736 extension to the editor.
737
738 (GNU Emacs is sometimes called an ``extensible editor'', but it does
739 much more than provide editing capabilities. It is better to refer to
740 Emacs as an ``extensible computing environment''. However, that
741 phrase is quite a mouthful. It is easier to refer to Emacs simply as
742 an editor. Moreover, everything you do in Emacs---find the Mayan date
743 and phases of the moon, simplify polynomials, debug code, manage
744 files, read letters, write books---all these activities are kinds of
745 editing in the most general sense of the word.)
746
747 @menu
748 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
749 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
750 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
751 * Lisp History::
752 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
753 * Thank You::
754 @end menu
755
756 @ifnottex
757 @node Why
758 @unnumberedsec Why Study Emacs Lisp?
759 @end ifnottex
760
761 Although Emacs Lisp is usually thought of in association only with Emacs,
762 it is a full computer programming language. You can use Emacs Lisp as
763 you would any other programming language.
764
765 Perhaps you want to understand programming; perhaps you want to extend
766 Emacs; or perhaps you want to become a programmer. This introduction to
767 Emacs Lisp is designed to get you started: to guide you in learning the
768 fundamentals of programming, and more importantly, to show you how you
769 can teach yourself to go further.
770
771 @node On Reading this Text
772 @unnumberedsec On Reading this Text
773
774 All through this document, you will see little sample programs you can
775 run inside of Emacs. If you read this document in Info inside of GNU
776 Emacs, you can run the programs as they appear. (This is easy to do and
777 is explained when the examples are presented.) Alternatively, you can
778 read this introduction as a printed book while sitting beside a computer
779 running Emacs. (This is what I like to do; I like printed books.) If
780 you don't have a running Emacs beside you, you can still read this book,
781 but in this case, it is best to treat it as a novel or as a travel guide
782 to a country not yet visited: interesting, but not the same as being
783 there.
784
785 Much of this introduction is dedicated to walkthroughs or guided tours
786 of code used in GNU Emacs. These tours are designed for two purposes:
787 first, to give you familiarity with real, working code (code you use
788 every day); and, second, to give you familiarity with the way Emacs
789 works. It is interesting to see how a working environment is
790 implemented.
791 Also, I
792 hope that you will pick up the habit of browsing through source code.
793 You can learn from it and mine it for ideas. Having GNU Emacs is like
794 having a dragon's cave of treasures.
795
796 In addition to learning about Emacs as an editor and Emacs Lisp as a
797 programming language, the examples and guided tours will give you an
798 opportunity to get acquainted with Emacs as a Lisp programming
799 environment. GNU Emacs supports programming and provides tools that
800 you will want to become comfortable using, such as @kbd{M-.} (the key
801 which invokes the @code{find-tag} command). You will also learn about
802 buffers and other objects that are part of the environment.
803 Learning about these features of Emacs is like learning new routes
804 around your home town.
805
806 @ignore
807 In addition, I have written several programs as extended examples.
808 Although these are examples, the programs are real. I use them.
809 Other people use them. You may use them. Beyond the fragments of
810 programs used for illustrations, there is very little in here that is
811 ``just for teaching purposes''; what you see is used. This is a great
812 advantage of Emacs Lisp: it is easy to learn to use it for work.
813 @end ignore
814
815 Finally, I hope to convey some of the skills for using Emacs to
816 learn aspects of programming that you don't know. You can often use
817 Emacs to help you understand what puzzles you or to find out how to do
818 something new. This self-reliance is not only a pleasure, but an
819 advantage.
820
821 @node Who You Are
822 @unnumberedsec For Whom This is Written
823
824 This text is written as an elementary introduction for people who are
825 not programmers. If you are a programmer, you may not be satisfied with
826 this primer. The reason is that you may have become expert at reading
827 reference manuals and be put off by the way this text is organized.
828
829 An expert programmer who reviewed this text said to me:
830
831 @quotation
832 @i{I prefer to learn from reference manuals. I ``dive into'' each
833 paragraph, and ``come up for air'' between paragraphs.}
834
835 @i{When I get to the end of a paragraph, I assume that that subject is
836 done, finished, that I know everything I need (with the
837 possible exception of the case when the next paragraph starts talking
838 about it in more detail). I expect that a well written reference manual
839 will not have a lot of redundancy, and that it will have excellent
840 pointers to the (one) place where the information I want is.}
841 @end quotation
842
843 This introduction is not written for this person!
844
845 Firstly, I try to say everything at least three times: first, to
846 introduce it; second, to show it in context; and third, to show it in a
847 different context, or to review it.
848
849 Secondly, I hardly ever put all the information about a subject in one
850 place, much less in one paragraph. To my way of thinking, that imposes
851 too heavy a burden on the reader. Instead I try to explain only what
852 you need to know at the time. (Sometimes I include a little extra
853 information so you won't be surprised later when the additional
854 information is formally introduced.)
855
856 When you read this text, you are not expected to learn everything the
857 first time. Frequently, you need only make, as it were, a ``nodding
858 acquaintance'' with some of the items mentioned. My hope is that I have
859 structured the text and given you enough hints that you will be alert to
860 what is important, and concentrate on it.
861
862 You will need to ``dive into'' some paragraphs; there is no other way
863 to read them. But I have tried to keep down the number of such
864 paragraphs. This book is intended as an approachable hill, rather than
865 as a daunting mountain.
866
867 This introduction to @cite{Programming in Emacs Lisp} has a companion
868 document,
869 @iftex
870 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
871 @end iftex
872 @ifnottex
873 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
874 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
875 @end ifnottex
876 The reference manual has more detail than this introduction. In the
877 reference manual, all the information about one topic is concentrated
878 in one place. You should turn to it if you are like the programmer
879 quoted above. And, of course, after you have read this
880 @cite{Introduction}, you will find the @cite{Reference Manual} useful
881 when you are writing your own programs.
882
883 @node Lisp History
884 @unnumberedsec Lisp History
885 @cindex Lisp history
886
887 Lisp was first developed in the late 1950s at the Massachusetts
888 Institute of Technology for research in artificial intelligence. The
889 great power of the Lisp language makes it superior for other purposes as
890 well, such as writing editor commands and integrated environments.
891
892 @cindex Maclisp
893 @cindex Common Lisp
894 GNU Emacs Lisp is largely inspired by Maclisp, which was written at MIT
895 in the 1960s. It is somewhat inspired by Common Lisp, which became a
896 standard in the 1980s. However, Emacs Lisp is much simpler than Common
897 Lisp. (The standard Emacs distribution contains an optional extensions
898 file, @file{cl.el}, that adds many Common Lisp features to Emacs Lisp.)
899
900 @node Note for Novices
901 @unnumberedsec A Note for Novices
902
903 If you don't know GNU Emacs, you can still read this document
904 profitably. However, I recommend you learn Emacs, if only to learn to
905 move around your computer screen. You can teach yourself how to use
906 Emacs with the built-in tutorial. To use it, type @kbd{C-h t}. (This
907 means you press and release the @key{CTRL} key and the @kbd{h} at the
908 same time, and then press and release @kbd{t}.)
909
910 Also, I often refer to one of Emacs's standard commands by listing the
911 keys which you press to invoke the command and then giving the name of
912 the command in parentheses, like this: @kbd{M-C-\}
913 (@code{indent-region}). What this means is that the
914 @code{indent-region} command is customarily invoked by typing
915 @kbd{M-C-\}. (You can, if you wish, change the keys that are typed to
916 invoke the command; this is called @dfn{rebinding}. @xref{Keymaps, ,
917 Keymaps}.) The abbreviation @kbd{M-C-\} means that you type your
918 @key{META} key, @key{CTRL} key and @key{\} key all at the same time.
919 (On many modern keyboards the @key{META} key is labeled
920 @key{ALT}.)
921 Sometimes a combination like this is called a keychord, since it is
922 similar to the way you play a chord on a piano. If your keyboard does
923 not have a @key{META} key, the @key{ESC} key prefix is used in place
924 of it. In this case, @kbd{M-C-\} means that you press and release your
925 @key{ESC} key and then type the @key{CTRL} key and the @key{\} key at
926 the same time. But usually @kbd{M-C-\} means press the @key{CTRL} key
927 along with the key that is labeled @key{ALT} and, at the same time,
928 press the @key{\} key.
929
930 In addition to typing a lone keychord, you can prefix what you type
931 with @kbd{C-u}, which is called the ``universal argument''. The
932 @kbd{C-u} keychord passes an argument to the subsequent command.
933 Thus, to indent a region of plain text by 6 spaces, mark the region,
934 and then type @w{@kbd{C-u 6 M-C-\}}. (If you do not specify a number,
935 Emacs either passes the number 4 to the command or otherwise runs the
936 command differently than it would otherwise.) @xref{Arguments, ,
937 Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
938
939 If you are reading this in Info using GNU Emacs, you can read through
940 this whole document just by pressing the space bar, @key{SPC}.
941 (To learn about Info, type @kbd{C-h i} and then select Info.)
942
943 A note on terminology: when I use the word Lisp alone, I often am
944 referring to the various dialects of Lisp in general, but when I speak
945 of Emacs Lisp, I am referring to GNU Emacs Lisp in particular.
946
947 @node Thank You
948 @unnumberedsec Thank You
949
950 My thanks to all who helped me with this book. My especial thanks to
951 @r{Jim Blandy}, @r{Noah Friedman}, @w{Jim Kingdon}, @r{Roland
952 McGrath}, @w{Frank Ritter}, @w{Randy Smith}, @w{Richard M.
953 Stallman}, and @w{Melissa Weisshaus}. My thanks also go to both
954 @w{Philip Johnson} and @w{David Stampe} for their patient
955 encouragement. My mistakes are my own.
956
957 @flushright
958 Robert J. Chassell
959 @ifnothtml
960 @email{bob@@gnu.org}
961 @end ifnothtml
962 @ifhtml
963 bob@@gnu.org
964 @end ifhtml
965 @end flushright
966
967 @c ================ Beginning of main text ================
968
969 @c Start main text on right-hand (verso) page
970
971 @tex
972 \par\vfill\supereject
973 \headings off
974 \ifodd\pageno
975 \par\vfill\supereject
976 \else
977 \par\vfill\supereject
978 \page\hbox{}\page
979 \par\vfill\supereject
980 \fi
981 @end tex
982
983 @c Note: this resetting of the page number back to 1 causes TeX to gripe
984 @c about already having seen page numbers 1-4 before (in the preface):
985 @c pdfTeX warning (ext4): destination with the same identifier (name{1})
986 @c has been already used, duplicate ignored
987 @c I guess that is harmless (what happens if a later part of the text
988 @c makes a link to something in the first 4 pages though?).
989 @c E.g., note that the Emacs manual has a preface, but does not bother
990 @c resetting the page numbers back to 1 after that.
991 @iftex
992 @headings off
993 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
994 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
995 @global@pageno = 1
996 @end iftex
997
998 @node List Processing
999 @chapter List Processing
1000
1001 To the untutored eye, Lisp is a strange programming language. In Lisp
1002 code there are parentheses everywhere. Some people even claim that
1003 the name stands for ``Lots of Isolated Silly Parentheses''. But the
1004 claim is unwarranted. Lisp stands for LISt Processing, and the
1005 programming language handles @emph{lists} (and lists of lists) by
1006 putting them between parentheses. The parentheses mark the boundaries
1007 of the list. Sometimes a list is preceded by a single apostrophe or
1008 quotation mark, @samp{'}@footnote{The single apostrophe or quotation
1009 mark is an abbreviation for the function @code{quote}; you need not
1010 think about functions now; functions are defined in @ref{Making
1011 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}.} Lists are the basis of Lisp.
1012
1013 @menu
1014 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
1015 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
1016 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
1017 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
1018 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
1019 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
1020 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
1021 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
1022 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
1023 * Summary:: The major points.
1024 * Error Message Exercises::
1025 @end menu
1026
1027 @node Lisp Lists
1028 @section Lisp Lists
1029 @cindex Lisp Lists
1030
1031 In Lisp, a list looks like this: @code{'(rose violet daisy buttercup)}.
1032 This list is preceded by a single apostrophe. It could just as well be
1033 written as follows, which looks more like the kind of list you are likely
1034 to be familiar with:
1035
1036 @smallexample
1037 @group
1038 '(rose
1039 violet
1040 daisy
1041 buttercup)
1042 @end group
1043 @end smallexample
1044
1045 @noindent
1046 The elements of this list are the names of the four different flowers,
1047 separated from each other by whitespace and surrounded by parentheses,
1048 like flowers in a field with a stone wall around them.
1049 @cindex Flowers in a field
1050
1051 @menu
1052 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
1053 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
1054 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
1055 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
1056 @end menu
1057
1058 @ifnottex
1059 @node Numbers Lists
1060 @unnumberedsubsec Numbers, Lists inside of Lists
1061 @end ifnottex
1062
1063 Lists can also have numbers in them, as in this list: @code{(+ 2 2)}.
1064 This list has a plus-sign, @samp{+}, followed by two @samp{2}s, each
1065 separated by whitespace.
1066
1067 In Lisp, both data and programs are represented the same way; that is,
1068 they are both lists of words, numbers, or other lists, separated by
1069 whitespace and surrounded by parentheses. (Since a program looks like
1070 data, one program may easily serve as data for another; this is a very
1071 powerful feature of Lisp.) (Incidentally, these two parenthetical
1072 remarks are @emph{not} Lisp lists, because they contain @samp{;} and
1073 @samp{.} as punctuation marks.)
1074
1075 @need 1200
1076 Here is another list, this time with a list inside of it:
1077
1078 @smallexample
1079 '(this list has (a list inside of it))
1080 @end smallexample
1081
1082 The components of this list are the words @samp{this}, @samp{list},
1083 @samp{has}, and the list @samp{(a list inside of it)}. The interior
1084 list is made up of the words @samp{a}, @samp{list}, @samp{inside},
1085 @samp{of}, @samp{it}.
1086
1087 @node Lisp Atoms
1088 @subsection Lisp Atoms
1089 @cindex Lisp Atoms
1090
1091 In Lisp, what we have been calling words are called @dfn{atoms}. This
1092 term comes from the historical meaning of the word atom, which means
1093 ``indivisible''. As far as Lisp is concerned, the words we have been
1094 using in the lists cannot be divided into any smaller parts and still
1095 mean the same thing as part of a program; likewise with numbers and
1096 single character symbols like @samp{+}. On the other hand, unlike an
1097 ancient atom, a list can be split into parts. (@xref{car cdr & cons,
1098 , @code{car} @code{cdr} & @code{cons} Fundamental Functions}.)
1099
1100 In a list, atoms are separated from each other by whitespace. They can be
1101 right next to a parenthesis.
1102
1103 @cindex @samp{empty list} defined
1104 Technically speaking, a list in Lisp consists of parentheses surrounding
1105 atoms separated by whitespace or surrounding other lists or surrounding
1106 both atoms and other lists. A list can have just one atom in it or
1107 have nothing in it at all. A list with nothing in it looks like this:
1108 @code{()}, and is called the @dfn{empty list}. Unlike anything else, an
1109 empty list is considered both an atom and a list at the same time.
1110
1111 @cindex Symbolic expressions, introduced
1112 @cindex @samp{expression} defined
1113 @cindex @samp{form} defined
1114 The printed representation of both atoms and lists are called
1115 @dfn{symbolic expressions} or, more concisely, @dfn{s-expressions}.
1116 The word @dfn{expression} by itself can refer to either the printed
1117 representation, or to the atom or list as it is held internally in the
1118 computer. Often, people use the term @dfn{expression}
1119 indiscriminately. (Also, in many texts, the word @dfn{form} is used
1120 as a synonym for expression.)
1121
1122 Incidentally, the atoms that make up our universe were named such when
1123 they were thought to be indivisible; but it has been found that physical
1124 atoms are not indivisible. Parts can split off an atom or it can
1125 fission into two parts of roughly equal size. Physical atoms were named
1126 prematurely, before their truer nature was found. In Lisp, certain
1127 kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated into parts; but the
1128 mechanism for doing this is different from the mechanism for splitting a
1129 list. As far as list operations are concerned, the atoms of a list are
1130 unsplittable.
1131
1132 As in English, the meanings of the component letters of a Lisp atom
1133 are different from the meaning the letters make as a word. For
1134 example, the word for the South American sloth, the @samp{ai}, is
1135 completely different from the two words, @samp{a}, and @samp{i}.
1136
1137 There are many kinds of atom in nature but only a few in Lisp: for
1138 example, @dfn{numbers}, such as 37, 511, or 1729, and @dfn{symbols}, such
1139 as @samp{+}, @samp{foo}, or @samp{forward-line}. The words we have
1140 listed in the examples above are all symbols. In everyday Lisp
1141 conversation, the word ``atom'' is not often used, because programmers
1142 usually try to be more specific about what kind of atom they are dealing
1143 with. Lisp programming is mostly about symbols (and sometimes numbers)
1144 within lists. (Incidentally, the preceding three word parenthetical
1145 remark is a proper list in Lisp, since it consists of atoms, which in
1146 this case are symbols, separated by whitespace and enclosed by
1147 parentheses, without any non-Lisp punctuation.)
1148
1149 @need 1250
1150 Text between double quotation marks---even sentences or
1151 paragraphs---is also an atom. Here is an example:
1152 @cindex Text between double quotation marks
1153
1154 @smallexample
1155 '(this list includes "text between quotation marks.")
1156 @end smallexample
1157
1158 @cindex @samp{string} defined
1159 @noindent
1160 In Lisp, all of the quoted text including the punctuation mark and the
1161 blank spaces is a single atom. This kind of atom is called a
1162 @dfn{string} (for ``string of characters'') and is the sort of thing that
1163 is used for messages that a computer can print for a human to read.
1164 Strings are a different kind of atom than numbers or symbols and are
1165 used differently.
1166
1167 @node Whitespace in Lists
1168 @subsection Whitespace in Lists
1169 @cindex Whitespace in lists
1170
1171 @need 1200
1172 The amount of whitespace in a list does not matter. From the point of view
1173 of the Lisp language,
1174
1175 @smallexample
1176 @group
1177 '(this list
1178 looks like this)
1179 @end group
1180 @end smallexample
1181
1182 @need 800
1183 @noindent
1184 is exactly the same as this:
1185
1186 @smallexample
1187 '(this list looks like this)
1188 @end smallexample
1189
1190 Both examples show what to Lisp is the same list, the list made up of
1191 the symbols @samp{this}, @samp{list}, @samp{looks}, @samp{like}, and
1192 @samp{this} in that order.
1193
1194 Extra whitespace and newlines are designed to make a list more readable
1195 by humans. When Lisp reads the expression, it gets rid of all the extra
1196 whitespace (but it needs to have at least one space between atoms in
1197 order to tell them apart.)
1198
1199 Odd as it seems, the examples we have seen cover almost all of what Lisp
1200 lists look like! Every other list in Lisp looks more or less like one
1201 of these examples, except that the list may be longer and more complex.
1202 In brief, a list is between parentheses, a string is between quotation
1203 marks, a symbol looks like a word, and a number looks like a number.
1204 (For certain situations, square brackets, dots and a few other special
1205 characters may be used; however, we will go quite far without them.)
1206
1207 @node Typing Lists
1208 @subsection GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists
1209 @cindex Help typing lists
1210 @cindex Formatting help
1211
1212 When you type a Lisp expression in GNU Emacs using either Lisp
1213 Interaction mode or Emacs Lisp mode, you have available to you several
1214 commands to format the Lisp expression so it is easy to read. For
1215 example, pressing the @key{TAB} key automatically indents the line the
1216 cursor is on by the right amount. A command to properly indent the
1217 code in a region is customarily bound to @kbd{M-C-\}. Indentation is
1218 designed so that you can see which elements of a list belong to which
1219 list---elements of a sub-list are indented more than the elements of
1220 the enclosing list.
1221
1222 In addition, when you type a closing parenthesis, Emacs momentarily
1223 jumps the cursor back to the matching opening parenthesis, so you can
1224 see which one it is. This is very useful, since every list you type
1225 in Lisp must have its closing parenthesis match its opening
1226 parenthesis. (@xref{Major Modes, , Major Modes, emacs, The GNU Emacs
1227 Manual}, for more information about Emacs's modes.)
1228
1229 @node Run a Program
1230 @section Run a Program
1231 @cindex Run a program
1232 @cindex Program, running one
1233
1234 @cindex @samp{evaluate} defined
1235 A list in Lisp---any list---is a program ready to run. If you run it
1236 (for which the Lisp jargon is @dfn{evaluate}), the computer will do one
1237 of three things: do nothing except return to you the list itself; send
1238 you an error message; or, treat the first symbol in the list as a
1239 command to do something. (Usually, of course, it is the last of these
1240 three things that you really want!)
1241
1242 @c use code for the single apostrophe, not samp.
1243 @findex quote
1244 @cindex @code{'} for quoting
1245 @cindex quoting using apostrophe
1246 @cindex apostrophe for quoting
1247 The single apostrophe, @code{'}, that I put in front of some of the
1248 example lists in preceding sections is called a @dfn{quote}; when it
1249 precedes a list, it tells Lisp to do nothing with the list, other than
1250 take it as it is written. But if there is no quote preceding a list,
1251 the first item of the list is special: it is a command for the computer
1252 to obey. (In Lisp, these commands are called @emph{functions}.) The list
1253 @code{(+ 2 2)} shown above did not have a quote in front of it, so Lisp
1254 understands that the @code{+} is an instruction to do something with the
1255 rest of the list: add the numbers that follow.
1256
1257 @need 1250
1258 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs in Info, here is how you can
1259 evaluate such a list: place your cursor immediately after the right
1260 hand parenthesis of the following list and then type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1261
1262 @smallexample
1263 (+ 2 2)
1264 @end smallexample
1265
1266 @c use code for the number four, not samp.
1267 @noindent
1268 You will see the number @code{4} appear in the echo area. (In the
1269 jargon, what you have just done is ``evaluate the list.'' The echo area
1270 is the line at the bottom of the screen that displays or ``echoes''
1271 text.) Now try the same thing with a quoted list: place the cursor
1272 right after the following list and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1273
1274 @smallexample
1275 '(this is a quoted list)
1276 @end smallexample
1277
1278 @noindent
1279 You will see @code{(this is a quoted list)} appear in the echo area.
1280
1281 @cindex Lisp interpreter, explained
1282 @cindex Interpreter, Lisp, explained
1283 In both cases, what you are doing is giving a command to the program
1284 inside of GNU Emacs called the @dfn{Lisp interpreter}---giving the
1285 interpreter a command to evaluate the expression. The name of the Lisp
1286 interpreter comes from the word for the task done by a human who comes
1287 up with the meaning of an expression---who ``interprets'' it.
1288
1289 You can also evaluate an atom that is not part of a list---one that is
1290 not surrounded by parentheses; again, the Lisp interpreter translates
1291 from the humanly readable expression to the language of the computer.
1292 But before discussing this (@pxref{Variables}), we will discuss what the
1293 Lisp interpreter does when you make an error.
1294
1295 @node Making Errors
1296 @section Generate an Error Message
1297 @cindex Generate an error message
1298 @cindex Error message generation
1299
1300 Partly so you won't worry if you do it accidentally, we will now give
1301 a command to the Lisp interpreter that generates an error message.
1302 This is a harmless activity; and indeed, we will often try to generate
1303 error messages intentionally. Once you understand the jargon, error
1304 messages can be informative. Instead of being called ``error''
1305 messages, they should be called ``help'' messages. They are like
1306 signposts to a traveler in a strange country; deciphering them can be
1307 hard, but once understood, they can point the way.
1308
1309 The error message is generated by a built-in GNU Emacs debugger. We
1310 will ``enter the debugger''. You get out of the debugger by typing @code{q}.
1311
1312 What we will do is evaluate a list that is not quoted and does not
1313 have a meaningful command as its first element. Here is a list almost
1314 exactly the same as the one we just used, but without the single-quote
1315 in front of it. Position the cursor right after it and type @kbd{C-x
1316 C-e}:
1317
1318 @smallexample
1319 (this is an unquoted list)
1320 @end smallexample
1321
1322 @ignore
1323 @noindent
1324 What you see depends on which version of Emacs you are running. GNU
1325 Emacs version 22 provides more information than version 20 and before.
1326 First, the more recent result of generating an error; then the
1327 earlier, version 20 result.
1328
1329 @need 1250
1330 @noindent
1331 In GNU Emacs version 22, a @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and
1332 you will see the following in it:
1333 @end ignore
1334
1335 A @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and you should see the
1336 following in it:
1337
1338 @smallexample
1339 @group
1340 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1341 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1342 (this is an unquoted list)
1343 eval((this is an unquoted list))
1344 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1345 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1346 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1347 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1348 @end group
1349 @end smallexample
1350
1351 @need 1200
1352 @noindent
1353 Your cursor will be in this window (you may have to wait a few seconds
1354 before it becomes visible). To quit the debugger and make the
1355 debugger window go away, type:
1356
1357 @smallexample
1358 q
1359 @end smallexample
1360
1361 @noindent
1362 Please type @kbd{q} right now, so you become confident that you can
1363 get out of the debugger. Then, type @kbd{C-x C-e} again to re-enter
1364 it.
1365
1366 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1367 Based on what we already know, we can almost read this error message.
1368
1369 You read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells
1370 you what Emacs did. When you typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, you made an
1371 interactive call to the command @code{eval-last-sexp}. @code{eval} is
1372 an abbreviation for ``evaluate'' and @code{sexp} is an abbreviation for
1373 ``symbolic expression''. The command means ``evaluate last symbolic
1374 expression'', which is the expression just before your cursor.
1375
1376 Each line above tells you what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
1377 The most recent action is at the top. The buffer is called the
1378 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer because it enables you to track Emacs
1379 backwards.
1380
1381 @need 800
1382 At the top of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, you see the line:
1383
1384 @smallexample
1385 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1386 @end smallexample
1387
1388 @noindent
1389 The Lisp interpreter tried to evaluate the first atom of the list, the
1390 word @samp{this}. It is this action that generated the error message
1391 @samp{void-function this}.
1392
1393 The message contains the words @samp{void-function} and @samp{this}.
1394
1395 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1396 The word @samp{function} was mentioned once before. It is a very
1397 important word. For our purposes, we can define it by saying that a
1398 @dfn{function} is a set of instructions to the computer that tell the
1399 computer to do something.
1400
1401 Now we can begin to understand the error message: @samp{void-function
1402 this}. The function (that is, the word @samp{this}) does not have a
1403 definition of any set of instructions for the computer to carry out.
1404
1405 The slightly odd word, @samp{void-function}, is designed to cover the
1406 way Emacs Lisp is implemented, which is that when a symbol does not
1407 have a function definition attached to it, the place that should
1408 contain the instructions is ``void''.
1409
1410 On the other hand, since we were able to add 2 plus 2 successfully, by
1411 evaluating @code{(+ 2 2)}, we can infer that the symbol @code{+} must
1412 have a set of instructions for the computer to obey and those
1413 instructions must be to add the numbers that follow the @code{+}.
1414
1415 It is possible to prevent Emacs entering the debugger in cases like
1416 this. We do not explain how to do that here, but we will mention what
1417 the result looks like, because you may encounter a similar situation
1418 if there is a bug in some Emacs code that you are using. In such
1419 cases, you will see only one line of error message; it will appear in
1420 the echo area and look like this:
1421
1422 @smallexample
1423 Symbol's function definition is void:@: this
1424 @end smallexample
1425
1426 @noindent
1427 @ignore
1428 (Also, your terminal may beep at you---some do, some don't; and others
1429 blink. This is just a device to get your attention.)
1430 @end ignore
1431 The message goes away as soon as you type a key, even just to
1432 move the cursor.
1433
1434 We know the meaning of the word @samp{Symbol}. It refers to the first
1435 atom of the list, the word @samp{this}. The word @samp{function}
1436 refers to the instructions that tell the computer what to do.
1437 (Technically, the symbol tells the computer where to find the
1438 instructions, but this is a complication we can ignore for the
1439 moment.)
1440
1441 The error message can be understood: @samp{Symbol's function
1442 definition is void:@: this}. The symbol (that is, the word
1443 @samp{this}) lacks instructions for the computer to carry out.
1444
1445 @node Names & Definitions
1446 @section Symbol Names and Function Definitions
1447 @cindex Symbol names
1448
1449 We can articulate another characteristic of Lisp based on what we have
1450 discussed so far---an important characteristic: a symbol, like
1451 @code{+}, is not itself the set of instructions for the computer to
1452 carry out. Instead, the symbol is used, perhaps temporarily, as a way
1453 of locating the definition or set of instructions. What we see is the
1454 name through which the instructions can be found. Names of people
1455 work the same way. I can be referred to as @samp{Bob}; however, I am
1456 not the letters @samp{B}, @samp{o}, @samp{b} but am, or was, the
1457 consciousness consistently associated with a particular life-form.
1458 The name is not me, but it can be used to refer to me.
1459
1460 In Lisp, one set of instructions can be attached to several names.
1461 For example, the computer instructions for adding numbers can be
1462 linked to the symbol @code{plus} as well as to the symbol @code{+}
1463 (and are in some dialects of Lisp). Among humans, I can be referred
1464 to as @samp{Robert} as well as @samp{Bob} and by other words as well.
1465
1466 On the other hand, a symbol can have only one function definition
1467 attached to it at a time. Otherwise, the computer would be confused as
1468 to which definition to use. If this were the case among people, only
1469 one person in the world could be named @samp{Bob}. However, the function
1470 definition to which the name refers can be changed readily.
1471 (@xref{Install, , Install a Function Definition}.)
1472
1473 Since Emacs Lisp is large, it is customary to name symbols in a way
1474 that identifies the part of Emacs to which the function belongs.
1475 Thus, all the names for functions that deal with Texinfo start with
1476 @samp{texinfo-} and those for functions that deal with reading mail
1477 start with @samp{rmail-}.
1478
1479 @node Lisp Interpreter
1480 @section The Lisp Interpreter
1481 @cindex Lisp interpreter, what it does
1482 @cindex Interpreter, what it does
1483
1484 Based on what we have seen, we can now start to figure out what the
1485 Lisp interpreter does when we command it to evaluate a list.
1486 First, it looks to see whether there is a quote before the list; if
1487 there is, the interpreter just gives us the list. On the other
1488 hand, if there is no quote, the interpreter looks at the first element
1489 in the list and sees whether it has a function definition. If it does,
1490 the interpreter carries out the instructions in the function definition.
1491 Otherwise, the interpreter prints an error message.
1492
1493 This is how Lisp works. Simple. There are added complications which we
1494 will get to in a minute, but these are the fundamentals. Of course, to
1495 write Lisp programs, you need to know how to write function definitions
1496 and attach them to names, and how to do this without confusing either
1497 yourself or the computer.
1498
1499 @menu
1500 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
1501 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
1502 @end menu
1503
1504 @ifnottex
1505 @node Complications
1506 @unnumberedsubsec Complications
1507 @end ifnottex
1508
1509 Now, for the first complication. In addition to lists, the Lisp
1510 interpreter can evaluate a symbol that is not quoted and does not have
1511 parentheses around it. The Lisp interpreter will attempt to determine
1512 the symbol's value as a @dfn{variable}. This situation is described
1513 in the section on variables. (@xref{Variables}.)
1514
1515 @cindex Special form
1516 The second complication occurs because some functions are unusual and
1517 do not work in the usual manner. Those that don't are called
1518 @dfn{special forms}. They are used for special jobs, like defining a
1519 function, and there are not many of them. In the next few chapters,
1520 you will be introduced to several of the more important special forms.
1521
1522 As well as special forms, there are also @dfn{macros}. A macro
1523 is a construct defined in Lisp, which differs from a function in that it
1524 translates a Lisp expression into another expression that is to be
1525 evaluated in place of the original expression. (@xref{Lisp macro}.)
1526
1527 For the purposes of this introduction, you do not need to worry too much
1528 about whether something is a special form, macro, or ordinary function.
1529 For example, @code{if} is a special form (@pxref{if}), but @code{when}
1530 is a macro (@pxref{Lisp macro}). In earlier versions of Emacs,
1531 @code{defun} was a special form, but now it is a macro (@pxref{defun}).
1532 It still behaves in the same way.
1533
1534 The final complication is this: if the function that the
1535 Lisp interpreter is looking at is not a special form, and if it is part
1536 of a list, the Lisp interpreter looks to see whether the list has a list
1537 inside of it. If there is an inner list, the Lisp interpreter first
1538 figures out what it should do with the inside list, and then it works on
1539 the outside list. If there is yet another list embedded inside the
1540 inner list, it works on that one first, and so on. It always works on
1541 the innermost list first. The interpreter works on the innermost list
1542 first, to evaluate the result of that list. The result may be
1543 used by the enclosing expression.
1544
1545 Otherwise, the interpreter works left to right, from one expression to
1546 the next.
1547
1548 @node Byte Compiling
1549 @subsection Byte Compiling
1550 @cindex Byte compiling
1551
1552 One other aspect of interpreting: the Lisp interpreter is able to
1553 interpret two kinds of entity: humanly readable code, on which we will
1554 focus exclusively, and specially processed code, called @dfn{byte
1555 compiled} code, which is not humanly readable. Byte compiled code
1556 runs faster than humanly readable code.
1557
1558 You can transform humanly readable code into byte compiled code by
1559 running one of the compile commands such as @code{byte-compile-file}.
1560 Byte compiled code is usually stored in a file that ends with a
1561 @file{.elc} extension rather than a @file{.el} extension. You will
1562 see both kinds of file in the @file{emacs/lisp} directory; the files
1563 to read are those with @file{.el} extensions.
1564
1565 As a practical matter, for most things you might do to customize or
1566 extend Emacs, you do not need to byte compile; and I will not discuss
1567 the topic here. @xref{Byte Compilation, , Byte Compilation, elisp,
1568 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a full description of byte
1569 compilation.
1570
1571 @node Evaluation
1572 @section Evaluation
1573 @cindex Evaluation
1574
1575 When the Lisp interpreter works on an expression, the term for the
1576 activity is called @dfn{evaluation}. We say that the interpreter
1577 ``evaluates the expression''. I've used this term several times before.
1578 The word comes from its use in everyday language, ``to ascertain the
1579 value or amount of; to appraise'', according to @cite{Webster's New
1580 Collegiate Dictionary}.
1581
1582 @menu
1583 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
1584 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
1585 @end menu
1586
1587 @ifnottex
1588 @node How the Interpreter Acts
1589 @unnumberedsubsec How the Lisp Interpreter Acts
1590 @end ifnottex
1591
1592 @cindex @samp{returned value} explained
1593 After evaluating an expression, the Lisp interpreter will most likely
1594 @dfn{return} the value that the computer produces by carrying out the
1595 instructions it found in the function definition, or perhaps it will
1596 give up on that function and produce an error message. (The interpreter
1597 may also find itself tossed, so to speak, to a different function or it
1598 may attempt to repeat continually what it is doing for ever and ever in
1599 what is called an ``infinite loop''. These actions are less common; and
1600 we can ignore them.) Most frequently, the interpreter returns a value.
1601
1602 @cindex @samp{side effect} defined
1603 At the same time the interpreter returns a value, it may do something
1604 else as well, such as move a cursor or copy a file; this other kind of
1605 action is called a @dfn{side effect}. Actions that we humans think are
1606 important, such as printing results, are often ``side effects'' to the
1607 Lisp interpreter. The jargon can sound peculiar, but it turns out that
1608 it is fairly easy to learn to use side effects.
1609
1610 In summary, evaluating a symbolic expression most commonly causes the
1611 Lisp interpreter to return a value and perhaps carry out a side effect;
1612 or else produce an error.
1613
1614 @node Evaluating Inner Lists
1615 @subsection Evaluating Inner Lists
1616 @cindex Inner list evaluation
1617 @cindex Evaluating inner lists
1618
1619 If evaluation applies to a list that is inside another list, the outer
1620 list may use the value returned by the first evaluation as information
1621 when the outer list is evaluated. This explains why inner expressions
1622 are evaluated first: the values they return are used by the outer
1623 expressions.
1624
1625 @need 1250
1626 We can investigate this process by evaluating another addition example.
1627 Place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1628
1629 @smallexample
1630 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1631 @end smallexample
1632
1633 @noindent
1634 The number 8 will appear in the echo area.
1635
1636 What happens is that the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the inner
1637 expression, @code{(+ 3 3)}, for which the value 6 is returned; then it
1638 evaluates the outer expression as if it were written @code{(+ 2 6)}, which
1639 returns the value 8. Since there are no more enclosing expressions to
1640 evaluate, the interpreter prints that value in the echo area.
1641
1642 Now it is easy to understand the name of the command invoked by the
1643 keystrokes @kbd{C-x C-e}: the name is @code{eval-last-sexp}. The
1644 letters @code{sexp} are an abbreviation for ``symbolic expression'', and
1645 @code{eval} is an abbreviation for ``evaluate''. The command means
1646 ``evaluate last symbolic expression''.
1647
1648 As an experiment, you can try evaluating the expression by putting the
1649 cursor at the beginning of the next line immediately following the
1650 expression, or inside the expression.
1651
1652 @need 800
1653 Here is another copy of the expression:
1654
1655 @smallexample
1656 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1657 @end smallexample
1658
1659 @noindent
1660 If you place the cursor at the beginning of the blank line that
1661 immediately follows the expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}, you will
1662 still get the value 8 printed in the echo area. Now try putting the
1663 cursor inside the expression. If you put it right after the next to
1664 last parenthesis (so it appears to sit on top of the last parenthesis),
1665 you will get a 6 printed in the echo area! This is because the command
1666 evaluates the expression @code{(+ 3 3)}.
1667
1668 Now put the cursor immediately after a number. Type @kbd{C-x C-e} and
1669 you will get the number itself. In Lisp, if you evaluate a number, you
1670 get the number itself---this is how numbers differ from symbols. If you
1671 evaluate a list starting with a symbol like @code{+}, you will get a
1672 value returned that is the result of the computer carrying out the
1673 instructions in the function definition attached to that name. If a
1674 symbol by itself is evaluated, something different happens, as we will
1675 see in the next section.
1676
1677 @node Variables
1678 @section Variables
1679 @cindex Variables
1680
1681 In Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have a value attached to it just as it can
1682 have a function definition attached to it. The two are different.
1683 The function definition is a set of instructions that a computer will
1684 obey. A value, on the other hand, is something, such as number or a
1685 name, that can vary (which is why such a symbol is called a variable).
1686 The value of a symbol can be any expression in Lisp, such as a symbol,
1687 number, list, or string. A symbol that has a value is often called a
1688 @dfn{variable}.
1689
1690 A symbol can have both a function definition and a value attached to
1691 it at the same time. Or it can have just one or the other.
1692 The two are separate. This is somewhat similar
1693 to the way the name Cambridge can refer to the city in Massachusetts
1694 and have some information attached to the name as well, such as
1695 ``great programming center''.
1696
1697 @ignore
1698 (Incidentally, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have two
1699 other things attached to it, too: a property list and a documentation
1700 string; these are discussed later.)
1701 @end ignore
1702
1703 Another way to think about this is to imagine a symbol as being a chest
1704 of drawers. The function definition is put in one drawer, the value in
1705 another, and so on. What is put in the drawer holding the value can be
1706 changed without affecting the contents of the drawer holding the
1707 function definition, and vice versa.
1708
1709 @menu
1710 * fill-column Example::
1711 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
1712 without a function.
1713 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
1714 @end menu
1715
1716 @ifnottex
1717 @node fill-column Example
1718 @unnumberedsubsec @code{fill-column}, an Example Variable
1719 @end ifnottex
1720
1721 @findex fill-column, @r{an example variable}
1722 @cindex Example variable, @code{fill-column}
1723 @cindex Variable, example of, @code{fill-column}
1724 The variable @code{fill-column} illustrates a symbol with a value
1725 attached to it: in every GNU Emacs buffer, this symbol is set to some
1726 value, usually 72 or 70, but sometimes to some other value. To find the
1727 value of this symbol, evaluate it by itself. If you are reading this in
1728 Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can do this by putting the cursor after
1729 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1730
1731 @smallexample
1732 fill-column
1733 @end smallexample
1734
1735 @noindent
1736 After I typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, Emacs printed the number 72 in my echo
1737 area. This is the value for which @code{fill-column} is set for me as I
1738 write this. It may be different for you in your Info buffer. Notice
1739 that the value returned as a variable is printed in exactly the same way
1740 as the value returned by a function carrying out its instructions. From
1741 the point of view of the Lisp interpreter, a value returned is a value
1742 returned. What kind of expression it came from ceases to matter once
1743 the value is known.
1744
1745 A symbol can have any value attached to it or, to use the jargon, we can
1746 @dfn{bind} the variable to a value: to a number, such as 72; to a
1747 string, @code{"such as this"}; to a list, such as @code{(spruce pine
1748 oak)}; we can even bind a variable to a function definition.
1749
1750 A symbol can be bound to a value in several ways. @xref{set & setq, ,
1751 Setting the Value of a Variable}, for information about one way to do
1752 this.
1753
1754 @node Void Function
1755 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Function
1756 @cindex Symbol without function error
1757 @cindex Error for symbol without function
1758
1759 When we evaluated @code{fill-column} to find its value as a variable,
1760 we did not place parentheses around the word. This is because we did
1761 not intend to use it as a function name.
1762
1763 If @code{fill-column} were the first or only element of a list, the
1764 Lisp interpreter would attempt to find the function definition
1765 attached to it. But @code{fill-column} has no function definition.
1766 Try evaluating this:
1767
1768 @smallexample
1769 (fill-column)
1770 @end smallexample
1771
1772 @need 1250
1773 @noindent
1774 You will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
1775
1776 @smallexample
1777 @group
1778 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1779 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function fill-column)
1780 (fill-column)
1781 eval((fill-column))
1782 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1783 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1784 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1785 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1786 @end group
1787 @end smallexample
1788
1789 @noindent
1790 (Remember, to quit the debugger and make the debugger window go away,
1791 type @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1792
1793 @ignore
1794 @need 800
1795 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will produce an error message that says:
1796
1797 @smallexample
1798 Symbol's function definition is void:@: fill-column
1799 @end smallexample
1800
1801 @noindent
1802 (The message will go away as soon as you move the cursor or type
1803 another key.)
1804 @end ignore
1805
1806 @node Void Variable
1807 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Value
1808 @cindex Symbol without value error
1809 @cindex Error for symbol without value
1810
1811 If you attempt to evaluate a symbol that does not have a value bound to
1812 it, you will receive an error message. You can see this by
1813 experimenting with our 2 plus 2 addition. In the following expression,
1814 put your cursor right after the @code{+}, before the first number 2,
1815 type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1816
1817 @smallexample
1818 (+ 2 2)
1819 @end smallexample
1820
1821 @need 1500
1822 @noindent
1823 In GNU Emacs 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that
1824 says:
1825
1826 @smallexample
1827 @group
1828 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1829 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-variable +)
1830 eval(+)
1831 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1832 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1833 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1834 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1835 @end group
1836 @end smallexample
1837
1838 @noindent
1839 (Again, you can quit the debugger by
1840 typing @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1841
1842 This backtrace is different from the very first error message we saw,
1843 which said, @samp{Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)}.
1844 In this case, the function does not have a value as a variable; while
1845 in the other error message, the function (the word @samp{this}) did not
1846 have a definition.
1847
1848 In this experiment with the @code{+}, what we did was cause the Lisp
1849 interpreter to evaluate the @code{+} and look for the value of the
1850 variable instead of the function definition. We did this by placing the
1851 cursor right after the symbol rather than after the parenthesis of the
1852 enclosing list as we did before. As a consequence, the Lisp interpreter
1853 evaluated the preceding s-expression, which in this case was
1854 @code{+} by itself.
1855
1856 Since @code{+} does not have a value bound to it, just the function
1857 definition, the error message reported that the symbol's value as a
1858 variable was void.
1859
1860 @ignore
1861 @need 800
1862 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, your error message will say:
1863
1864 @example
1865 Symbol's value as variable is void:@: +
1866 @end example
1867
1868 @noindent
1869 The meaning is the same as in GNU Emacs 22.
1870 @end ignore
1871
1872 @node Arguments
1873 @section Arguments
1874 @cindex Arguments
1875 @cindex Passing information to functions
1876
1877 To see how information is passed to functions, let's look again at
1878 our old standby, the addition of two plus two. In Lisp, this is written
1879 as follows:
1880
1881 @smallexample
1882 (+ 2 2)
1883 @end smallexample
1884
1885 If you evaluate this expression, the number 4 will appear in your echo
1886 area. What the Lisp interpreter does is add the numbers that follow
1887 the @code{+}.
1888
1889 @cindex @samp{argument} defined
1890 The numbers added by @code{+} are called the @dfn{arguments} of the
1891 function @code{+}. These numbers are the information that is given to
1892 or @dfn{passed} to the function.
1893
1894 The word ``argument'' comes from the way it is used in mathematics and
1895 does not refer to a disputation between two people; instead it refers to
1896 the information presented to the function, in this case, to the
1897 @code{+}. In Lisp, the arguments to a function are the atoms or lists
1898 that follow the function. The values returned by the evaluation of
1899 these atoms or lists are passed to the function. Different functions
1900 require different numbers of arguments; some functions require none at
1901 all.@footnote{It is curious to track the path by which the word ``argument''
1902 came to have two different meanings, one in mathematics and the other in
1903 everyday English. According to the @cite{Oxford English Dictionary},
1904 the word derives from the Latin for @samp{to make clear, prove}; thus it
1905 came to mean, by one thread of derivation, ``the evidence offered as
1906 proof'', which is to say, ``the information offered'', which led to its
1907 meaning in Lisp. But in the other thread of derivation, it came to mean
1908 ``to assert in a manner against which others may make counter
1909 assertions'', which led to the meaning of the word as a disputation.
1910 (Note here that the English word has two different definitions attached
1911 to it at the same time. By contrast, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol cannot
1912 have two different function definitions at the same time.)}
1913
1914 @menu
1915 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
1916 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
1917 of a variable or list.
1918 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
1919 variable number of arguments.
1920 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
1921 to a function.
1922 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
1923 @end menu
1924
1925 @node Data types
1926 @subsection Arguments' Data Types
1927 @cindex Data types
1928 @cindex Types of data
1929 @cindex Arguments' data types
1930
1931 The type of data that should be passed to a function depends on what
1932 kind of information it uses. The arguments to a function such as
1933 @code{+} must have values that are numbers, since @code{+} adds numbers.
1934 Other functions use different kinds of data for their arguments.
1935
1936 @need 1250
1937 @findex concat
1938 For example, the @code{concat} function links together or unites two or
1939 more strings of text to produce a string. The arguments are strings.
1940 Concatenating the two character strings @code{abc}, @code{def} produces
1941 the single string @code{abcdef}. This can be seen by evaluating the
1942 following:
1943
1944 @smallexample
1945 (concat "abc" "def")
1946 @end smallexample
1947
1948 @noindent
1949 The value produced by evaluating this expression is @code{"abcdef"}.
1950
1951 A function such as @code{substring} uses both a string and numbers as
1952 arguments. The function returns a part of the string, a substring of
1953 the first argument. This function takes three arguments. Its first
1954 argument is the string of characters, the second and third arguments
1955 are numbers that indicate the beginning (inclusive) and end
1956 (exclusive) of the substring. The numbers are a count of the number
1957 of characters (including spaces and punctuation) from the beginning of
1958 the string. Note that the characters in a string are numbered from
1959 zero, not one.
1960
1961 @need 800
1962 For example, if you evaluate the following:
1963
1964 @smallexample
1965 (substring "The quick brown fox jumped." 16 19)
1966 @end smallexample
1967
1968 @noindent
1969 you will see @code{"fox"} appear in the echo area. The arguments are the
1970 string and the two numbers.
1971
1972 Note that the string passed to @code{substring} is a single atom even
1973 though it is made up of several words separated by spaces. Lisp counts
1974 everything between the two quotation marks as part of the string,
1975 including the spaces. You can think of the @code{substring} function as
1976 a kind of ``atom smasher'' since it takes an otherwise indivisible atom
1977 and extracts a part. However, @code{substring} is only able to extract
1978 a substring from an argument that is a string, not from another type of
1979 atom such as a number or symbol.
1980
1981 @node Args as Variable or List
1982 @subsection An Argument as the Value of a Variable or List
1983
1984 An argument can be a symbol that returns a value when it is evaluated.
1985 For example, when the symbol @code{fill-column} by itself is evaluated,
1986 it returns a number. This number can be used in an addition.
1987
1988 @need 1250
1989 Position the cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
1990 C-e}:
1991
1992 @smallexample
1993 (+ 2 fill-column)
1994 @end smallexample
1995
1996 @noindent
1997 The value will be a number two more than what you get by evaluating
1998 @code{fill-column} alone. For me, this is 74, because my value of
1999 @code{fill-column} is 72.
2000
2001 As we have just seen, an argument can be a symbol that returns a value
2002 when evaluated. In addition, an argument can be a list that returns a
2003 value when it is evaluated. For example, in the following expression,
2004 the arguments to the function @code{concat} are the strings
2005 @w{@code{"The "}} and @w{@code{" red foxes."}} and the list
2006 @code{(number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column))}.
2007
2008 @c For GNU Emacs 22, need number-to-string
2009 @smallexample
2010 (concat "The " (number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column)) " red foxes.")
2011 @end smallexample
2012
2013 @noindent
2014 If you evaluate this expression---and if, as with my Emacs,
2015 @code{fill-column} evaluates to 72---@code{"The 74 red foxes."} will
2016 appear in the echo area. (Note that you must put spaces after the
2017 word @samp{The} and before the word @samp{red} so they will appear in
2018 the final string. The function @code{number-to-string} converts the
2019 integer that the addition function returns to a string.
2020 @code{number-to-string} is also known as @code{int-to-string}.)
2021
2022 @node Variable Number of Arguments
2023 @subsection Variable Number of Arguments
2024 @cindex Variable number of arguments
2025 @cindex Arguments, variable number of
2026
2027 Some functions, such as @code{concat}, @code{+} or @code{*}, take any
2028 number of arguments. (The @code{*} is the symbol for multiplication.)
2029 This can be seen by evaluating each of the following expressions in
2030 the usual way. What you will see in the echo area is printed in this
2031 text after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as ``evaluates to''.
2032
2033 @need 1250
2034 In the first set, the functions have no arguments:
2035
2036 @smallexample
2037 @group
2038 (+) @result{} 0
2039
2040 (*) @result{} 1
2041 @end group
2042 @end smallexample
2043
2044 @need 1250
2045 In this set, the functions have one argument each:
2046
2047 @smallexample
2048 @group
2049 (+ 3) @result{} 3
2050
2051 (* 3) @result{} 3
2052 @end group
2053 @end smallexample
2054
2055 @need 1250
2056 In this set, the functions have three arguments each:
2057
2058 @smallexample
2059 @group
2060 (+ 3 4 5) @result{} 12
2061
2062 (* 3 4 5) @result{} 60
2063 @end group
2064 @end smallexample
2065
2066 @node Wrong Type of Argument
2067 @subsection Using the Wrong Type Object as an Argument
2068 @cindex Wrong type of argument
2069 @cindex Argument, wrong type of
2070
2071 When a function is passed an argument of the wrong type, the Lisp
2072 interpreter produces an error message. For example, the @code{+}
2073 function expects the values of its arguments to be numbers. As an
2074 experiment we can pass it the quoted symbol @code{hello} instead of a
2075 number. Position the cursor after the following expression and type
2076 @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2077
2078 @smallexample
2079 (+ 2 'hello)
2080 @end smallexample
2081
2082 @noindent
2083 When you do this you will generate an error message. What has happened
2084 is that @code{+} has tried to add the 2 to the value returned by
2085 @code{'hello}, but the value returned by @code{'hello} is the symbol
2086 @code{hello}, not a number. Only numbers can be added. So @code{+}
2087 could not carry out its addition.
2088
2089 @need 1250
2090 You will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
2091
2092 @noindent
2093 @smallexample
2094 @group
2095 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2096 Debugger entered--Lisp error:
2097 (wrong-type-argument number-or-marker-p hello)
2098 +(2 hello)
2099 eval((+ 2 (quote hello)))
2100 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
2101 eval-last-sexp(nil)
2102 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
2103 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2104 @end group
2105 @end smallexample
2106
2107 @need 1250
2108 As usual, the error message tries to be helpful and makes sense after you
2109 learn how to read it.@footnote{@code{(quote hello)} is an expansion of
2110 the abbreviation @code{'hello}.}
2111
2112 The first part of the error message is straightforward; it says
2113 @samp{wrong type argument}. Next comes the mysterious jargon word
2114 @w{@samp{number-or-marker-p}}. This word is trying to tell you what
2115 kind of argument the @code{+} expected.
2116
2117 The symbol @code{number-or-marker-p} says that the Lisp interpreter is
2118 trying to determine whether the information presented it (the value of
2119 the argument) is a number or a marker (a special object representing a
2120 buffer position). What it does is test to see whether the @code{+} is
2121 being given numbers to add. It also tests to see whether the
2122 argument is something called a marker, which is a specific feature of
2123 Emacs Lisp. (In Emacs, locations in a buffer are recorded as markers.
2124 When the mark is set with the @kbd{C-@@} or @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} command,
2125 its position is kept as a marker. The mark can be considered a
2126 number---the number of characters the location is from the beginning
2127 of the buffer.) In Emacs Lisp, @code{+} can be used to add the
2128 numeric value of marker positions as numbers.
2129
2130 The @samp{p} of @code{number-or-marker-p} is the embodiment of a
2131 practice started in the early days of Lisp programming. The @samp{p}
2132 stands for ``predicate''. In the jargon used by the early Lisp
2133 researchers, a predicate refers to a function to determine whether some
2134 property is true or false. So the @samp{p} tells us that
2135 @code{number-or-marker-p} is the name of a function that determines
2136 whether it is true or false that the argument supplied is a number or
2137 a marker. Other Lisp symbols that end in @samp{p} include @code{zerop},
2138 a function that tests whether its argument has the value of zero, and
2139 @code{listp}, a function that tests whether its argument is a list.
2140
2141 Finally, the last part of the error message is the symbol @code{hello}.
2142 This is the value of the argument that was passed to @code{+}. If the
2143 addition had been passed the correct type of object, the value passed
2144 would have been a number, such as 37, rather than a symbol like
2145 @code{hello}. But then you would not have got the error message.
2146
2147 @ignore
2148 @need 1250
2149 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, the echo area displays an error
2150 message that says:
2151
2152 @smallexample
2153 Wrong type argument:@: number-or-marker-p, hello
2154 @end smallexample
2155
2156 This says, in different words, the same as the top line of the
2157 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.
2158 @end ignore
2159
2160 @node message
2161 @subsection The @code{message} Function
2162 @findex message
2163
2164 Like @code{+}, the @code{message} function takes a variable number of
2165 arguments. It is used to send messages to the user and is so useful
2166 that we will describe it here.
2167
2168 @need 1250
2169 A message is printed in the echo area. For example, you can print a
2170 message in your echo area by evaluating the following list:
2171
2172 @smallexample
2173 (message "This message appears in the echo area!")
2174 @end smallexample
2175
2176 The whole string between double quotation marks is a single argument
2177 and is printed @i{in toto}. (Note that in this example, the message
2178 itself will appear in the echo area within double quotes; that is
2179 because you see the value returned by the @code{message} function. In
2180 most uses of @code{message} in programs that you write, the text will
2181 be printed in the echo area as a side-effect, without the quotes.
2182 @xref{multiply-by-seven in detail, , @code{multiply-by-seven} in
2183 detail}, for an example of this.)
2184
2185 However, if there is a @samp{%s} in the quoted string of characters, the
2186 @code{message} function does not print the @samp{%s} as such, but looks
2187 to the argument that follows the string. It evaluates the second
2188 argument and prints the value at the location in the string where the
2189 @samp{%s} is.
2190
2191 @need 1250
2192 You can see this by positioning the cursor after the following
2193 expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2194
2195 @smallexample
2196 (message "The name of this buffer is: %s." (buffer-name))
2197 @end smallexample
2198
2199 @noindent
2200 In Info, @code{"The name of this buffer is: *info*."} will appear in the
2201 echo area. The function @code{buffer-name} returns the name of the
2202 buffer as a string, which the @code{message} function inserts in place
2203 of @code{%s}.
2204
2205 To print a value as an integer, use @samp{%d} in the same way as
2206 @samp{%s}. For example, to print a message in the echo area that
2207 states the value of the @code{fill-column}, evaluate the following:
2208
2209 @smallexample
2210 (message "The value of fill-column is %d." fill-column)
2211 @end smallexample
2212
2213 @noindent
2214 On my system, when I evaluate this list, @code{"The value of
2215 fill-column is 72."} appears in my echo area@footnote{Actually, you
2216 can use @code{%s} to print a number. It is non-specific. @code{%d}
2217 prints only the part of a number left of a decimal point, and not
2218 anything that is not a number.}.
2219
2220 If there is more than one @samp{%s} in the quoted string, the value of
2221 the first argument following the quoted string is printed at the
2222 location of the first @samp{%s} and the value of the second argument is
2223 printed at the location of the second @samp{%s}, and so on.
2224
2225 @need 1250
2226 For example, if you evaluate the following,
2227
2228 @smallexample
2229 @group
2230 (message "There are %d %s in the office!"
2231 (- fill-column 14) "pink elephants")
2232 @end group
2233 @end smallexample
2234
2235 @noindent
2236 a rather whimsical message will appear in your echo area. On my system
2237 it says, @code{"There are 58 pink elephants in the office!"}.
2238
2239 The expression @code{(- fill-column 14)} is evaluated and the resulting
2240 number is inserted in place of the @samp{%d}; and the string in double
2241 quotes, @code{"pink elephants"}, is treated as a single argument and
2242 inserted in place of the @samp{%s}. (That is to say, a string between
2243 double quotes evaluates to itself, like a number.)
2244
2245 Finally, here is a somewhat complex example that not only illustrates
2246 the computation of a number, but also shows how you can use an
2247 expression within an expression to generate the text that is substituted
2248 for @samp{%s}:
2249
2250 @smallexample
2251 @group
2252 (message "He saw %d %s"
2253 (- fill-column 32)
2254 (concat "red "
2255 (substring
2256 "The quick brown foxes jumped." 16 21)
2257 " leaping."))
2258 @end group
2259 @end smallexample
2260
2261 In this example, @code{message} has three arguments: the string,
2262 @code{"He saw %d %s"}, the expression, @code{(- fill-column 32)}, and
2263 the expression beginning with the function @code{concat}. The value
2264 resulting from the evaluation of @code{(- fill-column 32)} is inserted
2265 in place of the @samp{%d}; and the value returned by the expression
2266 beginning with @code{concat} is inserted in place of the @samp{%s}.
2267
2268 When your fill column is 70 and you evaluate the expression, the
2269 message @code{"He saw 38 red foxes leaping."} appears in your echo
2270 area.
2271
2272 @node set & setq
2273 @section Setting the Value of a Variable
2274 @cindex Variable, setting value
2275 @cindex Setting value of variable
2276
2277 @cindex @samp{bind} defined
2278 There are several ways by which a variable can be given a value. One of
2279 the ways is to use either the function @code{set} or the function
2280 @code{setq}. Another way is to use @code{let} (@pxref{let}). (The
2281 jargon for this process is to @dfn{bind} a variable to a value.)
2282
2283 The following sections not only describe how @code{set} and @code{setq}
2284 work but also illustrate how arguments are passed.
2285
2286 @menu
2287 * Using set:: Setting values.
2288 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
2289 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
2290 @end menu
2291
2292 @node Using set
2293 @subsection Using @code{set}
2294 @findex set
2295
2296 To set the value of the symbol @code{flowers} to the list @code{'(rose
2297 violet daisy buttercup)}, evaluate the following expression by
2298 positioning the cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2299
2300 @smallexample
2301 (set 'flowers '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
2302 @end smallexample
2303
2304 @noindent
2305 The list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in the echo
2306 area. This is what is @emph{returned} by the @code{set} function. As a
2307 side effect, the symbol @code{flowers} is bound to the list; that is,
2308 the symbol @code{flowers}, which can be viewed as a variable, is given
2309 the list as its value. (This process, by the way, illustrates how a
2310 side effect to the Lisp interpreter, setting the value, can be the
2311 primary effect that we humans are interested in. This is because every
2312 Lisp function must return a value if it does not get an error, but it
2313 will only have a side effect if it is designed to have one.)
2314
2315 After evaluating the @code{set} expression, you can evaluate the symbol
2316 @code{flowers} and it will return the value you just set. Here is the
2317 symbol. Place your cursor after it and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2318
2319 @smallexample
2320 flowers
2321 @end smallexample
2322
2323 @noindent
2324 When you evaluate @code{flowers}, the list
2325 @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} appears in the echo area.
2326
2327 Incidentally, if you evaluate @code{'flowers}, the variable with a quote
2328 in front of it, what you will see in the echo area is the symbol itself,
2329 @code{flowers}. Here is the quoted symbol, so you can try this:
2330
2331 @smallexample
2332 'flowers
2333 @end smallexample
2334
2335 Note also, that when you use @code{set}, you need to quote both
2336 arguments to @code{set}, unless you want them evaluated. Since we do
2337 not want either argument evaluated, neither the variable
2338 @code{flowers} nor the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)}, both
2339 are quoted. (When you use @code{set} without quoting its first
2340 argument, the first argument is evaluated before anything else is
2341 done. If you did this and @code{flowers} did not have a value
2342 already, you would get an error message that the @samp{Symbol's value
2343 as variable is void}; on the other hand, if @code{flowers} did return
2344 a value after it was evaluated, the @code{set} would attempt to set
2345 the value that was returned. There are situations where this is the
2346 right thing for the function to do; but such situations are rare.)
2347
2348 @node Using setq
2349 @subsection Using @code{setq}
2350 @findex setq
2351
2352 As a practical matter, you almost always quote the first argument to
2353 @code{set}. The combination of @code{set} and a quoted first argument
2354 is so common that it has its own name: the special form @code{setq}.
2355 This special form is just like @code{set} except that the first argument
2356 is quoted automatically, so you don't need to type the quote mark
2357 yourself. Also, as an added convenience, @code{setq} permits you to set
2358 several different variables to different values, all in one expression.
2359
2360 To set the value of the variable @code{carnivores} to the list
2361 @code{'(lion tiger leopard)} using @code{setq}, the following expression
2362 is used:
2363
2364 @smallexample
2365 (setq carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2366 @end smallexample
2367
2368 @noindent
2369 This is exactly the same as using @code{set} except the first argument
2370 is automatically quoted by @code{setq}. (The @samp{q} in @code{setq}
2371 means @code{quote}.)
2372
2373 @need 1250
2374 With @code{set}, the expression would look like this:
2375
2376 @smallexample
2377 (set 'carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2378 @end smallexample
2379
2380 Also, @code{setq} can be used to assign different values to
2381 different variables. The first argument is bound to the value
2382 of the second argument, the third argument is bound to the value of the
2383 fourth argument, and so on. For example, you could use the following to
2384 assign a list of trees to the symbol @code{trees} and a list of herbivores
2385 to the symbol @code{herbivores}:
2386
2387 @smallexample
2388 @group
2389 (setq trees '(pine fir oak maple)
2390 herbivores '(gazelle antelope zebra))
2391 @end group
2392 @end smallexample
2393
2394 @noindent
2395 (The expression could just as well have been on one line, but it might
2396 not have fit on a page; and humans find it easier to read nicely
2397 formatted lists.)
2398
2399 Although I have been using the term ``assign'', there is another way of
2400 thinking about the workings of @code{set} and @code{setq}; and that is to
2401 say that @code{set} and @code{setq} make the symbol @emph{point} to the
2402 list. This latter way of thinking is very common and in forthcoming
2403 chapters we shall come upon at least one symbol that has ``pointer'' as
2404 part of its name. The name is chosen because the symbol has a value,
2405 specifically a list, attached to it; or, expressed another way,
2406 the symbol is set to ``point'' to the list.
2407
2408 @node Counting
2409 @subsection Counting
2410 @cindex Counting
2411
2412 Here is an example that shows how to use @code{setq} in a counter. You
2413 might use this to count how many times a part of your program repeats
2414 itself. First set a variable to zero; then add one to the number each
2415 time the program repeats itself. To do this, you need a variable that
2416 serves as a counter, and two expressions: an initial @code{setq}
2417 expression that sets the counter variable to zero; and a second
2418 @code{setq} expression that increments the counter each time it is
2419 evaluated.
2420
2421 @smallexample
2422 @group
2423 (setq counter 0) ; @r{Let's call this the initializer.}
2424
2425 (setq counter (+ counter 1)) ; @r{This is the incrementer.}
2426
2427 counter ; @r{This is the counter.}
2428 @end group
2429 @end smallexample
2430
2431 @noindent
2432 (The text following the @samp{;} are comments. @xref{Change a
2433 defun, , Change a Function Definition}.)
2434
2435 If you evaluate the first of these expressions, the initializer,
2436 @code{(setq counter 0)}, and then evaluate the third expression,
2437 @code{counter}, the number @code{0} will appear in the echo area. If
2438 you then evaluate the second expression, the incrementer, @code{(setq
2439 counter (+ counter 1))}, the counter will get the value 1. So if you
2440 again evaluate @code{counter}, the number @code{1} will appear in the
2441 echo area. Each time you evaluate the second expression, the value of
2442 the counter will be incremented.
2443
2444 When you evaluate the incrementer, @code{(setq counter (+ counter 1))},
2445 the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the innermost list; this is the
2446 addition. In order to evaluate this list, it must evaluate the variable
2447 @code{counter} and the number @code{1}. When it evaluates the variable
2448 @code{counter}, it receives its current value. It passes this value and
2449 the number @code{1} to the @code{+} which adds them together. The sum
2450 is then returned as the value of the inner list and passed to the
2451 @code{setq} which sets the variable @code{counter} to this new value.
2452 Thus, the value of the variable, @code{counter}, is changed.
2453
2454 @node Summary
2455 @section Summary
2456
2457 Learning Lisp is like climbing a hill in which the first part is the
2458 steepest. You have now climbed the most difficult part; what remains
2459 becomes easier as you progress onwards.
2460
2461 @need 1000
2462 In summary,
2463
2464 @itemize @bullet
2465
2466 @item
2467 Lisp programs are made up of expressions, which are lists or single atoms.
2468
2469 @item
2470 Lists are made up of zero or more atoms or inner lists, separated by whitespace and
2471 surrounded by parentheses. A list can be empty.
2472
2473 @item
2474 Atoms are multi-character symbols, like @code{forward-paragraph}, single
2475 character symbols like @code{+}, strings of characters between double
2476 quotation marks, or numbers.
2477
2478 @item
2479 A number evaluates to itself.
2480
2481 @item
2482 A string between double quotes also evaluates to itself.
2483
2484 @item
2485 When you evaluate a symbol by itself, its value is returned.
2486
2487 @item
2488 When you evaluate a list, the Lisp interpreter looks at the first symbol
2489 in the list and then at the function definition bound to that symbol.
2490 Then the instructions in the function definition are carried out.
2491
2492 @item
2493 A single quotation mark,
2494 @ifinfo
2495 '
2496 @end ifinfo
2497 @ifnotinfo
2498 @code{'}
2499 @end ifnotinfo
2500 , tells the Lisp interpreter that it should
2501 return the following expression as written, and not evaluate it as it
2502 would if the quote were not there.
2503
2504 @item
2505 Arguments are the information passed to a function. The arguments to a
2506 function are computed by evaluating the rest of the elements of the list
2507 of which the function is the first element.
2508
2509 @item
2510 A function always returns a value when it is evaluated (unless it gets
2511 an error); in addition, it may also carry out some action called a
2512 ``side effect''. In many cases, a function's primary purpose is to
2513 create a side effect.
2514 @end itemize
2515
2516 @node Error Message Exercises
2517 @section Exercises
2518
2519 A few simple exercises:
2520
2521 @itemize @bullet
2522 @item
2523 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2524 not within parentheses.
2525
2526 @item
2527 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2528 between parentheses.
2529
2530 @item
2531 Create a counter that increments by two rather than one.
2532
2533 @item
2534 Write an expression that prints a message in the echo area when
2535 evaluated.
2536 @end itemize
2537
2538 @node Practicing Evaluation
2539 @chapter Practicing Evaluation
2540 @cindex Practicing evaluation
2541 @cindex Evaluation practice
2542
2543 Before learning how to write a function definition in Emacs Lisp, it is
2544 useful to spend a little time evaluating various expressions that have
2545 already been written. These expressions will be lists with the
2546 functions as their first (and often only) element. Since some of the
2547 functions associated with buffers are both simple and interesting, we
2548 will start with those. In this section, we will evaluate a few of
2549 these. In another section, we will study the code of several other
2550 buffer-related functions, to see how they were written.
2551
2552 @menu
2553 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
2554 causes evaluation.
2555 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
2556 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
2557 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
2558 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
2559 the buffer.
2560 * Evaluation Exercise::
2561 @end menu
2562
2563 @ifnottex
2564 @node How to Evaluate
2565 @unnumberedsec How to Evaluate
2566 @end ifnottex
2567
2568 @i{Whenever you give an editing command} to Emacs Lisp, such as the
2569 command to move the cursor or to scroll the screen, @i{you are evaluating
2570 an expression,} the first element of which is a function. @i{This is
2571 how Emacs works.}
2572
2573 @cindex @samp{interactive function} defined
2574 @cindex @samp{command} defined
2575 When you type keys, you cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate an
2576 expression and that is how you get your results. Even typing plain text
2577 involves evaluating an Emacs Lisp function, in this case, one that uses
2578 @code{self-insert-command}, which simply inserts the character you
2579 typed. The functions you evaluate by typing keystrokes are called
2580 @dfn{interactive} functions, or @dfn{commands}; how you make a function
2581 interactive will be illustrated in the chapter on how to write function
2582 definitions. @xref{Interactive, , Making a Function Interactive}.
2583
2584 In addition to typing keyboard commands, we have seen a second way to
2585 evaluate an expression: by positioning the cursor after a list and
2586 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. This is what we will do in the rest of this
2587 section. There are other ways to evaluate an expression as well; these
2588 will be described as we come to them.
2589
2590 Besides being used for practicing evaluation, the functions shown in the
2591 next few sections are important in their own right. A study of these
2592 functions makes clear the distinction between buffers and files, how to
2593 switch to a buffer, and how to determine a location within it.
2594
2595 @node Buffer Names
2596 @section Buffer Names
2597 @findex buffer-name
2598 @findex buffer-file-name
2599
2600 The two functions, @code{buffer-name} and @code{buffer-file-name}, show
2601 the difference between a file and a buffer. When you evaluate the
2602 following expression, @code{(buffer-name)}, the name of the buffer
2603 appears in the echo area. When you evaluate @code{(buffer-file-name)},
2604 the name of the file to which the buffer refers appears in the echo
2605 area. Usually, the name returned by @code{(buffer-name)} is the same as
2606 the name of the file to which it refers, and the name returned by
2607 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is the full path-name of the file.
2608
2609 A file and a buffer are two different entities. A file is information
2610 recorded permanently in the computer (unless you delete it). A buffer,
2611 on the other hand, is information inside of Emacs that will vanish at
2612 the end of the editing session (or when you kill the buffer). Usually,
2613 a buffer contains information that you have copied from a file; we say
2614 the buffer is @dfn{visiting} that file. This copy is what you work on
2615 and modify. Changes to the buffer do not change the file, until you
2616 save the buffer. When you save the buffer, the buffer is copied to the file
2617 and is thus saved permanently.
2618
2619 @need 1250
2620 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
2621 each of the following expressions by positioning the cursor after it and
2622 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2623
2624 @example
2625 @group
2626 (buffer-name)
2627
2628 (buffer-file-name)
2629 @end group
2630 @end example
2631
2632 @noindent
2633 When I do this in Info, the value returned by evaluating
2634 @code{(buffer-name)} is @file{"*info*"}, and the value returned by
2635 evaluating @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}.
2636
2637 On the other hand, while I am writing this document, the value
2638 returned by evaluating @code{(buffer-name)} is
2639 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}, and the value returned by evaluating
2640 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is
2641 @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2642
2643 @cindex @code{nil}, history of word
2644 The former is the name of the buffer and the latter is the name of the
2645 file. In Info, the buffer name is @file{"*info*"}. Info does not
2646 point to any file, so the result of evaluating
2647 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}. The symbol @code{nil} is
2648 from the Latin word for ``nothing''; in this case, it means that the
2649 buffer is not associated with any file. (In Lisp, @code{nil} is also
2650 used to mean ``false'' and is a synonym for the empty list, @code{()}.)
2651
2652 When I am writing, the name of my buffer is
2653 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}. The name of the file to which it
2654 points is @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2655
2656 (In the expressions, the parentheses tell the Lisp interpreter to
2657 treat @w{@code{buffer-name}} and @w{@code{buffer-file-name}} as
2658 functions; without the parentheses, the interpreter would attempt to
2659 evaluate the symbols as variables. @xref{Variables}.)
2660
2661 In spite of the distinction between files and buffers, you will often
2662 find that people refer to a file when they mean a buffer and vice versa.
2663 Indeed, most people say, ``I am editing a file,'' rather than saying,
2664 ``I am editing a buffer which I will soon save to a file.'' It is
2665 almost always clear from context what people mean. When dealing with
2666 computer programs, however, it is important to keep the distinction in mind,
2667 since the computer is not as smart as a person.
2668
2669 @cindex Buffer, history of word
2670 The word ``buffer'', by the way, comes from the meaning of the word as a
2671 cushion that deadens the force of a collision. In early computers, a
2672 buffer cushioned the interaction between files and the computer's
2673 central processing unit. The drums or tapes that held a file and the
2674 central processing unit were pieces of equipment that were very
2675 different from each other, working at their own speeds, in spurts. The
2676 buffer made it possible for them to work together effectively.
2677 Eventually, the buffer grew from being an intermediary, a temporary
2678 holding place, to being the place where work is done. This
2679 transformation is rather like that of a small seaport that grew into a
2680 great city: once it was merely the place where cargo was warehoused
2681 temporarily before being loaded onto ships; then it became a business
2682 and cultural center in its own right.
2683
2684 Not all buffers are associated with files. For example, a
2685 @file{*scratch*} buffer does not visit any file. Similarly, a
2686 @file{*Help*} buffer is not associated with any file.
2687
2688 In the old days, when you lacked a @file{~/.emacs} file and started an
2689 Emacs session by typing the command @code{emacs} alone, without naming
2690 any files, Emacs started with the @file{*scratch*} buffer visible.
2691 Nowadays, you will see a splash screen. You can follow one of the
2692 commands suggested on the splash screen, visit a file, or press the
2693 spacebar to reach the @file{*scratch*} buffer.
2694
2695 If you switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer, type
2696 @code{(buffer-name)}, position the cursor after it, and then type
2697 @kbd{C-x C-e} to evaluate the expression. The name @code{"*scratch*"}
2698 will be returned and will appear in the echo area. @code{"*scratch*"}
2699 is the name of the buffer. When you type @code{(buffer-file-name)} in
2700 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate that, @code{nil} will appear
2701 in the echo area, just as it does when you evaluate
2702 @code{(buffer-file-name)} in Info.
2703
2704 Incidentally, if you are in the @file{*scratch*} buffer and want the
2705 value returned by an expression to appear in the @file{*scratch*}
2706 buffer itself rather than in the echo area, type @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
2707 instead of @kbd{C-x C-e}. This causes the value returned to appear
2708 after the expression. The buffer will look like this:
2709
2710 @smallexample
2711 (buffer-name)"*scratch*"
2712 @end smallexample
2713
2714 @noindent
2715 You cannot do this in Info since Info is read-only and it will not allow
2716 you to change the contents of the buffer. But you can do this in any
2717 buffer you can edit; and when you write code or documentation (such as
2718 this book), this feature is very useful.
2719
2720 @node Getting Buffers
2721 @section Getting Buffers
2722 @findex current-buffer
2723 @findex other-buffer
2724 @cindex Getting a buffer
2725
2726 The @code{buffer-name} function returns the @emph{name} of the buffer;
2727 to get the buffer @emph{itself}, a different function is needed: the
2728 @code{current-buffer} function. If you use this function in code, what
2729 you get is the buffer itself.
2730
2731 A name and the object or entity to which the name refers are different
2732 from each other. You are not your name. You are a person to whom
2733 others refer by name. If you ask to speak to George and someone hands you
2734 a card with the letters @samp{G}, @samp{e}, @samp{o}, @samp{r},
2735 @samp{g}, and @samp{e} written on it, you might be amused, but you would
2736 not be satisfied. You do not want to speak to the name, but to the
2737 person to whom the name refers. A buffer is similar: the name of the
2738 scratch buffer is @file{*scratch*}, but the name is not the buffer. To
2739 get a buffer itself, you need to use a function such as
2740 @code{current-buffer}.
2741
2742 However, there is a slight complication: if you evaluate
2743 @code{current-buffer} in an expression on its own, as we will do here,
2744 what you see is a printed representation of the name of the buffer
2745 without the contents of the buffer. Emacs works this way for two
2746 reasons: the buffer may be thousands of lines long---too long to be
2747 conveniently displayed; and, another buffer may have the same contents
2748 but a different name, and it is important to distinguish between them.
2749
2750 @need 800
2751 Here is an expression containing the function:
2752
2753 @smallexample
2754 (current-buffer)
2755 @end smallexample
2756
2757 @noindent
2758 If you evaluate this expression in Info in Emacs in the usual way,
2759 @file{#<buffer *info*>} will appear in the echo area. The special
2760 format indicates that the buffer itself is being returned, rather than
2761 just its name.
2762
2763 Incidentally, while you can type a number or symbol into a program, you
2764 cannot do that with the printed representation of a buffer: the only way
2765 to get a buffer itself is with a function such as @code{current-buffer}.
2766
2767 A related function is @code{other-buffer}. This returns the most
2768 recently selected buffer other than the one you are in currently, not
2769 a printed representation of its name. If you have recently switched
2770 back and forth from the @file{*scratch*} buffer, @code{other-buffer}
2771 will return that buffer.
2772
2773 @need 800
2774 You can see this by evaluating the expression:
2775
2776 @smallexample
2777 (other-buffer)
2778 @end smallexample
2779
2780 @noindent
2781 You should see @file{#<buffer *scratch*>} appear in the echo area, or
2782 the name of whatever other buffer you switched back from most
2783 recently@footnote{Actually, by default, if the buffer from which you
2784 just switched is visible to you in another window, @code{other-buffer}
2785 will choose the most recent buffer that you cannot see; this is a
2786 subtlety that I often forget.}.
2787
2788 @node Switching Buffers
2789 @section Switching Buffers
2790 @findex switch-to-buffer
2791 @findex set-buffer
2792 @cindex Switching to a buffer
2793
2794 The @code{other-buffer} function actually provides a buffer when it is
2795 used as an argument to a function that requires one. We can see this
2796 by using @code{other-buffer} and @code{switch-to-buffer} to switch to a
2797 different buffer.
2798
2799 But first, a brief introduction to the @code{switch-to-buffer}
2800 function. When you switched back and forth from Info to the
2801 @file{*scratch*} buffer to evaluate @code{(buffer-name)}, you most
2802 likely typed @kbd{C-x b} and then typed @file{*scratch*}@footnote{Or
2803 rather, to save typing, you probably only typed @kbd{RET} if the
2804 default buffer was @file{*scratch*}, or if it was different, then you
2805 typed just part of the name, such as @code{*sc}, pressed your
2806 @kbd{TAB} key to cause it to expand to the full name, and then typed
2807 @kbd{RET}.} when prompted in the minibuffer for the name of
2808 the buffer to which you wanted to switch. The keystrokes, @kbd{C-x
2809 b}, cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate the interactive function
2810 @code{switch-to-buffer}. As we said before, this is how Emacs works:
2811 different keystrokes call or run different functions. For example,
2812 @kbd{C-f} calls @code{forward-char}, @kbd{M-e} calls
2813 @code{forward-sentence}, and so on.
2814
2815 By writing @code{switch-to-buffer} in an expression, and giving it a
2816 buffer to switch to, we can switch buffers just the way @kbd{C-x b}
2817 does:
2818
2819 @smallexample
2820 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer))
2821 @end smallexample
2822
2823 @noindent
2824 The symbol @code{switch-to-buffer} is the first element of the list,
2825 so the Lisp interpreter will treat it as a function and carry out the
2826 instructions that are attached to it. But before doing that, the
2827 interpreter will note that @code{other-buffer} is inside parentheses
2828 and work on that symbol first. @code{other-buffer} is the first (and
2829 in this case, the only) element of this list, so the Lisp interpreter
2830 calls or runs the function. It returns another buffer. Next, the
2831 interpreter runs @code{switch-to-buffer}, passing to it, as an
2832 argument, the other buffer, which is what Emacs will switch to. If
2833 you are reading this in Info, try this now. Evaluate the expression.
2834 (To get back, type @kbd{C-x b @key{RET}}.)@footnote{Remember, this
2835 expression will move you to your most recent other buffer that you
2836 cannot see. If you really want to go to your most recently selected
2837 buffer, even if you can still see it, you need to evaluate the
2838 following more complex expression:
2839
2840 @smallexample
2841 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
2842 @end smallexample
2843
2844 @c noindent
2845 In this case, the first argument to @code{other-buffer} tells it which
2846 buffer to skip---the current one---and the second argument tells
2847 @code{other-buffer} it is OK to switch to a visible buffer. In
2848 regular use, @code{switch-to-buffer} takes you to a buffer not visible
2849 in windows since you would most likely use @kbd{C-x o}
2850 (@code{other-window}) to go to another visible buffer.}
2851
2852 In the programming examples in later sections of this document, you will
2853 see the function @code{set-buffer} more often than
2854 @code{switch-to-buffer}. This is because of a difference between
2855 computer programs and humans: humans have eyes and expect to see the
2856 buffer on which they are working on their computer terminals. This is
2857 so obvious, it almost goes without saying. However, programs do not
2858 have eyes. When a computer program works on a buffer, that buffer does
2859 not need to be visible on the screen.
2860
2861 @code{switch-to-buffer} is designed for humans and does two different
2862 things: it switches the buffer to which Emacs's attention is directed; and
2863 it switches the buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer.
2864 @code{set-buffer}, on the other hand, does only one thing: it switches
2865 the attention of the computer program to a different buffer. The buffer
2866 on the screen remains unchanged (of course, normally nothing happens
2867 there until the command finishes running).
2868
2869 @cindex @samp{call} defined
2870 Also, we have just introduced another jargon term, the word @dfn{call}.
2871 When you evaluate a list in which the first symbol is a function, you
2872 are calling that function. The use of the term comes from the notion of
2873 the function as an entity that can do something for you if you ``call''
2874 it---just as a plumber is an entity who can fix a leak if you call him
2875 or her.
2876
2877 @node Buffer Size & Locations
2878 @section Buffer Size and the Location of Point
2879 @cindex Size of buffer
2880 @cindex Buffer size
2881 @cindex Point location
2882 @cindex Location of point
2883
2884 Finally, let's look at several rather simple functions,
2885 @code{buffer-size}, @code{point}, @code{point-min}, and
2886 @code{point-max}. These give information about the size of a buffer and
2887 the location of point within it.
2888
2889 The function @code{buffer-size} tells you the size of the current
2890 buffer; that is, the function returns a count of the number of
2891 characters in the buffer.
2892
2893 @smallexample
2894 (buffer-size)
2895 @end smallexample
2896
2897 @noindent
2898 You can evaluate this in the usual way, by positioning the
2899 cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2900
2901 @cindex @samp{point} defined
2902 In Emacs, the current position of the cursor is called @dfn{point}.
2903 The expression @code{(point)} returns a number that tells you where the
2904 cursor is located as a count of the number of characters from the
2905 beginning of the buffer up to point.
2906
2907 @need 1250
2908 You can see the character count for point in this buffer by evaluating
2909 the following expression in the usual way:
2910
2911 @smallexample
2912 (point)
2913 @end smallexample
2914
2915 @noindent
2916 As I write this, the value of point is 65724. The @code{point}
2917 function is frequently used in some of the examples later in this
2918 book.
2919
2920 @need 1250
2921 The value of point depends, of course, on its location within the
2922 buffer. If you evaluate point in this spot, the number will be larger:
2923
2924 @smallexample
2925 (point)
2926 @end smallexample
2927
2928 @noindent
2929 For me, the value of point in this location is 66043, which means that
2930 there are 319 characters (including spaces) between the two
2931 expressions. (Doubtless, you will see different numbers, since I will
2932 have edited this since I first evaluated point.)
2933
2934 @cindex @samp{narrowing} defined
2935 The function @code{point-min} is somewhat similar to @code{point}, but
2936 it returns the value of the minimum permissible value of point in the
2937 current buffer. This is the number 1 unless @dfn{narrowing} is in
2938 effect. (Narrowing is a mechanism whereby you can restrict yourself,
2939 or a program, to operations on just a part of a buffer.
2940 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}.) Likewise, the
2941 function @code{point-max} returns the value of the maximum permissible
2942 value of point in the current buffer.
2943
2944 @node Evaluation Exercise
2945 @section Exercise
2946
2947 Find a file with which you are working and move towards its middle.
2948 Find its buffer name, file name, length, and your position in the file.
2949
2950 @node Writing Defuns
2951 @chapter How To Write Function Definitions
2952 @cindex Definition writing
2953 @cindex Function definition writing
2954 @cindex Writing a function definition
2955
2956 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates a list, it looks to see whether the
2957 first symbol on the list has a function definition attached to it; or,
2958 put another way, whether the symbol points to a function definition. If
2959 it does, the computer carries out the instructions in the definition. A
2960 symbol that has a function definition is called, simply, a function
2961 (although, properly speaking, the definition is the function and the
2962 symbol refers to it.)
2963
2964 @menu
2965 * Primitive Functions::
2966 * defun:: The @code{defun} macro.
2967 * Install:: Install a function definition.
2968 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
2969 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
2970 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
2971 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
2972 * if:: What if?
2973 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
2974 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
2975 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point and buffer.
2976 * Review::
2977 * defun Exercises::
2978 @end menu
2979
2980 @ifnottex
2981 @node Primitive Functions
2982 @unnumberedsec An Aside about Primitive Functions
2983 @end ifnottex
2984 @cindex Primitive functions
2985 @cindex Functions, primitive
2986
2987 @cindex C language primitives
2988 @cindex Primitives written in C
2989 All functions are defined in terms of other functions, except for a few
2990 @dfn{primitive} functions that are written in the C programming
2991 language. When you write functions' definitions, you will write them in
2992 Emacs Lisp and use other functions as your building blocks. Some of the
2993 functions you will use will themselves be written in Emacs Lisp (perhaps
2994 by you) and some will be primitives written in C@. The primitive
2995 functions are used exactly like those written in Emacs Lisp and behave
2996 like them. They are written in C so we can easily run GNU Emacs on any
2997 computer that has sufficient power and can run C.
2998
2999 Let me re-emphasize this: when you write code in Emacs Lisp, you do not
3000 distinguish between the use of functions written in C and the use of
3001 functions written in Emacs Lisp. The difference is irrelevant. I
3002 mention the distinction only because it is interesting to know. Indeed,
3003 unless you investigate, you won't know whether an already-written
3004 function is written in Emacs Lisp or C.
3005
3006 @node defun
3007 @section The @code{defun} Macro
3008 @findex defun
3009
3010 @cindex @samp{function definition} defined
3011 In Lisp, a symbol such as @code{mark-whole-buffer} has code attached to
3012 it that tells the computer what to do when the function is called.
3013 This code is called the @dfn{function definition} and is created by
3014 evaluating a Lisp expression that starts with the symbol @code{defun}
3015 (which is an abbreviation for @emph{define function}).
3016
3017 In subsequent sections, we will look at function definitions from the
3018 Emacs source code, such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}. In this section,
3019 we will describe a simple function definition so you can see how it
3020 looks. This function definition uses arithmetic because it makes for a
3021 simple example. Some people dislike examples using arithmetic; however,
3022 if you are such a person, do not despair. Hardly any of the code we
3023 will study in the remainder of this introduction involves arithmetic or
3024 mathematics. The examples mostly involve text in one way or another.
3025
3026 A function definition has up to five parts following the word
3027 @code{defun}:
3028
3029 @enumerate
3030 @item
3031 The name of the symbol to which the function definition should be
3032 attached.
3033
3034 @item
3035 A list of the arguments that will be passed to the function. If no
3036 arguments will be passed to the function, this is an empty list,
3037 @code{()}.
3038
3039 @item
3040 Documentation describing the function. (Technically optional, but
3041 strongly recommended.)
3042
3043 @item
3044 Optionally, an expression to make the function interactive so you can
3045 use it by typing @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by
3046 typing an appropriate key or keychord.
3047
3048 @cindex @samp{body} defined
3049 @item
3050 The code that instructs the computer what to do: the @dfn{body} of the
3051 function definition.
3052 @end enumerate
3053
3054 It is helpful to think of the five parts of a function definition as
3055 being organized in a template, with slots for each part:
3056
3057 @smallexample
3058 @group
3059 (defun @var{function-name} (@var{arguments}@dots{})
3060 "@var{optional-documentation}@dots{}"
3061 (interactive @var{argument-passing-info}) ; @r{optional}
3062 @var{body}@dots{})
3063 @end group
3064 @end smallexample
3065
3066 As an example, here is the code for a function that multiplies its
3067 argument by 7. (This example is not interactive. @xref{Interactive,
3068 , Making a Function Interactive}, for that information.)
3069
3070 @smallexample
3071 @group
3072 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3073 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3074 (* 7 number))
3075 @end group
3076 @end smallexample
3077
3078 This definition begins with a parenthesis and the symbol @code{defun},
3079 followed by the name of the function.
3080
3081 @cindex @samp{argument list} defined
3082 The name of the function is followed by a list that contains the
3083 arguments that will be passed to the function. This list is called
3084 the @dfn{argument list}. In this example, the list has only one
3085 element, the symbol, @code{number}. When the function is used, the
3086 symbol will be bound to the value that is used as the argument to the
3087 function.
3088
3089 Instead of choosing the word @code{number} for the name of the argument,
3090 I could have picked any other name. For example, I could have chosen
3091 the word @code{multiplicand}. I picked the word ``number'' because it
3092 tells what kind of value is intended for this slot; but I could just as
3093 well have chosen the word ``multiplicand'' to indicate the role that the
3094 value placed in this slot will play in the workings of the function. I
3095 could have called it @code{foogle}, but that would have been a bad
3096 choice because it would not tell humans what it means. The choice of
3097 name is up to the programmer and should be chosen to make the meaning of
3098 the function clear.
3099
3100 Indeed, you can choose any name you wish for a symbol in an argument
3101 list, even the name of a symbol used in some other function: the name
3102 you use in an argument list is private to that particular definition.
3103 In that definition, the name refers to a different entity than any use
3104 of the same name outside the function definition. Suppose you have a
3105 nick-name ``Shorty'' in your family; when your family members refer to
3106 ``Shorty'', they mean you. But outside your family, in a movie, for
3107 example, the name ``Shorty'' refers to someone else. Because a name in an
3108 argument list is private to the function definition, you can change the
3109 value of such a symbol inside the body of a function without changing
3110 its value outside the function. The effect is similar to that produced
3111 by a @code{let} expression. (@xref{let, , @code{let}}.)
3112
3113 @ignore
3114 Note also that we discuss the word ``number'' in two different ways: as a
3115 symbol that appears in the code, and as the name of something that will
3116 be replaced by a something else during the evaluation of the function.
3117 In the first case, @code{number} is a symbol, not a number; it happens
3118 that within the function, it is a variable who value is the number in
3119 question, but our primary interest in it is as a symbol. On the other
3120 hand, when we are talking about the function, our interest is that we
3121 will substitute a number for the word @var{number}. To keep this
3122 distinction clear, we use different typography for the two
3123 circumstances. When we talk about this function, or about how it works,
3124 we refer to this number by writing @var{number}. In the function
3125 itself, we refer to it by writing @code{number}.
3126 @end ignore
3127
3128 The argument list is followed by the documentation string that
3129 describes the function. This is what you see when you type
3130 @w{@kbd{C-h f}} and the name of a function. Incidentally, when you
3131 write a documentation string like this, you should make the first line
3132 a complete sentence since some commands, such as @code{apropos}, print
3133 only the first line of a multi-line documentation string. Also, you
3134 should not indent the second line of a documentation string, if you
3135 have one, because that looks odd when you use @kbd{C-h f}
3136 (@code{describe-function}). The documentation string is optional, but
3137 it is so useful, it should be included in almost every function you
3138 write.
3139
3140 @findex * @r{(multiplication)}
3141 The third line of the example consists of the body of the function
3142 definition. (Most functions' definitions, of course, are longer than
3143 this.) In this function, the body is the list, @code{(* 7 number)}, which
3144 says to multiply the value of @var{number} by 7. (In Emacs Lisp,
3145 @code{*} is the function for multiplication, just as @code{+} is the
3146 function for addition.)
3147
3148 When you use the @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the argument
3149 @code{number} evaluates to the actual number you want used. Here is an
3150 example that shows how @code{multiply-by-seven} is used; but don't try
3151 to evaluate this yet!
3152
3153 @smallexample
3154 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3155 @end smallexample
3156
3157 @noindent
3158 The symbol @code{number}, specified in the function definition in the
3159 next section, is given or ``bound to'' the value 3 in the actual use of
3160 the function. Note that although @code{number} was inside parentheses
3161 in the function definition, the argument passed to the
3162 @code{multiply-by-seven} function is not in parentheses. The
3163 parentheses are written in the function definition so the computer can
3164 figure out where the argument list ends and the rest of the function
3165 definition begins.
3166
3167 If you evaluate this example, you are likely to get an error message.
3168 (Go ahead, try it!) This is because we have written the function
3169 definition, but not yet told the computer about the definition---we have
3170 not yet installed (or ``loaded'') the function definition in Emacs.
3171 Installing a function is the process that tells the Lisp interpreter the
3172 definition of the function. Installation is described in the next
3173 section.
3174
3175 @node Install
3176 @section Install a Function Definition
3177 @cindex Install a Function Definition
3178 @cindex Definition installation
3179 @cindex Function definition installation
3180
3181 If you are reading this inside of Info in Emacs, you can try out the
3182 @code{multiply-by-seven} function by first evaluating the function
3183 definition and then evaluating @code{(multiply-by-seven 3)}. A copy of
3184 the function definition follows. Place the cursor after the last
3185 parenthesis of the function definition and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you
3186 do this, @code{multiply-by-seven} will appear in the echo area. (What
3187 this means is that when a function definition is evaluated, the value it
3188 returns is the name of the defined function.) At the same time, this
3189 action installs the function definition.
3190
3191 @smallexample
3192 @group
3193 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3194 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3195 (* 7 number))
3196 @end group
3197 @end smallexample
3198
3199 @noindent
3200 By evaluating this @code{defun}, you have just installed
3201 @code{multiply-by-seven} in Emacs. The function is now just as much a
3202 part of Emacs as @code{forward-word} or any other editing function you
3203 use. (@code{multiply-by-seven} will stay installed until you quit
3204 Emacs. To reload code automatically whenever you start Emacs, see
3205 @ref{Permanent Installation, , Installing Code Permanently}.)
3206
3207 @menu
3208 * Effect of installation::
3209 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
3210 @end menu
3211
3212 @ifnottex
3213 @node Effect of installation
3214 @unnumberedsubsec The effect of installation
3215 @end ifnottex
3216
3217 You can see the effect of installing @code{multiply-by-seven} by
3218 evaluating the following sample. Place the cursor after the following
3219 expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. The number 21 will appear in the
3220 echo area.
3221
3222 @smallexample
3223 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3224 @end smallexample
3225
3226 If you wish, you can read the documentation for the function by typing
3227 @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and then the name of the
3228 function, @code{multiply-by-seven}. When you do this, a
3229 @file{*Help*} window will appear on your screen that says:
3230
3231 @smallexample
3232 @group
3233 multiply-by-seven is a Lisp function.
3234
3235 (multiply-by-seven NUMBER)
3236
3237 Multiply NUMBER by seven.
3238 @end group
3239 @end smallexample
3240
3241 @noindent
3242 (To return to a single window on your screen, type @kbd{C-x 1}.)
3243
3244 @node Change a defun
3245 @subsection Change a Function Definition
3246 @cindex Changing a function definition
3247 @cindex Function definition, how to change
3248 @cindex Definition, how to change
3249
3250 If you want to change the code in @code{multiply-by-seven}, just rewrite
3251 it. To install the new version in place of the old one, evaluate the
3252 function definition again. This is how you modify code in Emacs. It is
3253 very simple.
3254
3255 As an example, you can change the @code{multiply-by-seven} function to
3256 add the number to itself seven times instead of multiplying the number
3257 by seven. It produces the same answer, but by a different path. At
3258 the same time, we will add a comment to the code; a comment is text
3259 that the Lisp interpreter ignores, but that a human reader may find
3260 useful or enlightening. The comment is that this is the ``second
3261 version''.
3262
3263 @smallexample
3264 @group
3265 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Second version.}
3266 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3267 (+ number number number number number number number))
3268 @end group
3269 @end smallexample
3270
3271 @cindex Comments in Lisp code
3272 The comment follows a semicolon, @samp{;}. In Lisp, everything on a
3273 line that follows a semicolon is a comment. The end of the line is the
3274 end of the comment. To stretch a comment over two or more lines, begin
3275 each line with a semicolon.
3276
3277 @xref{Beginning init File, , Beginning a @file{.emacs}
3278 File}, and @ref{Comments, , Comments, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
3279 Reference Manual}, for more about comments.
3280
3281 You can install this version of the @code{multiply-by-seven} function by
3282 evaluating it in the same way you evaluated the first function: place
3283 the cursor after the last parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3284
3285 In summary, this is how you write code in Emacs Lisp: you write a
3286 function; install it; test it; and then make fixes or enhancements and
3287 install it again.
3288
3289 @node Interactive
3290 @section Make a Function Interactive
3291 @cindex Interactive functions
3292 @findex interactive
3293
3294 You make a function interactive by placing a list that begins with
3295 the special form @code{interactive} immediately after the
3296 documentation. A user can invoke an interactive function by typing
3297 @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by typing the keys to
3298 which it is bound, for example, by typing @kbd{C-n} for
3299 @code{next-line} or @kbd{C-x h} for @code{mark-whole-buffer}.
3300
3301 Interestingly, when you call an interactive function interactively,
3302 the value returned is not automatically displayed in the echo area.
3303 This is because you often call an interactive function for its side
3304 effects, such as moving forward by a word or line, and not for the
3305 value returned. If the returned value were displayed in the echo area
3306 each time you typed a key, it would be very distracting.
3307
3308 @menu
3309 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
3310 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
3311 @end menu
3312
3313 @ifnottex
3314 @node Interactive multiply-by-seven
3315 @unnumberedsubsec An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}, An Overview
3316 @end ifnottex
3317
3318 Both the use of the special form @code{interactive} and one way to
3319 display a value in the echo area can be illustrated by creating an
3320 interactive version of @code{multiply-by-seven}.
3321
3322 @need 1250
3323 Here is the code:
3324
3325 @smallexample
3326 @group
3327 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3328 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3329 (interactive "p")
3330 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3331 @end group
3332 @end smallexample
3333
3334 @noindent
3335 You can install this code by placing your cursor after it and typing
3336 @kbd{C-x C-e}. The name of the function will appear in your echo area.
3337 Then, you can use this code by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number and then
3338 typing @kbd{M-x multiply-by-seven} and pressing @key{RET}. The phrase
3339 @samp{The result is @dots{}} followed by the product will appear in the
3340 echo area.
3341
3342 Speaking more generally, you invoke a function like this in either of two
3343 ways:
3344
3345 @enumerate
3346 @item
3347 By typing a prefix argument that contains the number to be passed, and
3348 then typing @kbd{M-x} and the name of the function, as with
3349 @kbd{C-u 3 M-x forward-sentence}; or,
3350
3351 @item
3352 By typing whatever key or keychord the function is bound to, as with
3353 @kbd{C-u 3 M-e}.
3354 @end enumerate
3355
3356 @noindent
3357 Both the examples just mentioned work identically to move point forward
3358 three sentences. (Since @code{multiply-by-seven} is not bound to a key,
3359 it could not be used as an example of key binding.)
3360
3361 (@xref{Keybindings, , Some Keybindings}, to learn how to bind a command
3362 to a key.)
3363
3364 A prefix argument is passed to an interactive function by typing the
3365 @key{META} key followed by a number, for example, @kbd{M-3 M-e}, or by
3366 typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number, for example, @kbd{C-u 3 M-e} (if you
3367 type @kbd{C-u} without a number, it defaults to 4).
3368
3369 @node multiply-by-seven in detail
3370 @subsection An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}
3371
3372 Let's look at the use of the special form @code{interactive} and then at
3373 the function @code{message} in the interactive version of
3374 @code{multiply-by-seven}. You will recall that the function definition
3375 looks like this:
3376
3377 @smallexample
3378 @group
3379 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3380 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3381 (interactive "p")
3382 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3383 @end group
3384 @end smallexample
3385
3386 In this function, the expression, @code{(interactive "p")}, is a list of
3387 two elements. The @code{"p"} tells Emacs to pass the prefix argument to
3388 the function and use its value for the argument of the function.
3389
3390 @need 1000
3391 The argument will be a number. This means that the symbol
3392 @code{number} will be bound to a number in the line:
3393
3394 @smallexample
3395 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number))
3396 @end smallexample
3397
3398 @need 1250
3399 @noindent
3400 For example, if your prefix argument is 5, the Lisp interpreter will
3401 evaluate the line as if it were:
3402
3403 @smallexample
3404 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 5))
3405 @end smallexample
3406
3407 @noindent
3408 (If you are reading this in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate this expression
3409 yourself.) First, the interpreter will evaluate the inner list, which
3410 is @code{(* 7 5)}. This returns a value of 35. Next, it
3411 will evaluate the outer list, passing the values of the second and
3412 subsequent elements of the list to the function @code{message}.
3413
3414 As we have seen, @code{message} is an Emacs Lisp function especially
3415 designed for sending a one line message to a user. (@xref{message, ,
3416 The @code{message} function}.) In summary, the @code{message}
3417 function prints its first argument in the echo area as is, except for
3418 occurrences of @samp{%d} or @samp{%s} (and various other %-sequences
3419 which we have not mentioned). When it sees a control sequence, the
3420 function looks to the second or subsequent arguments and prints the
3421 value of the argument in the location in the string where the control
3422 sequence is located.
3423
3424 In the interactive @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the control string
3425 is @samp{%d}, which requires a number, and the value returned by
3426 evaluating @code{(* 7 5)} is the number 35. Consequently, the number 35
3427 is printed in place of the @samp{%d} and the message is @samp{The result
3428 is 35}.
3429
3430 (Note that when you call the function @code{multiply-by-seven}, the
3431 message is printed without quotes, but when you call @code{message}, the
3432 text is printed in double quotes. This is because the value returned by
3433 @code{message} is what appears in the echo area when you evaluate an
3434 expression whose first element is @code{message}; but when embedded in a
3435 function, @code{message} prints the text as a side effect without
3436 quotes.)
3437
3438 @node Interactive Options
3439 @section Different Options for @code{interactive}
3440 @cindex Options for @code{interactive}
3441 @cindex Interactive options
3442
3443 In the example, @code{multiply-by-seven} used @code{"p"} as the
3444 argument to @code{interactive}. This argument told Emacs to interpret
3445 your typing either @kbd{C-u} followed by a number or @key{META}
3446 followed by a number as a command to pass that number to the function
3447 as its argument. Emacs has more than twenty characters predefined for
3448 use with @code{interactive}. In almost every case, one of these
3449 options will enable you to pass the right information interactively to
3450 a function. (@xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for
3451 @code{interactive}, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
3452
3453 @need 1250
3454 Consider the function @code{zap-to-char}. Its interactive expression
3455 is
3456
3457 @smallexample
3458 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3459 @end smallexample
3460
3461 The first part of the argument to @code{interactive} is @samp{p}, with
3462 which you are already familiar. This argument tells Emacs to
3463 interpret a ``prefix'', as a number to be passed to the function. You
3464 can specify a prefix either by typing @kbd{C-u} followed by a number
3465 or by typing @key{META} followed by a number. The prefix is the
3466 number of specified characters. Thus, if your prefix is three and the
3467 specified character is @samp{x}, then you will delete all the text up
3468 to and including the third next @samp{x}. If you do not set a prefix,
3469 then you delete all the text up to and including the specified
3470 character, but no more.
3471
3472 The @samp{c} tells the function the name of the character to which to delete.
3473
3474 More formally, a function with two or more arguments can have
3475 information passed to each argument by adding parts to the string that
3476 follows @code{interactive}. When you do this, the information is
3477 passed to each argument in the same order it is specified in the
3478 @code{interactive} list. In the string, each part is separated from
3479 the next part by a @samp{\n}, which is a newline. For example, you
3480 can follow @samp{p} with a @samp{\n} and an @samp{cZap to char:@: }.
3481 This causes Emacs to pass the value of the prefix argument (if there
3482 is one) and the character.
3483
3484 In this case, the function definition looks like the following, where
3485 @code{arg} and @code{char} are the symbols to which @code{interactive}
3486 binds the prefix argument and the specified character:
3487
3488 @smallexample
3489 @group
3490 (defun @var{name-of-function} (arg char)
3491 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3492 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3493 @var{body-of-function}@dots{})
3494 @end group
3495 @end smallexample
3496
3497 @noindent
3498 (The space after the colon in the prompt makes it look better when you
3499 are prompted. @xref{copy-to-buffer, , The Definition of
3500 @code{copy-to-buffer}}, for an example.)
3501
3502 When a function does not take arguments, @code{interactive} does not
3503 require any. Such a function contains the simple expression
3504 @code{(interactive)}. The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is like
3505 this.
3506
3507 Alternatively, if the special letter-codes are not right for your
3508 application, you can pass your own arguments to @code{interactive} as
3509 a list.
3510
3511 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}},
3512 for an example. @xref{Using Interactive, , Using @code{Interactive},
3513 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a more complete
3514 explanation about this technique.
3515
3516 @node Permanent Installation
3517 @section Install Code Permanently
3518 @cindex Install code permanently
3519 @cindex Permanent code installation
3520 @cindex Code installation
3521
3522 When you install a function definition by evaluating it, it will stay
3523 installed until you quit Emacs. The next time you start a new session
3524 of Emacs, the function will not be installed unless you evaluate the
3525 function definition again.
3526
3527 At some point, you may want to have code installed automatically
3528 whenever you start a new session of Emacs. There are several ways of
3529 doing this:
3530
3531 @itemize @bullet
3532 @item
3533 If you have code that is just for yourself, you can put the code for the
3534 function definition in your @file{.emacs} initialization file. When you
3535 start Emacs, your @file{.emacs} file is automatically evaluated and all
3536 the function definitions within it are installed.
3537 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
3538
3539 @item
3540 Alternatively, you can put the function definitions that you want
3541 installed in one or more files of their own and use the @code{load}
3542 function to cause Emacs to evaluate and thereby install each of the
3543 functions in the files.
3544 @xref{Loading Files, , Loading Files}.
3545
3546 @item
3547 Thirdly, if you have code that your whole site will use, it is usual
3548 to put it in a file called @file{site-init.el} that is loaded when
3549 Emacs is built. This makes the code available to everyone who uses
3550 your machine. (See the @file{INSTALL} file that is part of the Emacs
3551 distribution.)
3552 @end itemize
3553
3554 Finally, if you have code that everyone who uses Emacs may want, you
3555 can post it on a computer network or send a copy to the Free Software
3556 Foundation. (When you do this, please license the code and its
3557 documentation under a license that permits other people to run, copy,
3558 study, modify, and redistribute the code and which protects you from
3559 having your work taken from you.) If you send a copy of your code to
3560 the Free Software Foundation, and properly protect yourself and
3561 others, it may be included in the next release of Emacs. In large
3562 part, this is how Emacs has grown over the past years, by donations.
3563
3564 @node let
3565 @section @code{let}
3566 @findex let
3567
3568 The @code{let} expression is a special form in Lisp that you will need
3569 to use in most function definitions.
3570
3571 @code{let} is used to attach or bind a symbol to a value in such a way
3572 that the Lisp interpreter will not confuse the variable with a
3573 variable of the same name that is not part of the function.
3574
3575 To understand why the @code{let} special form is necessary, consider
3576 the situation in which you own a home that you generally refer to as
3577 ``the house'', as in the sentence, ``The house needs painting.'' If you
3578 are visiting a friend and your host refers to ``the house'', he is
3579 likely to be referring to @emph{his} house, not yours, that is, to a
3580 different house.
3581
3582 If your friend is referring to his house and you think he is referring
3583 to your house, you may be in for some confusion. The same thing could
3584 happen in Lisp if a variable that is used inside of one function has
3585 the same name as a variable that is used inside of another function,
3586 and the two are not intended to refer to the same value. The
3587 @code{let} special form prevents this kind of confusion.
3588
3589 @menu
3590 * Prevent confusion::
3591 * Parts of let Expression::
3592 * Sample let Expression::
3593 * Uninitialized let Variables::
3594 @end menu
3595
3596 @ifnottex
3597 @node Prevent confusion
3598 @unnumberedsubsec @code{let} Prevents Confusion
3599 @end ifnottex
3600
3601 @cindex @samp{local variable} defined
3602 @cindex @samp{variable, local}, defined
3603 The @code{let} special form prevents confusion. @code{let} creates a
3604 name for a @dfn{local variable} that overshadows any use of the same
3605 name outside the @code{let} expression. This is like understanding
3606 that whenever your host refers to ``the house'', he means his house, not
3607 yours. (Symbols used in argument lists work the same way.
3608 @xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
3609
3610 Local variables created by a @code{let} expression retain their value
3611 @emph{only} within the @code{let} expression itself (and within
3612 expressions called within the @code{let} expression); the local
3613 variables have no effect outside the @code{let} expression.
3614
3615 Another way to think about @code{let} is that it is like a @code{setq}
3616 that is temporary and local. The values set by @code{let} are
3617 automatically undone when the @code{let} is finished. The setting
3618 only affects expressions that are inside the bounds of the @code{let}
3619 expression. In computer science jargon, we would say ``the binding of
3620 a symbol is visible only in functions called in the @code{let} form;
3621 in Emacs Lisp, scoping is dynamic, not lexical.''
3622
3623 @code{let} can create more than one variable at once. Also,
3624 @code{let} gives each variable it creates an initial value, either a
3625 value specified by you, or @code{nil}. (In the jargon, this is called
3626 ``binding the variable to the value''.) After @code{let} has created
3627 and bound the variables, it executes the code in the body of the
3628 @code{let}, and returns the value of the last expression in the body,
3629 as the value of the whole @code{let} expression. (``Execute'' is a jargon
3630 term that means to evaluate a list; it comes from the use of the word
3631 meaning ``to give practical effect to'' (@cite{Oxford English
3632 Dictionary}). Since you evaluate an expression to perform an action,
3633 ``execute'' has evolved as a synonym to ``evaluate''.)
3634
3635 @node Parts of let Expression
3636 @subsection The Parts of a @code{let} Expression
3637 @cindex @code{let} expression, parts of
3638 @cindex Parts of @code{let} expression
3639
3640 @cindex @samp{varlist} defined
3641 A @code{let} expression is a list of three parts. The first part is
3642 the symbol @code{let}. The second part is a list, called a
3643 @dfn{varlist}, each element of which is either a symbol by itself or a
3644 two-element list, the first element of which is a symbol. The third
3645 part of the @code{let} expression is the body of the @code{let}. The
3646 body usually consists of one or more lists.
3647
3648 @need 800
3649 A template for a @code{let} expression looks like this:
3650
3651 @smallexample
3652 (let @var{varlist} @var{body}@dots{})
3653 @end smallexample
3654
3655 @noindent
3656 The symbols in the varlist are the variables that are given initial
3657 values by the @code{let} special form. Symbols by themselves are given
3658 the initial value of @code{nil}; and each symbol that is the first
3659 element of a two-element list is bound to the value that is returned
3660 when the Lisp interpreter evaluates the second element.
3661
3662 Thus, a varlist might look like this: @code{(thread (needles 3))}. In
3663 this case, in a @code{let} expression, Emacs binds the symbol
3664 @code{thread} to an initial value of @code{nil}, and binds the symbol
3665 @code{needles} to an initial value of 3.
3666
3667 When you write a @code{let} expression, what you do is put the
3668 appropriate expressions in the slots of the @code{let} expression
3669 template.
3670
3671 If the varlist is composed of two-element lists, as is often the case,
3672 the template for the @code{let} expression looks like this:
3673
3674 @smallexample
3675 @group
3676 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value})
3677 (@var{variable} @var{value})
3678 @dots{})
3679 @var{body}@dots{})
3680 @end group
3681 @end smallexample
3682
3683 @node Sample let Expression
3684 @subsection Sample @code{let} Expression
3685 @cindex Sample @code{let} expression
3686 @cindex @code{let} expression sample
3687
3688 The following expression creates and gives initial values
3689 to the two variables @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. The body of the
3690 @code{let} expression is a list which calls the @code{message} function.
3691
3692 @smallexample
3693 @group
3694 (let ((zebra 'stripes)
3695 (tiger 'fierce))
3696 (message "One kind of animal has %s and another is %s."
3697 zebra tiger))
3698 @end group
3699 @end smallexample
3700
3701 Here, the varlist is @code{((zebra 'stripes) (tiger 'fierce))}.
3702
3703 The two variables are @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. Each variable is
3704 the first element of a two-element list and each value is the second
3705 element of its two-element list. In the varlist, Emacs binds the
3706 variable @code{zebra} to the value @code{stripes}@footnote{According
3707 to Jared Diamond in @cite{Guns, Germs, and Steel}, ``@dots{} zebras
3708 become impossibly dangerous as they grow older'' but the claim here is
3709 that they do not become fierce like a tiger. (1997, W. W. Norton and
3710 Co., ISBN 0-393-03894-2, page 171)}, and binds the
3711 variable @code{tiger} to the value @code{fierce}. In this example,
3712 both values are symbols preceded by a quote. The values could just as
3713 well have been another list or a string. The body of the @code{let}
3714 follows after the list holding the variables. In this example, the
3715 body is a list that uses the @code{message} function to print a string
3716 in the echo area.
3717
3718 @need 1500
3719 You may evaluate the example in the usual fashion, by placing the
3720 cursor after the last parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you do
3721 this, the following will appear in the echo area:
3722
3723 @smallexample
3724 "One kind of animal has stripes and another is fierce."
3725 @end smallexample
3726
3727 As we have seen before, the @code{message} function prints its first
3728 argument, except for @samp{%s}. In this example, the value of the variable
3729 @code{zebra} is printed at the location of the first @samp{%s} and the
3730 value of the variable @code{tiger} is printed at the location of the
3731 second @samp{%s}.
3732
3733 @node Uninitialized let Variables
3734 @subsection Uninitialized Variables in a @code{let} Statement
3735 @cindex Uninitialized @code{let} variables
3736 @cindex @code{let} variables uninitialized
3737
3738 If you do not bind the variables in a @code{let} statement to specific
3739 initial values, they will automatically be bound to an initial value of
3740 @code{nil}, as in the following expression:
3741
3742 @smallexample
3743 @group
3744 (let ((birch 3)
3745 pine
3746 fir
3747 (oak 'some))
3748 (message
3749 "Here are %d variables with %s, %s, and %s value."
3750 birch pine fir oak))
3751 @end group
3752 @end smallexample
3753
3754 @noindent
3755 Here, the varlist is @code{((birch 3) pine fir (oak 'some))}.
3756
3757 @need 1250
3758 If you evaluate this expression in the usual way, the following will
3759 appear in your echo area:
3760
3761 @smallexample
3762 "Here are 3 variables with nil, nil, and some value."
3763 @end smallexample
3764
3765 @noindent
3766 In this example, Emacs binds the symbol @code{birch} to the number 3,
3767 binds the symbols @code{pine} and @code{fir} to @code{nil}, and binds
3768 the symbol @code{oak} to the value @code{some}.
3769
3770 Note that in the first part of the @code{let}, the variables @code{pine}
3771 and @code{fir} stand alone as atoms that are not surrounded by
3772 parentheses; this is because they are being bound to @code{nil}, the
3773 empty list. But @code{oak} is bound to @code{some} and so is a part of
3774 the list @code{(oak 'some)}. Similarly, @code{birch} is bound to the
3775 number 3 and so is in a list with that number. (Since a number
3776 evaluates to itself, the number does not need to be quoted. Also, the
3777 number is printed in the message using a @samp{%d} rather than a
3778 @samp{%s}.) The four variables as a group are put into a list to
3779 delimit them from the body of the @code{let}.
3780
3781 @node if
3782 @section The @code{if} Special Form
3783 @findex if
3784 @cindex Conditional with @code{if}
3785
3786 A third special form, in addition to @code{defun} and @code{let}, is the
3787 conditional @code{if}. This form is used to instruct the computer to
3788 make decisions. You can write function definitions without using
3789 @code{if}, but it is used often enough, and is important enough, to be
3790 included here. It is used, for example, in the code for the
3791 function @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
3792
3793 The basic idea behind an @code{if}, is that ``@emph{if} a test is true,
3794 @emph{then} an expression is evaluated.'' If the test is not true, the
3795 expression is not evaluated. For example, you might make a decision
3796 such as, ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to the beach!''
3797
3798 @menu
3799 * if in more detail::
3800 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
3801 @end menu
3802
3803 @ifnottex
3804 @node if in more detail
3805 @unnumberedsubsec @code{if} in more detail
3806 @end ifnottex
3807
3808 @cindex @samp{if-part} defined
3809 @cindex @samp{then-part} defined
3810 An @code{if} expression written in Lisp does not use the word ``then'';
3811 the test and the action are the second and third elements of the list
3812 whose first element is @code{if}. Nonetheless, the test part of an
3813 @code{if} expression is often called the @dfn{if-part} and the second
3814 argument is often called the @dfn{then-part}.
3815
3816 Also, when an @code{if} expression is written, the true-or-false-test
3817 is usually written on the same line as the symbol @code{if}, but the
3818 action to carry out if the test is true, the ``then-part'', is written
3819 on the second and subsequent lines. This makes the @code{if}
3820 expression easier to read.
3821
3822 @smallexample
3823 @group
3824 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3825 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-test-is-true})
3826 @end group
3827 @end smallexample
3828
3829 @noindent
3830 The true-or-false-test will be an expression that
3831 is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter.
3832
3833 Here is an example that you can evaluate in the usual manner. The test
3834 is whether the number 5 is greater than the number 4. Since it is, the
3835 message @samp{5 is greater than 4!} will be printed.
3836
3837 @smallexample
3838 @group
3839 (if (> 5 4) ; @r{if-part}
3840 (message "5 is greater than 4!")) ; @r{then-part}
3841 @end group
3842 @end smallexample
3843
3844 @noindent
3845 (The function @code{>} tests whether its first argument is greater than
3846 its second argument and returns true if it is.)
3847 @findex > (greater than)
3848
3849 Of course, in actual use, the test in an @code{if} expression will not
3850 be fixed for all time as it is by the expression @code{(> 5 4)}.
3851 Instead, at least one of the variables used in the test will be bound to
3852 a value that is not known ahead of time. (If the value were known ahead
3853 of time, we would not need to run the test!)
3854
3855 For example, the value may be bound to an argument of a function
3856 definition. In the following function definition, the character of the
3857 animal is a value that is passed to the function. If the value bound to
3858 @code{characteristic} is @code{fierce}, then the message, @samp{It's a
3859 tiger!} will be printed; otherwise, @code{nil} will be returned.
3860
3861 @smallexample
3862 @group
3863 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3864 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3865 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol ‘fierce’,
3866 then warn of a tiger."
3867 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3868 (message "It’s a tiger!")))
3869 @end group
3870 @end smallexample
3871
3872 @need 1500
3873 @noindent
3874 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate the
3875 function definition in the usual way to install it in Emacs, and then you
3876 can evaluate the following two expressions to see the results:
3877
3878 @smallexample
3879 @group
3880 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
3881
3882 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
3883
3884 @end group
3885 @end smallexample
3886
3887 @c Following sentences rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
3888 @noindent
3889 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
3890 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It’s a tiger!"}; and
3891 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)} you will see @code{nil}
3892 printed in the echo area.
3893
3894 @node type-of-animal in detail
3895 @subsection The @code{type-of-animal} Function in Detail
3896
3897 Let's look at the @code{type-of-animal} function in detail.
3898
3899 The function definition for @code{type-of-animal} was written by filling
3900 the slots of two templates, one for a function definition as a whole, and
3901 a second for an @code{if} expression.
3902
3903 @need 1250
3904 The template for every function that is not interactive is:
3905
3906 @smallexample
3907 @group
3908 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
3909 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3910 @var{body}@dots{})
3911 @end group
3912 @end smallexample
3913
3914 @need 800
3915 The parts of the function that match this template look like this:
3916
3917 @smallexample
3918 @group
3919 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3920 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3921 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol ‘fierce’,
3922 then warn of a tiger."
3923 @var{body: the} @code{if} @var{expression})
3924 @end group
3925 @end smallexample
3926
3927 The name of function is @code{type-of-animal}; it is passed the value
3928 of one argument. The argument list is followed by a multi-line
3929 documentation string. The documentation string is included in the
3930 example because it is a good habit to write documentation string for
3931 every function definition. The body of the function definition
3932 consists of the @code{if} expression.
3933
3934 @need 800
3935 The template for an @code{if} expression looks like this:
3936
3937 @smallexample
3938 @group
3939 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3940 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true})
3941 @end group
3942 @end smallexample
3943
3944 @need 1250
3945 In the @code{type-of-animal} function, the code for the @code{if}
3946 looks like this:
3947
3948 @smallexample
3949 @group
3950 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3951 (message "It’s a tiger!")))
3952 @end group
3953 @end smallexample
3954
3955 @need 800
3956 Here, the true-or-false-test is the expression:
3957
3958 @smallexample
3959 (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3960 @end smallexample
3961
3962 @noindent
3963 In Lisp, @code{equal} is a function that determines whether its first
3964 argument is equal to its second argument. The second argument is the
3965 quoted symbol @code{'fierce} and the first argument is the value of the
3966 symbol @code{characteristic}---in other words, the argument passed to
3967 this function.
3968
3969 In the first exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the argument
3970 @code{fierce} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. Since @code{fierce}
3971 is equal to @code{fierce}, the expression, @code{(equal characteristic
3972 'fierce)}, returns a value of true. When this happens, the @code{if}
3973 evaluates the second argument or then-part of the @code{if}:
3974 @code{(message "It’s a tiger!")}.
3975
3976 On the other hand, in the second exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the
3977 argument @code{zebra} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. @code{zebra}
3978 is not equal to @code{fierce}, so the then-part is not evaluated and
3979 @code{nil} is returned by the @code{if} expression.
3980
3981 @node else
3982 @section If--then--else Expressions
3983 @cindex Else
3984
3985 An @code{if} expression may have an optional third argument, called
3986 the @dfn{else-part}, for the case when the true-or-false-test returns
3987 false. When this happens, the second argument or then-part of the
3988 overall @code{if} expression is @emph{not} evaluated, but the third or
3989 else-part @emph{is} evaluated. You might think of this as the cloudy
3990 day alternative for the decision ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to
3991 the beach, else read a book!''.
3992
3993 The word ``else'' is not written in the Lisp code; the else-part of an
3994 @code{if} expression comes after the then-part. In the written Lisp, the
3995 else-part is usually written to start on a line of its own and is
3996 indented less than the then-part:
3997
3998 @smallexample
3999 @group
4000 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4001 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true}
4002 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-false})
4003 @end group
4004 @end smallexample
4005
4006 For example, the following @code{if} expression prints the message @samp{4
4007 is not greater than 5!} when you evaluate it in the usual way:
4008
4009 @smallexample
4010 @group
4011 (if (> 4 5) ; @r{if-part}
4012 (message "4 falsely greater than 5!") ; @r{then-part}
4013 (message "4 is not greater than 5!")) ; @r{else-part}
4014 @end group
4015 @end smallexample
4016
4017 @noindent
4018 Note that the different levels of indentation make it easy to
4019 distinguish the then-part from the else-part. (GNU Emacs has several
4020 commands that automatically indent @code{if} expressions correctly.
4021 @xref{Typing Lists, , GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists}.)
4022
4023 We can extend the @code{type-of-animal} function to include an
4024 else-part by simply incorporating an additional part to the @code{if}
4025 expression.
4026
4027 @need 1500
4028 You can see the consequences of doing this if you evaluate the following
4029 version of the @code{type-of-animal} function definition to install it
4030 and then evaluate the two subsequent expressions to pass different
4031 arguments to the function.
4032
4033 @smallexample
4034 @group
4035 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic) ; @r{Second version.}
4036 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4037 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol ‘fierce’,
4038 then warn of a tiger; else say it’s not fierce."
4039 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4040 (message "It’s a tiger!")
4041 (message "It’s not fierce!")))
4042 @end group
4043 @end smallexample
4044 @sp 1
4045
4046 @smallexample
4047 @group
4048 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4049
4050 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4051
4052 @end group
4053 @end smallexample
4054
4055 @c Following sentence rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4056 @noindent
4057 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4058 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It’s a tiger!"}; but
4059 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)}, you will see
4060 @code{"It’s not fierce!"}.
4061
4062 (Of course, if the @var{characteristic} were @code{ferocious}, the
4063 message @code{"It’s not fierce!"} would be printed; and it would be
4064 misleading! When you write code, you need to take into account the
4065 possibility that some such argument will be tested by the @code{if}
4066 and write your program accordingly.)
4067
4068 @node Truth & Falsehood
4069 @section Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4070 @cindex Truth and falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4071 @cindex Falsehood and truth in Emacs Lisp
4072 @findex nil
4073
4074 There is an important aspect to the truth test in an @code{if}
4075 expression. So far, we have spoken of ``true'' and ``false'' as values of
4076 predicates as if they were new kinds of Emacs Lisp objects. In fact,
4077 ``false'' is just our old friend @code{nil}. Anything else---anything
4078 at all---is ``true''.
4079
4080 The expression that tests for truth is interpreted as @dfn{true}
4081 if the result of evaluating it is a value that is not @code{nil}. In
4082 other words, the result of the test is considered true if the value
4083 returned is a number such as 47, a string such as @code{"hello"}, or a
4084 symbol (other than @code{nil}) such as @code{flowers}, or a list (so
4085 long as it is not empty), or even a buffer!
4086
4087 @menu
4088 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
4089 @end menu
4090
4091 @ifnottex
4092 @node nil explained
4093 @unnumberedsubsec An explanation of @code{nil}
4094 @end ifnottex
4095
4096 Before illustrating a test for truth, we need an explanation of @code{nil}.
4097
4098 In Emacs Lisp, the symbol @code{nil} has two meanings. First, it means the
4099 empty list. Second, it means false and is the value returned when a
4100 true-or-false-test tests false. @code{nil} can be written as an empty
4101 list, @code{()}, or as @code{nil}. As far as the Lisp interpreter is
4102 concerned, @code{()} and @code{nil} are the same. Humans, however, tend
4103 to use @code{nil} for false and @code{()} for the empty list.
4104
4105 In Emacs Lisp, any value that is not @code{nil}---is not the empty
4106 list---is considered true. This means that if an evaluation returns
4107 something that is not an empty list, an @code{if} expression will test
4108 true. For example, if a number is put in the slot for the test, it
4109 will be evaluated and will return itself, since that is what numbers
4110 do when evaluated. In this conditional, the @code{if} expression will
4111 test true. The expression tests false only when @code{nil}, an empty
4112 list, is returned by evaluating the expression.
4113
4114 You can see this by evaluating the two expressions in the following examples.
4115
4116 In the first example, the number 4 is evaluated as the test in the
4117 @code{if} expression and returns itself; consequently, the then-part
4118 of the expression is evaluated and returned: @samp{true} appears in
4119 the echo area. In the second example, the @code{nil} indicates false;
4120 consequently, the else-part of the expression is evaluated and
4121 returned: @samp{false} appears in the echo area.
4122
4123 @smallexample
4124 @group
4125 (if 4
4126 'true
4127 'false)
4128 @end group
4129
4130 @group
4131 (if nil
4132 'true
4133 'false)
4134 @end group
4135 @end smallexample
4136
4137 @need 1250
4138 Incidentally, if some other useful value is not available for a test that
4139 returns true, then the Lisp interpreter will return the symbol @code{t}
4140 for true. For example, the expression @code{(> 5 4)} returns @code{t}
4141 when evaluated, as you can see by evaluating it in the usual way:
4142
4143 @smallexample
4144 (> 5 4)
4145 @end smallexample
4146
4147 @need 1250
4148 @noindent
4149 On the other hand, this function returns @code{nil} if the test is false.
4150
4151 @smallexample
4152 (> 4 5)
4153 @end smallexample
4154
4155 @node save-excursion
4156 @section @code{save-excursion}
4157 @findex save-excursion
4158 @cindex Region, what it is
4159 @cindex Preserving point and buffer
4160 @cindex Point and buffer preservation
4161 @findex point
4162 @findex mark
4163
4164 The @code{save-excursion} function is the third and final special form
4165 that we will discuss in this chapter.
4166
4167 In Emacs Lisp programs used for editing, the @code{save-excursion}
4168 function is very common. It saves the location of point,
4169 executes the body of the function, and then restores point to
4170 its previous position if its location was changed. Its primary
4171 purpose is to keep the user from being surprised and disturbed by
4172 unexpected movement of point.
4173
4174 @menu
4175 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
4176 * Template for save-excursion::
4177 @end menu
4178
4179 @ifnottex
4180 @node Point and mark
4181 @unnumberedsubsec Point and Mark
4182 @end ifnottex
4183
4184 Before discussing @code{save-excursion}, however, it may be useful
4185 first to review what point and mark are in GNU Emacs. @dfn{Point} is
4186 the current location of the cursor. Wherever the cursor
4187 is, that is point. More precisely, on terminals where the cursor
4188 appears to be on top of a character, point is immediately before the
4189 character. In Emacs Lisp, point is an integer. The first character in
4190 a buffer is number one, the second is number two, and so on. The
4191 function @code{point} returns the current position of the cursor as a
4192 number. Each buffer has its own value for point.
4193
4194 The @dfn{mark} is another position in the buffer; its value can be set
4195 with a command such as @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}). If
4196 a mark has been set, you can use the command @kbd{C-x C-x}
4197 (@code{exchange-point-and-mark}) to cause the cursor to jump to the mark
4198 and set the mark to be the previous position of point. In addition, if
4199 you set another mark, the position of the previous mark is saved in the
4200 mark ring. Many mark positions can be saved this way. You can jump the
4201 cursor to a saved mark by typing @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}} one or more
4202 times.
4203
4204 The part of the buffer between point and mark is called @dfn{the
4205 region}. Numerous commands work on the region, including
4206 @code{center-region}, @code{count-lines-region}, @code{kill-region}, and
4207 @code{print-region}.
4208
4209 The @code{save-excursion} special form saves the location of point and
4210 restores this position after the code within the body of the
4211 special form is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter. Thus, if point were
4212 in the beginning of a piece of text and some code moved point to the end
4213 of the buffer, the @code{save-excursion} would put point back to where
4214 it was before, after the expressions in the body of the function were
4215 evaluated.
4216
4217 In Emacs, a function frequently moves point as part of its internal
4218 workings even though a user would not expect this. For example,
4219 @code{count-lines-region} moves point. To prevent the user from being
4220 bothered by jumps that are both unexpected and (from the user's point of
4221 view) unnecessary, @code{save-excursion} is often used to keep point in
4222 the location expected by the user. The use of
4223 @code{save-excursion} is good housekeeping.
4224
4225 To make sure the house stays clean, @code{save-excursion} restores the
4226 value of point even if something goes wrong in the code inside
4227 of it (or, to be more precise and to use the proper jargon, ``in case of
4228 abnormal exit''). This feature is very helpful.
4229
4230 In addition to recording the value of point,
4231 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the current buffer, and restores
4232 it, too. This means you can write code that will change the buffer and
4233 have @code{save-excursion} switch you back to the original buffer.
4234 This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in @code{append-to-buffer}.
4235 (@xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
4236
4237 @node Template for save-excursion
4238 @subsection Template for a @code{save-excursion} Expression
4239
4240 @need 800
4241 The template for code using @code{save-excursion} is simple:
4242
4243 @smallexample
4244 @group
4245 (save-excursion
4246 @var{body}@dots{})
4247 @end group
4248 @end smallexample
4249
4250 @noindent
4251 The body of the function is one or more expressions that will be
4252 evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter. If there is more than
4253 one expression in the body, the value of the last one will be returned
4254 as the value of the @code{save-excursion} function. The other
4255 expressions in the body are evaluated only for their side effects; and
4256 @code{save-excursion} itself is used only for its side effect (which
4257 is restoring the position of point).
4258
4259 @need 1250
4260 In more detail, the template for a @code{save-excursion} expression
4261 looks like this:
4262
4263 @smallexample
4264 @group
4265 (save-excursion
4266 @var{first-expression-in-body}
4267 @var{second-expression-in-body}
4268 @var{third-expression-in-body}
4269 @dots{}
4270 @var{last-expression-in-body})
4271 @end group
4272 @end smallexample
4273
4274 @noindent
4275 An expression, of course, may be a symbol on its own or a list.
4276
4277 In Emacs Lisp code, a @code{save-excursion} expression often occurs
4278 within the body of a @code{let} expression. It looks like this:
4279
4280 @smallexample
4281 @group
4282 (let @var{varlist}
4283 (save-excursion
4284 @var{body}@dots{}))
4285 @end group
4286 @end smallexample
4287
4288 @node Review
4289 @section Review
4290
4291 In the last few chapters we have introduced a macro and a fair number
4292 of functions and special forms. Here they are described in brief,
4293 along with a few similar functions that have not been mentioned yet.
4294
4295 @table @code
4296 @item eval-last-sexp
4297 Evaluate the last symbolic expression before the current location of
4298 point. The value is printed in the echo area unless the function is
4299 invoked with an argument; in that case, the output is printed in the
4300 current buffer. This command is normally bound to @kbd{C-x C-e}.
4301
4302 @item defun
4303 Define function. This macro has up to five parts: the name, a
4304 template for the arguments that will be passed to the function,
4305 documentation, an optional interactive declaration, and the body of
4306 the definition.
4307
4308 @need 1250
4309 For example, in an early version of Emacs, the function definition was
4310 as follows. (It is slightly more complex now that it seeks the first
4311 non-whitespace character rather than the first visible character.)
4312
4313 @smallexample
4314 @group
4315 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4316 "Move point to first visible character on line."
4317 (interactive)
4318 (beginning-of-line 1)
4319 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4320 @end group
4321 @end smallexample
4322
4323 @ignore
4324 In GNU Emacs 22,
4325
4326 (defun backward-to-indentation (&optional arg)
4327 "Move backward ARG lines and position at first nonblank character."
4328 (interactive "p")
4329 (forward-line (- (or arg 1)))
4330 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4331
4332 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4333 "Move point to the first non-whitespace character on this line."
4334 (interactive)
4335 (beginning-of-line 1)
4336 (skip-syntax-forward " " (line-end-position))
4337 ;; Move back over chars that have whitespace syntax but have the p flag.
4338 (backward-prefix-chars))
4339 @end ignore
4340
4341 @item interactive
4342 Declare to the interpreter that the function can be used
4343 interactively. This special form may be followed by a string with one
4344 or more parts that pass the information to the arguments of the
4345 function, in sequence. These parts may also tell the interpreter to
4346 prompt for information. Parts of the string are separated by
4347 newlines, @samp{\n}.
4348
4349 @need 1000
4350 Common code characters are:
4351
4352 @table @code
4353 @item b
4354 The name of an existing buffer.
4355
4356 @item f
4357 The name of an existing file.
4358
4359 @item p
4360 The numeric prefix argument. (Note that this @code{p} is lower case.)
4361
4362 @item r
4363 Point and the mark, as two numeric arguments, smallest first. This
4364 is the only code letter that specifies two successive arguments
4365 rather than one.
4366 @end table
4367
4368 @xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for @samp{interactive},
4369 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a complete list of
4370 code characters.
4371
4372 @item let
4373 Declare that a list of variables is for use within the body of the
4374 @code{let} and give them an initial value, either @code{nil} or a
4375 specified value; then evaluate the rest of the expressions in the body
4376 of the @code{let} and return the value of the last one. Inside the
4377 body of the @code{let}, the Lisp interpreter does not see the values of
4378 the variables of the same names that are bound outside of the
4379 @code{let}.
4380
4381 @need 1250
4382 For example,
4383
4384 @smallexample
4385 @group
4386 (let ((foo (buffer-name))
4387 (bar (buffer-size)))
4388 (message
4389 "This buffer is %s and has %d characters."
4390 foo bar))
4391 @end group
4392 @end smallexample
4393
4394 @item save-excursion
4395 Record the values of point and the current buffer before
4396 evaluating the body of this special form. Restore the value of point and
4397 buffer afterward.
4398
4399 @need 1250
4400 For example,
4401
4402 @smallexample
4403 @group
4404 (message "We are %d characters into this buffer."
4405 (- (point)
4406 (save-excursion
4407 (goto-char (point-min)) (point))))
4408 @end group
4409 @end smallexample
4410
4411 @item if
4412 Evaluate the first argument to the function; if it is true, evaluate
4413 the second argument; else evaluate the third argument, if there is one.
4414
4415 The @code{if} special form is called a @dfn{conditional}. There are
4416 other conditionals in Emacs Lisp, but @code{if} is perhaps the most
4417 commonly used.
4418
4419 @need 1250
4420 For example,
4421
4422 @smallexample
4423 @group
4424 (if (= 22 emacs-major-version)
4425 (message "This is version 22 Emacs")
4426 (message "This is not version 22 Emacs"))
4427 @end group
4428 @end smallexample
4429
4430 @need 1250
4431 @item <
4432 @itemx >
4433 @itemx <=
4434 @itemx >=
4435 The @code{<} function tests whether its first argument is smaller than
4436 its second argument. A corresponding function, @code{>}, tests whether
4437 the first argument is greater than the second. Likewise, @code{<=}
4438 tests whether the first argument is less than or equal to the second and
4439 @code{>=} tests whether the first argument is greater than or equal to
4440 the second. In all cases, both arguments must be numbers or markers
4441 (markers indicate positions in buffers).
4442
4443 @need 800
4444 @item =
4445 The @code{=} function tests whether two arguments, both numbers or
4446 markers, are equal.
4447
4448 @need 1250
4449 @item equal
4450 @itemx eq
4451 Test whether two objects are the same. @code{equal} uses one meaning
4452 of the word ``same'' and @code{eq} uses another: @code{equal} returns
4453 true if the two objects have a similar structure and contents, such as
4454 two copies of the same book. On the other hand, @code{eq}, returns
4455 true if both arguments are actually the same object.
4456 @findex equal
4457 @findex eq
4458
4459 @need 1250
4460 @item string<
4461 @itemx string-lessp
4462 @itemx string=
4463 @itemx string-equal
4464 The @code{string-lessp} function tests whether its first argument is
4465 smaller than the second argument. A shorter, alternative name for the
4466 same function (a @code{defalias}) is @code{string<}.
4467
4468 The arguments to @code{string-lessp} must be strings or symbols; the
4469 ordering is lexicographic, so case is significant. The print names of
4470 symbols are used instead of the symbols themselves.
4471
4472 @cindex @samp{empty string} defined
4473 An empty string, @samp{""}, a string with no characters in it, is
4474 smaller than any string of characters.
4475
4476 @code{string-equal} provides the corresponding test for equality. Its
4477 shorter, alternative name is @code{string=}. There are no string test
4478 functions that correspond to @var{>}, @code{>=}, or @code{<=}.
4479
4480 @item message
4481 Print a message in the echo area. The first argument is a string that
4482 can contain @samp{%s}, @samp{%d}, or @samp{%c} to print the value of
4483 arguments that follow the string. The argument used by @samp{%s} must
4484 be a string or a symbol; the argument used by @samp{%d} must be a
4485 number. The argument used by @samp{%c} must be an @sc{ascii} code
4486 number; it will be printed as the character with that @sc{ascii} code.
4487 (Various other %-sequences have not been mentioned.)
4488
4489 @item setq
4490 @itemx set
4491 The @code{setq} function sets the value of its first argument to the
4492 value of the second argument. The first argument is automatically
4493 quoted by @code{setq}. It does the same for succeeding pairs of
4494 arguments. Another function, @code{set}, takes only two arguments and
4495 evaluates both of them before setting the value returned by its first
4496 argument to the value returned by its second argument.
4497
4498 @item buffer-name
4499 Without an argument, return the name of the buffer, as a string.
4500
4501 @item buffer-file-name
4502 Without an argument, return the name of the file the buffer is
4503 visiting.
4504
4505 @item current-buffer
4506 Return the buffer in which Emacs is active; it may not be
4507 the buffer that is visible on the screen.
4508
4509 @item other-buffer
4510 Return the most recently selected buffer (other than the buffer passed
4511 to @code{other-buffer} as an argument and other than the current
4512 buffer).
4513
4514 @item switch-to-buffer
4515 Select a buffer for Emacs to be active in and display it in the current
4516 window so users can look at it. Usually bound to @kbd{C-x b}.
4517
4518 @item set-buffer
4519 Switch Emacs's attention to a buffer on which programs will run. Don't
4520 alter what the window is showing.
4521
4522 @item buffer-size
4523 Return the number of characters in the current buffer.
4524
4525 @item point
4526 Return the value of the current position of the cursor, as an
4527 integer counting the number of characters from the beginning of the
4528 buffer.
4529
4530 @item point-min
4531 Return the minimum permissible value of point in
4532 the current buffer. This is 1, unless narrowing is in effect.
4533
4534 @item point-max
4535 Return the value of the maximum permissible value of point in the
4536 current buffer. This is the end of the buffer, unless narrowing is in
4537 effect.
4538 @end table
4539
4540 @need 1500
4541 @node defun Exercises
4542 @section Exercises
4543
4544 @itemize @bullet
4545 @item
4546 Write a non-interactive function that doubles the value of its
4547 argument, a number. Make that function interactive.
4548
4549 @item
4550 Write a function that tests whether the current value of
4551 @code{fill-column} is greater than the argument passed to the function,
4552 and if so, prints an appropriate message.
4553 @end itemize
4554
4555 @node Buffer Walk Through
4556 @chapter A Few Buffer-Related Functions
4557
4558 In this chapter we study in detail several of the functions used in GNU
4559 Emacs. This is called a ``walk-through''. These functions are used as
4560 examples of Lisp code, but are not imaginary examples; with the
4561 exception of the first, simplified function definition, these functions
4562 show the actual code used in GNU Emacs. You can learn a great deal from
4563 these definitions. The functions described here are all related to
4564 buffers. Later, we will study other functions.
4565
4566 @menu
4567 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
4568 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
4569 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
4570 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
4571 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
4572 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
4573 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
4574 * Buffer Exercises::
4575 @end menu
4576
4577 @node Finding More
4578 @section Finding More Information
4579
4580 @findex describe-function, @r{introduced}
4581 @cindex Find function documentation
4582 In this walk-through, I will describe each new function as we come to
4583 it, sometimes in detail and sometimes briefly. If you are interested,
4584 you can get the full documentation of any Emacs Lisp function at any
4585 time by typing @kbd{C-h f} and then the name of the function (and then
4586 @key{RET}). Similarly, you can get the full documentation for a
4587 variable by typing @kbd{C-h v} and then the name of the variable (and
4588 then @key{RET}).
4589
4590 @cindex Find source of function
4591 @c In version 22, tells location both of C and of Emacs Lisp
4592 Also, @code{describe-function} will tell you the location of the
4593 function definition.
4594
4595 Put point into the name of the file that contains the function and
4596 press the @key{RET} key. In this case, @key{RET} means
4597 @code{push-button} rather than ``return'' or ``enter''. Emacs will take
4598 you directly to the function definition.
4599
4600 @ignore
4601 Not In version 22
4602
4603 If you move point over the file name and press
4604 the @key{RET} key, which in this case means @code{help-follow} rather
4605 than ``return'' or ``enter'', Emacs will take you directly to the function
4606 definition.
4607 @end ignore
4608
4609 More generally, if you want to see a function in its original source
4610 file, you can use the @code{find-tag} function to jump to it.
4611 @code{find-tag} works with a wide variety of languages, not just
4612 Lisp, and C, and it works with non-programming text as well. For
4613 example, @code{find-tag} will jump to the various nodes in the
4614 Texinfo source file of this document.
4615 The @code{find-tag} function depends on ``tags tables'' that record
4616 the locations of the functions, variables, and other items to which
4617 @code{find-tag} jumps.
4618
4619 To use the @code{find-tag} command, type @kbd{M-.} (i.e., press the
4620 period key while holding down the @key{META} key, or else type the
4621 @key{ESC} key and then type the period key), and then, at the prompt,
4622 type in the name of the function whose source code you want to see,
4623 such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}, and then type @key{RET}. Emacs will
4624 switch buffers and display the source code for the function on your
4625 screen. To switch back to your current buffer, type @kbd{C-x b
4626 @key{RET}}. (On some keyboards, the @key{META} key is labeled
4627 @key{ALT}.)
4628
4629 @c !!! 22.1.1 tags table location in this paragraph
4630 @cindex TAGS table, specifying
4631 @findex find-tag
4632 Depending on how the initial default values of your copy of Emacs are
4633 set, you may also need to specify the location of your ``tags table'',
4634 which is a file called @file{TAGS}. For example, if you are
4635 interested in Emacs sources, the tags table you will most likely want,
4636 if it has already been created for you, will be in a subdirectory of
4637 the @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/} directory; thus you would use the
4638 @code{M-x visit-tags-table} command and specify a pathname such as
4639 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/TAGS}. If the tags table
4640 has not already been created, you will have to create it yourself. It
4641 will be in a file such as @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}.
4642
4643 @need 1250
4644 To create a @file{TAGS} file in a specific directory, switch to that
4645 directory in Emacs using @kbd{M-x cd} command, or list the directory
4646 with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the compile command, with
4647 @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute:
4648
4649 @smallexample
4650 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
4651 @end smallexample
4652
4653 For more information, see @ref{etags, , Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File}.
4654
4655 After you become more familiar with Emacs Lisp, you will find that you will
4656 frequently use @code{find-tag} to navigate your way around source code;
4657 and you will create your own @file{TAGS} tables.
4658
4659 @cindex Library, as term for ``file''
4660 Incidentally, the files that contain Lisp code are conventionally
4661 called @dfn{libraries}. The metaphor is derived from that of a
4662 specialized library, such as a law library or an engineering library,
4663 rather than a general library. Each library, or file, contains
4664 functions that relate to a particular topic or activity, such as
4665 @file{abbrev.el} for handling abbreviations and other typing
4666 shortcuts, and @file{help.el} for help. (Sometimes several
4667 libraries provide code for a single activity, as the various
4668 @file{rmail@dots{}} files provide code for reading electronic mail.)
4669 In @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}, you will see sentences such as ``The
4670 @kbd{C-h p} command lets you search the standard Emacs Lisp libraries
4671 by topic keywords.''
4672
4673 @node simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4674 @section A Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition
4675 @findex simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4676
4677 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} command is a good function to start with
4678 since you are likely to be familiar with it and it is easy to
4679 understand. Used as an interactive command, @code{beginning-of-buffer}
4680 moves the cursor to the beginning of the buffer, leaving the mark at the
4681 previous position. It is generally bound to @kbd{M-<}.
4682
4683 In this section, we will discuss a shortened version of the function
4684 that shows how it is most frequently used. This shortened function
4685 works as written, but it does not contain the code for a complex option.
4686 In another section, we will describe the entire function.
4687 (@xref{beginning-of-buffer, , Complete Definition of
4688 @code{beginning-of-buffer}}.)
4689
4690 Before looking at the code, let's consider what the function
4691 definition has to contain: it must include an expression that makes
4692 the function interactive so it can be called by typing @kbd{M-x
4693 beginning-of-buffer} or by typing a keychord such as @kbd{M-<}; it
4694 must include code to leave a mark at the original position in the
4695 buffer; and it must include code to move the cursor to the beginning
4696 of the buffer.
4697
4698 @need 1250
4699 Here is the complete text of the shortened version of the function:
4700
4701 @smallexample
4702 @group
4703 (defun simplified-beginning-of-buffer ()
4704 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
4705 leave mark at previous position."
4706 (interactive)
4707 (push-mark)
4708 (goto-char (point-min)))
4709 @end group
4710 @end smallexample
4711
4712 Like all function definitions, this definition has five parts following
4713 the macro @code{defun}:
4714
4715 @enumerate
4716 @item
4717 The name: in this example, @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}.
4718
4719 @item
4720 A list of the arguments: in this example, an empty list, @code{()},
4721
4722 @item
4723 The documentation string.
4724
4725 @item
4726 The interactive expression.
4727
4728 @item
4729 The body.
4730 @end enumerate
4731
4732 @noindent
4733 In this function definition, the argument list is empty; this means that
4734 this function does not require any arguments. (When we look at the
4735 definition for the complete function, we will see that it may be passed
4736 an optional argument.)
4737
4738 The interactive expression tells Emacs that the function is intended to
4739 be used interactively. In this example, @code{interactive} does not have
4740 an argument because @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} does not
4741 require one.
4742
4743 @need 800
4744 The body of the function consists of the two lines:
4745
4746 @smallexample
4747 @group
4748 (push-mark)
4749 (goto-char (point-min))
4750 @end group
4751 @end smallexample
4752
4753 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark)}. When
4754 this expression is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter, it sets a mark at
4755 the current position of the cursor, wherever that may be. The position
4756 of this mark is saved in the mark ring.
4757
4758 The next line is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}. This expression
4759 jumps the cursor to the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the
4760 beginning of the buffer (or to the beginning of the accessible portion
4761 of the buffer if it is narrowed. @xref{Narrowing & Widening, ,
4762 Narrowing and Widening}.)
4763
4764 The @code{push-mark} command sets a mark at the place where the cursor
4765 was located before it was moved to the beginning of the buffer by the
4766 @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression. Consequently, you can, if
4767 you wish, go back to where you were originally by typing @kbd{C-x C-x}.
4768
4769 That is all there is to the function definition!
4770
4771 @findex describe-function
4772 When you are reading code such as this and come upon an unfamiliar
4773 function, such as @code{goto-char}, you can find out what it does by
4774 using the @code{describe-function} command. To use this command, type
4775 @kbd{C-h f} and then type in the name of the function and press
4776 @key{RET}. The @code{describe-function} command will print the
4777 function's documentation string in a @file{*Help*} window. For
4778 example, the documentation for @code{goto-char} is:
4779
4780 @smallexample
4781 @group
4782 Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.
4783 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max).
4784 @end group
4785 @end smallexample
4786
4787 @noindent
4788 The function's one argument is the desired position.
4789
4790 @noindent
4791 (The prompt for @code{describe-function} will offer you the symbol
4792 under or preceding the cursor, so you can save typing by positioning
4793 the cursor right over or after the function and then typing @kbd{C-h f
4794 @key{RET}}.)
4795
4796 The @code{end-of-buffer} function definition is written in the same way as
4797 the @code{beginning-of-buffer} definition except that the body of the
4798 function contains the expression @code{(goto-char (point-max))} in place
4799 of @code{(goto-char (point-min))}.
4800
4801 @node mark-whole-buffer
4802 @section The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4803 @findex mark-whole-buffer
4804
4805 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is no harder to understand than the
4806 @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function. In this case, however,
4807 we will look at the complete function, not a shortened version.
4808
4809 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is not as commonly used as the
4810 @code{beginning-of-buffer} function, but is useful nonetheless: it
4811 marks a whole buffer as a region by putting point at the beginning and
4812 a mark at the end of the buffer. It is generally bound to @kbd{C-x
4813 h}.
4814
4815 @menu
4816 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
4817 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
4818 @end menu
4819
4820 @ifnottex
4821 @node mark-whole-buffer overview
4822 @unnumberedsubsec An overview of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4823 @end ifnottex
4824
4825 @need 1250
4826 In GNU Emacs 22, the code for the complete function looks like this:
4827
4828 @smallexample
4829 @group
4830 (defun mark-whole-buffer ()
4831 "Put point at beginning and mark at end of buffer.
4832 You probably should not use this function in Lisp programs;
4833 it is usually a mistake for a Lisp function to use any subroutine
4834 that uses or sets the mark."
4835 (interactive)
4836 (push-mark (point))
4837 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4838 (goto-char (point-min)))
4839 @end group
4840 @end smallexample
4841
4842 @need 1250
4843 Like all other functions, the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function fits
4844 into the template for a function definition. The template looks like
4845 this:
4846
4847 @smallexample
4848 @group
4849 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4850 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4851 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
4852 @var{body}@dots{})
4853 @end group
4854 @end smallexample
4855
4856 Here is how the function works: the name of the function is
4857 @code{mark-whole-buffer}; it is followed by an empty argument list,
4858 @samp{()}, which means that the function does not require arguments.
4859 The documentation comes next.
4860
4861 The next line is an @code{(interactive)} expression that tells Emacs
4862 that the function will be used interactively. These details are similar
4863 to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function described in the
4864 previous section.
4865
4866 @need 1250
4867 @node Body of mark-whole-buffer
4868 @subsection Body of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4869
4870 The body of the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function consists of three
4871 lines of code:
4872
4873 @c GNU Emacs 22
4874 @smallexample
4875 @group
4876 (push-mark (point))
4877 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4878 (goto-char (point-min))
4879 @end group
4880 @end smallexample
4881
4882 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark (point))}.
4883
4884 This line does exactly the same job as the first line of the body of
4885 the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function, which is written
4886 @code{(push-mark)}. In both cases, the Lisp interpreter sets a mark
4887 at the current position of the cursor.
4888
4889 I don't know why the expression in @code{mark-whole-buffer} is written
4890 @code{(push-mark (point))} and the expression in
4891 @code{beginning-of-buffer} is written @code{(push-mark)}. Perhaps
4892 whoever wrote the code did not know that the arguments for
4893 @code{push-mark} are optional and that if @code{push-mark} is not
4894 passed an argument, the function automatically sets mark at the
4895 location of point by default. Or perhaps the expression was written
4896 so as to parallel the structure of the next line. In any case, the
4897 line causes Emacs to determine the position of point and set a mark
4898 there.
4899
4900 In earlier versions of GNU Emacs, the next line of
4901 @code{mark-whole-buffer} was @code{(push-mark (point-max))}. This
4902 expression sets a mark at the point in the buffer that has the highest
4903 number. This will be the end of the buffer (or, if the buffer is
4904 narrowed, the end of the accessible portion of the buffer.
4905 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more about
4906 narrowing.) After this mark has been set, the previous mark, the one
4907 set at point, is no longer set, but Emacs remembers its position, just
4908 as all other recent marks are always remembered. This means that you
4909 can, if you wish, go back to that position by typing @kbd{C-u
4910 C-@key{SPC}} twice.
4911
4912 @need 1250
4913 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{(point-max)} is slightly more complicated.
4914 The line reads
4915
4916 @smallexample
4917 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4918 @end smallexample
4919
4920 @noindent
4921 The expression works nearly the same as before. It sets a mark at the
4922 highest numbered place in the buffer that it can. However, in this
4923 version, @code{push-mark} has two additional arguments. The second
4924 argument to @code{push-mark} is @code{nil}. This tells the function
4925 it @emph{should} display a message that says ``Mark set'' when it pushes
4926 the mark. The third argument is @code{t}. This tells
4927 @code{push-mark} to activate the mark when Transient Mark mode is
4928 turned on. Transient Mark mode highlights the currently active
4929 region. It is often turned off.
4930
4931 Finally, the last line of the function is @code{(goto-char
4932 (point-min)))}. This is written exactly the same way as it is written
4933 in @code{beginning-of-buffer}. The expression moves the cursor to
4934 the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the beginning of the buffer
4935 (or to the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer). As a
4936 result of this, point is placed at the beginning of the buffer and mark
4937 is set at the end of the buffer. The whole buffer is, therefore, the
4938 region.
4939
4940 @c FIXME: the definition of append-to-buffer has been changed (in
4941 @c 2010-03-30).
4942 @node append-to-buffer
4943 @section The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
4944 @findex append-to-buffer
4945
4946 The @code{append-to-buffer} command is more complex than the
4947 @code{mark-whole-buffer} command. What it does is copy the region
4948 (that is, the part of the buffer between point and mark) from the
4949 current buffer to a specified buffer.
4950
4951 @menu
4952 * append-to-buffer overview::
4953 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
4954 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
4955 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
4956 @end menu
4957
4958 @ifnottex
4959 @node append-to-buffer overview
4960 @unnumberedsubsec An Overview of @code{append-to-buffer}
4961 @end ifnottex
4962
4963 @findex insert-buffer-substring
4964 The @code{append-to-buffer} command uses the
4965 @code{insert-buffer-substring} function to copy the region.
4966 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is described by its name: it takes a
4967 string of characters from part of a buffer, a ``substring'', and
4968 inserts them into another buffer.
4969
4970 Most of @code{append-to-buffer} is
4971 concerned with setting up the conditions for
4972 @code{insert-buffer-substring} to work: the code must specify both the
4973 buffer to which the text will go, the window it comes from and goes
4974 to, and the region that will be copied.
4975
4976 @need 1250
4977 Here is the complete text of the function:
4978
4979 @smallexample
4980 @group
4981 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
4982 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
4983 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
4984 @end group
4985
4986 @group
4987 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
4988 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
4989 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
4990 (interactive
4991 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer
4992 (current-buffer) t))
4993 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
4994 @end group
4995 @group
4996 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
4997 (save-excursion
4998 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
4999 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5000 point)
5001 (set-buffer append-to)
5002 (setq point (point))
5003 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5004 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5005 (dolist (window windows)
5006 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5007 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5008 @end group
5009 @end smallexample
5010
5011 The function can be understood by looking at it as a series of
5012 filled-in templates.
5013
5014 The outermost template is for the function definition. In this
5015 function, it looks like this (with several slots filled in):
5016
5017 @smallexample
5018 @group
5019 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5020 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5021 (interactive @dots{})
5022 @var{body}@dots{})
5023 @end group
5024 @end smallexample
5025
5026 The first line of the function includes its name and three arguments.
5027 The arguments are the @code{buffer} to which the text will be copied, and
5028 the @code{start} and @code{end} of the region in the current buffer that
5029 will be copied.
5030
5031 The next part of the function is the documentation, which is clear and
5032 complete. As is conventional, the three arguments are written in
5033 upper case so you will notice them easily. Even better, they are
5034 described in the same order as in the argument list.
5035
5036 Note that the documentation distinguishes between a buffer and its
5037 name. (The function can handle either.)
5038
5039 @node append interactive
5040 @subsection The @code{append-to-buffer} Interactive Expression
5041
5042 Since the @code{append-to-buffer} function will be used interactively,
5043 the function must have an @code{interactive} expression. (For a
5044 review of @code{interactive}, see @ref{Interactive, , Making a
5045 Function Interactive}.) The expression reads as follows:
5046
5047 @smallexample
5048 @group
5049 (interactive
5050 (list (read-buffer
5051 "Append to buffer: "
5052 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5053 (region-beginning)
5054 (region-end)))
5055 @end group
5056 @end smallexample
5057
5058 @noindent
5059 This expression is not one with letters standing for parts, as
5060 described earlier. Instead, it starts a list with these parts:
5061
5062 The first part of the list is an expression to read the name of a
5063 buffer and return it as a string. That is @code{read-buffer}. The
5064 function requires a prompt as its first argument, @samp{"Append to
5065 buffer: "}. Its second argument tells the command what value to
5066 provide if you don't specify anything.
5067
5068 In this case that second argument is an expression containing the
5069 function @code{other-buffer}, an exception, and a @samp{t}, standing
5070 for true.
5071
5072 The first argument to @code{other-buffer}, the exception, is yet
5073 another function, @code{current-buffer}. That is not going to be
5074 returned. The second argument is the symbol for true, @code{t}. that
5075 tells @code{other-buffer} that it may show visible buffers (except in
5076 this case, it will not show the current buffer, which makes sense).
5077
5078 @need 1250
5079 The expression looks like this:
5080
5081 @smallexample
5082 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t)
5083 @end smallexample
5084
5085 The second and third arguments to the @code{list} expression are
5086 @code{(region-beginning)} and @code{(region-end)}. These two
5087 functions specify the beginning and end of the text to be appended.
5088
5089 @need 1250
5090 Originally, the command used the letters @samp{B} and @samp{r}.
5091 The whole @code{interactive} expression looked like this:
5092
5093 @smallexample
5094 (interactive "BAppend to buffer:@: \nr")
5095 @end smallexample
5096
5097 @noindent
5098 But when that was done, the default value of the buffer switched to
5099 was invisible. That was not wanted.
5100
5101 (The prompt was separated from the second argument with a newline,
5102 @samp{\n}. It was followed by an @samp{r} that told Emacs to bind the
5103 two arguments that follow the symbol @code{buffer} in the function's
5104 argument list (that is, @code{start} and @code{end}) to the values of
5105 point and mark. That argument worked fine.)
5106
5107 @node append-to-buffer body
5108 @subsection The Body of @code{append-to-buffer}
5109
5110 @ignore
5111 in GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
5112
5113 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5114 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5115 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5116
5117 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5118 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5119 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5120 (interactive
5121 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5122 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5123 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5124 (save-excursion
5125 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5126 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5127 point)
5128 (set-buffer append-to)
5129 (setq point (point))
5130 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5131 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5132 (dolist (window windows)
5133 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5134 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5135 @end ignore
5136
5137 The body of the @code{append-to-buffer} function begins with @code{let}.
5138
5139 As we have seen before (@pxref{let, , @code{let}}), the purpose of a
5140 @code{let} expression is to create and give initial values to one or
5141 more variables that will only be used within the body of the
5142 @code{let}. This means that such a variable will not be confused with
5143 any variable of the same name outside the @code{let} expression.
5144
5145 We can see how the @code{let} expression fits into the function as a
5146 whole by showing a template for @code{append-to-buffer} with the
5147 @code{let} expression in outline:
5148
5149 @smallexample
5150 @group
5151 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5152 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5153 (interactive @dots{})
5154 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value}))
5155 @var{body}@dots{})
5156 @end group
5157 @end smallexample
5158
5159 The @code{let} expression has three elements:
5160
5161 @enumerate
5162 @item
5163 The symbol @code{let};
5164
5165 @item
5166 A varlist containing, in this case, a single two-element list,
5167 @code{(@var{variable} @var{value})};
5168
5169 @item
5170 The body of the @code{let} expression.
5171 @end enumerate
5172
5173 @need 800
5174 In the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the varlist looks like this:
5175
5176 @smallexample
5177 (oldbuf (current-buffer))
5178 @end smallexample
5179
5180 @noindent
5181 In this part of the @code{let} expression, the one variable,
5182 @code{oldbuf}, is bound to the value returned by the
5183 @code{(current-buffer)} expression. The variable, @code{oldbuf}, is
5184 used to keep track of the buffer in which you are working and from
5185 which you will copy.
5186
5187 The element or elements of a varlist are surrounded by a set of
5188 parentheses so the Lisp interpreter can distinguish the varlist from
5189 the body of the @code{let}. As a consequence, the two-element list
5190 within the varlist is surrounded by a circumscribing set of parentheses.
5191 The line looks like this:
5192
5193 @smallexample
5194 @group
5195 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5196 @dots{} )
5197 @end group
5198 @end smallexample
5199
5200 @noindent
5201 The two parentheses before @code{oldbuf} might surprise you if you did
5202 not realize that the first parenthesis before @code{oldbuf} marks the
5203 boundary of the varlist and the second parenthesis marks the beginning
5204 of the two-element list, @code{(oldbuf (current-buffer))}.
5205
5206 @node append save-excursion
5207 @subsection @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}
5208
5209 The body of the @code{let} expression in @code{append-to-buffer}
5210 consists of a @code{save-excursion} expression.
5211
5212 The @code{save-excursion} function saves the location of point, and restores it
5213 to that position after the expressions in the
5214 body of the @code{save-excursion} complete execution. In addition,
5215 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the original buffer, and
5216 restores it. This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in
5217 @code{append-to-buffer}.
5218
5219 @need 1500
5220 @cindex Indentation for formatting
5221 @cindex Formatting convention
5222 Incidentally, it is worth noting here that a Lisp function is normally
5223 formatted so that everything that is enclosed in a multi-line spread is
5224 indented more to the right than the first symbol. In this function
5225 definition, the @code{let} is indented more than the @code{defun}, and
5226 the @code{save-excursion} is indented more than the @code{let}, like
5227 this:
5228
5229 @smallexample
5230 @group
5231 (defun @dots{}
5232 @dots{}
5233 @dots{}
5234 (let@dots{}
5235 (save-excursion
5236 @dots{}
5237 @end group
5238 @end smallexample
5239
5240 @need 1500
5241 @noindent
5242 This formatting convention makes it easy to see that the lines in
5243 the body of the @code{save-excursion} are enclosed by the parentheses
5244 associated with @code{save-excursion}, just as the
5245 @code{save-excursion} itself is enclosed by the parentheses associated
5246 with the @code{let}:
5247
5248 @smallexample
5249 @group
5250 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5251 (save-excursion
5252 @dots{}
5253 (set-buffer @dots{})
5254 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5255 @dots{}))
5256 @end group
5257 @end smallexample
5258
5259 @need 1200
5260 The use of the @code{save-excursion} function can be viewed as a process
5261 of filling in the slots of a template:
5262
5263 @smallexample
5264 @group
5265 (save-excursion
5266 @var{first-expression-in-body}
5267 @var{second-expression-in-body}
5268 @dots{}
5269 @var{last-expression-in-body})
5270 @end group
5271 @end smallexample
5272
5273 @need 1200
5274 @noindent
5275 In this function, the body of the @code{save-excursion} contains only
5276 one expression, the @code{let*} expression. You know about a
5277 @code{let} function. The @code{let*} function is different. It has a
5278 @samp{*} in its name. It enables Emacs to set each variable in its
5279 varlist in sequence, one after another.
5280
5281 Its critical feature is that variables later in the varlist can make
5282 use of the values to which Emacs set variables earlier in the varlist.
5283 @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}.
5284
5285 We will skip functions like @code{let*} and focus on two: the
5286 @code{set-buffer} function and the @code{insert-buffer-substring}
5287 function.
5288
5289 @need 1250
5290 In the old days, the @code{set-buffer} expression was simply
5291
5292 @smallexample
5293 (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer))
5294 @end smallexample
5295
5296 @need 1250
5297 @noindent
5298 but now it is
5299
5300 @smallexample
5301 (set-buffer append-to)
5302 @end smallexample
5303
5304 @noindent
5305 @code{append-to} is bound to @code{(get-buffer-create buffer)} earlier
5306 on in the @code{let*} expression. That extra binding would not be
5307 necessary except for that @code{append-to} is used later in the
5308 varlist as an argument to @code{get-buffer-window-list}.
5309
5310 @ignore
5311 in GNU Emacs 22
5312
5313 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5314 (save-excursion
5315 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5316 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5317 point)
5318 (set-buffer append-to)
5319 (setq point (point))
5320 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5321 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5322 (dolist (window windows)
5323 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5324 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5325 @end ignore
5326
5327 The @code{append-to-buffer} function definition inserts text from the
5328 buffer in which you are currently to a named buffer. It happens that
5329 @code{insert-buffer-substring} copies text from another buffer to the
5330 current buffer, just the reverse---that is why the
5331 @code{append-to-buffer} definition starts out with a @code{let} that
5332 binds the local symbol @code{oldbuf} to the value returned by
5333 @code{current-buffer}.
5334
5335 @need 1250
5336 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression looks like this:
5337
5338 @smallexample
5339 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5340 @end smallexample
5341
5342 @noindent
5343 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies a string
5344 @emph{from} the buffer specified as its first argument and inserts the
5345 string into the present buffer. In this case, the argument to
5346 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is the value of the variable created
5347 and bound by the @code{let}, namely the value of @code{oldbuf}, which
5348 was the current buffer when you gave the @code{append-to-buffer}
5349 command.
5350
5351 After @code{insert-buffer-substring} has done its work,
5352 @code{save-excursion} will restore the action to the original buffer
5353 and @code{append-to-buffer} will have done its job.
5354
5355 @need 800
5356 Written in skeletal form, the workings of the body look like this:
5357
5358 @smallexample
5359 @group
5360 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5361 (save-excursion ; @r{Keep track of buffer.}
5362 @var{change-buffer}
5363 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})
5364
5365 @var{change-back-to-original-buffer-when-finished}
5366 @var{let-the-local-meaning-of-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-disappear-when-finished}
5367 @end group
5368 @end smallexample
5369
5370 In summary, @code{append-to-buffer} works as follows: it saves the
5371 value of the current buffer in the variable called @code{oldbuf}. It
5372 gets the new buffer (creating one if need be) and switches Emacs's
5373 attention to it. Using the value of @code{oldbuf}, it inserts the
5374 region of text from the old buffer into the new buffer; and then using
5375 @code{save-excursion}, it brings you back to your original buffer.
5376
5377 In looking at @code{append-to-buffer}, you have explored a fairly
5378 complex function. It shows how to use @code{let} and
5379 @code{save-excursion}, and how to change to and come back from another
5380 buffer. Many function definitions use @code{let},
5381 @code{save-excursion}, and @code{set-buffer} this way.
5382
5383 @node Buffer Related Review
5384 @section Review
5385
5386 Here is a brief summary of the various functions discussed in this chapter.
5387
5388 @table @code
5389 @item describe-function
5390 @itemx describe-variable
5391 Print the documentation for a function or variable.
5392 Conventionally bound to @kbd{C-h f} and @kbd{C-h v}.
5393
5394 @item find-tag
5395 Find the file containing the source for a function or variable and
5396 switch buffers to it, positioning point at the beginning of the item.
5397 Conventionally bound to @kbd{M-.} (that's a period following the
5398 @key{META} key).
5399
5400 @item save-excursion
5401 Save the location of point and restore its value after the
5402 arguments to @code{save-excursion} have been evaluated. Also, remember
5403 the current buffer and return to it.
5404
5405 @item push-mark
5406 Set mark at a location and record the value of the previous mark on the
5407 mark ring. The mark is a location in the buffer that will keep its
5408 relative position even if text is added to or removed from the buffer.
5409
5410 @item goto-char
5411 Set point to the location specified by the value of the argument, which
5412 can be a number, a marker, or an expression that returns the number of
5413 a position, such as @code{(point-min)}.
5414
5415 @item insert-buffer-substring
5416 Copy a region of text from a buffer that is passed to the function as
5417 an argument and insert the region into the current buffer.
5418
5419 @item mark-whole-buffer
5420 Mark the whole buffer as a region. Normally bound to @kbd{C-x h}.
5421
5422 @item set-buffer
5423 Switch the attention of Emacs to another buffer, but do not change the
5424 window being displayed. Used when the program rather than a human is
5425 to work on a different buffer.
5426
5427 @item get-buffer-create
5428 @itemx get-buffer
5429 Find a named buffer or create one if a buffer of that name does not
5430 exist. The @code{get-buffer} function returns @code{nil} if the named
5431 buffer does not exist.
5432 @end table
5433
5434 @need 1500
5435 @node Buffer Exercises
5436 @section Exercises
5437
5438 @itemize @bullet
5439 @item
5440 Write your own @code{simplified-end-of-buffer} function definition;
5441 then test it to see whether it works.
5442
5443 @item
5444 Use @code{if} and @code{get-buffer} to write a function that prints a
5445 message telling you whether a buffer exists.
5446
5447 @item
5448 Using @code{find-tag}, find the source for the @code{copy-to-buffer}
5449 function.
5450 @end itemize
5451
5452 @node More Complex
5453 @chapter A Few More Complex Functions
5454
5455 In this chapter, we build on what we have learned in previous chapters
5456 by looking at more complex functions. The @code{copy-to-buffer}
5457 function illustrates use of two @code{save-excursion} expressions in
5458 one definition, while the @code{insert-buffer} function illustrates
5459 use of an asterisk in an @code{interactive} expression, use of
5460 @code{or}, and the important distinction between a name and the object
5461 to which the name refers.
5462
5463 @menu
5464 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
5465 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
5466 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
5467 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
5468 * Second Buffer Related Review::
5469 * optional Exercise::
5470 @end menu
5471
5472 @node copy-to-buffer
5473 @section The Definition of @code{copy-to-buffer}
5474 @findex copy-to-buffer
5475
5476 After understanding how @code{append-to-buffer} works, it is easy to
5477 understand @code{copy-to-buffer}. This function copies text into a
5478 buffer, but instead of adding to the second buffer, it replaces all the
5479 previous text in the second buffer.
5480
5481 @need 800
5482 The body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this,
5483
5484 @smallexample
5485 @group
5486 @dots{}
5487 (interactive "BCopy to buffer: \nr")
5488 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5489 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)
5490 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5491 (erase-buffer)
5492 (save-excursion
5493 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)))))
5494 @end group
5495 @end smallexample
5496
5497 The @code{copy-to-buffer} function has a simpler @code{interactive}
5498 expression than @code{append-to-buffer}.
5499
5500 @need 800
5501 The definition then says
5502
5503 @smallexample
5504 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer) @dots{}
5505 @end smallexample
5506
5507 First, look at the earliest inner expression; that is evaluated first.
5508 That expression starts with @code{get-buffer-create buffer}. The
5509 function tells the computer to use the buffer with the name specified
5510 as the one to which you are copying, or if such a buffer does not
5511 exist, to create it. Then, the @code{with-current-buffer} function
5512 evaluates its body with that buffer temporarily current.
5513
5514 (This demonstrates another way to shift the computer's attention but
5515 not the user's. The @code{append-to-buffer} function showed how to do
5516 the same with @code{save-excursion} and @code{set-buffer}.
5517 @code{with-current-buffer} is a newer, and arguably easier,
5518 mechanism.)
5519
5520 The @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} function sends you an error
5521 message saying the buffer is read-only if you cannot modify it.
5522
5523 The next line has the @code{erase-buffer} function as its sole
5524 contents. That function erases the buffer.
5525
5526 Finally, the last two lines contain the @code{save-excursion}
5527 expression with @code{insert-buffer-substring} as its body.
5528 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression copies the text from
5529 the buffer you are in (and you have not seen the computer shift its
5530 attention, so you don't know that that buffer is now called
5531 @code{oldbuf}).
5532
5533 Incidentally, this is what is meant by ``replacement''. To replace text,
5534 Emacs erases the previous text and then inserts new text.
5535
5536 @need 1250
5537 In outline, the body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this:
5538
5539 @smallexample
5540 @group
5541 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5542 (@var{with-the-buffer-you-are-copying-to}
5543 (@var{but-do-not-erase-or-copy-to-a-read-only-buffer})
5544 (erase-buffer)
5545 (save-excursion
5546 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})))
5547 @end group
5548 @end smallexample
5549
5550 @node insert-buffer
5551 @section The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
5552 @findex insert-buffer
5553
5554 @code{insert-buffer} is yet another buffer-related function. This
5555 command copies another buffer @emph{into} the current buffer. It is the
5556 reverse of @code{append-to-buffer} or @code{copy-to-buffer}, since they
5557 copy a region of text @emph{from} the current buffer to another buffer.
5558
5559 Here is a discussion based on the original code. The code was
5560 simplified in 2003 and is harder to understand.
5561
5562 (@xref{New insert-buffer, , New Body for @code{insert-buffer}}, to see
5563 a discussion of the new body.)
5564
5565 In addition, this code illustrates the use of @code{interactive} with a
5566 buffer that might be @dfn{read-only} and the important distinction
5567 between the name of an object and the object actually referred to.
5568
5569 @menu
5570 * insert-buffer code::
5571 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
5572 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
5573 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
5574 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
5575 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
5576 * New insert-buffer::
5577 @end menu
5578
5579 @ifnottex
5580 @node insert-buffer code
5581 @unnumberedsubsec The Code for @code{insert-buffer}
5582 @end ifnottex
5583
5584 @need 800
5585 Here is the earlier code:
5586
5587 @smallexample
5588 @group
5589 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5590 "Insert after point the contents of BUFFER.
5591 Puts mark after the inserted text.
5592 BUFFER may be a buffer or a buffer name."
5593 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5594 @end group
5595 @group
5596 (or (bufferp buffer)
5597 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5598 (let (start end newmark)
5599 (save-excursion
5600 (save-excursion
5601 (set-buffer buffer)
5602 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5603 @end group
5604 @group
5605 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5606 (setq newmark (point)))
5607 (push-mark newmark)))
5608 @end group
5609 @end smallexample
5610
5611 @need 1200
5612 As with other function definitions, you can use a template to see an
5613 outline of the function:
5614
5615 @smallexample
5616 @group
5617 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5618 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5619 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5620 @var{body}@dots{})
5621 @end group
5622 @end smallexample
5623
5624 @node insert-buffer interactive
5625 @subsection The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5626 @findex interactive, @r{example use of}
5627
5628 In @code{insert-buffer}, the argument to the @code{interactive}
5629 declaration has two parts, an asterisk, @samp{*}, and @samp{bInsert
5630 buffer:@: }.
5631
5632 @menu
5633 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
5634 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
5635 @end menu
5636
5637 @node Read-only buffer
5638 @unnumberedsubsubsec A Read-only Buffer
5639 @cindex Read-only buffer
5640 @cindex Asterisk for read-only buffer
5641 @findex * @r{for read-only buffer}
5642
5643 The asterisk is for the situation when the current buffer is a
5644 read-only buffer---a buffer that cannot be modified. If
5645 @code{insert-buffer} is called when the current buffer is read-only, a
5646 message to this effect is printed in the echo area and the terminal
5647 may beep or blink at you; you will not be permitted to insert anything
5648 into current buffer. The asterisk does not need to be followed by a
5649 newline to separate it from the next argument.
5650
5651 @node b for interactive
5652 @unnumberedsubsubsec @samp{b} in an Interactive Expression
5653
5654 The next argument in the interactive expression starts with a lower
5655 case @samp{b}. (This is different from the code for
5656 @code{append-to-buffer}, which uses an upper-case @samp{B}.
5657 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
5658 The lower-case @samp{b} tells the Lisp interpreter that the argument
5659 for @code{insert-buffer} should be an existing buffer or else its
5660 name. (The upper-case @samp{B} option provides for the possibility
5661 that the buffer does not exist.) Emacs will prompt you for the name
5662 of the buffer, offering you a default buffer, with name completion
5663 enabled. If the buffer does not exist, you receive a message that
5664 says ``No match''; your terminal may beep at you as well.
5665
5666 The new and simplified code generates a list for @code{interactive}.
5667 It uses the @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} and @code{read-buffer}
5668 functions with which we are already familiar and the @code{progn}
5669 special form with which we are not. (It will be described later.)
5670
5671 @node insert-buffer body
5672 @subsection The Body of the @code{insert-buffer} Function
5673
5674 The body of the @code{insert-buffer} function has two major parts: an
5675 @code{or} expression and a @code{let} expression. The purpose of the
5676 @code{or} expression is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is
5677 bound to a buffer and not just the name of a buffer. The body of the
5678 @code{let} expression contains the code which copies the other buffer
5679 into the current buffer.
5680
5681 @need 1250
5682 In outline, the two expressions fit into the @code{insert-buffer}
5683 function like this:
5684
5685 @smallexample
5686 @group
5687 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5688 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5689 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5690 (or @dots{}
5691 @dots{}
5692 @end group
5693 @group
5694 (let (@var{varlist})
5695 @var{body-of-}@code{let}@dots{} )
5696 @end group
5697 @end smallexample
5698
5699 To understand how the @code{or} expression ensures that the argument
5700 @code{buffer} is bound to a buffer and not to the name of a buffer, it
5701 is first necessary to understand the @code{or} function.
5702
5703 Before doing this, let me rewrite this part of the function using
5704 @code{if} so that you can see what is done in a manner that will be familiar.
5705
5706 @node if & or
5707 @subsection @code{insert-buffer} With an @code{if} Instead of an @code{or}
5708
5709 The job to be done is to make sure the value of @code{buffer} is a
5710 buffer itself and not the name of a buffer. If the value is the name,
5711 then the buffer itself must be got.
5712
5713 You can imagine yourself at a conference where an usher is wandering
5714 around holding a list with your name on it and looking for you: the
5715 usher is ``bound'' to your name, not to you; but when the usher finds
5716 you and takes your arm, the usher becomes ``bound'' to you.
5717
5718 @need 800
5719 In Lisp, you might describe this situation like this:
5720
5721 @smallexample
5722 @group
5723 (if (not (holding-on-to-guest))
5724 (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5725 @end group
5726 @end smallexample
5727
5728 We want to do the same thing with a buffer---if we do not have the
5729 buffer itself, we want to get it.
5730
5731 @need 1200
5732 Using a predicate called @code{bufferp} that tells us whether we have a
5733 buffer (rather than its name), we can write the code like this:
5734
5735 @smallexample
5736 @group
5737 (if (not (bufferp buffer)) ; @r{if-part}
5738 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))) ; @r{then-part}
5739 @end group
5740 @end smallexample
5741
5742 @noindent
5743 Here, the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression is
5744 @w{@code{(not (bufferp buffer))}}; and the then-part is the expression
5745 @w{@code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}}.
5746
5747 In the test, the function @code{bufferp} returns true if its argument is
5748 a buffer---but false if its argument is the name of the buffer. (The
5749 last character of the function name @code{bufferp} is the character
5750 @samp{p}; as we saw earlier, such use of @samp{p} is a convention that
5751 indicates that the function is a predicate, which is a term that means
5752 that the function will determine whether some property is true or false.
5753 @xref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong Type Object as an
5754 Argument}.)
5755
5756 @need 1200
5757 The function @code{not} precedes the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)},
5758 so the true-or-false-test looks like this:
5759
5760 @smallexample
5761 (not (bufferp buffer))
5762 @end smallexample
5763
5764 @noindent
5765 @code{not} is a function that returns true if its argument is false
5766 and false if its argument is true. So if @code{(bufferp buffer)}
5767 returns true, the @code{not} expression returns false and vice versa:
5768 what is ``not true'' is false and what is ``not false'' is true.
5769
5770 Using this test, the @code{if} expression works as follows: when the
5771 value of the variable @code{buffer} is actually a buffer rather than
5772 its name, the true-or-false-test returns false and the @code{if}
5773 expression does not evaluate the then-part. This is fine, since we do
5774 not need to do anything to the variable @code{buffer} if it really is
5775 a buffer.
5776
5777 On the other hand, when the value of @code{buffer} is not a buffer
5778 itself, but the name of a buffer, the true-or-false-test returns true
5779 and the then-part of the expression is evaluated. In this case, the
5780 then-part is @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}. This
5781 expression uses the @code{get-buffer} function to return an actual
5782 buffer itself, given its name. The @code{setq} then sets the variable
5783 @code{buffer} to the value of the buffer itself, replacing its previous
5784 value (which was the name of the buffer).
5785
5786 @node Insert or
5787 @subsection The @code{or} in the Body
5788
5789 The purpose of the @code{or} expression in the @code{insert-buffer}
5790 function is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is bound to a
5791 buffer and not just to the name of a buffer. The previous section shows
5792 how the job could have been done using an @code{if} expression.
5793 However, the @code{insert-buffer} function actually uses @code{or}.
5794 To understand this, it is necessary to understand how @code{or} works.
5795
5796 @findex or
5797 An @code{or} function can have any number of arguments. It evaluates
5798 each argument in turn and returns the value of the first of its
5799 arguments that is not @code{nil}. Also, and this is a crucial feature
5800 of @code{or}, it does not evaluate any subsequent arguments after
5801 returning the first non-@code{nil} value.
5802
5803 @need 800
5804 The @code{or} expression looks like this:
5805
5806 @smallexample
5807 @group
5808 (or (bufferp buffer)
5809 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5810 @end group
5811 @end smallexample
5812
5813 @noindent
5814 The first argument to @code{or} is the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)}.
5815 This expression returns true (a non-@code{nil} value) if the buffer is
5816 actually a buffer, and not just the name of a buffer. In the @code{or}
5817 expression, if this is the case, the @code{or} expression returns this
5818 true value and does not evaluate the next expression---and this is fine
5819 with us, since we do not want to do anything to the value of
5820 @code{buffer} if it really is a buffer.
5821
5822 On the other hand, if the value of @code{(bufferp buffer)} is @code{nil},
5823 which it will be if the value of @code{buffer} is the name of a buffer,
5824 the Lisp interpreter evaluates the next element of the @code{or}
5825 expression. This is the expression @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer
5826 buffer))}. This expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, which
5827 is the value to which it sets the variable @code{buffer}---and this
5828 value is a buffer itself, not the name of a buffer.
5829
5830 The result of all this is that the symbol @code{buffer} is always
5831 bound to a buffer itself rather than to the name of a buffer. All
5832 this is necessary because the @code{set-buffer} function in a
5833 following line only works with a buffer itself, not with the name to a
5834 buffer.
5835
5836 @need 1250
5837 Incidentally, using @code{or}, the situation with the usher would be
5838 written like this:
5839
5840 @smallexample
5841 (or (holding-on-to-guest) (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5842 @end smallexample
5843
5844 @node Insert let
5845 @subsection The @code{let} Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5846
5847 After ensuring that the variable @code{buffer} refers to a buffer itself
5848 and not just to the name of a buffer, the @code{insert-buffer function}
5849 continues with a @code{let} expression. This specifies three local
5850 variables, @code{start}, @code{end}, and @code{newmark} and binds them
5851 to the initial value @code{nil}. These variables are used inside the
5852 remainder of the @code{let} and temporarily hide any other occurrence of
5853 variables of the same name in Emacs until the end of the @code{let}.
5854
5855 @need 1200
5856 The body of the @code{let} contains two @code{save-excursion}
5857 expressions. First, we will look at the inner @code{save-excursion}
5858 expression in detail. The expression looks like this:
5859
5860 @smallexample
5861 @group
5862 (save-excursion
5863 (set-buffer buffer)
5864 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5865 @end group
5866 @end smallexample
5867
5868 @noindent
5869 The expression @code{(set-buffer buffer)} changes Emacs's attention
5870 from the current buffer to the one from which the text will copied.
5871 In that buffer, the variables @code{start} and @code{end} are set to
5872 the beginning and end of the buffer, using the commands
5873 @code{point-min} and @code{point-max}. Note that we have here an
5874 illustration of how @code{setq} is able to set two variables in the
5875 same expression. The first argument of @code{setq} is set to the
5876 value of its second, and its third argument is set to the value of its
5877 fourth.
5878
5879 After the body of the inner @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, the
5880 @code{save-excursion} restores the original buffer, but @code{start} and
5881 @code{end} remain set to the values of the beginning and end of the
5882 buffer from which the text will be copied.
5883
5884 @need 1250
5885 The outer @code{save-excursion} expression looks like this:
5886
5887 @smallexample
5888 @group
5889 (save-excursion
5890 (@var{inner-}@code{save-excursion}@var{-expression}
5891 (@var{go-to-new-buffer-and-set-}@code{start}@var{-and-}@code{end})
5892 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5893 (setq newmark (point)))
5894 @end group
5895 @end smallexample
5896
5897 @noindent
5898 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies the text
5899 @emph{into} the current buffer @emph{from} the region indicated by
5900 @code{start} and @code{end} in @code{buffer}. Since the whole of the
5901 second buffer lies between @code{start} and @code{end}, the whole of
5902 the second buffer is copied into the buffer you are editing. Next,
5903 the value of point, which will be at the end of the inserted text, is
5904 recorded in the variable @code{newmark}.
5905
5906 After the body of the outer @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, point
5907 is relocated to its original place.
5908
5909 However, it is convenient to locate a mark at the end of the newly
5910 inserted text and locate point at its beginning. The @code{newmark}
5911 variable records the end of the inserted text. In the last line of
5912 the @code{let} expression, the @code{(push-mark newmark)} expression
5913 function sets a mark to this location. (The previous location of the
5914 mark is still accessible; it is recorded on the mark ring and you can
5915 go back to it with @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}}.) Meanwhile, point is
5916 located at the beginning of the inserted text, which is where it was
5917 before you called the insert function, the position of which was saved
5918 by the first @code{save-excursion}.
5919
5920 @need 1250
5921 The whole @code{let} expression looks like this:
5922
5923 @smallexample
5924 @group
5925 (let (start end newmark)
5926 (save-excursion
5927 (save-excursion
5928 (set-buffer buffer)
5929 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5930 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5931 (setq newmark (point)))
5932 (push-mark newmark))
5933 @end group
5934 @end smallexample
5935
5936 Like the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the @code{insert-buffer}
5937 function uses @code{let}, @code{save-excursion}, and
5938 @code{set-buffer}. In addition, the function illustrates one way to
5939 use @code{or}. All these functions are building blocks that we will
5940 find and use again and again.
5941
5942 @node New insert-buffer
5943 @subsection New Body for @code{insert-buffer}
5944 @findex insert-buffer, new version body
5945 @findex new version body for insert-buffer
5946
5947 The body in the GNU Emacs 22 version is more confusing than the original.
5948
5949 @need 1250
5950 It consists of two expressions,
5951
5952 @smallexample
5953 @group
5954 (push-mark
5955 (save-excursion
5956 (insert-buffer-substring (get-buffer buffer))
5957 (point)))
5958
5959 nil
5960 @end group
5961 @end smallexample
5962
5963 @noindent
5964 except, and this is what confuses novices, very important work is done
5965 inside the @code{push-mark} expression.
5966
5967 The @code{get-buffer} function returns a buffer with the name
5968 provided. You will note that the function is @emph{not} called
5969 @code{get-buffer-create}; it does not create a buffer if one does not
5970 already exist. The buffer returned by @code{get-buffer}, an existing
5971 buffer, is passed to @code{insert-buffer-substring}, which inserts the
5972 whole of the buffer (since you did not specify anything else).
5973
5974 The location into which the buffer is inserted is recorded by
5975 @code{push-mark}. Then the function returns @code{nil}, the value of
5976 its last command. Put another way, the @code{insert-buffer} function
5977 exists only to produce a side effect, inserting another buffer, not to
5978 return any value.
5979
5980 @node beginning-of-buffer
5981 @section Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
5982 @findex beginning-of-buffer
5983
5984 The basic structure of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function has
5985 already been discussed. (@xref{simplified-beginning-of-buffer, , A
5986 Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition}.)
5987 This section describes the complex part of the definition.
5988
5989 As previously described, when invoked without an argument,
5990 @code{beginning-of-buffer} moves the cursor to the beginning of the
5991 buffer (in truth, the beginning of the accessible portion of the
5992 buffer), leaving the mark at the previous position. However, when the
5993 command is invoked with a number between one and ten, the function
5994 considers that number to be a fraction of the length of the buffer,
5995 measured in tenths, and Emacs moves the cursor that fraction of the
5996 way from the beginning of the buffer. Thus, you can either call this
5997 function with the key command @kbd{M-<}, which will move the cursor to
5998 the beginning of the buffer, or with a key command such as @kbd{C-u 7
5999 M-<} which will move the cursor to a point 70% of the way through the
6000 buffer. If a number bigger than ten is used for the argument, it
6001 moves to the end of the buffer.
6002
6003 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} function can be called with or without an
6004 argument. The use of the argument is optional.
6005
6006 @menu
6007 * Optional Arguments::
6008 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
6009 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
6010 @end menu
6011
6012 @node Optional Arguments
6013 @subsection Optional Arguments
6014
6015 Unless told otherwise, Lisp expects that a function with an argument in
6016 its function definition will be called with a value for that argument.
6017 If that does not happen, you get an error and a message that says
6018 @samp{Wrong number of arguments}.
6019
6020 @cindex Optional arguments
6021 @cindex Keyword
6022 @findex optional
6023 However, optional arguments are a feature of Lisp: a particular
6024 @dfn{keyword} is used to tell the Lisp interpreter that an argument is
6025 optional. The keyword is @code{&optional}. (The @samp{&} in front of
6026 @samp{optional} is part of the keyword.) In a function definition, if
6027 an argument follows the keyword @code{&optional}, no value need be
6028 passed to that argument when the function is called.
6029
6030 @need 1200
6031 The first line of the function definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6032 therefore looks like this:
6033
6034 @smallexample
6035 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6036 @end smallexample
6037
6038 @need 1250
6039 In outline, the whole function looks like this:
6040
6041 @smallexample
6042 @group
6043 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6044 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
6045 (interactive "P")
6046 (or (@var{is-the-argument-a-cons-cell} arg)
6047 (and @var{are-both-transient-mark-mode-and-mark-active-true})
6048 (push-mark))
6049 (let (@var{determine-size-and-set-it})
6050 (goto-char
6051 (@var{if-there-is-an-argument}
6052 @var{figure-out-where-to-go}
6053 @var{else-go-to}
6054 (point-min))))
6055 @var{do-nicety}
6056 @end group
6057 @end smallexample
6058
6059 The function is similar to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}
6060 function except that the @code{interactive} expression has @code{"P"}
6061 as an argument and the @code{goto-char} function is followed by an
6062 if-then-else expression that figures out where to put the cursor if
6063 there is an argument that is not a cons cell.
6064
6065 (Since I do not explain a cons cell for many more chapters, please
6066 consider ignoring the function @code{consp}. @xref{List
6067 Implementation, , How Lists are Implemented}, and @ref{Cons Cell Type,
6068 , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6069 Manual}.)
6070
6071 The @code{"P"} in the @code{interactive} expression tells Emacs to
6072 pass a prefix argument, if there is one, to the function in raw form.
6073 A prefix argument is made by typing the @key{META} key followed by a
6074 number, or by typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number. (If you don't type
6075 a number, @kbd{C-u} defaults to a cons cell with a 4. A lowercase
6076 @code{"p"} in the @code{interactive} expression causes the function to
6077 convert a prefix arg to a number.)
6078
6079 The true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression looks complex, but
6080 it is not: it checks whether @code{arg} has a value that is not
6081 @code{nil} and whether it is a cons cell. (That is what @code{consp}
6082 does; it checks whether its argument is a cons cell.) If @code{arg}
6083 has a value that is not @code{nil} (and is not a cons cell), which
6084 will be the case if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with a
6085 numeric argument, then this true-or-false-test will return true and
6086 the then-part of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. On the
6087 other hand, if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is not called with an
6088 argument, the value of @code{arg} will be @code{nil} and the else-part
6089 of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. The else-part is
6090 simply @code{point-min}, and when this is the outcome, the whole
6091 @code{goto-char} expression is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, which
6092 is how we saw the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function in its
6093 simplified form.
6094
6095 @node beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6096 @subsection @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
6097
6098 When @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with an argument, an
6099 expression is evaluated which calculates what value to pass to
6100 @code{goto-char}. This expression is rather complicated at first sight.
6101 It includes an inner @code{if} expression and much arithmetic. It looks
6102 like this:
6103
6104 @smallexample
6105 @group
6106 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6107 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6108 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6109 (/ size 10))
6110 (/
6111 (+ 10
6112 (*
6113 size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10)))
6114 @end group
6115 @end smallexample
6116
6117 @menu
6118 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
6119 * Large buffer case::
6120 * Small buffer case::
6121 @end menu
6122
6123 @ifnottex
6124 @node Disentangle beginning-of-buffer
6125 @unnumberedsubsubsec Disentangle @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6126 @end ifnottex
6127
6128 Like other complex-looking expressions, the conditional expression
6129 within @code{beginning-of-buffer} can be disentangled by looking at it
6130 as parts of a template, in this case, the template for an if-then-else
6131 expression. In skeletal form, the expression looks like this:
6132
6133 @smallexample
6134 @group
6135 (if (@var{buffer-is-large}
6136 @var{divide-buffer-size-by-10-and-multiply-by-arg}
6137 @var{else-use-alternate-calculation}
6138 @end group
6139 @end smallexample
6140
6141 The true-or-false-test of this inner @code{if} expression checks the
6142 size of the buffer. The reason for this is that the old version 18
6143 Emacs used numbers that are no bigger than eight million or so and in
6144 the computation that followed, the programmer feared that Emacs might
6145 try to use over-large numbers if the buffer were large. The term
6146 ``overflow'', mentioned in the comment, means numbers that are over
6147 large. More recent versions of Emacs use larger numbers, but this
6148 code has not been touched, if only because people now look at buffers
6149 that are far, far larger than ever before.
6150
6151 There are two cases: if the buffer is large and if it is not.
6152
6153 @node Large buffer case
6154 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a large buffer
6155
6156 In @code{beginning-of-buffer}, the inner @code{if} expression tests
6157 whether the size of the buffer is greater than 10,000 characters. To do
6158 this, it uses the @code{>} function and the computation of @code{size}
6159 that comes from the let expression.
6160
6161 In the old days, the function @code{buffer-size} was used. Not only
6162 was that function called several times, it gave the size of the whole
6163 buffer, not the accessible part. The computation makes much more
6164 sense when it handles just the accessible part. (@xref{Narrowing &
6165 Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more information on focusing
6166 attention to an ``accessible'' part.)
6167
6168 @need 800
6169 The line looks like this:
6170
6171 @smallexample
6172 (if (> size 10000)
6173 @end smallexample
6174
6175 @need 1200
6176 @noindent
6177 When the buffer is large, the then-part of the @code{if} expression is
6178 evaluated. It reads like this (after formatting for easy reading):
6179
6180 @smallexample
6181 @group
6182 (*
6183 (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6184 (/ size 10))
6185 @end group
6186 @end smallexample
6187
6188 @noindent
6189 This expression is a multiplication, with two arguments to the function
6190 @code{*}.
6191
6192 The first argument is @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}. When
6193 @code{"P"} is used as the argument for @code{interactive}, the value
6194 passed to the function as its argument is passed a ``raw prefix
6195 argument'', and not a number. (It is a number in a list.) To perform
6196 the arithmetic, a conversion is necessary, and
6197 @code{prefix-numeric-value} does the job.
6198
6199 @findex / @r{(division)}
6200 @cindex Division
6201 The second argument is @code{(/ size 10)}. This expression divides
6202 the numeric value by ten---the numeric value of the size of the
6203 accessible portion of the buffer. This produces a number that tells
6204 how many characters make up one tenth of the buffer size. (In Lisp,
6205 @code{/} is used for division, just as @code{*} is used for
6206 multiplication.)
6207
6208 @need 1200
6209 In the multiplication expression as a whole, this amount is multiplied
6210 by the value of the prefix argument---the multiplication looks like this:
6211
6212 @smallexample
6213 @group
6214 (* @var{numeric-value-of-prefix-arg}
6215 @var{number-of-characters-in-one-tenth-of-the-accessible-buffer})
6216 @end group
6217 @end smallexample
6218
6219 @noindent
6220 If, for example, the prefix argument is @samp{7}, the one-tenth value
6221 will be multiplied by 7 to give a position 70% of the way through.
6222
6223 @need 1200
6224 The result of all this is that if the accessible portion of the buffer
6225 is large, the @code{goto-char} expression reads like this:
6226
6227 @smallexample
6228 @group
6229 (goto-char (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6230 (/ size 10)))
6231 @end group
6232 @end smallexample
6233
6234 This puts the cursor where we want it.
6235
6236 @node Small buffer case
6237 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a small buffer
6238
6239 If the buffer contains fewer than 10,000 characters, a slightly
6240 different computation is performed. You might think this is not
6241 necessary, since the first computation could do the job. However, in
6242 a small buffer, the first method may not put the cursor on exactly the
6243 desired line; the second method does a better job.
6244
6245 @need 800
6246 The code looks like this:
6247
6248 @c Keep this on one line.
6249 @smallexample
6250 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10))
6251 @end smallexample
6252
6253 @need 1200
6254 @noindent
6255 This is code in which you figure out what happens by discovering how the
6256 functions are embedded in parentheses. It is easier to read if you
6257 reformat it with each expression indented more deeply than its
6258 enclosing expression:
6259
6260 @smallexample
6261 @group
6262 (/
6263 (+ 10
6264 (*
6265 size
6266 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6267 10))
6268 @end group
6269 @end smallexample
6270
6271 @need 1200
6272 @noindent
6273 Looking at parentheses, we see that the innermost operation is
6274 @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}, which converts the raw argument to
6275 a number. In the following expression, this number is multiplied by
6276 the size of the accessible portion of the buffer:
6277
6278 @smallexample
6279 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))
6280 @end smallexample
6281
6282 @noindent
6283 This multiplication creates a number that may be larger than the size of
6284 the buffer---seven times larger if the argument is 7, for example. Ten
6285 is then added to this number and finally the large number is divided by
6286 ten to provide a value that is one character larger than the percentage
6287 position in the buffer.
6288
6289 The number that results from all this is passed to @code{goto-char} and
6290 the cursor is moved to that point.
6291
6292 @need 1500
6293 @node beginning-of-buffer complete
6294 @subsection The Complete @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6295
6296 @need 1000
6297 Here is the complete text of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function:
6298 @sp 1
6299
6300 @c In GNU Emacs 22
6301 @smallexample
6302 @group
6303 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6304 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6305 leave mark at previous position.
6306 With \\[universal-argument] prefix,
6307 do not set mark at previous position.
6308 With numeric arg N,
6309 put point N/10 of the way from the beginning.
6310
6311 If the buffer is narrowed,
6312 this command uses the beginning and size
6313 of the accessible part of the buffer.
6314 @end group
6315
6316 @group
6317 Don't use this command in Lisp programs!
6318 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6319 and avoids clobbering the mark."
6320 (interactive "P")
6321 (or (consp arg)
6322 (and transient-mark-mode mark-active)
6323 (push-mark))
6324 @end group
6325 @group
6326 (let ((size (- (point-max) (point-min))))
6327 (goto-char (if (and arg (not (consp arg)))
6328 (+ (point-min)
6329 (if (> size 10000)
6330 ;; Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!
6331 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6332 (/ size 10))
6333 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6334 10)))
6335 (point-min))))
6336 (if (and arg (not (consp arg))) (forward-line 1)))
6337 @end group
6338 @end smallexample
6339
6340 @ignore
6341 From before GNU Emacs 22
6342 @smallexample
6343 @group
6344 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6345 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6346 leave mark at previous position.
6347 With arg N, put point N/10 of the way
6348 from the true beginning.
6349 @end group
6350 @group
6351 Don’t use this in Lisp programs!
6352 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6353 and does not set the mark."
6354 (interactive "P")
6355 (push-mark)
6356 @end group
6357 @group
6358 (goto-char
6359 (if arg
6360 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6361 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6362 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6363 (/ (buffer-size) 10))
6364 @end group
6365 @group
6366 (/ (+ 10 (* (buffer-size)
6367 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6368 10))
6369 (point-min)))
6370 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6371 @end group
6372 @end smallexample
6373 @end ignore
6374
6375 @noindent
6376 Except for two small points, the previous discussion shows how this
6377 function works. The first point deals with a detail in the
6378 documentation string, and the second point concerns the last line of
6379 the function.
6380
6381 @need 800
6382 In the documentation string, there is reference to an expression:
6383
6384 @smallexample
6385 \\[universal-argument]
6386 @end smallexample
6387
6388 @noindent
6389 A @samp{\\} is used before the first square bracket of this
6390 expression. This @samp{\\} tells the Lisp interpreter to substitute
6391 whatever key is currently bound to the @samp{[@dots{}]}. In the case
6392 of @code{universal-argument}, that is usually @kbd{C-u}, but it might
6393 be different. (@xref{Documentation Tips, , Tips for Documentation
6394 Strings, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
6395 information.)
6396
6397 @need 1200
6398 Finally, the last line of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} command says
6399 to move point to the beginning of the next line if the command is
6400 invoked with an argument:
6401
6402 @smallexample
6403 (if (and arg (not (consp arg))) (forward-line 1))
6404 @end smallexample
6405
6406 @noindent
6407 This puts the cursor at the beginning of the first line after the
6408 appropriate tenths position in the buffer. This is a flourish that
6409 means that the cursor is always located @emph{at least} the requested
6410 tenths of the way through the buffer, which is a nicety that is,
6411 perhaps, not necessary, but which, if it did not occur, would be sure
6412 to draw complaints. (The @code{(not (consp arg))} portion is so that
6413 if you specify the command with a @kbd{C-u}, but without a number,
6414 that is to say, if the ``raw prefix argument'' is simply a cons cell,
6415 the command does not put you at the beginning of the second line.)
6416
6417 @node Second Buffer Related Review
6418 @section Review
6419
6420 Here is a brief summary of some of the topics covered in this chapter.
6421
6422 @table @code
6423 @item or
6424 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and return the value of the first
6425 argument that is not @code{nil}; if none return a value that is not
6426 @code{nil}, return @code{nil}. In brief, return the first true value
6427 of the arguments; return a true value if one @emph{or} any of the
6428 others are true.
6429
6430 @item and
6431 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and if any are @code{nil}, return
6432 @code{nil}; if none are @code{nil}, return the value of the last
6433 argument. In brief, return a true value only if all the arguments are
6434 true; return a true value if one @emph{and} each of the others is
6435 true.
6436
6437 @item &optional
6438 A keyword used to indicate that an argument to a function definition
6439 is optional; this means that the function can be evaluated without the
6440 argument, if desired.
6441
6442 @item prefix-numeric-value
6443 Convert the ``raw prefix argument'' produced by @code{(interactive
6444 "P")} to a numeric value.
6445
6446 @item forward-line
6447 Move point forward to the beginning of the next line, or if the argument
6448 is greater than one, forward that many lines. If it can't move as far
6449 forward as it is supposed to, @code{forward-line} goes forward as far as
6450 it can and then returns a count of the number of additional lines it was
6451 supposed to move but couldn't.
6452
6453 @item erase-buffer
6454 Delete the entire contents of the current buffer.
6455
6456 @item bufferp
6457 Return @code{t} if its argument is a buffer; otherwise return @code{nil}.
6458 @end table
6459
6460 @node optional Exercise
6461 @section @code{optional} Argument Exercise
6462
6463 Write an interactive function with an optional argument that tests
6464 whether its argument, a number, is greater than or equal to, or else,
6465 less than the value of @code{fill-column}, and tells you which, in a
6466 message. However, if you do not pass an argument to the function, use
6467 56 as a default value.
6468
6469 @node Narrowing & Widening
6470 @chapter Narrowing and Widening
6471 @cindex Focusing attention (narrowing)
6472 @cindex Narrowing
6473 @cindex Widening
6474
6475 Narrowing is a feature of Emacs that makes it possible for you to focus
6476 on a specific part of a buffer, and work without accidentally changing
6477 other parts. Narrowing is normally disabled since it can confuse
6478 novices.
6479
6480 @menu
6481 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
6482 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
6483 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
6484 * narrow Exercise::
6485 @end menu
6486
6487 @ifnottex
6488 @node Narrowing advantages
6489 @unnumberedsec The Advantages of Narrowing
6490 @end ifnottex
6491
6492 With narrowing, the rest of a buffer is made invisible, as if it weren't
6493 there. This is an advantage if, for example, you want to replace a word
6494 in one part of a buffer but not in another: you narrow to the part you want
6495 and the replacement is carried out only in that section, not in the rest
6496 of the buffer. Searches will only work within a narrowed region, not
6497 outside of one, so if you are fixing a part of a document, you can keep
6498 yourself from accidentally finding parts you do not need to fix by
6499 narrowing just to the region you want.
6500 (The key binding for @code{narrow-to-region} is @kbd{C-x n n}.)
6501
6502 However, narrowing does make the rest of the buffer invisible, which
6503 can scare people who inadvertently invoke narrowing and think they
6504 have deleted a part of their file. Moreover, the @code{undo} command
6505 (which is usually bound to @kbd{C-x u}) does not turn off narrowing
6506 (nor should it), so people can become quite desperate if they do not
6507 know that they can return the rest of a buffer to visibility with the
6508 @code{widen} command.
6509 (The key binding for @code{widen} is @kbd{C-x n w}.)
6510
6511 Narrowing is just as useful to the Lisp interpreter as to a human.
6512 Often, an Emacs Lisp function is designed to work on just part of a
6513 buffer; or conversely, an Emacs Lisp function needs to work on all of a
6514 buffer that has been narrowed. The @code{what-line} function, for
6515 example, removes the narrowing from a buffer, if it has any narrowing
6516 and when it has finished its job, restores the narrowing to what it was.
6517 On the other hand, the @code{count-lines} function
6518 uses narrowing to restrict itself to just that portion
6519 of the buffer in which it is interested and then restores the previous
6520 situation.
6521
6522 @node save-restriction
6523 @section The @code{save-restriction} Special Form
6524 @findex save-restriction
6525
6526 In Emacs Lisp, you can use the @code{save-restriction} special form to
6527 keep track of whatever narrowing is in effect, if any. When the Lisp
6528 interpreter meets with @code{save-restriction}, it executes the code
6529 in the body of the @code{save-restriction} expression, and then undoes
6530 any changes to narrowing that the code caused. If, for example, the
6531 buffer is narrowed and the code that follows @code{save-restriction}
6532 gets rid of the narrowing, @code{save-restriction} returns the buffer
6533 to its narrowed region afterwards. In the @code{what-line} command,
6534 any narrowing the buffer may have is undone by the @code{widen}
6535 command that immediately follows the @code{save-restriction} command.
6536 Any original narrowing is restored just before the completion of the
6537 function.
6538
6539 @need 1250
6540 The template for a @code{save-restriction} expression is simple:
6541
6542 @smallexample
6543 @group
6544 (save-restriction
6545 @var{body}@dots{} )
6546 @end group
6547 @end smallexample
6548
6549 @noindent
6550 The body of the @code{save-restriction} is one or more expressions that
6551 will be evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter.
6552
6553 Finally, a point to note: when you use both @code{save-excursion} and
6554 @code{save-restriction}, one right after the other, you should use
6555 @code{save-excursion} outermost. If you write them in reverse order,
6556 you may fail to record narrowing in the buffer to which Emacs switches
6557 after calling @code{save-excursion}. Thus, when written together,
6558 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} should be written
6559 like this:
6560
6561 @smallexample
6562 @group
6563 (save-excursion
6564 (save-restriction
6565 @var{body}@dots{}))
6566 @end group
6567 @end smallexample
6568
6569 In other circumstances, when not written together, the
6570 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} special forms must
6571 be written in the order appropriate to the function.
6572
6573 @need 1250
6574 For example,
6575
6576 @smallexample
6577 @group
6578 (save-restriction
6579 (widen)
6580 (save-excursion
6581 @var{body}@dots{}))
6582 @end group
6583 @end smallexample
6584
6585 @ignore
6586 Emacs 22
6587 /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
6588
6589 (defun what-line ()
6590 "Print the current buffer line number and narrowed line number of point."
6591 (interactive)
6592 (let ((start (point-min))
6593 (n (line-number-at-pos)))
6594 (if (= start 1)
6595 (message "Line %d" n)
6596 (save-excursion
6597 (save-restriction
6598 (widen)
6599 (message "line %d (narrowed line %d)"
6600 (+ n (line-number-at-pos start) -1) n))))))
6601
6602 (defun line-number-at-pos (&optional pos)
6603 "Return (narrowed) buffer line number at position POS.
6604 If POS is nil, use current buffer location.
6605 Counting starts at (point-min), so the value refers
6606 to the contents of the accessible portion of the buffer."
6607 (let ((opoint (or pos (point))) start)
6608 (save-excursion
6609 (goto-char (point-min))
6610 (setq start (point))
6611 (goto-char opoint)
6612 (forward-line 0)
6613 (1+ (count-lines start (point))))))
6614
6615 (defun count-lines (start end)
6616 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6617 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6618 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6619 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6620 (save-excursion
6621 (save-restriction
6622 (narrow-to-region start end)
6623 (goto-char (point-min))
6624 (if (eq selective-display t)
6625 (save-match-data
6626 (let ((done 0))
6627 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6628 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6629 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6630 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6631 (goto-char (point-max))
6632 (if (and (/= start end)
6633 (not (bolp)))
6634 (1+ done)
6635 done)))
6636 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6637 @end ignore
6638
6639 @node what-line
6640 @section @code{what-line}
6641 @findex what-line
6642 @cindex Widening, example of
6643
6644 The @code{what-line} command tells you the number of the line in which
6645 the cursor is located. The function illustrates the use of the
6646 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} commands. Here is the
6647 original text of the function:
6648
6649 @smallexample
6650 @group
6651 (defun what-line ()
6652 "Print the current line number (in the buffer) of point."
6653 (interactive)
6654 (save-restriction
6655 (widen)
6656 (save-excursion
6657 (beginning-of-line)
6658 (message "Line %d"
6659 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6660 @end group
6661 @end smallexample
6662
6663 (In recent versions of GNU Emacs, the @code{what-line} function has
6664 been expanded to tell you your line number in a narrowed buffer as
6665 well as your line number in a widened buffer. The recent version is
6666 more complex than the version shown here. If you feel adventurous,
6667 you might want to look at it after figuring out how this version
6668 works. You will probably need to use @kbd{C-h f}
6669 (@code{describe-function}). The newer version uses a conditional to
6670 determine whether the buffer has been narrowed.
6671
6672 (Also, it uses @code{line-number-at-pos}, which among other simple
6673 expressions, such as @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, moves point to
6674 the beginning of the current line with @code{(forward-line 0)} rather
6675 than @code{beginning-of-line}.)
6676
6677 The @code{what-line} function as shown here has a documentation line
6678 and is interactive, as you would expect. The next two lines use the
6679 functions @code{save-restriction} and @code{widen}.
6680
6681 The @code{save-restriction} special form notes whatever narrowing is in
6682 effect, if any, in the current buffer and restores that narrowing after
6683 the code in the body of the @code{save-restriction} has been evaluated.
6684
6685 The @code{save-restriction} special form is followed by @code{widen}.
6686 This function undoes any narrowing the current buffer may have had
6687 when @code{what-line} was called. (The narrowing that was there is
6688 the narrowing that @code{save-restriction} remembers.) This widening
6689 makes it possible for the line counting commands to count from the
6690 beginning of the buffer. Otherwise, they would have been limited to
6691 counting within the accessible region. Any original narrowing is
6692 restored just before the completion of the function by the
6693 @code{save-restriction} special form.
6694
6695 The call to @code{widen} is followed by @code{save-excursion}, which
6696 saves the location of the cursor (i.e., of point), and
6697 restores it after the code in the body of the @code{save-excursion}
6698 uses the @code{beginning-of-line} function to move point.
6699
6700 (Note that the @code{(widen)} expression comes between the
6701 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} special forms. When
6702 you write the two @code{save- @dots{}} expressions in sequence, write
6703 @code{save-excursion} outermost.)
6704
6705 @need 1200
6706 The last two lines of the @code{what-line} function are functions to
6707 count the number of lines in the buffer and then print the number in the
6708 echo area.
6709
6710 @smallexample
6711 @group
6712 (message "Line %d"
6713 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6714 @end group
6715 @end smallexample
6716
6717 The @code{message} function prints a one-line message at the bottom of
6718 the Emacs screen. The first argument is inside of quotation marks and
6719 is printed as a string of characters. However, it may contain a
6720 @samp{%d} expression to print a following argument. @samp{%d} prints
6721 the argument as a decimal, so the message will say something such as
6722 @samp{Line 243}.
6723
6724 @need 1200
6725 The number that is printed in place of the @samp{%d} is computed by the
6726 last line of the function:
6727
6728 @smallexample
6729 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))
6730 @end smallexample
6731
6732 @ignore
6733 GNU Emacs 22
6734
6735 (defun count-lines (start end)
6736 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6737 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6738 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6739 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6740 (save-excursion
6741 (save-restriction
6742 (narrow-to-region start end)
6743 (goto-char (point-min))
6744 (if (eq selective-display t)
6745 (save-match-data
6746 (let ((done 0))
6747 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6748 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6749 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6750 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6751 (goto-char (point-max))
6752 (if (and (/= start end)
6753 (not (bolp)))
6754 (1+ done)
6755 done)))
6756 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6757 @end ignore
6758
6759 @noindent
6760 What this does is count the lines from the first position of the
6761 buffer, indicated by the @code{1}, up to @code{(point)}, and then add
6762 one to that number. (The @code{1+} function adds one to its
6763 argument.) We add one to it because line 2 has only one line before
6764 it, and @code{count-lines} counts only the lines @emph{before} the
6765 current line.
6766
6767 After @code{count-lines} has done its job, and the message has been
6768 printed in the echo area, the @code{save-excursion} restores point to
6769 its original position; and @code{save-restriction} restores
6770 the original narrowing, if any.
6771
6772 @node narrow Exercise
6773 @section Exercise with Narrowing
6774
6775 Write a function that will display the first 60 characters of the
6776 current buffer, even if you have narrowed the buffer to its latter
6777 half so that the first line is inaccessible. Restore point, mark, and
6778 narrowing. For this exercise, you need to use a whole potpourri of
6779 functions, including @code{save-restriction}, @code{widen},
6780 @code{goto-char}, @code{point-min}, @code{message}, and
6781 @code{buffer-substring}.
6782
6783 @cindex Properties, mention of @code{buffer-substring-no-properties}
6784 (@code{buffer-substring} is a previously unmentioned function you will
6785 have to investigate yourself; or perhaps you will have to use
6786 @code{buffer-substring-no-properties} or
6787 @code{filter-buffer-substring} @dots{}, yet other functions. Text
6788 properties are a feature otherwise not discussed here. @xref{Text
6789 Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6790 Manual}.)
6791
6792 Additionally, do you really need @code{goto-char} or @code{point-min}?
6793 Or can you write the function without them?
6794
6795 @node car cdr & cons
6796 @chapter @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
6797 @findex car, @r{introduced}
6798 @findex cdr, @r{introduced}
6799
6800 In Lisp, @code{car}, @code{cdr}, and @code{cons} are fundamental
6801 functions. The @code{cons} function is used to construct lists, and
6802 the @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used to take them apart.
6803
6804 In the walk through of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function, we
6805 will see @code{cons} as well as two variants on @code{cdr},
6806 namely, @code{setcdr} and @code{nthcdr}. (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
6807
6808 @menu
6809 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
6810 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
6811 * cons:: Constructing a list.
6812 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
6813 * nth::
6814 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
6815 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
6816 * cons Exercise::
6817 @end menu
6818
6819 @ifnottex
6820 @node Strange Names
6821 @unnumberedsec Strange Names
6822 @end ifnottex
6823
6824 The name of the @code{cons} function is not unreasonable: it is an
6825 abbreviation of the word ``construct''. The origins of the names for
6826 @code{car} and @code{cdr}, on the other hand, are esoteric: @code{car}
6827 is an acronym from the phrase ``Contents of the Address part of the
6828 Register''; and @code{cdr} (pronounced ``could-er'') is an acronym from
6829 the phrase ``Contents of the Decrement part of the Register''. These
6830 phrases refer to specific pieces of hardware on the very early
6831 computer on which the original Lisp was developed. Besides being
6832 obsolete, the phrases have been completely irrelevant for more than 25
6833 years to anyone thinking about Lisp. Nonetheless, although a few
6834 brave scholars have begun to use more reasonable names for these
6835 functions, the old terms are still in use. In particular, since the
6836 terms are used in the Emacs Lisp source code, we will use them in this
6837 introduction.
6838
6839 @node car & cdr
6840 @section @code{car} and @code{cdr}
6841
6842 The @sc{car} of a list is, quite simply, the first item in the list.
6843 Thus the @sc{car} of the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} is
6844 @code{rose}.
6845
6846 @need 1200
6847 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can see this by
6848 evaluating the following:
6849
6850 @smallexample
6851 (car '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
6852 @end smallexample
6853
6854 @noindent
6855 After evaluating the expression, @code{rose} will appear in the echo
6856 area.
6857
6858 Clearly, a more reasonable name for the @code{car} function would be
6859 @code{first} and this is often suggested.
6860
6861 @code{car} does not remove the first item from the list; it only reports
6862 what it is. After @code{car} has been applied to a list, the list is
6863 still the same as it was. In the jargon, @code{car} is
6864 ``non-destructive''. This feature turns out to be important.
6865
6866 The @sc{cdr} of a list is the rest of the list, that is, the
6867 @code{cdr} function returns the part of the list that follows the
6868 first item. Thus, while the @sc{car} of the list @code{'(rose violet
6869 daisy buttercup)} is @code{rose}, the rest of the list, the value
6870 returned by the @code{cdr} function, is @code{(violet daisy
6871 buttercup)}.
6872
6873 @need 800
6874 You can see this by evaluating the following in the usual way:
6875
6876 @smallexample
6877 (cdr '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
6878 @end smallexample
6879
6880 @noindent
6881 When you evaluate this, @code{(violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in
6882 the echo area.
6883
6884 Like @code{car}, @code{cdr} does not remove any elements from the
6885 list---it just returns a report of what the second and subsequent
6886 elements are.
6887
6888 Incidentally, in the example, the list of flowers is quoted. If it were
6889 not, the Lisp interpreter would try to evaluate the list by calling
6890 @code{rose} as a function. In this example, we do not want to do that.
6891
6892 Clearly, a more reasonable name for @code{cdr} would be @code{rest}.
6893
6894 (There is a lesson here: when you name new functions, consider very
6895 carefully what you are doing, since you may be stuck with the names
6896 for far longer than you expect. The reason this document perpetuates
6897 these names is that the Emacs Lisp source code uses them, and if I did
6898 not use them, you would have a hard time reading the code; but do,
6899 please, try to avoid using these terms yourself. The people who come
6900 after you will be grateful to you.)
6901
6902 When @code{car} and @code{cdr} are applied to a list made up of symbols,
6903 such as the list @code{(pine fir oak maple)}, the element of the list
6904 returned by the function @code{car} is the symbol @code{pine} without
6905 any parentheses around it. @code{pine} is the first element in the
6906 list. However, the @sc{cdr} of the list is a list itself, @code{(fir
6907 oak maple)}, as you can see by evaluating the following expressions in
6908 the usual way:
6909
6910 @smallexample
6911 @group
6912 (car '(pine fir oak maple))
6913
6914 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
6915 @end group
6916 @end smallexample
6917
6918 On the other hand, in a list of lists, the first element is itself a
6919 list. @code{car} returns this first element as a list. For example,
6920 the following list contains three sub-lists, a list of carnivores, a
6921 list of herbivores and a list of sea mammals:
6922
6923 @smallexample
6924 @group
6925 (car '((lion tiger cheetah)
6926 (gazelle antelope zebra)
6927 (whale dolphin seal)))
6928 @end group
6929 @end smallexample
6930
6931 @noindent
6932 In this example, the first element or @sc{car} of the list is the list of
6933 carnivores, @code{(lion tiger cheetah)}, and the rest of the list is
6934 @code{((gazelle antelope zebra) (whale dolphin seal))}.
6935
6936 @smallexample
6937 @group
6938 (cdr '((lion tiger cheetah)
6939 (gazelle antelope zebra)
6940 (whale dolphin seal)))
6941 @end group
6942 @end smallexample
6943
6944 It is worth saying again that @code{car} and @code{cdr} are
6945 non-destructive---that is, they do not modify or change lists to which
6946 they are applied. This is very important for how they are used.
6947
6948 Also, in the first chapter, in the discussion about atoms, I said that
6949 in Lisp, ``certain kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated
6950 into parts; but the mechanism for doing this is different from the
6951 mechanism for splitting a list. As far as Lisp is concerned, the
6952 atoms of a list are unsplittable.'' (@xref{Lisp Atoms}.) The
6953 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used for splitting lists and
6954 are considered fundamental to Lisp. Since they cannot split or gain
6955 access to the parts of an array, an array is considered an atom.
6956 Conversely, the other fundamental function, @code{cons}, can put
6957 together or construct a list, but not an array. (Arrays are handled
6958 by array-specific functions. @xref{Arrays, , Arrays, elisp, The GNU
6959 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
6960
6961 @node cons
6962 @section @code{cons}
6963 @findex cons, @r{introduced}
6964
6965 The @code{cons} function constructs lists; it is the inverse of
6966 @code{car} and @code{cdr}. For example, @code{cons} can be used to make
6967 a four element list from the three element list, @code{(fir oak maple)}:
6968
6969 @smallexample
6970 (cons 'pine '(fir oak maple))
6971 @end smallexample
6972
6973 @need 800
6974 @noindent
6975 After evaluating this list, you will see
6976
6977 @smallexample
6978 (pine fir oak maple)
6979 @end smallexample
6980
6981 @noindent
6982 appear in the echo area. @code{cons} causes the creation of a new
6983 list in which the element is followed by the elements of the original
6984 list.
6985
6986 We often say that ``@code{cons} puts a new element at the beginning of
6987 a list; it attaches or pushes elements onto the list'', but this
6988 phrasing can be misleading, since @code{cons} does not change an
6989 existing list, but creates a new one.
6990
6991 Like @code{car} and @code{cdr}, @code{cons} is non-destructive.
6992
6993 @menu
6994 * Build a list::
6995 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
6996 @end menu
6997
6998 @ifnottex
6999 @node Build a list
7000 @unnumberedsubsec Build a list
7001 @end ifnottex
7002
7003 @code{cons} must have a list to attach to.@footnote{Actually, you can
7004 @code{cons} an element to an atom to produce a dotted pair. Dotted
7005 pairs are not discussed here; see @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted
7006 Pair Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.} You
7007 cannot start from absolutely nothing. If you are building a list, you
7008 need to provide at least an empty list at the beginning. Here is a
7009 series of @code{cons} expressions that build up a list of flowers. If
7010 you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate each of
7011 the expressions in the usual way; the value is printed in this text
7012 after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as ``evaluates to''.
7013
7014 @smallexample
7015 @group
7016 (cons 'buttercup ())
7017 @result{} (buttercup)
7018 @end group
7019
7020 @group
7021 (cons 'daisy '(buttercup))
7022 @result{} (daisy buttercup)
7023 @end group
7024
7025 @group
7026 (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup))
7027 @result{} (violet daisy buttercup)
7028 @end group
7029
7030 @group
7031 (cons 'rose '(violet daisy buttercup))
7032 @result{} (rose violet daisy buttercup)
7033 @end group
7034 @end smallexample
7035
7036 @noindent
7037 In the first example, the empty list is shown as @code{()} and a list
7038 made up of @code{buttercup} followed by the empty list is constructed.
7039 As you can see, the empty list is not shown in the list that was
7040 constructed. All that you see is @code{(buttercup)}. The empty list is
7041 not counted as an element of a list because there is nothing in an empty
7042 list. Generally speaking, an empty list is invisible.
7043
7044 The second example, @code{(cons 'daisy '(buttercup))} constructs a new,
7045 two element list by putting @code{daisy} in front of @code{buttercup};
7046 and the third example constructs a three element list by putting
7047 @code{violet} in front of @code{daisy} and @code{buttercup}.
7048
7049 @node length
7050 @subsection Find the Length of a List: @code{length}
7051 @findex length
7052
7053 You can find out how many elements there are in a list by using the Lisp
7054 function @code{length}, as in the following examples:
7055
7056 @smallexample
7057 @group
7058 (length '(buttercup))
7059 @result{} 1
7060 @end group
7061
7062 @group
7063 (length '(daisy buttercup))
7064 @result{} 2
7065 @end group
7066
7067 @group
7068 (length (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup)))
7069 @result{} 3
7070 @end group
7071 @end smallexample
7072
7073 @noindent
7074 In the third example, the @code{cons} function is used to construct a
7075 three element list which is then passed to the @code{length} function as
7076 its argument.
7077
7078 @need 1200
7079 We can also use @code{length} to count the number of elements in an
7080 empty list:
7081
7082 @smallexample
7083 @group
7084 (length ())
7085 @result{} 0
7086 @end group
7087 @end smallexample
7088
7089 @noindent
7090 As you would expect, the number of elements in an empty list is zero.
7091
7092 An interesting experiment is to find out what happens if you try to find
7093 the length of no list at all; that is, if you try to call @code{length}
7094 without giving it an argument, not even an empty list:
7095
7096 @smallexample
7097 (length )
7098 @end smallexample
7099
7100 @need 800
7101 @noindent
7102 What you see, if you evaluate this, is the error message
7103
7104 @smallexample
7105 Lisp error: (wrong-number-of-arguments length 0)
7106 @end smallexample
7107
7108 @noindent
7109 This means that the function receives the wrong number of
7110 arguments, zero, when it expects some other number of arguments. In
7111 this case, one argument is expected, the argument being a list whose
7112 length the function is measuring. (Note that @emph{one} list is
7113 @emph{one} argument, even if the list has many elements inside it.)
7114
7115 The part of the error message that says @samp{length} is the name of
7116 the function.
7117
7118 @ignore
7119 @code{length} is still a subroutine, but you need C-h f to discover that.
7120
7121 In an earlier version:
7122 This is written with a special notation, @samp{#<subr},
7123 that indicates that the function @code{length} is one of the primitive
7124 functions written in C rather than in Emacs Lisp. (@samp{subr} is an
7125 abbreviation for ``subroutine''.) @xref{What Is a Function, , What Is a
7126 Function?, elisp , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
7127 about subroutines.
7128 @end ignore
7129
7130 @node nthcdr
7131 @section @code{nthcdr}
7132 @findex nthcdr
7133
7134 The @code{nthcdr} function is associated with the @code{cdr} function.
7135 What it does is take the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7136
7137 If you take the @sc{cdr} of the list @code{(pine fir
7138 oak maple)}, you will be returned the list @code{(fir oak maple)}. If you
7139 repeat this on what was returned, you will be returned the list
7140 @code{(oak maple)}. (Of course, repeated @sc{cdr}ing on the original
7141 list will just give you the original @sc{cdr} since the function does
7142 not change the list. You need to evaluate the @sc{cdr} of the
7143 @sc{cdr} and so on.) If you continue this, eventually you will be
7144 returned an empty list, which in this case, instead of being shown as
7145 @code{()} is shown as @code{nil}.
7146
7147 @need 1200
7148 For review, here is a series of repeated @sc{cdr}s, the text following
7149 the @samp{@result{}} shows what is returned.
7150
7151 @smallexample
7152 @group
7153 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7154 @result{}(fir oak maple)
7155 @end group
7156
7157 @group
7158 (cdr '(fir oak maple))
7159 @result{} (oak maple)
7160 @end group
7161
7162 @group
7163 (cdr '(oak maple))
7164 @result{}(maple)
7165 @end group
7166
7167 @group
7168 (cdr '(maple))
7169 @result{} nil
7170 @end group
7171
7172 @group
7173 (cdr 'nil)
7174 @result{} nil
7175 @end group
7176
7177 @group
7178 (cdr ())
7179 @result{} nil
7180 @end group
7181 @end smallexample
7182
7183 @need 1200
7184 You can also do several @sc{cdr}s without printing the values in
7185 between, like this:
7186
7187 @smallexample
7188 @group
7189 (cdr (cdr '(pine fir oak maple)))
7190 @result{} (oak maple)
7191 @end group
7192 @end smallexample
7193
7194 @noindent
7195 In this example, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the innermost list first.
7196 The innermost list is quoted, so it just passes the list as it is to the
7197 innermost @code{cdr}. This @code{cdr} passes a list made up of the
7198 second and subsequent elements of the list to the outermost @code{cdr},
7199 which produces a list composed of the third and subsequent elements of
7200 the original list. In this example, the @code{cdr} function is repeated
7201 and returns a list that consists of the original list without its
7202 first two elements.
7203
7204 The @code{nthcdr} function does the same as repeating the call to
7205 @code{cdr}. In the following example, the argument 2 is passed to the
7206 function @code{nthcdr}, along with the list, and the value returned is
7207 the list without its first two items, which is exactly the same
7208 as repeating @code{cdr} twice on the list:
7209
7210 @smallexample
7211 @group
7212 (nthcdr 2 '(pine fir oak maple))
7213 @result{} (oak maple)
7214 @end group
7215 @end smallexample
7216
7217 @need 1200
7218 Using the original four element list, we can see what happens when
7219 various numeric arguments are passed to @code{nthcdr}, including 0, 1,
7220 and 5:
7221
7222 @smallexample
7223 @group
7224 ;; @r{Leave the list as it was.}
7225 (nthcdr 0 '(pine fir oak maple))
7226 @result{} (pine fir oak maple)
7227 @end group
7228
7229 @group
7230 ;; @r{Return a copy without the first element.}
7231 (nthcdr 1 '(pine fir oak maple))
7232 @result{} (fir oak maple)
7233 @end group
7234
7235 @group
7236 ;; @r{Return a copy of the list without three elements.}
7237 (nthcdr 3 '(pine fir oak maple))
7238 @result{} (maple)
7239 @end group
7240
7241 @group
7242 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all four elements.}
7243 (nthcdr 4 '(pine fir oak maple))
7244 @result{} nil
7245 @end group
7246
7247 @group
7248 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all elements.}
7249 (nthcdr 5 '(pine fir oak maple))
7250 @result{} nil
7251 @end group
7252 @end smallexample
7253
7254 @node nth
7255 @section @code{nth}
7256 @findex nth
7257
7258 The @code{nthcdr} function takes the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7259 The @code{nth} function takes the @sc{car} of the result returned by
7260 @code{nthcdr}. It returns the Nth element of the list.
7261
7262 @need 1500
7263 Thus, if it were not defined in C for speed, the definition of
7264 @code{nth} would be:
7265
7266 @smallexample
7267 @group
7268 (defun nth (n list)
7269 "Returns the Nth element of LIST.
7270 N counts from zero. If LIST is not that long, nil is returned."
7271 (car (nthcdr n list)))
7272 @end group
7273 @end smallexample
7274
7275 @noindent
7276 (Originally, @code{nth} was defined in Emacs Lisp in @file{subr.el},
7277 but its definition was redone in C in the 1980s.)
7278
7279 The @code{nth} function returns a single element of a list.
7280 This can be very convenient.
7281
7282 Note that the elements are numbered from zero, not one. That is to
7283 say, the first element of a list, its @sc{car} is the zeroth element.
7284 This is called ``zero-based'' counting and often bothers people who
7285 are accustomed to the first element in a list being number one, which
7286 is ``one-based''.
7287
7288 @need 1250
7289 For example:
7290
7291 @smallexample
7292 @group
7293 (nth 0 '("one" "two" "three"))
7294 @result{} "one"
7295
7296 (nth 1 '("one" "two" "three"))
7297 @result{} "two"
7298 @end group
7299 @end smallexample
7300
7301 It is worth mentioning that @code{nth}, like @code{nthcdr} and
7302 @code{cdr}, does not change the original list---the function is
7303 non-destructive. This is in sharp contrast to the @code{setcar} and
7304 @code{setcdr} functions.
7305
7306 @node setcar
7307 @section @code{setcar}
7308 @findex setcar
7309
7310 As you might guess from their names, the @code{setcar} and @code{setcdr}
7311 functions set the @sc{car} or the @sc{cdr} of a list to a new value.
7312 They actually change the original list, unlike @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7313 which leave the original list as it was. One way to find out how this
7314 works is to experiment. We will start with the @code{setcar} function.
7315
7316 @need 1200
7317 First, we can make a list and then set the value of a variable to the
7318 list, using the @code{setq} function. Here is a list of animals:
7319
7320 @smallexample
7321 (setq animals '(antelope giraffe lion tiger))
7322 @end smallexample
7323
7324 @noindent
7325 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
7326 this expression in the usual fashion, by positioning the cursor after
7327 the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. (I'm doing this right here
7328 as I write this. This is one of the advantages of having the
7329 interpreter built into the computing environment. Incidentally, when
7330 there is nothing on the line after the final parentheses, such as a
7331 comment, point can be on the next line. Thus, if your cursor is in
7332 the first column of the next line, you do not need to move it.
7333 Indeed, Emacs permits any amount of white space after the final
7334 parenthesis.)
7335
7336 @need 1200
7337 When we evaluate the variable @code{animals}, we see that it is bound to
7338 the list @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}:
7339
7340 @smallexample
7341 @group
7342 animals
7343 @result{} (antelope giraffe lion tiger)
7344 @end group
7345 @end smallexample
7346
7347 @noindent
7348 Put another way, the variable @code{animals} points to the list
7349 @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}.
7350
7351 Next, evaluate the function @code{setcar} while passing it two
7352 arguments, the variable @code{animals} and the quoted symbol
7353 @code{hippopotamus}; this is done by writing the three element list
7354 @code{(setcar animals 'hippopotamus)} and then evaluating it in the
7355 usual fashion:
7356
7357 @smallexample
7358 (setcar animals 'hippopotamus)
7359 @end smallexample
7360
7361 @need 1200
7362 @noindent
7363 After evaluating this expression, evaluate the variable @code{animals}
7364 again. You will see that the list of animals has changed:
7365
7366 @smallexample
7367 @group
7368 animals
7369 @result{} (hippopotamus giraffe lion tiger)
7370 @end group
7371 @end smallexample
7372
7373 @noindent
7374 The first element on the list, @code{antelope} is replaced by
7375 @code{hippopotamus}.
7376
7377 So we can see that @code{setcar} did not add a new element to the list
7378 as @code{cons} would have; it replaced @code{antelope} with
7379 @code{hippopotamus}; it @emph{changed} the list.
7380
7381 @node setcdr
7382 @section @code{setcdr}
7383 @findex setcdr
7384
7385 The @code{setcdr} function is similar to the @code{setcar} function,
7386 except that the function replaces the second and subsequent elements of
7387 a list rather than the first element.
7388
7389 (To see how to change the last element of a list, look ahead to
7390 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, which uses
7391 the @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr} functions.)
7392
7393 @need 1200
7394 To see how this works, set the value of the variable to a list of
7395 domesticated animals by evaluating the following expression:
7396
7397 @smallexample
7398 (setq domesticated-animals '(horse cow sheep goat))
7399 @end smallexample
7400
7401 @need 1200
7402 @noindent
7403 If you now evaluate the list, you will be returned the list
7404 @code{(horse cow sheep goat)}:
7405
7406 @smallexample
7407 @group
7408 domesticated-animals
7409 @result{} (horse cow sheep goat)
7410 @end group
7411 @end smallexample
7412
7413 @need 1200
7414 Next, evaluate @code{setcdr} with two arguments, the name of the
7415 variable which has a list as its value, and the list to which the
7416 @sc{cdr} of the first list will be set;
7417
7418 @smallexample
7419 (setcdr domesticated-animals '(cat dog))
7420 @end smallexample
7421
7422 @noindent
7423 If you evaluate this expression, the list @code{(cat dog)} will appear
7424 in the echo area. This is the value returned by the function. The
7425 result we are interested in is the ``side effect'', which we can see by
7426 evaluating the variable @code{domesticated-animals}:
7427
7428 @smallexample
7429 @group
7430 domesticated-animals
7431 @result{} (horse cat dog)
7432 @end group
7433 @end smallexample
7434
7435 @noindent
7436 Indeed, the list is changed from @code{(horse cow sheep goat)} to
7437 @code{(horse cat dog)}. The @sc{cdr} of the list is changed from
7438 @code{(cow sheep goat)} to @code{(cat dog)}.
7439
7440 @node cons Exercise
7441 @section Exercise
7442
7443 Construct a list of four birds by evaluating several expressions with
7444 @code{cons}. Find out what happens when you @code{cons} a list onto
7445 itself. Replace the first element of the list of four birds with a
7446 fish. Replace the rest of that list with a list of other fish.
7447
7448 @node Cutting & Storing Text
7449 @chapter Cutting and Storing Text
7450 @cindex Cutting and storing text
7451 @cindex Storing and cutting text
7452 @cindex Killing text
7453 @cindex Clipping text
7454 @cindex Erasing text
7455 @cindex Deleting text
7456
7457 Whenever you cut or clip text out of a buffer with a ``kill'' command in
7458 GNU Emacs, it is stored in a list and you can bring it back with a
7459 ``yank'' command.
7460
7461 (The use of the word ``kill'' in Emacs for processes which specifically
7462 @emph{do not} destroy the values of the entities is an unfortunate
7463 historical accident. A much more appropriate word would be ``clip'' since
7464 that is what the kill commands do; they clip text out of a buffer and
7465 put it into storage from which it can be brought back. I have often
7466 been tempted to replace globally all occurrences of ``kill'' in the Emacs
7467 sources with ``clip'' and all occurrences of ``killed'' with ``clipped''.)
7468
7469 @menu
7470 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
7471 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
7472 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
7473 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
7474 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
7475 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
7476 * cons & search-fwd Review::
7477 * search Exercises::
7478 @end menu
7479
7480 @ifnottex
7481 @node Storing Text
7482 @unnumberedsec Storing Text in a List
7483 @end ifnottex
7484
7485 When text is cut out of a buffer, it is stored on a list. Successive
7486 pieces of text are stored on the list successively, so the list might
7487 look like this:
7488
7489 @smallexample
7490 ("a piece of text" "previous piece")
7491 @end smallexample
7492
7493 @need 1200
7494 @noindent
7495 The function @code{cons} can be used to create a new list from a piece
7496 of text (an ``atom'', to use the jargon) and an existing list, like
7497 this:
7498
7499 @smallexample
7500 @group
7501 (cons "another piece"
7502 '("a piece of text" "previous piece"))
7503 @end group
7504 @end smallexample
7505
7506 @need 1200
7507 @noindent
7508 If you evaluate this expression, a list of three elements will appear in
7509 the echo area:
7510
7511 @smallexample
7512 ("another piece" "a piece of text" "previous piece")
7513 @end smallexample
7514
7515 With the @code{car} and @code{nthcdr} functions, you can retrieve
7516 whichever piece of text you want. For example, in the following code,
7517 @code{nthcdr 1 @dots{}} returns the list with the first item removed;
7518 and the @code{car} returns the first element of that remainder---the
7519 second element of the original list:
7520
7521 @smallexample
7522 @group
7523 (car (nthcdr 1 '("another piece"
7524 "a piece of text"
7525 "previous piece")))
7526 @result{} "a piece of text"
7527 @end group
7528 @end smallexample
7529
7530 The actual functions in Emacs are more complex than this, of course.
7531 The code for cutting and retrieving text has to be written so that
7532 Emacs can figure out which element in the list you want---the first,
7533 second, third, or whatever. In addition, when you get to the end of
7534 the list, Emacs should give you the first element of the list, rather
7535 than nothing at all.
7536
7537 The list that holds the pieces of text is called the @dfn{kill ring}.
7538 This chapter leads up to a description of the kill ring and how it is
7539 used by first tracing how the @code{zap-to-char} function works. This
7540 function uses (or ``calls'') a function that invokes a function that
7541 manipulates the kill ring. Thus, before reaching the mountains, we
7542 climb the foothills.
7543
7544 A subsequent chapter describes how text that is cut from the buffer is
7545 retrieved. @xref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}.
7546
7547 @node zap-to-char
7548 @section @code{zap-to-char}
7549 @findex zap-to-char
7550
7551 Let us look at the interactive @code{zap-to-char} function.
7552
7553 @menu
7554 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
7555 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
7556 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
7557 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
7558 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
7559 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
7560 @end menu
7561
7562 @ifnottex
7563 @node Complete zap-to-char
7564 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{zap-to-char} Implementation
7565 @end ifnottex
7566
7567 The @code{zap-to-char} function removes the text in the region between
7568 the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) up to and including the
7569 next occurrence of a specified character. The text that
7570 @code{zap-to-char} removes is put in the kill ring; and it can be
7571 retrieved from the kill ring by typing @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}). If
7572 the command is given an argument, it removes text through that number
7573 of occurrences. Thus, if the cursor were at the beginning of this
7574 sentence and the character were @samp{s}, @samp{Thus} would be
7575 removed. If the argument were two, @samp{Thus, if the curs} would be
7576 removed, up to and including the @samp{s} in @samp{cursor}.
7577
7578 If the specified character is not found, @code{zap-to-char} will say
7579 ``Search failed'', tell you the character you typed, and not remove
7580 any text.
7581
7582 In order to determine how much text to remove, @code{zap-to-char} uses
7583 a search function. Searches are used extensively in code that
7584 manipulates text, and we will focus attention on them as well as on the
7585 deletion command.
7586
7587 @ignore
7588 @c GNU Emacs version 19
7589 (defun zap-to-char (arg char) ; version 19 implementation
7590 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7591 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7592 (interactive "*p\ncZap to char: ")
7593 (kill-region (point)
7594 (progn
7595 (search-forward
7596 (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7597 (point))))
7598 @end ignore
7599
7600 @need 1250
7601 Here is the complete text of the version 22 implementation of the function:
7602
7603 @c GNU Emacs 22
7604 @smallexample
7605 @group
7606 (defun zap-to-char (arg char)
7607 "Kill up to and including ARG’th occurrence of CHAR.
7608 Case is ignored if ‘case-fold-search’ is non-nil in the current buffer.
7609 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7610 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7611 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7612 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7613 (kill-region (point) (progn
7614 (search-forward (char-to-string char)
7615 nil nil arg)
7616 (point))))
7617 @end group
7618 @end smallexample
7619
7620 The documentation is thorough. You do need to know the jargon meaning
7621 of the word ``kill''.
7622
7623 @node zap-to-char interactive
7624 @subsection The @code{interactive} Expression
7625
7626 @need 800
7627 The interactive expression in the @code{zap-to-char} command looks like
7628 this:
7629
7630 @smallexample
7631 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7632 @end smallexample
7633
7634 The part within quotation marks, @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "}, specifies
7635 two different things. First, and most simply, is the @samp{p}.
7636 This part is separated from the next part by a newline, @samp{\n}.
7637 The @samp{p} means that the first argument to the function will be
7638 passed the value of a ``processed prefix''. The prefix argument is
7639 passed by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number, or @kbd{M-} and a number. If
7640 the function is called interactively without a prefix, 1 is passed to
7641 this argument.
7642
7643 The second part of @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "} is
7644 @samp{cZap to char:@: }. In this part, the lower case @samp{c}
7645 indicates that @code{interactive} expects a prompt and that the
7646 argument will be a character. The prompt follows the @samp{c} and is
7647 the string @samp{Zap to char:@: } (with a space after the colon to
7648 make it look good).
7649
7650 What all this does is prepare the arguments to @code{zap-to-char} so they
7651 are of the right type, and give the user a prompt.
7652
7653 In a read-only buffer, the @code{zap-to-char} function copies the text
7654 to the kill ring, but does not remove it. The echo area displays a
7655 message saying that the buffer is read-only. Also, the terminal may
7656 beep or blink at you.
7657
7658 @node zap-to-char body
7659 @subsection The Body of @code{zap-to-char}
7660
7661 The body of the @code{zap-to-char} function contains the code that
7662 kills (that is, removes) the text in the region from the current
7663 position of the cursor up to and including the specified character.
7664
7665 The first part of the code looks like this:
7666
7667 @smallexample
7668 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7669 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7670 (kill-region (point) (progn
7671 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7672 (point)))
7673 @end smallexample
7674
7675 @noindent
7676 @code{char-table-p} is an hitherto unseen function. It determines
7677 whether its argument is a character table. When it is, it sets the
7678 character passed to @code{zap-to-char} to one of them, if that
7679 character exists, or to the character itself. (This becomes important
7680 for certain characters in non-European languages. The @code{aref}
7681 function extracts an element from an array. It is an array-specific
7682 function that is not described in this document. @xref{Arrays, ,
7683 Arrays, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7684
7685 @noindent
7686 @code{(point)} is the current position of the cursor.
7687
7688 The next part of the code is an expression using @code{progn}. The body
7689 of the @code{progn} consists of calls to @code{search-forward} and
7690 @code{point}.
7691
7692 It is easier to understand how @code{progn} works after learning about
7693 @code{search-forward}, so we will look at @code{search-forward} and
7694 then at @code{progn}.
7695
7696 @node search-forward
7697 @subsection The @code{search-forward} Function
7698 @findex search-forward
7699
7700 The @code{search-forward} function is used to locate the
7701 zapped-for-character in @code{zap-to-char}. If the search is
7702 successful, @code{search-forward} leaves point immediately after the
7703 last character in the target string. (In @code{zap-to-char}, the
7704 target string is just one character long. @code{zap-to-char} uses the
7705 function @code{char-to-string} to ensure that the computer treats that
7706 character as a string.) If the search is backwards,
7707 @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first character in
7708 the target. Also, @code{search-forward} returns @code{t} for true.
7709 (Moving point is therefore a ``side effect''.)
7710
7711 @need 1250
7712 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{search-forward} function looks like this:
7713
7714 @smallexample
7715 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7716 @end smallexample
7717
7718 The @code{search-forward} function takes four arguments:
7719
7720 @enumerate
7721 @item
7722 The first argument is the target, what is searched for. This must be a
7723 string, such as @samp{"z"}.
7724
7725 As it happens, the argument passed to @code{zap-to-char} is a single
7726 character. Because of the way computers are built, the Lisp
7727 interpreter may treat a single character as being different from a
7728 string of characters. Inside the computer, a single character has a
7729 different electronic format than a string of one character. (A single
7730 character can often be recorded in the computer using exactly one
7731 byte; but a string may be longer, and the computer needs to be ready
7732 for this.) Since the @code{search-forward} function searches for a
7733 string, the character that the @code{zap-to-char} function receives as
7734 its argument must be converted inside the computer from one format to
7735 the other; otherwise the @code{search-forward} function will fail.
7736 The @code{char-to-string} function is used to make this conversion.
7737
7738 @item
7739 The second argument bounds the search; it is specified as a position in
7740 the buffer. In this case, the search can go to the end of the buffer,
7741 so no bound is set and the second argument is @code{nil}.
7742
7743 @item
7744 The third argument tells the function what it should do if the search
7745 fails---it can signal an error (and print a message) or it can return
7746 @code{nil}. A @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
7747 signal an error when the search fails.
7748
7749 @item
7750 The fourth argument to @code{search-forward} is the repeat count---how
7751 many occurrences of the string to look for. This argument is optional
7752 and if the function is called without a repeat count, this argument is
7753 passed the value 1. If this argument is negative, the search goes
7754 backwards.
7755 @end enumerate
7756
7757 @need 800
7758 In template form, a @code{search-forward} expression looks like this:
7759
7760 @smallexample
7761 @group
7762 (search-forward "@var{target-string}"
7763 @var{limit-of-search}
7764 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
7765 @var{repeat-count})
7766 @end group
7767 @end smallexample
7768
7769 We will look at @code{progn} next.
7770
7771 @node progn
7772 @subsection The @code{progn} Special Form
7773 @findex progn
7774
7775 @code{progn} is a special form that causes each of its arguments to be
7776 evaluated in sequence and then returns the value of the last one. The
7777 preceding expressions are evaluated only for the side effects they
7778 perform. The values produced by them are discarded.
7779
7780 @need 800
7781 The template for a @code{progn} expression is very simple:
7782
7783 @smallexample
7784 @group
7785 (progn
7786 @var{body}@dots{})
7787 @end group
7788 @end smallexample
7789
7790 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{progn} expression has to do two things:
7791 put point in exactly the right position; and return the location of
7792 point so that @code{kill-region} will know how far to kill to.
7793
7794 The first argument to the @code{progn} is @code{search-forward}. When
7795 @code{search-forward} finds the string, the function leaves point
7796 immediately after the last character in the target string. (In this
7797 case the target string is just one character long.) If the search is
7798 backwards, @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first
7799 character in the target. The movement of point is a side effect.
7800
7801 The second and last argument to @code{progn} is the expression
7802 @code{(point)}. This expression returns the value of point, which in
7803 this case will be the location to which it has been moved by
7804 @code{search-forward}. (In the source, a line that tells the function
7805 to go to the previous character, if it is going forward, was commented
7806 out in 1999; I don't remember whether that feature or mis-feature was
7807 ever a part of the distributed source.) The value of @code{point} is
7808 returned by the @code{progn} expression and is passed to
7809 @code{kill-region} as @code{kill-region}'s second argument.
7810
7811 @node Summing up zap-to-char
7812 @subsection Summing up @code{zap-to-char}
7813
7814 Now that we have seen how @code{search-forward} and @code{progn} work,
7815 we can see how the @code{zap-to-char} function works as a whole.
7816
7817 The first argument to @code{kill-region} is the position of the cursor
7818 when the @code{zap-to-char} command is given---the value of point at
7819 that time. Within the @code{progn}, the search function then moves
7820 point to just after the zapped-to-character and @code{point} returns the
7821 value of this location. The @code{kill-region} function puts together
7822 these two values of point, the first one as the beginning of the region
7823 and the second one as the end of the region, and removes the region.
7824
7825 The @code{progn} special form is necessary because the
7826 @code{kill-region} command takes two arguments; and it would fail if
7827 @code{search-forward} and @code{point} expressions were written in
7828 sequence as two additional arguments. The @code{progn} expression is
7829 a single argument to @code{kill-region} and returns the one value that
7830 @code{kill-region} needs for its second argument.
7831
7832 @node kill-region
7833 @section @code{kill-region}
7834 @findex kill-region
7835
7836 The @code{zap-to-char} function uses the @code{kill-region} function.
7837 This function clips text from a region and copies that text to
7838 the kill ring, from which it may be retrieved.
7839
7840 @ignore
7841 GNU Emacs 22:
7842
7843 (defun kill-region (beg end &optional yank-handler)
7844 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
7845 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
7846 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there.
7847 \(If you want to kill and then yank immediately, use \\[kill-ring-save].)
7848
7849 If you want to append the killed region to the last killed text,
7850 use \\[append-next-kill] before \\[kill-region].
7851
7852 If the buffer is read-only, Emacs will beep and refrain from deleting
7853 the text, but put the text in the kill ring anyway. This means that
7854 you can use the killing commands to copy text from a read-only buffer.
7855
7856 This is the primitive for programs to kill text (as opposed to deleting it).
7857 Supply two arguments, character positions indicating the stretch of text
7858 to be killed.
7859 Any command that calls this function is a \"kill command\".
7860 If the previous command was also a kill command,
7861 the text killed this time appends to the text killed last time
7862 to make one entry in the kill ring.
7863
7864 In Lisp code, optional third arg YANK-HANDLER, if non-nil,
7865 specifies the yank-handler text property to be set on the killed
7866 text. See ‘insert-for-yank’."
7867 ;; Pass point first, then mark, because the order matters
7868 ;; when calling kill-append.
7869 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
7870 (unless (and beg end)
7871 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
7872 (condition-case nil
7873 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
7874 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
7875 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
7876 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
7877 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
7878 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
7879 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
7880 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
7881 nil)
7882 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only)
7883 ;; The code above failed because the buffer, or some of the characters
7884 ;; in the region, are read-only.
7885 ;; We should beep, in case the user just isn't aware of this.
7886 ;; However, there's no harm in putting
7887 ;; the region's text in the kill ring, anyway.
7888 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
7889 ;; Set this-command now, so it will be set even if we get an error.
7890 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
7891 ;; This should barf, if appropriate, and give us the correct error.
7892 (if kill-read-only-ok
7893 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
7894 ;; Signal an error if the buffer is read-only.
7895 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
7896 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
7897 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
7898 @end ignore
7899
7900 The Emacs 22 version of that function uses @code{condition-case} and
7901 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, both of which we will explain.
7902 @code{condition-case} is an important special form.
7903
7904 In essence, the @code{kill-region} function calls
7905 @code{condition-case}, which takes three arguments. In this function,
7906 the first argument does nothing. The second argument contains the
7907 code that does the work when all goes well. The third argument
7908 contains the code that is called in the event of an error.
7909
7910 @menu
7911 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
7912 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
7913 * Lisp macro::
7914 @end menu
7915
7916 @ifnottex
7917 @node Complete kill-region
7918 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{kill-region} Definition
7919 @end ifnottex
7920
7921 @need 1200
7922 We will go through the @code{condition-case} code in a moment. First,
7923 let us look at the definition of @code{kill-region}, with comments
7924 added:
7925
7926 @c GNU Emacs 22:
7927 @smallexample
7928 @group
7929 (defun kill-region (beg end)
7930 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
7931 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
7932 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there. @dots{} "
7933 @end group
7934
7935 @group
7936 ;; @bullet{} Since order matters, pass point first.
7937 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
7938 ;; @bullet{} And tell us if we cannot cut the text.
7939 ;; 'unless' is an 'if' without a then-part.
7940 (unless (and beg end)
7941 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
7942 @end group
7943
7944 @group
7945 ;; @bullet{} 'condition-case' takes three arguments.
7946 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
7947 ;; information about the error signal is not
7948 ;; stored for use by another function.
7949 (condition-case nil
7950 @end group
7951
7952 @group
7953 ;; @bullet{} The second argument to 'condition-case' tells the
7954 ;; Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
7955 @end group
7956
7957 @group
7958 ;; It starts with a 'let' function that extracts the string
7959 ;; and tests whether it exists. If so (that is what the
7960 ;; 'when' checks), it calls an 'if' function that determines
7961 ;; whether the previous command was another call to
7962 ;; 'kill-region'; if it was, then the new text is appended to
7963 ;; the previous text; if not, then a different function,
7964 ;; 'kill-new', is called.
7965 @end group
7966
7967 @group
7968 ;; The 'kill-append' function concatenates the new string and
7969 ;; the old. The 'kill-new' function inserts text into a new
7970 ;; item in the kill ring.
7971 @end group
7972
7973 @group
7974 ;; 'when' is an 'if' without an else-part. The second 'when'
7975 ;; again checks whether the current string exists; in
7976 ;; addition, it checks whether the previous command was
7977 ;; another call to 'kill-region'. If one or the other
7978 ;; condition is true, then it sets the current command to
7979 ;; be 'kill-region'.
7980 @end group
7981 @group
7982 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
7983 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
7984 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
7985 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
7986 @end group
7987 @group
7988 ;; @minus{} 'yank-handler' is an optional argument to
7989 ;; 'kill-region' that tells the 'kill-append' and
7990 ;; 'kill-new' functions how deal with properties
7991 ;; added to the text, such as 'bold' or 'italics'.
7992 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
7993 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
7994 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
7995 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
7996 nil)
7997 @end group
7998
7999 @group
8000 ;; @bullet{} The third argument to 'condition-case' tells the interpreter
8001 ;; what to do with an error.
8002 @end group
8003 @group
8004 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8005 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8006 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8007 ;; then the body is executed.
8008 @end group
8009 @group
8010 ;; The first part of the third argument is the following:
8011 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; the if-part
8012 ;; @dots{} the then-part
8013 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8014 @end group
8015 @group
8016 ;; Next, also as part of the then-part, set this-command, so
8017 ;; it will be set in an error
8018 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8019 ;; Finally, in the then-part, send a message if you may copy
8020 ;; the text to the kill ring without signaling an error, but
8021 ;; don't if you may not.
8022 @end group
8023 @group
8024 (if kill-read-only-ok
8025 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8026 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8027 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8028 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))
8029 @end group
8030 @end smallexample
8031
8032 @ignore
8033 @c v 21
8034 @smallexample
8035 @group
8036 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8037 "Kill between point and mark.
8038 The text is deleted but saved in the kill ring."
8039 (interactive "r")
8040 @end group
8041
8042 @group
8043 ;; 1. 'condition-case' takes three arguments.
8044 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8045 ;; information about the error signal is not
8046 ;; stored for use by another function.
8047 (condition-case nil
8048 @end group
8049
8050 @group
8051 ;; 2. The second argument to 'condition-case'
8052 ;; tells the Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8053 @end group
8054
8055 @group
8056 ;; The 'delete-and-extract-region' function usually does the
8057 ;; work. If the beginning and ending of the region are both
8058 ;; the same, then the variable 'string' will be empty, or nil
8059 (let ((string (delete-and-extract-region beg end)))
8060 @end group
8061
8062 @group
8063 ;; 'when' is an 'if' clause that cannot take an 'else-part'.
8064 ;; Emacs normally sets the value of 'last-command' to the
8065 ;; previous command.
8066 @end group
8067 @group
8068 ;; 'kill-append' concatenates the new string and the old.
8069 ;; 'kill-new' inserts text into a new item in the kill ring.
8070 (when string
8071 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8072 ;; if true, prepend string
8073 (kill-append string (< end beg))
8074 (kill-new string)))
8075 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8076 @end group
8077
8078 @group
8079 ;; 3. The third argument to 'condition-case' tells the interpreter
8080 ;; what to do with an error.
8081 @end group
8082 @group
8083 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8084 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8085 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8086 ;; then the body is executed.
8087 @end group
8088 @group
8089 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; this is the if-part
8090 ;; then...
8091 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8092 @end group
8093 @group
8094 (if kill-read-only-ok ;; usually this variable is nil
8095 (message "Read only text copied to kill ring")
8096 ;; or else, signal an error if the buffer is read-only;
8097 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8098 ;; and, in any case, signal that the text is read-only.
8099 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8100 @end group
8101 @end smallexample
8102 @end ignore
8103
8104 @node condition-case
8105 @subsection @code{condition-case}
8106 @findex condition-case
8107
8108 As we have seen earlier (@pxref{Making Errors, , Generate an Error
8109 Message}), when the Emacs Lisp interpreter has trouble evaluating an
8110 expression, it provides you with help; in the jargon, this is called
8111 ``signaling an error''. Usually, the computer stops the program and
8112 shows you a message.
8113
8114 However, some programs undertake complicated actions. They should not
8115 simply stop on an error. In the @code{kill-region} function, the most
8116 likely error is that you will try to kill text that is read-only and
8117 cannot be removed. So the @code{kill-region} function contains code
8118 to handle this circumstance. This code, which makes up the body of
8119 the @code{kill-region} function, is inside of a @code{condition-case}
8120 special form.
8121
8122 @need 800
8123 The template for @code{condition-case} looks like this:
8124
8125 @smallexample
8126 @group
8127 (condition-case
8128 @var{var}
8129 @var{bodyform}
8130 @var{error-handler}@dots{})
8131 @end group
8132 @end smallexample
8133
8134 The second argument, @var{bodyform}, is straightforward. The
8135 @code{condition-case} special form causes the Lisp interpreter to
8136 evaluate the code in @var{bodyform}. If no error occurs, the special
8137 form returns the code's value and produces the side-effects, if any.
8138
8139 In short, the @var{bodyform} part of a @code{condition-case}
8140 expression determines what should happen when everything works
8141 correctly.
8142
8143 However, if an error occurs, among its other actions, the function
8144 generating the error signal will define one or more error condition
8145 names.
8146
8147 An error handler is the third argument to @code{condition-case}.
8148 An error handler has two parts, a @var{condition-name} and a
8149 @var{body}. If the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8150 matches a condition name generated by an error, then the @var{body}
8151 part of the error handler is run.
8152
8153 As you will expect, the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8154 may be either a single condition name or a list of condition names.
8155
8156 Also, a complete @code{condition-case} expression may contain more
8157 than one error handler. When an error occurs, the first applicable
8158 handler is run.
8159
8160 Lastly, the first argument to the @code{condition-case} expression,
8161 the @var{var} argument, is sometimes bound to a variable that
8162 contains information about the error. However, if that argument is
8163 nil, as is the case in @code{kill-region}, that information is
8164 discarded.
8165
8166 @need 1200
8167 In brief, in the @code{kill-region} function, the code
8168 @code{condition-case} works like this:
8169
8170 @smallexample
8171 @group
8172 @var{If no errors}, @var{run only this code}
8173 @var{but}, @var{if errors}, @var{run this other code}.
8174 @end group
8175 @end smallexample
8176
8177 @ignore
8178 2006 Oct 24
8179 In Emacs 22,
8180 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8181 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8182 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8183 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8184
8185 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8186 this is line 8054
8187 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar} includes line 8350
8188 @end ignore
8189
8190 @node Lisp macro
8191 @subsection Lisp macro
8192 @cindex Macro, lisp
8193 @cindex Lisp macro
8194
8195 The part of the @code{condition-case} expression that is evaluated in
8196 the expectation that all goes well has a @code{when}. The code uses
8197 @code{when} to determine whether the @code{string} variable points to
8198 text that exists.
8199
8200 A @code{when} expression is simply a programmers' convenience. It is
8201 an @code{if} without the possibility of an else clause. In your mind,
8202 you can replace @code{when} with @code{if} and understand what goes
8203 on. That is what the Lisp interpreter does.
8204
8205 Technically speaking, @code{when} is a Lisp macro. A Lisp macro
8206 enables you to define new control constructs and other language
8207 features. It tells the interpreter how to compute another Lisp
8208 expression which will in turn compute the value. In this case, the
8209 ``other expression'' is an @code{if} expression.
8210
8211 The @code{kill-region} function definition also has an @code{unless}
8212 macro; it is the converse of @code{when}. The @code{unless} macro is
8213 an @code{if} without a then clause
8214
8215 For more about Lisp macros, see @ref{Macros, , Macros, elisp, The GNU
8216 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. The C programming language also
8217 provides macros. These are different, but also useful.
8218
8219 @ignore
8220 We will briefly look at C macros in
8221 @ref{Digression into C}.
8222 @end ignore
8223
8224 @need 1200
8225 Regarding the @code{when} macro, in the @code{condition-case}
8226 expression, when the string has content, then another conditional
8227 expression is executed. This is an @code{if} with both a then-part
8228 and an else-part.
8229
8230 @smallexample
8231 @group
8232 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8233 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8234 (kill-new string nil yank-handler))
8235 @end group
8236 @end smallexample
8237
8238 The then-part is evaluated if the previous command was another call to
8239 @code{kill-region}; if not, the else-part is evaluated.
8240
8241 @code{yank-handler} is an optional argument to @code{kill-region} that
8242 tells the @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new} functions how deal
8243 with properties added to the text, such as ``bold'' or ``italics''.
8244
8245 @code{last-command} is a variable that comes with Emacs that we have
8246 not seen before. Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs
8247 sets the value of @code{last-command} to the previous command.
8248
8249 @need 1200
8250 In this segment of the definition, the @code{if} expression checks
8251 whether the previous command was @code{kill-region}. If it was,
8252
8253 @smallexample
8254 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8255 @end smallexample
8256
8257 @noindent
8258 concatenates a copy of the newly clipped text to the just previously
8259 clipped text in the kill ring.
8260
8261 @node copy-region-as-kill
8262 @section @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8263 @findex copy-region-as-kill
8264 @findex nthcdr
8265
8266 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function copies a region of text from a
8267 buffer and (via either @code{kill-append} or @code{kill-new}) saves it
8268 in the @code{kill-ring}.
8269
8270 If you call @code{copy-region-as-kill} immediately after a
8271 @code{kill-region} command, Emacs appends the newly copied text to the
8272 previously copied text. This means that if you yank back the text, you
8273 get it all, from both this and the previous operation. On the other
8274 hand, if some other command precedes the @code{copy-region-as-kill},
8275 the function copies the text into a separate entry in the kill ring.
8276
8277 @menu
8278 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
8279 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
8280 @end menu
8281
8282 @ifnottex
8283 @node Complete copy-region-as-kill
8284 @unnumberedsubsec The complete @code{copy-region-as-kill} function definition
8285 @end ifnottex
8286
8287 @need 1200
8288 Here is the complete text of the version 22 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8289 function:
8290
8291 @smallexample
8292 @group
8293 (defun copy-region-as-kill (beg end)
8294 "Save the region as if killed, but don’t kill it.
8295 In Transient Mark mode, deactivate the mark.
8296 If ‘interprogram-cut-function’ is non-nil, also save the text for a window
8297 system cut and paste."
8298 (interactive "r")
8299 @end group
8300 @group
8301 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8302 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8303 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8304 @end group
8305 @group
8306 (if transient-mark-mode
8307 (setq deactivate-mark t))
8308 nil)
8309 @end group
8310 @end smallexample
8311
8312 @need 800
8313 As usual, this function can be divided into its component parts:
8314
8315 @smallexample
8316 @group
8317 (defun copy-region-as-kill (@var{argument-list})
8318 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
8319 (interactive "r")
8320 @var{body}@dots{})
8321 @end group
8322 @end smallexample
8323
8324 The arguments are @code{beg} and @code{end} and the function is
8325 interactive with @code{"r"}, so the two arguments must refer to the
8326 beginning and end of the region. If you have been reading through this
8327 document from the beginning, understanding these parts of a function is
8328 almost becoming routine.
8329
8330 The documentation is somewhat confusing unless you remember that the
8331 word ``kill'' has a meaning different from usual. The ``Transient Mark''
8332 and @code{interprogram-cut-function} comments explain certain
8333 side-effects.
8334
8335 After you once set a mark, a buffer always contains a region. If you
8336 wish, you can use Transient Mark mode to highlight the region
8337 temporarily. (No one wants to highlight the region all the time, so
8338 Transient Mark mode highlights it only at appropriate times. Many
8339 people turn off Transient Mark mode, so the region is never
8340 highlighted.)
8341
8342 Also, a windowing system allows you to copy, cut, and paste among
8343 different programs. In the X windowing system, for example, the
8344 @code{interprogram-cut-function} function is @code{x-select-text},
8345 which works with the windowing system's equivalent of the Emacs kill
8346 ring.
8347
8348 The body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function starts with an
8349 @code{if} clause. What this clause does is distinguish between two
8350 different situations: whether or not this command is executed
8351 immediately after a previous @code{kill-region} command. In the first
8352 case, the new region is appended to the previously copied text.
8353 Otherwise, it is inserted into the beginning of the kill ring as a
8354 separate piece of text from the previous piece.
8355
8356 The last two lines of the function prevent the region from lighting up
8357 if Transient Mark mode is turned on.
8358
8359 The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill} merits discussion in detail.
8360
8361 @node copy-region-as-kill body
8362 @subsection The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8363
8364 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function works in much the same way as
8365 the @code{kill-region} function. Both are written so that two or more
8366 kills in a row combine their text into a single entry. If you yank
8367 back the text from the kill ring, you get it all in one piece.
8368 Moreover, kills that kill forward from the current position of the
8369 cursor are added to the end of the previously copied text and commands
8370 that copy text backwards add it to the beginning of the previously
8371 copied text. This way, the words in the text stay in the proper
8372 order.
8373
8374 Like @code{kill-region}, the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function makes
8375 use of the @code{last-command} variable that keeps track of the
8376 previous Emacs command.
8377
8378 @menu
8379 * last-command & this-command::
8380 * kill-append function::
8381 * kill-new function::
8382 @end menu
8383
8384 @ifnottex
8385 @node last-command & this-command
8386 @unnumberedsubsubsec @code{last-command} and @code{this-command}
8387 @end ifnottex
8388
8389 Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs sets the value of
8390 @code{this-command} to the function being executed (which in this case
8391 would be @code{copy-region-as-kill}). At the same time, Emacs sets
8392 the value of @code{last-command} to the previous value of
8393 @code{this-command}.
8394
8395 In the first part of the body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8396 function, an @code{if} expression determines whether the value of
8397 @code{last-command} is @code{kill-region}. If so, the then-part of
8398 the @code{if} expression is evaluated; it uses the @code{kill-append}
8399 function to concatenate the text copied at this call to the function
8400 with the text already in the first element (the @sc{car}) of the kill
8401 ring. On the other hand, if the value of @code{last-command} is not
8402 @code{kill-region}, then the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function
8403 attaches a new element to the kill ring using the @code{kill-new}
8404 function.
8405
8406 @need 1250
8407 The @code{if} expression reads as follows; it uses @code{eq}:
8408
8409 @smallexample
8410 @group
8411 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8412 ;; @r{then-part}
8413 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8414 ;; @r{else-part}
8415 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8416 @end group
8417 @end smallexample
8418
8419 @findex filter-buffer-substring
8420 (The @code{filter-buffer-substring} function returns a filtered
8421 substring of the buffer, if any. Optionally---the arguments are not
8422 here, so neither is done---the function may delete the initial text or
8423 return the text without its properties; this function is a replacement
8424 for the older @code{buffer-substring} function, which came before text
8425 properties were implemented.)
8426
8427 @findex eq @r{(example of use)}
8428 @noindent
8429 The @code{eq} function tests whether its first argument is the same Lisp
8430 object as its second argument. The @code{eq} function is similar to the
8431 @code{equal} function in that it is used to test for equality, but
8432 differs in that it determines whether two representations are actually
8433 the same object inside the computer, but with different names.
8434 @code{equal} determines whether the structure and contents of two
8435 expressions are the same.
8436
8437 If the previous command was @code{kill-region}, then the Emacs Lisp
8438 interpreter calls the @code{kill-append} function
8439
8440 @node kill-append function
8441 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-append} function
8442 @findex kill-append
8443
8444 @need 800
8445 The @code{kill-append} function looks like this:
8446
8447 @c in GNU Emacs 22
8448 @smallexample
8449 @group
8450 (defun kill-append (string before-p &optional yank-handler)
8451 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8452 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8453 @dots{} "
8454 (let* ((cur (car kill-ring)))
8455 (kill-new (if before-p (concat string cur) (concat cur string))
8456 (or (= (length cur) 0)
8457 (equal yank-handler
8458 (get-text-property 0 'yank-handler cur)))
8459 yank-handler)))
8460 @end group
8461 @end smallexample
8462
8463 @ignore
8464 was:
8465 (defun kill-append (string before-p)
8466 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8467 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8468 If `interprogram-cut-function' is set, pass the resulting kill to
8469 it."
8470 (kill-new (if before-p
8471 (concat string (car kill-ring))
8472 (concat (car kill-ring) string))
8473 t))
8474 @end ignore
8475
8476 @noindent
8477 The @code{kill-append} function is fairly straightforward. It uses
8478 the @code{kill-new} function, which we will discuss in more detail in
8479 a moment.
8480
8481 (Also, the function provides an optional argument called
8482 @code{yank-handler}; when invoked, this argument tells the function
8483 how to deal with properties added to the text, such as ``bold'' or
8484 ``italics''.)
8485
8486 @c !!! bug in GNU Emacs 22 version of kill-append ?
8487 It has a @code{let*} function to set the value of the first element of
8488 the kill ring to @code{cur}. (I do not know why the function does not
8489 use @code{let} instead; only one value is set in the expression.
8490 Perhaps this is a bug that produces no problems?)
8491
8492 Consider the conditional that is one of the two arguments to
8493 @code{kill-new}. It uses @code{concat} to concatenate the new text to
8494 the @sc{car} of the kill ring. Whether it prepends or appends the
8495 text depends on the results of an @code{if} expression:
8496
8497 @smallexample
8498 @group
8499 (if before-p ; @r{if-part}
8500 (concat string cur) ; @r{then-part}
8501 (concat cur string)) ; @r{else-part}
8502 @end group
8503 @end smallexample
8504
8505 @noindent
8506 If the region being killed is before the region that was killed in the
8507 last command, then it should be prepended before the material that was
8508 saved in the previous kill; and conversely, if the killed text follows
8509 what was just killed, it should be appended after the previous text.
8510 The @code{if} expression depends on the predicate @code{before-p} to
8511 decide whether the newly saved text should be put before or after the
8512 previously saved text.
8513
8514 The symbol @code{before-p} is the name of one of the arguments to
8515 @code{kill-append}. When the @code{kill-append} function is
8516 evaluated, it is bound to the value returned by evaluating the actual
8517 argument. In this case, this is the expression @code{(< end beg)}.
8518 This expression does not directly determine whether the killed text in
8519 this command is located before or after the kill text of the last
8520 command; what it does is determine whether the value of the variable
8521 @code{end} is less than the value of the variable @code{beg}. If it
8522 is, it means that the user is most likely heading towards the
8523 beginning of the buffer. Also, the result of evaluating the predicate
8524 expression, @code{(< end beg)}, will be true and the text will be
8525 prepended before the previous text. On the other hand, if the value of
8526 the variable @code{end} is greater than the value of the variable
8527 @code{beg}, the text will be appended after the previous text.
8528
8529 @need 800
8530 When the newly saved text will be prepended, then the string with the new
8531 text will be concatenated before the old text:
8532
8533 @smallexample
8534 (concat string cur)
8535 @end smallexample
8536
8537 @need 1200
8538 @noindent
8539 But if the text will be appended, it will be concatenated
8540 after the old text:
8541
8542 @smallexample
8543 (concat cur string))
8544 @end smallexample
8545
8546 To understand how this works, we first need to review the
8547 @code{concat} function. The @code{concat} function links together or
8548 unites two strings of text. The result is a string. For example:
8549
8550 @smallexample
8551 @group
8552 (concat "abc" "def")
8553 @result{} "abcdef"
8554 @end group
8555
8556 @group
8557 (concat "new "
8558 (car '("first element" "second element")))
8559 @result{} "new first element"
8560
8561 (concat (car
8562 '("first element" "second element")) " modified")
8563 @result{} "first element modified"
8564 @end group
8565 @end smallexample
8566
8567 We can now make sense of @code{kill-append}: it modifies the contents
8568 of the kill ring. The kill ring is a list, each element of which is
8569 saved text. The @code{kill-append} function uses the @code{kill-new}
8570 function which in turn uses the @code{setcar} function.
8571
8572 @node kill-new function
8573 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-new} function
8574 @findex kill-new
8575
8576 @c in GNU Emacs 22, additional documentation to kill-new:
8577 @ignore
8578 Optional third arguments YANK-HANDLER controls how the STRING is later
8579 inserted into a buffer; see `insert-for-yank' for details.
8580 When a yank handler is specified, STRING must be non-empty (the yank
8581 handler, if non-nil, is stored as a `yank-handler' text property on STRING).
8582
8583 When the yank handler has a non-nil PARAM element, the original STRING
8584 argument is not used by `insert-for-yank'. However, since Lisp code
8585 may access and use elements from the kill ring directly, the STRING
8586 argument should still be a \"useful\" string for such uses."
8587 @end ignore
8588 @need 1200
8589 The @code{kill-new} function looks like this:
8590
8591 @smallexample
8592 @group
8593 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace yank-handler)
8594 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8595 Set ‘kill-ring-yank-pointer’ to point to it.
8596
8597 If `interprogram-cut-function’ is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8598 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8599 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list.
8600 @dots{}"
8601 @end group
8602 @group
8603 (if (> (length string) 0)
8604 (if yank-handler
8605 (put-text-property 0 (length string)
8606 'yank-handler yank-handler string))
8607 (if yank-handler
8608 (signal 'args-out-of-range
8609 (list string "yank-handler specified for empty string"))))
8610 @end group
8611 @group
8612 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8613 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8614 @end group
8615 @group
8616 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8617 (setcar kill-ring string)
8618 (push string kill-ring)
8619 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8620 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8621 @end group
8622 @group
8623 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8624 (if interprogram-cut-function
8625 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8626 @end group
8627 @end smallexample
8628 @ignore
8629 was:
8630 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace)
8631 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8632 Set the kill-ring-yank pointer to point to it.
8633 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8634 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8635 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list."
8636 (and (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8637 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8638 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8639 (setcar kill-ring string)
8640 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8641 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8642 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8643 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8644 (if interprogram-cut-function
8645 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8646 @end ignore
8647
8648 (Notice that the function is not interactive.)
8649
8650 As usual, we can look at this function in parts.
8651
8652 The function definition has an optional @code{yank-handler} argument,
8653 which when invoked tells the function how to deal with properties
8654 added to the text, such as ``bold'' or ``italics''. We will skip that.
8655
8656 @need 1200
8657 The first line of the documentation makes sense:
8658
8659 @smallexample
8660 Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8661 @end smallexample
8662
8663 @noindent
8664 Let's skip over the rest of the documentation for the moment.
8665
8666 @noindent
8667 Also, let's skip over the initial @code{if} expression and those lines
8668 of code involving @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu}. We will explain
8669 them below.
8670
8671 @need 1200
8672 The critical lines are these:
8673
8674 @smallexample
8675 @group
8676 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8677 ;; @r{then}
8678 (setcar kill-ring string)
8679 @end group
8680 @group
8681 ;; @r{else}
8682 (push string kill-ring)
8683 @end group
8684 @group
8685 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8686 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8687 ;; @r{avoid overly long kill ring}
8688 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8689 @end group
8690 @group
8691 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8692 (if interprogram-cut-function
8693 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8694 @end group
8695 @end smallexample
8696
8697 The conditional test is @w{@code{(and replace kill-ring)}}.
8698 This will be true when two conditions are met: the kill ring has
8699 something in it, and the @code{replace} variable is true.
8700
8701 @need 1250
8702 When the @code{kill-append} function sets @code{replace} to be true
8703 and when the kill ring has at least one item in it, the @code{setcar}
8704 expression is executed:
8705
8706 @smallexample
8707 (setcar kill-ring string)
8708 @end smallexample
8709
8710 The @code{setcar} function actually changes the first element of the
8711 @code{kill-ring} list to the value of @code{string}. It replaces the
8712 first element.
8713
8714 @need 1250
8715 On the other hand, if the kill ring is empty, or replace is false, the
8716 else-part of the condition is executed:
8717
8718 @smallexample
8719 (push string kill-ring)
8720 @end smallexample
8721
8722 @noindent
8723 @need 1250
8724 @code{push} puts its first argument onto the second. It is similar to
8725 the older
8726
8727 @smallexample
8728 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8729 @end smallexample
8730
8731 @noindent
8732 @need 1250
8733 or the newer
8734
8735 @smallexample
8736 (add-to-list kill-ring string)
8737 @end smallexample
8738
8739 @noindent
8740 When it is false, the expression first constructs a new version of the
8741 kill ring by prepending @code{string} to the existing kill ring as a
8742 new element (that is what the @code{push} does). Then it executes a
8743 second @code{if} clause. This second @code{if} clause keeps the kill
8744 ring from growing too long.
8745
8746 Let's look at these two expressions in order.
8747
8748 The @code{push} line of the else-part sets the new value of the kill
8749 ring to what results from adding the string being killed to the old
8750 kill ring.
8751
8752 We can see how this works with an example.
8753
8754 @need 800
8755 First,
8756
8757 @smallexample
8758 (setq example-list '("here is a clause" "another clause"))
8759 @end smallexample
8760
8761 @need 1200
8762 @noindent
8763 After evaluating this expression with @kbd{C-x C-e}, you can evaluate
8764 @code{example-list} and see what it returns:
8765
8766 @smallexample
8767 @group
8768 example-list
8769 @result{} ("here is a clause" "another clause")
8770 @end group
8771 @end smallexample
8772
8773 @need 1200
8774 @noindent
8775 Now, we can add a new element on to this list by evaluating the
8776 following expression:
8777 @findex push, @r{example}
8778
8779 @smallexample
8780 (push "a third clause" example-list)
8781 @end smallexample
8782
8783 @need 800
8784 @noindent
8785 When we evaluate @code{example-list}, we find its value is:
8786
8787 @smallexample
8788 @group
8789 example-list
8790 @result{} ("a third clause" "here is a clause" "another clause")
8791 @end group
8792 @end smallexample
8793
8794 @noindent
8795 Thus, the third clause is added to the list by @code{push}.
8796
8797 @need 1200
8798 Now for the second part of the @code{if} clause. This expression
8799 keeps the kill ring from growing too long. It looks like this:
8800
8801 @smallexample
8802 @group
8803 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8804 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil))
8805 @end group
8806 @end smallexample
8807
8808 The code checks whether the length of the kill ring is greater than
8809 the maximum permitted length. This is the value of
8810 @code{kill-ring-max} (which is 60, by default). If the length of the
8811 kill ring is too long, then this code sets the last element of the
8812 kill ring to @code{nil}. It does this by using two functions,
8813 @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr}.
8814
8815 We looked at @code{setcdr} earlier (@pxref{setcdr, , @code{setcdr}}).
8816 It sets the @sc{cdr} of a list, just as @code{setcar} sets the
8817 @sc{car} of a list. In this case, however, @code{setcdr} will not be
8818 setting the @sc{cdr} of the whole kill ring; the @code{nthcdr}
8819 function is used to cause it to set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last
8820 element of the kill ring---this means that since the @sc{cdr} of the
8821 next to last element is the last element of the kill ring, it will set
8822 the last element of the kill ring.
8823
8824 @findex nthcdr, @r{example}
8825 The @code{nthcdr} function works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a
8826 list---it takes the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr}
8827 @dots{} It does this @var{N} times and returns the results.
8828 (@xref{nthcdr, , @code{nthcdr}}.)
8829
8830 @findex setcdr, @r{example}
8831 Thus, if we had a four element list that was supposed to be three
8832 elements long, we could set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last element
8833 to @code{nil}, and thereby shorten the list. (If you set the last
8834 element to some other value than @code{nil}, which you could do, then
8835 you would not have shortened the list. @xref{setcdr, ,
8836 @code{setcdr}}.)
8837
8838 You can see shortening by evaluating the following three expressions
8839 in turn. First set the value of @code{trees} to @code{(maple oak pine
8840 birch)}, then set the @sc{cdr} of its second @sc{cdr} to @code{nil}
8841 and then find the value of @code{trees}:
8842
8843 @smallexample
8844 @group
8845 (setq trees '(maple oak pine birch))
8846 @result{} (maple oak pine birch)
8847 @end group
8848
8849 @group
8850 (setcdr (nthcdr 2 trees) nil)
8851 @result{} nil
8852
8853 trees
8854 @result{} (maple oak pine)
8855 @end group
8856 @end smallexample
8857
8858 @noindent
8859 (The value returned by the @code{setcdr} expression is @code{nil} since
8860 that is what the @sc{cdr} is set to.)
8861
8862 To repeat, in @code{kill-new}, the @code{nthcdr} function takes the
8863 @sc{cdr} a number of times that is one less than the maximum permitted
8864 size of the kill ring and @code{setcdr} sets the @sc{cdr} of that
8865 element (which will be the rest of the elements in the kill ring) to
8866 @code{nil}. This prevents the kill ring from growing too long.
8867
8868 @need 800
8869 The next to last expression in the @code{kill-new} function is
8870
8871 @smallexample
8872 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8873 @end smallexample
8874
8875 The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a global variable that is set to be
8876 the @code{kill-ring}.
8877
8878 Even though the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is called a
8879 @samp{pointer}, it is a variable just like the kill ring. However, the
8880 name has been chosen to help humans understand how the variable is used.
8881
8882 @need 1200
8883 Now, to return to an early expression in the body of the function:
8884
8885 @smallexample
8886 @group
8887 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8888 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8889 @end group
8890 @end smallexample
8891
8892 @noindent
8893 It starts with an @code{if} expression
8894
8895 In this case, the expression tests first to see whether
8896 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} exists as a function, and if so,
8897 calls it. The @code{fboundp} function returns true if the symbol it
8898 is testing has a function definition that ``is not void''. If the
8899 symbol's function definition were void, we would receive an error
8900 message, as we did when we created errors intentionally (@pxref{Making
8901 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}).
8902
8903 @noindent
8904 The then-part contains an expression whose first element is the
8905 function @code{and}.
8906
8907 @findex and
8908 The @code{and} special form evaluates each of its arguments until one
8909 of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in which case the
8910 @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if none of the
8911 arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value resulting from
8912 evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such a value is not
8913 @code{nil}, it is considered true in Emacs Lisp.) In other words, an
8914 @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its arguments
8915 are true. (@xref{Second Buffer Related Review}.)
8916
8917 The expression determines whether the second argument to
8918 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is true or not.
8919 @ignore
8920 ;; If we're supposed to be extending an existing string, and that
8921 ;; string really is at the front of the menu, then update it in place.
8922 @end ignore
8923
8924 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is one of the functions that make it
8925 possible to use the ``Select and Paste'' menu in the Edit item of a menu
8926 bar; using a mouse, you can look at the various pieces of text you
8927 have saved and select one piece to paste.
8928
8929 The last expression in the @code{kill-new} function adds the newly
8930 copied string to whatever facility exists for copying and pasting
8931 among different programs running in a windowing system. In the X
8932 Windowing system, for example, the @code{x-select-text} function takes
8933 the string and stores it in memory operated by X@. You can paste the
8934 string in another program, such as an Xterm.
8935
8936 @need 1200
8937 The expression looks like this:
8938
8939 @smallexample
8940 @group
8941 (if interprogram-cut-function
8942 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8943 @end group
8944 @end smallexample
8945
8946 If an @code{interprogram-cut-function} exists, then Emacs executes
8947 @code{funcall}, which in turn calls its first argument as a function
8948 and passes the remaining arguments to it. (Incidentally, as far as I
8949 can see, this @code{if} expression could be replaced by an @code{and}
8950 expression similar to the one in the first part of the function.)
8951
8952 We are not going to discuss windowing systems and other programs
8953 further, but merely note that this is a mechanism that enables GNU
8954 Emacs to work easily and well with other programs.
8955
8956 This code for placing text in the kill ring, either concatenated with
8957 an existing element or as a new element, leads us to the code for
8958 bringing back text that has been cut out of the buffer---the yank
8959 commands. However, before discussing the yank commands, it is better
8960 to learn how lists are implemented in a computer. This will make
8961 clear such mysteries as the use of the term ``pointer''. But before
8962 that, we will digress into C.
8963
8964 @ignore
8965 @c is this true in Emacs 22? Does not seems to be
8966
8967 (If the @w{@code{(< end beg))}}
8968 expression is true, @code{kill-append} prepends the string to the just
8969 previously clipped text. For a detailed discussion, see
8970 @ref{kill-append function, , The @code{kill-append} function}.)
8971
8972 If you then yank back the text, i.e., ``paste'' it, you get both
8973 pieces of text at once. That way, if you delete two words in a row,
8974 and then yank them back, you get both words, in their proper order,
8975 with one yank. (The @w{@code{(< end beg))}} expression makes sure the
8976 order is correct.)
8977
8978 On the other hand, if the previous command is not @code{kill-region},
8979 then the @code{kill-new} function is called, which adds the text to
8980 the kill ring as the latest item, and sets the
8981 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable to point to it.
8982 @end ignore
8983 @ignore
8984
8985 @c Evidently, changed for Emacs 22. The zap-to-char command does not
8986 @c use the delete-and-extract-region function
8987
8988 2006 Oct 26, the Digression into C is now OK but should come after
8989 copy-region-as-kill and filter-buffer-substring
8990
8991 2006 Oct 24
8992 In Emacs 22,
8993 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8994 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8995 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8996 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8997
8998 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8999 @end ignore
9000
9001 @node Digression into C
9002 @section Digression into C
9003 @findex delete-and-extract-region
9004 @cindex C, a digression into
9005 @cindex Digression into C
9006
9007 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function (@pxref{copy-region-as-kill, ,
9008 @code{copy-region-as-kill}}) uses the @code{filter-buffer-substring}
9009 function, which in turn uses the @code{delete-and-extract-region}
9010 function. It removes the contents of a region and you cannot get them
9011 back.
9012
9013 Unlike the other code discussed here, the
9014 @code{delete-and-extract-region} function is not written in Emacs
9015 Lisp; it is written in C and is one of the primitives of the GNU Emacs
9016 system. Since it is very simple, I will digress briefly from Lisp and
9017 describe it here.
9018
9019 @c GNU Emacs 24 in src/editfns.c
9020 @c the DEFUN for delete-and-extract-region
9021
9022 @need 1500
9023 Like many of the other Emacs primitives,
9024 @code{delete-and-extract-region} is written as an instance of a C
9025 macro, a macro being a template for code. The complete macro looks
9026 like this:
9027
9028 @smallexample
9029 @group
9030 DEFUN ("delete-and-extract-region", Fdelete_and_extract_region,
9031 Sdelete_and_extract_region, 2, 2, 0,
9032 doc: /* Delete the text between START and END and return it. */)
9033 (Lisp_Object start, Lisp_Object end)
9034 @{
9035 validate_region (&start, &end);
9036 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9037 return empty_unibyte_string;
9038 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9039 @}
9040 @end group
9041 @end smallexample
9042
9043 Without going into the details of the macro writing process, let me
9044 point out that this macro starts with the word @code{DEFUN}. The word
9045 @code{DEFUN} was chosen since the code serves the same purpose as
9046 @code{defun} does in Lisp. (The @code{DEFUN} C macro is defined in
9047 @file{emacs/src/lisp.h}.)
9048
9049 The word @code{DEFUN} is followed by seven parts inside of
9050 parentheses:
9051
9052 @itemize @bullet
9053 @item
9054 The first part is the name given to the function in Lisp,
9055 @code{delete-and-extract-region}.
9056
9057 @item
9058 The second part is the name of the function in C,
9059 @code{Fdelete_and_extract_region}. By convention, it starts with
9060 @samp{F}. Since C does not use hyphens in names, underscores are used
9061 instead.
9062
9063 @item
9064 The third part is the name for the C constant structure that records
9065 information on this function for internal use. It is the name of the
9066 function in C but begins with an @samp{S} instead of an @samp{F}.
9067
9068 @item
9069 The fourth and fifth parts specify the minimum and maximum number of
9070 arguments the function can have. This function demands exactly 2
9071 arguments.
9072
9073 @item
9074 The sixth part is nearly like the argument that follows the
9075 @code{interactive} declaration in a function written in Lisp: a letter
9076 followed, perhaps, by a prompt. The only difference from the Lisp is
9077 when the macro is called with no arguments. Then you write a @code{0}
9078 (which is a ``null string''), as in this macro.
9079
9080 If you were to specify arguments, you would place them between
9081 quotation marks. The C macro for @code{goto-char} includes
9082 @code{"NGoto char: "} in this position to indicate that the function
9083 expects a raw prefix, in this case, a numerical location in a buffer,
9084 and provides a prompt.
9085
9086 @item
9087 The seventh part is a documentation string, just like the one for a
9088 function written in Emacs Lisp. This is written as a C comment. (When
9089 you build Emacs, the program @command{lib-src/make-docfile} extracts
9090 these comments and uses them to make the ``real'' documentation.)
9091 @end itemize
9092
9093 @need 1200
9094 In a C macro, the formal parameters come next, with a statement of
9095 what kind of object they are, followed by what might be called the ``body''
9096 of the macro. For @code{delete-and-extract-region} the ``body''
9097 consists of the following four lines:
9098
9099 @smallexample
9100 @group
9101 validate_region (&start, &end);
9102 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9103 return empty_unibyte_string;
9104 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9105 @end group
9106 @end smallexample
9107
9108 The @code{validate_region} function checks whether the values
9109 passed as the beginning and end of the region are the proper type and
9110 are within range. If the beginning and end positions are the same,
9111 then return an empty string.
9112
9113 The @code{del_range_1} function actually deletes the text. It is a
9114 complex function we will not look into. It updates the buffer and
9115 does other things. However, it is worth looking at the two arguments
9116 passed to @code{del_range}. These are @w{@code{XINT (start)}} and
9117 @w{@code{XINT (end)}}.
9118
9119 As far as the C language is concerned, @code{start} and @code{end} are
9120 two integers that mark the beginning and end of the region to be
9121 deleted@footnote{More precisely, and requiring more expert knowledge
9122 to understand, the two integers are of type @code{Lisp_Object}, which can
9123 also be a C union instead of an integer type.}.
9124
9125 In early versions of Emacs, these two numbers were thirty-two bits
9126 long, but the code is slowly being generalized to handle other
9127 lengths. Three of the available bits are used to specify the type of
9128 information; the remaining bits are used as ``content''.
9129
9130 @samp{XINT} is a C macro that extracts the relevant number from the
9131 longer collection of bits; the three other bits are discarded.
9132
9133 @need 800
9134 The command in @code{delete-and-extract-region} looks like this:
9135
9136 @smallexample
9137 del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9138 @end smallexample
9139
9140 @noindent
9141 It deletes the region between the beginning position, @code{start},
9142 and the ending position, @code{end}.
9143
9144 From the point of view of the person writing Lisp, Emacs is all very
9145 simple; but hidden underneath is a great deal of complexity to make it
9146 all work.
9147
9148 @node defvar
9149 @section Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9150 @findex defvar
9151 @cindex Initializing a variable
9152 @cindex Variable initialization
9153
9154 @ignore
9155 2006 Oct 24
9156 In Emacs 22,
9157 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9158 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9159 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9160 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9161
9162 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9163
9164 @end ignore
9165
9166 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function is written in Emacs Lisp. Two
9167 functions within it, @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new}, copy a
9168 region in a buffer and save it in a variable called the
9169 @code{kill-ring}. This section describes how the @code{kill-ring}
9170 variable is created and initialized using the @code{defvar} special
9171 form.
9172
9173 (Again we note that the term @code{kill-ring} is a misnomer. The text
9174 that is clipped out of the buffer can be brought back; it is not a ring
9175 of corpses, but a ring of resurrectable text.)
9176
9177 In Emacs Lisp, a variable such as the @code{kill-ring} is created and
9178 given an initial value by using the @code{defvar} special form. The
9179 name comes from ``define variable''.
9180
9181 The @code{defvar} special form is similar to @code{setq} in that it sets
9182 the value of a variable. It is unlike @code{setq} in two ways: first,
9183 it only sets the value of the variable if the variable does not already
9184 have a value. If the variable already has a value, @code{defvar} does
9185 not override the existing value. Second, @code{defvar} has a
9186 documentation string.
9187
9188 (There is a related macro, @code{defcustom}, designed for variables
9189 that people customize. It has more features than @code{defvar}.
9190 (@xref{defcustom, , Setting Variables with @code{defcustom}}.)
9191
9192 @menu
9193 * See variable current value::
9194 * defvar and asterisk::
9195 @end menu
9196
9197 @ifnottex
9198 @node See variable current value
9199 @unnumberedsubsec Seeing the Current Value of a Variable
9200 @end ifnottex
9201
9202 You can see the current value of a variable, any variable, by using
9203 the @code{describe-variable} function, which is usually invoked by
9204 typing @kbd{C-h v}. If you type @kbd{C-h v} and then @code{kill-ring}
9205 (followed by @key{RET}) when prompted, you will see what is in your
9206 current kill ring---this may be quite a lot! Conversely, if you have
9207 been doing nothing this Emacs session except read this document, you
9208 may have nothing in it. Also, you will see the documentation for
9209 @code{kill-ring}:
9210
9211 @smallexample
9212 @group
9213 Documentation:
9214 List of killed text sequences.
9215 Since the kill ring is supposed to interact nicely with cut-and-paste
9216 facilities offered by window systems, use of this variable should
9217 @end group
9218 @group
9219 interact nicely with `interprogram-cut-function' and
9220 `interprogram-paste-function'. The functions `kill-new',
9221 `kill-append', and `current-kill' are supposed to implement this
9222 interaction; you may want to use them instead of manipulating the kill
9223 ring directly.
9224 @end group
9225 @end smallexample
9226
9227 @need 800
9228 The kill ring is defined by a @code{defvar} in the following way:
9229
9230 @smallexample
9231 @group
9232 (defvar kill-ring nil
9233 "List of killed text sequences.
9234 @dots{}")
9235 @end group
9236 @end smallexample
9237
9238 @noindent
9239 In this variable definition, the variable is given an initial value of
9240 @code{nil}, which makes sense, since if you have saved nothing, you want
9241 nothing back if you give a @code{yank} command. The documentation
9242 string is written just like the documentation string of a @code{defun}.
9243 As with the documentation string of the @code{defun}, the first line of
9244 the documentation should be a complete sentence, since some commands,
9245 like @code{apropos}, print only the first line of documentation.
9246 Succeeding lines should not be indented; otherwise they look odd when
9247 you use @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}).
9248
9249 @node defvar and asterisk
9250 @subsection @code{defvar} and an asterisk
9251 @findex defvar @r{for a user customizable variable}
9252 @findex defvar @r{with an asterisk}
9253
9254 In the past, Emacs used the @code{defvar} special form both for
9255 internal variables that you would not expect a user to change and for
9256 variables that you do expect a user to change. Although you can still
9257 use @code{defvar} for user customizable variables, please use
9258 @code{defcustom} instead, since it provides a path into
9259 the Customization commands. (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables
9260 using @code{defcustom}}.)
9261
9262 When you specified a variable using the @code{defvar} special form,
9263 you could distinguish a variable that a user might want to change from
9264 others by typing an asterisk, @samp{*}, in the first column of its
9265 documentation string. For example:
9266
9267 @smallexample
9268 @group
9269 (defvar shell-command-default-error-buffer nil
9270 "*Buffer name for ‘shell-command’ @dots{} error output.
9271 @dots{} ")
9272 @end group
9273 @end smallexample
9274
9275 @findex set-variable
9276 @noindent
9277 You could (and still can) use the @code{set-variable} command to
9278 change the value of @code{shell-command-default-error-buffer}
9279 temporarily. However, options set using @code{set-variable} are set
9280 only for the duration of your editing session. The new values are not
9281 saved between sessions. Each time Emacs starts, it reads the original
9282 value, unless you change the value within your @file{.emacs} file,
9283 either by setting it manually or by using @code{customize}.
9284 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
9285
9286 For me, the major use of the @code{set-variable} command is to suggest
9287 variables that I might want to set in my @file{.emacs} file. There
9288 are now more than 700 such variables, far too many to remember
9289 readily. Fortunately, you can press @key{TAB} after calling the
9290 @code{M-x set-variable} command to see the list of variables.
9291 (@xref{Examining, , Examining and Setting Variables, emacs,
9292 The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
9293
9294 @need 1250
9295 @node cons & search-fwd Review
9296 @section Review
9297
9298 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
9299
9300 @table @code
9301 @item car
9302 @itemx cdr
9303 @code{car} returns the first element of a list; @code{cdr} returns the
9304 second and subsequent elements of a list.
9305
9306 @need 1250
9307 For example:
9308
9309 @smallexample
9310 @group
9311 (car '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9312 @result{} 1
9313 (cdr '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9314 @result{} (2 3 4 5 6 7)
9315 @end group
9316 @end smallexample
9317
9318 @item cons
9319 @code{cons} constructs a list by prepending its first argument to its
9320 second argument.
9321
9322 @need 1250
9323 For example:
9324
9325 @smallexample
9326 @group
9327 (cons 1 '(2 3 4))
9328 @result{} (1 2 3 4)
9329 @end group
9330 @end smallexample
9331
9332 @item funcall
9333 @code{funcall} evaluates its first argument as a function. It passes
9334 its remaining arguments to its first argument.
9335
9336 @item nthcdr
9337 Return the result of taking @sc{cdr} @var{n} times on a list.
9338 @iftex
9339 The
9340 @tex
9341 $n^{th}$
9342 @end tex
9343 @code{cdr}.
9344 @end iftex
9345 The ``rest of the rest'', as it were.
9346
9347 @need 1250
9348 For example:
9349
9350 @smallexample
9351 @group
9352 (nthcdr 3 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9353 @result{} (4 5 6 7)
9354 @end group
9355 @end smallexample
9356
9357 @item setcar
9358 @itemx setcdr
9359 @code{setcar} changes the first element of a list; @code{setcdr}
9360 changes the second and subsequent elements of a list.
9361
9362 @need 1250
9363 For example:
9364
9365 @smallexample
9366 @group
9367 (setq triple '(1 2 3))
9368
9369 (setcar triple '37)
9370
9371 triple
9372 @result{} (37 2 3)
9373
9374 (setcdr triple '("foo" "bar"))
9375
9376 triple
9377 @result{} (37 "foo" "bar")
9378 @end group
9379 @end smallexample
9380
9381 @item progn
9382 Evaluate each argument in sequence and then return the value of the
9383 last.
9384
9385 @need 1250
9386 For example:
9387
9388 @smallexample
9389 @group
9390 (progn 1 2 3 4)
9391 @result{} 4
9392 @end group
9393 @end smallexample
9394
9395 @item save-restriction
9396 Record whatever narrowing is in effect in the current buffer, if any,
9397 and restore that narrowing after evaluating the arguments.
9398
9399 @item search-forward
9400 Search for a string, and if the string is found, move point. With a
9401 regular expression, use the similar @code{re-search-forward}.
9402 (@xref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, for an
9403 explanation of regular expression patterns and searches.)
9404
9405 @need 1250
9406 @noindent
9407 @code{search-forward} and @code{re-search-forward} take four
9408 arguments:
9409
9410 @enumerate
9411 @item
9412 The string or regular expression to search for.
9413
9414 @item
9415 Optionally, the limit of the search.
9416
9417 @item
9418 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
9419 error message.
9420
9421 @item
9422 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
9423 search goes backwards.
9424 @end enumerate
9425
9426 @item kill-region
9427 @itemx delete-and-extract-region
9428 @itemx copy-region-as-kill
9429
9430 @code{kill-region} cuts the text between point and mark from the
9431 buffer and stores that text in the kill ring, so you can get it back
9432 by yanking.
9433
9434 @code{copy-region-as-kill} copies the text between point and mark into
9435 the kill ring, from which you can get it by yanking. The function
9436 does not cut or remove the text from the buffer.
9437 @end table
9438
9439 @code{delete-and-extract-region} removes the text between point and
9440 mark from the buffer and throws it away. You cannot get it back.
9441 (This is not an interactive command.)
9442
9443 @need 1500
9444 @node search Exercises
9445 @section Searching Exercises
9446
9447 @itemize @bullet
9448 @item
9449 Write an interactive function that searches for a string. If the
9450 search finds the string, leave point after it and display a message
9451 that says ``Found!''. (Do not use @code{search-forward} for the name
9452 of this function; if you do, you will overwrite the existing version of
9453 @code{search-forward} that comes with Emacs. Use a name such as
9454 @code{test-search} instead.)
9455
9456 @item
9457 Write a function that prints the third element of the kill ring in the
9458 echo area, if any; if the kill ring does not contain a third element,
9459 print an appropriate message.
9460 @end itemize
9461
9462 @node List Implementation
9463 @chapter How Lists are Implemented
9464 @cindex Lists in a computer
9465
9466 In Lisp, atoms are recorded in a straightforward fashion; if the
9467 implementation is not straightforward in practice, it is, nonetheless,
9468 straightforward in theory. The atom @samp{rose}, for example, is
9469 recorded as the four contiguous letters @samp{r}, @samp{o}, @samp{s},
9470 @samp{e}. A list, on the other hand, is kept differently. The mechanism
9471 is equally simple, but it takes a moment to get used to the idea. A
9472 list is kept using a series of pairs of pointers. In the series, the
9473 first pointer in each pair points to an atom or to another list, and the
9474 second pointer in each pair points to the next pair, or to the symbol
9475 @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9476
9477 A pointer itself is quite simply the electronic address of what is
9478 pointed to. Hence, a list is kept as a series of electronic addresses.
9479
9480 @menu
9481 * Lists diagrammed::
9482 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
9483 * List Exercise::
9484 @end menu
9485
9486 @ifnottex
9487 @node Lists diagrammed
9488 @unnumberedsec Lists diagrammed
9489 @end ifnottex
9490
9491 For example, the list @code{(rose violet buttercup)} has three elements,
9492 @samp{rose}, @samp{violet}, and @samp{buttercup}. In the computer, the
9493 electronic address of @samp{rose} is recorded in a segment of computer
9494 memory along with the address that gives the electronic address of where
9495 the atom @samp{violet} is located; and that address (the one that tells
9496 where @samp{violet} is located) is kept along with an address that tells
9497 where the address for the atom @samp{buttercup} is located.
9498
9499 @need 1200
9500 This sounds more complicated than it is and is easier seen in a diagram:
9501
9502 @c clear print-postscript-figures
9503 @c !!! cons-cell-diagram #1
9504 @ifnottex
9505 @smallexample
9506 @group
9507 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9508 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9509 | | |
9510 | | |
9511 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9512 @end group
9513 @end smallexample
9514 @end ifnottex
9515 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9516 @sp 1
9517 @tex
9518 @center @image{cons-1}
9519 @end tex
9520 @sp 1
9521 @end ifset
9522 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9523 @iftex
9524 @smallexample
9525 @group
9526 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9527 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9528 | | |
9529 | | |
9530 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9531 @end group
9532 @end smallexample
9533 @end iftex
9534 @end ifclear
9535
9536 @noindent
9537 In the diagram, each box represents a word of computer memory that
9538 holds a Lisp object, usually in the form of a memory address. The boxes,
9539 i.e., the addresses, are in pairs. Each arrow points to what the address
9540 is the address of, either an atom or another pair of addresses. The
9541 first box is the electronic address of @samp{rose} and the arrow points
9542 to @samp{rose}; the second box is the address of the next pair of boxes,
9543 the first part of which is the address of @samp{violet} and the second
9544 part of which is the address of the next pair. The very last box
9545 points to the symbol @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9546
9547 @need 1200
9548 When a variable is set to a list with a function such as @code{setq},
9549 it stores the address of the first box in the variable. Thus,
9550 evaluation of the expression
9551
9552 @smallexample
9553 (setq bouquet '(rose violet buttercup))
9554 @end smallexample
9555
9556 @need 1250
9557 @noindent
9558 creates a situation like this:
9559
9560 @c cons-cell-diagram #2
9561 @ifnottex
9562 @smallexample
9563 @group
9564 bouquet
9565 |
9566 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9567 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9568 | | |
9569 | | |
9570 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9571 @end group
9572 @end smallexample
9573 @end ifnottex
9574 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9575 @sp 1
9576 @tex
9577 @center @image{cons-2}
9578 @end tex
9579 @sp 1
9580 @end ifset
9581 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9582 @iftex
9583 @smallexample
9584 @group
9585 bouquet
9586 |
9587 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9588 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9589 | | |
9590 | | |
9591 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9592 @end group
9593 @end smallexample
9594 @end iftex
9595 @end ifclear
9596
9597 @noindent
9598 In this example, the symbol @code{bouquet} holds the address of the first
9599 pair of boxes.
9600
9601 @need 1200
9602 This same list can be illustrated in a different sort of box notation
9603 like this:
9604
9605 @c cons-cell-diagram #2a
9606 @ifnottex
9607 @smallexample
9608 @group
9609 bouquet
9610 |
9611 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9612 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9613 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9614 | | | | | | | cup | |
9615 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9616 @end group
9617 @end smallexample
9618 @end ifnottex
9619 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9620 @sp 1
9621 @tex
9622 @center @image{cons-2a}
9623 @end tex
9624 @sp 1
9625 @end ifset
9626 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9627 @iftex
9628 @smallexample
9629 @group
9630 bouquet
9631 |
9632 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9633 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9634 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9635 | | | | | | | cup | |
9636 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9637 @end group
9638 @end smallexample
9639 @end iftex
9640 @end ifclear
9641
9642 (Symbols consist of more than pairs of addresses, but the structure of
9643 a symbol is made up of addresses. Indeed, the symbol @code{bouquet}
9644 consists of a group of address-boxes, one of which is the address of
9645 the printed word @samp{bouquet}, a second of which is the address of a
9646 function definition attached to the symbol, if any, a third of which
9647 is the address of the first pair of address-boxes for the list
9648 @code{(rose violet buttercup)}, and so on. Here we are showing that
9649 the symbol's third address-box points to the first pair of
9650 address-boxes for the list.)
9651
9652 If a symbol is set to the @sc{cdr} of a list, the list itself is not
9653 changed; the symbol simply has an address further down the list. (In
9654 the jargon, @sc{car} and @sc{cdr} are ``non-destructive''.) Thus,
9655 evaluation of the following expression
9656
9657 @smallexample
9658 (setq flowers (cdr bouquet))
9659 @end smallexample
9660
9661 @need 800
9662 @noindent
9663 produces this:
9664
9665 @c cons-cell-diagram #3
9666 @ifnottex
9667 @sp 1
9668 @smallexample
9669 @group
9670 bouquet flowers
9671 | |
9672 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9673 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9674 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9675 | | |
9676 | | |
9677 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9678 @end group
9679 @end smallexample
9680 @sp 1
9681 @end ifnottex
9682 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9683 @sp 1
9684 @tex
9685 @center @image{cons-3}
9686 @end tex
9687 @sp 1
9688 @end ifset
9689 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9690 @iftex
9691 @sp 1
9692 @smallexample
9693 @group
9694 bouquet flowers
9695 | |
9696 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9697 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9698 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9699 | | |
9700 | | |
9701 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9702 @end group
9703 @end smallexample
9704 @sp 1
9705 @end iftex
9706 @end ifclear
9707
9708 @noindent
9709 The value of @code{flowers} is @code{(violet buttercup)}, which is
9710 to say, the symbol @code{flowers} holds the address of the pair of
9711 address-boxes, the first of which holds the address of @code{violet},
9712 and the second of which holds the address of @code{buttercup}.
9713
9714 A pair of address-boxes is called a @dfn{cons cell} or @dfn{dotted
9715 pair}. @xref{Cons Cell Type, , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9716 Reference Manual}, and @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted Pair
9717 Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
9718 information about cons cells and dotted pairs.
9719
9720 @need 1200
9721 The function @code{cons} adds a new pair of addresses to the front of
9722 a series of addresses like that shown above. For example, evaluating
9723 the expression
9724
9725 @smallexample
9726 (setq bouquet (cons 'lily bouquet))
9727 @end smallexample
9728
9729 @need 1500
9730 @noindent
9731 produces:
9732
9733 @c cons-cell-diagram #4
9734 @ifnottex
9735 @sp 1
9736 @smallexample
9737 @group
9738 bouquet flowers
9739 | |
9740 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9741 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9742 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9743 | | | |
9744 | | | |
9745 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9746 @end group
9747 @end smallexample
9748 @sp 1
9749 @end ifnottex
9750 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9751 @sp 1
9752 @tex
9753 @center @image{cons-4}
9754 @end tex
9755 @sp 1
9756 @end ifset
9757 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9758 @iftex
9759 @sp 1
9760 @smallexample
9761 @group
9762 bouquet flowers
9763 | |
9764 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9765 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9766 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9767 | | | |
9768 | | | |
9769 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9770 @end group
9771 @end smallexample
9772 @sp 1
9773 @end iftex
9774 @end ifclear
9775
9776 @need 1200
9777 @noindent
9778 However, this does not change the value of the symbol
9779 @code{flowers}, as you can see by evaluating the following,
9780
9781 @smallexample
9782 (eq (cdr (cdr bouquet)) flowers)
9783 @end smallexample
9784
9785 @noindent
9786 which returns @code{t} for true.
9787
9788 Until it is reset, @code{flowers} still has the value
9789 @code{(violet buttercup)}; that is, it has the address of the cons
9790 cell whose first address is of @code{violet}. Also, this does not
9791 alter any of the pre-existing cons cells; they are all still there.
9792
9793 Thus, in Lisp, to get the @sc{cdr} of a list, you just get the address
9794 of the next cons cell in the series; to get the @sc{car} of a list,
9795 you get the address of the first element of the list; to @code{cons} a
9796 new element on a list, you add a new cons cell to the front of the list.
9797 That is all there is to it! The underlying structure of Lisp is
9798 brilliantly simple!
9799
9800 And what does the last address in a series of cons cells refer to? It
9801 is the address of the empty list, of @code{nil}.
9802
9803 In summary, when a Lisp variable is set to a value, it is provided with
9804 the address of the list to which the variable refers.
9805
9806 @node Symbols as Chest
9807 @section Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
9808 @cindex Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
9809 @cindex Chest of Drawers, metaphor for a symbol
9810 @cindex Drawers, Chest of, metaphor for a symbol
9811
9812 In an earlier section, I suggested that you might imagine a symbol as
9813 being a chest of drawers. The function definition is put in one
9814 drawer, the value in another, and so on. What is put in the drawer
9815 holding the value can be changed without affecting the contents of the
9816 drawer holding the function definition, and vice versa.
9817
9818 Actually, what is put in each drawer is the address of the value or
9819 function definition. It is as if you found an old chest in the attic,
9820 and in one of its drawers you found a map giving you directions to
9821 where the buried treasure lies.
9822
9823 (In addition to its name, symbol definition, and variable value, a
9824 symbol has a ``drawer'' for a @dfn{property list} which can be used to
9825 record other information. Property lists are not discussed here; see
9826 @ref{Property Lists, , Property Lists, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9827 Reference Manual}.)
9828
9829 @need 1500
9830 Here is a fanciful representation:
9831
9832 @c chest-of-drawers diagram
9833 @ifnottex
9834 @sp 1
9835 @smallexample
9836 @group
9837 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
9838
9839 __ o0O0o __
9840 / \
9841 ---------------------
9842 | directions to | [map to]
9843 | symbol name | bouquet
9844 | |
9845 +---------------------+
9846 | directions to |
9847 | symbol definition | [none]
9848 | |
9849 +---------------------+
9850 | directions to | [map to]
9851 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
9852 | |
9853 +---------------------+
9854 | directions to |
9855 | property list | [not described here]
9856 | |
9857 +---------------------+
9858 |/ \|
9859 @end group
9860 @end smallexample
9861 @sp 1
9862 @end ifnottex
9863 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9864 @sp 1
9865 @tex
9866 @center @image{drawers}
9867 @end tex
9868 @sp 1
9869 @end ifset
9870 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9871 @iftex
9872 @sp 1
9873 @smallexample
9874 @group
9875 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
9876
9877 __ o0O0o __
9878 / \
9879 ---------------------
9880 | directions to | [map to]
9881 | symbol name | bouquet
9882 | |
9883 +---------------------+
9884 | directions to |
9885 | symbol definition | [none]
9886 | |
9887 +---------------------+
9888 | directions to | [map to]
9889 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
9890 | |
9891 +---------------------+
9892 | directions to |
9893 | property list | [not described here]
9894 | |
9895 +---------------------+
9896 |/ \|
9897 @end group
9898 @end smallexample
9899 @sp 1
9900 @end iftex
9901 @end ifclear
9902
9903 @node List Exercise
9904 @section Exercise
9905
9906 Set @code{flowers} to @code{violet} and @code{buttercup}. Cons two
9907 more flowers on to this list and set this new list to
9908 @code{more-flowers}. Set the @sc{car} of @code{flowers} to a fish.
9909 What does the @code{more-flowers} list now contain?
9910
9911 @node Yanking
9912 @chapter Yanking Text Back
9913 @findex yank
9914 @cindex Text retrieval
9915 @cindex Retrieving text
9916 @cindex Pasting text
9917
9918 Whenever you cut text out of a buffer with a ``kill'' command in GNU Emacs,
9919 you can bring it back with a ``yank'' command. The text that is cut out of
9920 the buffer is put in the kill ring and the yank commands insert the
9921 appropriate contents of the kill ring back into a buffer (not necessarily
9922 the original buffer).
9923
9924 A simple @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) command inserts the first item from
9925 the kill ring into the current buffer. If the @kbd{C-y} command is
9926 followed immediately by @kbd{M-y}, the first element is replaced by
9927 the second element. Successive @kbd{M-y} commands replace the second
9928 element with the third, fourth, or fifth element, and so on. When the
9929 last element in the kill ring is reached, it is replaced by the first
9930 element and the cycle is repeated. (Thus the kill ring is called a
9931 ``ring'' rather than just a ``list''. However, the actual data structure
9932 that holds the text is a list.
9933 @xref{Kill Ring, , Handling the Kill Ring}, for the details of how the
9934 list is handled as a ring.)
9935
9936 @menu
9937 * Kill Ring Overview::
9938 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
9939 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
9940 @end menu
9941
9942 @node Kill Ring Overview
9943 @section Kill Ring Overview
9944 @cindex Kill ring overview
9945
9946 The kill ring is a list of textual strings. This is what it looks like:
9947
9948 @smallexample
9949 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9950 @end smallexample
9951
9952 If this were the contents of my kill ring and I pressed @kbd{C-y}, the
9953 string of characters saying @samp{some text} would be inserted in this
9954 buffer where my cursor is located.
9955
9956 The @code{yank} command is also used for duplicating text by copying it.
9957 The copied text is not cut from the buffer, but a copy of it is put on the
9958 kill ring and is inserted by yanking it back.
9959
9960 Three functions are used for bringing text back from the kill ring:
9961 @code{yank}, which is usually bound to @kbd{C-y}; @code{yank-pop},
9962 which is usually bound to @kbd{M-y}; and @code{rotate-yank-pointer},
9963 which is used by the two other functions.
9964
9965 These functions refer to the kill ring through a variable called the
9966 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. Indeed, the insertion code for both the
9967 @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} functions is:
9968
9969 @smallexample
9970 (insert (car kill-ring-yank-pointer))
9971 @end smallexample
9972
9973 @noindent
9974 (Well, no more. In GNU Emacs 22, the function has been replaced by
9975 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{insert-for-yank-1}
9976 repetitively for each @code{yank-handler} segment. In turn,
9977 @code{insert-for-yank-1} strips text properties from the inserted text
9978 according to @code{yank-excluded-properties}. Otherwise, it is just
9979 like @code{insert}. We will stick with plain @code{insert} since it
9980 is easier to understand.)
9981
9982 To begin to understand how @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} work, it is
9983 first necessary to look at the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
9984
9985 @node kill-ring-yank-pointer
9986 @section The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} Variable
9987
9988 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a variable, just as @code{kill-ring} is
9989 a variable. It points to something by being bound to the value of what
9990 it points to, like any other Lisp variable.
9991
9992 @need 1000
9993 Thus, if the value of the kill ring is:
9994
9995 @smallexample
9996 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9997 @end smallexample
9998
9999 @need 1250
10000 @noindent
10001 and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points to the second clause, the
10002 value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is:
10003
10004 @smallexample
10005 ("a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10006 @end smallexample
10007
10008 As explained in the previous chapter (@pxref{List Implementation}), the
10009 computer does not keep two different copies of the text being pointed to
10010 by both the @code{kill-ring} and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. The
10011 words ``a different piece of text'' and ``yet more text'' are not
10012 duplicated. Instead, the two Lisp variables point to the same pieces of
10013 text. Here is a diagram:
10014
10015 @c cons-cell-diagram #5
10016 @ifnottex
10017 @smallexample
10018 @group
10019 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10020 | |
10021 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10022 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10023 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10024 | | |
10025 | | |
10026 | | --> "yet more text"
10027 | |
10028 | --> "a different piece of text"
10029 |
10030 --> "some text"
10031 @end group
10032 @end smallexample
10033 @sp 1
10034 @end ifnottex
10035 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10036 @sp 1
10037 @tex
10038 @center @image{cons-5}
10039 @end tex
10040 @sp 1
10041 @end ifset
10042 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10043 @iftex
10044 @smallexample
10045 @group
10046 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10047 | |
10048 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10049 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10050 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10051 | | |
10052 | | |
10053 | | --> "yet more text"
10054 | |
10055 | --> "a different piece of text
10056 |
10057 --> "some text"
10058 @end group
10059 @end smallexample
10060 @sp 1
10061 @end iftex
10062 @end ifclear
10063
10064 Both the variable @code{kill-ring} and the variable
10065 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} are pointers. But the kill ring itself is
10066 usually described as if it were actually what it is composed of. The
10067 @code{kill-ring} is spoken of as if it were the list rather than that it
10068 points to the list. Conversely, the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is
10069 spoken of as pointing to a list.
10070
10071 These two ways of talking about the same thing sound confusing at first but
10072 make sense on reflection. The kill ring is generally thought of as the
10073 complete structure of data that holds the information of what has recently
10074 been cut out of the Emacs buffers. The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
10075 on the other hand, serves to indicate---that is, to ``point to''---that part
10076 of the kill ring of which the first element (the @sc{car}) will be
10077 inserted.
10078
10079 @ignore
10080 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{kill-new} function calls
10081
10082 @code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)}
10083
10084 (defun rotate-yank-pointer (arg)
10085 "Rotate the yanking point in the kill ring.
10086 With argument, rotate that many kills forward (or backward, if negative)."
10087 (interactive "p")
10088 (current-kill arg))
10089
10090 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
10091 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
10092 If N is zero, ‘interprogram-paste-function’ is set, and calling it
10093 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
10094 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
10095 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don’t actually move the
10096 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
10097 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
10098 interprogram-paste-function
10099 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
10100 (if interprogram-paste
10101 (progn
10102 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
10103 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
10104 ;; selection, with identical text.
10105 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
10106 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
10107 interprogram-paste)
10108 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
10109 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
10110 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10111 (length kill-ring))
10112 kill-ring)))
10113 (or do-not-move
10114 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
10115 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
10116
10117 @end ignore
10118
10119 @need 1500
10120 @node yank nthcdr Exercises
10121 @section Exercises with @code{yank} and @code{nthcdr}
10122
10123 @itemize @bullet
10124 @item
10125 Using @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}), look at the value of
10126 your kill ring. Add several items to your kill ring; look at its
10127 value again. Using @kbd{M-y} (@code{yank-pop)}, move all the way
10128 around the kill ring. How many items were in your kill ring? Find
10129 the value of @code{kill-ring-max}. Was your kill ring full, or could
10130 you have kept more blocks of text within it?
10131
10132 @item
10133 Using @code{nthcdr} and @code{car}, construct a series of expressions
10134 to return the first, second, third, and fourth elements of a list.
10135 @end itemize
10136
10137 @node Loops & Recursion
10138 @chapter Loops and Recursion
10139 @cindex Loops and recursion
10140 @cindex Recursion and loops
10141 @cindex Repetition (loops)
10142
10143 Emacs Lisp has two primary ways to cause an expression, or a series of
10144 expressions, to be evaluated repeatedly: one uses a @code{while}
10145 loop, and the other uses @dfn{recursion}.
10146
10147 Repetition can be very valuable. For example, to move forward four
10148 sentences, you need only write a program that will move forward one
10149 sentence and then repeat the process four times. Since a computer does
10150 not get bored or tired, such repetitive action does not have the
10151 deleterious effects that excessive or the wrong kinds of repetition can
10152 have on humans.
10153
10154 People mostly write Emacs Lisp functions using @code{while} loops and
10155 their kin; but you can use recursion, which provides a very powerful
10156 way to think about and then to solve problems@footnote{You can write
10157 recursive functions to be frugal or wasteful of mental or computer
10158 resources; as it happens, methods that people find easy---that are
10159 frugal of ``mental resources''---sometimes use considerable computer
10160 resources. Emacs was designed to run on machines that we now consider
10161 limited and its default settings are conservative. You may want to
10162 increase the values of @code{max-specpdl-size} and
10163 @code{max-lisp-eval-depth}. In my @file{.emacs} file, I set them to
10164 15 and 30 times their default value.}.
10165
10166 @menu
10167 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
10168 * dolist dotimes::
10169 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
10170 * Looping exercise::
10171 @end menu
10172
10173 @node while
10174 @section @code{while}
10175 @cindex Loops
10176 @findex while
10177
10178 The @code{while} special form tests whether the value returned by
10179 evaluating its first argument is true or false. This is similar to what
10180 the Lisp interpreter does with an @code{if}; what the interpreter does
10181 next, however, is different.
10182
10183 In a @code{while} expression, if the value returned by evaluating the
10184 first argument is false, the Lisp interpreter skips the rest of the
10185 expression (the @dfn{body} of the expression) and does not evaluate it.
10186 However, if the value is true, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the body
10187 of the expression and then again tests whether the first argument to
10188 @code{while} is true or false. If the value returned by evaluating the
10189 first argument is again true, the Lisp interpreter again evaluates the
10190 body of the expression.
10191
10192 @need 1200
10193 The template for a @code{while} expression looks like this:
10194
10195 @smallexample
10196 @group
10197 (while @var{true-or-false-test}
10198 @var{body}@dots{})
10199 @end group
10200 @end smallexample
10201
10202 @menu
10203 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
10204 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
10205 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
10206 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
10207 * Incrementing Loop Details::
10208 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
10209 @end menu
10210
10211 @ifnottex
10212 @node Looping with while
10213 @unnumberedsubsec Looping with @code{while}
10214 @end ifnottex
10215
10216 So long as the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} expression
10217 returns a true value when it is evaluated, the body is repeatedly
10218 evaluated. This process is called a loop since the Lisp interpreter
10219 repeats the same thing again and again, like an airplane doing a loop.
10220 When the result of evaluating the true-or-false-test is false, the
10221 Lisp interpreter does not evaluate the rest of the @code{while}
10222 expression and ``exits the loop''.
10223
10224 Clearly, if the value returned by evaluating the first argument to
10225 @code{while} is always true, the body following will be evaluated
10226 again and again @dots{} and again @dots{} forever. Conversely, if the
10227 value returned is never true, the expressions in the body will never
10228 be evaluated. The craft of writing a @code{while} loop consists of
10229 choosing a mechanism such that the true-or-false-test returns true
10230 just the number of times that you want the subsequent expressions to
10231 be evaluated, and then have the test return false.
10232
10233 The value returned by evaluating a @code{while} is the value of the
10234 true-or-false-test. An interesting consequence of this is that a
10235 @code{while} loop that evaluates without error will return @code{nil}
10236 or false regardless of whether it has looped 1 or 100 times or none at
10237 all. A @code{while} expression that evaluates successfully never
10238 returns a true value! What this means is that @code{while} is always
10239 evaluated for its side effects, which is to say, the consequences of
10240 evaluating the expressions within the body of the @code{while} loop.
10241 This makes sense. It is not the mere act of looping that is desired,
10242 but the consequences of what happens when the expressions in the loop
10243 are repeatedly evaluated.
10244
10245 @node Loop Example
10246 @subsection A @code{while} Loop and a List
10247
10248 A common way to control a @code{while} loop is to test whether a list
10249 has any elements. If it does, the loop is repeated; but if it does not,
10250 the repetition is ended. Since this is an important technique, we will
10251 create a short example to illustrate it.
10252
10253 A simple way to test whether a list has elements is to evaluate the
10254 list: if it has no elements, it is an empty list and will return the
10255 empty list, @code{()}, which is a synonym for @code{nil} or false. On
10256 the other hand, a list with elements will return those elements when it
10257 is evaluated. Since Emacs Lisp considers as true any value that is not
10258 @code{nil}, a list that returns elements will test true in a
10259 @code{while} loop.
10260
10261 @need 1200
10262 For example, you can set the variable @code{empty-list} to @code{nil} by
10263 evaluating the following @code{setq} expression:
10264
10265 @smallexample
10266 (setq empty-list ())
10267 @end smallexample
10268
10269 @noindent
10270 After evaluating the @code{setq} expression, you can evaluate the
10271 variable @code{empty-list} in the usual way, by placing the cursor after
10272 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}; @code{nil} will appear in your
10273 echo area:
10274
10275 @smallexample
10276 empty-list
10277 @end smallexample
10278
10279 On the other hand, if you set a variable to be a list with elements, the
10280 list will appear when you evaluate the variable, as you can see by
10281 evaluating the following two expressions:
10282
10283 @smallexample
10284 @group
10285 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10286
10287 animals
10288 @end group
10289 @end smallexample
10290
10291 Thus, to create a @code{while} loop that tests whether there are any
10292 items in the list @code{animals}, the first part of the loop will be
10293 written like this:
10294
10295 @smallexample
10296 @group
10297 (while animals
10298 @dots{}
10299 @end group
10300 @end smallexample
10301
10302 @noindent
10303 When the @code{while} tests its first argument, the variable
10304 @code{animals} is evaluated. It returns a list. So long as the list
10305 has elements, the @code{while} considers the results of the test to be
10306 true; but when the list is empty, it considers the results of the test
10307 to be false.
10308
10309 To prevent the @code{while} loop from running forever, some mechanism
10310 needs to be provided to empty the list eventually. An oft-used
10311 technique is to have one of the subsequent forms in the @code{while}
10312 expression set the value of the list to be the @sc{cdr} of the list.
10313 Each time the @code{cdr} function is evaluated, the list will be made
10314 shorter, until eventually only the empty list will be left. At this
10315 point, the test of the @code{while} loop will return false, and the
10316 arguments to the @code{while} will no longer be evaluated.
10317
10318 For example, the list of animals bound to the variable @code{animals}
10319 can be set to be the @sc{cdr} of the original list with the
10320 following expression:
10321
10322 @smallexample
10323 (setq animals (cdr animals))
10324 @end smallexample
10325
10326 @noindent
10327 If you have evaluated the previous expressions and then evaluate this
10328 expression, you will see @code{(giraffe lion tiger)} appear in the echo
10329 area. If you evaluate the expression again, @code{(lion tiger)} will
10330 appear in the echo area. If you evaluate it again and yet again,
10331 @code{(tiger)} appears and then the empty list, shown by @code{nil}.
10332
10333 A template for a @code{while} loop that uses the @code{cdr} function
10334 repeatedly to cause the true-or-false-test eventually to test false
10335 looks like this:
10336
10337 @smallexample
10338 @group
10339 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
10340 @var{body}@dots{}
10341 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
10342 @end group
10343 @end smallexample
10344
10345 This test and use of @code{cdr} can be put together in a function that
10346 goes through a list and prints each element of the list on a line of its
10347 own.
10348
10349 @node print-elements-of-list
10350 @subsection An Example: @code{print-elements-of-list}
10351 @findex print-elements-of-list
10352
10353 The @code{print-elements-of-list} function illustrates a @code{while}
10354 loop with a list.
10355
10356 @cindex @file{*scratch*} buffer
10357 The function requires several lines for its output. If you are
10358 reading this in a recent instance of GNU Emacs,
10359 @c GNU Emacs 21, GNU Emacs 22, or a later version,
10360 you can evaluate the following expression inside of Info, as usual.
10361
10362 If you are using an earlier version of Emacs, you need to copy the
10363 necessary expressions to your @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate
10364 them there. This is because the echo area had only one line in the
10365 earlier versions.
10366
10367 You can copy the expressions by marking the beginning of the region
10368 with @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}), moving the cursor to
10369 the end of the region and then copying the region using @kbd{M-w}
10370 (@code{kill-ring-save}, which calls @code{copy-region-as-kill} and
10371 then provides visual feedback). In the @file{*scratch*}
10372 buffer, you can yank the expressions back by typing @kbd{C-y}
10373 (@code{yank}).
10374
10375 After you have copied the expressions to the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
10376 evaluate each expression in turn. Be sure to evaluate the last
10377 expression, @code{(print-elements-of-list animals)}, by typing
10378 @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}, that is, by giving an argument to
10379 @code{eval-last-sexp}. This will cause the result of the evaluation
10380 to be printed in the @file{*scratch*} buffer instead of being printed
10381 in the echo area. (Otherwise you will see something like this in your
10382 echo area: @code{^Jgazelle^J^Jgiraffe^J^Jlion^J^Jtiger^Jnil}, in which
10383 each @samp{^J} stands for a ``newline''.)
10384
10385 @need 1500
10386 In a recent instance of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate these expressions
10387 directly in the Info buffer, and the echo area will grow to show the
10388 results.
10389
10390 @smallexample
10391 @group
10392 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10393
10394 (defun print-elements-of-list (list)
10395 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own."
10396 (while list
10397 (print (car list))
10398 (setq list (cdr list))))
10399
10400 (print-elements-of-list animals)
10401 @end group
10402 @end smallexample
10403
10404 @need 1200
10405 @noindent
10406 When you evaluate the three expressions in sequence, you will see
10407 this:
10408
10409 @smallexample
10410 @group
10411 gazelle
10412
10413 giraffe
10414
10415 lion
10416
10417 tiger
10418 nil
10419 @end group
10420 @end smallexample
10421
10422 Each element of the list is printed on a line of its own (that is what
10423 the function @code{print} does) and then the value returned by the
10424 function is printed. Since the last expression in the function is the
10425 @code{while} loop, and since @code{while} loops always return
10426 @code{nil}, a @code{nil} is printed after the last element of the list.
10427
10428 @node Incrementing Loop
10429 @subsection A Loop with an Incrementing Counter
10430
10431 A loop is not useful unless it stops when it ought. Besides
10432 controlling a loop with a list, a common way of stopping a loop is to
10433 write the first argument as a test that returns false when the correct
10434 number of repetitions are complete. This means that the loop must
10435 have a counter---an expression that counts how many times the loop
10436 repeats itself.
10437
10438 @ifnottex
10439 @node Incrementing Loop Details
10440 @unnumberedsubsec Details of an Incrementing Loop
10441 @end ifnottex
10442
10443 The test for a loop with an incrementing counter can be an expression
10444 such as @code{(< count desired-number)} which returns @code{t} for
10445 true if the value of @code{count} is less than the
10446 @code{desired-number} of repetitions and @code{nil} for false if the
10447 value of @code{count} is equal to or is greater than the
10448 @code{desired-number}. The expression that increments the count can
10449 be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq count (1+ count))}, where
10450 @code{1+} is a built-in function in Emacs Lisp that adds 1 to its
10451 argument. (The expression @w{@code{(1+ count)}} has the same result
10452 as @w{@code{(+ count 1)}}, but is easier for a human to read.)
10453
10454 @need 1250
10455 The template for a @code{while} loop controlled by an incrementing
10456 counter looks like this:
10457
10458 @smallexample
10459 @group
10460 @var{set-count-to-initial-value}
10461 (while (< count desired-number) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10462 @var{body}@dots{}
10463 (setq count (1+ count))) ; @r{incrementer}
10464 @end group
10465 @end smallexample
10466
10467 @noindent
10468 Note that you need to set the initial value of @code{count}; usually it
10469 is set to 1.
10470
10471 @menu
10472 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
10473 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10474 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10475 @end menu
10476
10477 @node Incrementing Example
10478 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with incrementing counter
10479
10480 Suppose you are playing on the beach and decide to make a triangle of
10481 pebbles, putting one pebble in the first row, two in the second row,
10482 three in the third row and so on, like this:
10483
10484 @sp 1
10485 @c pebble diagram
10486 @ifnottex
10487 @smallexample
10488 @group
10489 *
10490 * *
10491 * * *
10492 * * * *
10493 @end group
10494 @end smallexample
10495 @end ifnottex
10496 @iftex
10497 @smallexample
10498 @group
10499 @bullet{}
10500 @bullet{} @bullet{}
10501 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10502 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10503 @end group
10504 @end smallexample
10505 @end iftex
10506 @sp 1
10507
10508 @noindent
10509 (About 2500 years ago, Pythagoras and others developed the beginnings of
10510 number theory by considering questions such as this.)
10511
10512 Suppose you want to know how many pebbles you will need to make a
10513 triangle with 7 rows?
10514
10515 Clearly, what you need to do is add up the numbers from 1 to 7. There
10516 are two ways to do this; start with the smallest number, one, and add up
10517 the list in sequence, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so on; or start with the largest
10518 number and add the list going down: 7, 6, 5, 4 and so on. Because both
10519 mechanisms illustrate common ways of writing @code{while} loops, we will
10520 create two examples, one counting up and the other counting down. In
10521 this first example, we will start with 1 and add 2, 3, 4 and so on.
10522
10523 If you are just adding up a short list of numbers, the easiest way to do
10524 it is to add up all the numbers at once. However, if you do not know
10525 ahead of time how many numbers your list will have, or if you want to be
10526 prepared for a very long list, then you need to design your addition so
10527 that what you do is repeat a simple process many times instead of doing
10528 a more complex process once.
10529
10530 For example, instead of adding up all the pebbles all at once, what you
10531 can do is add the number of pebbles in the first row, 1, to the number
10532 in the second row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to the
10533 third row, 3. Then you can add the number in the fourth row, 4, to the
10534 total of the first three rows; and so on.
10535
10536 The critical characteristic of the process is that each repetitive
10537 action is simple. In this case, at each step we add only two numbers,
10538 the number of pebbles in the row and the total already found. This
10539 process of adding two numbers is repeated again and again until the last
10540 row has been added to the total of all the preceding rows. In a more
10541 complex loop the repetitive action might not be so simple, but it will
10542 be simpler than doing everything all at once.
10543
10544 @node Inc Example parts
10545 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10546
10547 The preceding analysis gives us the bones of our function definition:
10548 first, we will need a variable that we can call @code{total} that will
10549 be the total number of pebbles. This will be the value returned by
10550 the function.
10551
10552 Second, we know that the function will require an argument: this
10553 argument will be the total number of rows in the triangle. It can be
10554 called @code{number-of-rows}.
10555
10556 Finally, we need a variable to use as a counter. We could call this
10557 variable @code{counter}, but a better name is @code{row-number}. That
10558 is because what the counter does in this function is count rows, and a
10559 program should be written to be as understandable as possible.
10560
10561 When the Lisp interpreter first starts evaluating the expressions in the
10562 function, the value of @code{total} should be set to zero, since we have
10563 not added anything to it. Then the function should add the number of
10564 pebbles in the first row to the total, and then add the number of
10565 pebbles in the second to the total, and then add the number of
10566 pebbles in the third row to the total, and so on, until there are no
10567 more rows left to add.
10568
10569 Both @code{total} and @code{row-number} are used only inside the
10570 function, so they can be declared as local variables with @code{let}
10571 and given initial values. Clearly, the initial value for @code{total}
10572 should be 0. The initial value of @code{row-number} should be 1,
10573 since we start with the first row. This means that the @code{let}
10574 statement will look like this:
10575
10576 @smallexample
10577 @group
10578 (let ((total 0)
10579 (row-number 1))
10580 @var{body}@dots{})
10581 @end group
10582 @end smallexample
10583
10584 After the internal variables are declared and bound to their initial
10585 values, we can begin the @code{while} loop. The expression that serves
10586 as the test should return a value of @code{t} for true so long as the
10587 @code{row-number} is less than or equal to the @code{number-of-rows}.
10588 (If the expression tests true only so long as the row number is less
10589 than the number of rows in the triangle, the last row will never be
10590 added to the total; hence the row number has to be either less than or
10591 equal to the number of rows.)
10592
10593 @need 1500
10594 @findex <= @r{(less than or equal)}
10595 Lisp provides the @code{<=} function that returns true if the value of
10596 its first argument is less than or equal to the value of its second
10597 argument and false otherwise. So the expression that the @code{while}
10598 will evaluate as its test should look like this:
10599
10600 @smallexample
10601 (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10602 @end smallexample
10603
10604 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10605 of pebbles in a row to the total already found. Since the number of
10606 pebbles in the row is equal to the row number, the total can be found by
10607 adding the row number to the total. (Clearly, in a more complex
10608 situation, the number of pebbles in the row might be related to the row
10609 number in a more complicated way; if this were the case, the row number
10610 would be replaced by the appropriate expression.)
10611
10612 @smallexample
10613 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10614 @end smallexample
10615
10616 @noindent
10617 What this does is set the new value of @code{total} to be equal to the
10618 sum of adding the number of pebbles in the row to the previous total.
10619
10620 After setting the value of @code{total}, the conditions need to be
10621 established for the next repetition of the loop, if there is one. This
10622 is done by incrementing the value of the @code{row-number} variable,
10623 which serves as a counter. After the @code{row-number} variable has
10624 been incremented, the true-or-false-test at the beginning of the
10625 @code{while} loop tests whether its value is still less than or equal to
10626 the value of the @code{number-of-rows} and if it is, adds the new value
10627 of the @code{row-number} variable to the @code{total} of the previous
10628 repetition of the loop.
10629
10630 @need 1200
10631 The built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1+} adds 1 to a number, so the
10632 @code{row-number} variable can be incremented with this expression:
10633
10634 @smallexample
10635 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))
10636 @end smallexample
10637
10638 @node Inc Example altogether
10639 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10640
10641 We have created the parts for the function definition; now we need to
10642 put them together.
10643
10644 @need 800
10645 First, the contents of the @code{while} expression:
10646
10647 @smallexample
10648 @group
10649 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10650 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10651 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))) ; @r{incrementer}
10652 @end group
10653 @end smallexample
10654
10655 Along with the @code{let} expression varlist, this very nearly
10656 completes the body of the function definition. However, it requires
10657 one final element, the need for which is somewhat subtle.
10658
10659 The final touch is to place the variable @code{total} on a line by
10660 itself after the @code{while} expression. Otherwise, the value returned
10661 by the whole function is the value of the last expression that is
10662 evaluated in the body of the @code{let}, and this is the value
10663 returned by the @code{while}, which is always @code{nil}.
10664
10665 This may not be evident at first sight. It almost looks as if the
10666 incrementing expression is the last expression of the whole function.
10667 But that expression is part of the body of the @code{while}; it is the
10668 last element of the list that starts with the symbol @code{while}.
10669 Moreover, the whole of the @code{while} loop is a list within the body
10670 of the @code{let}.
10671
10672 @need 1250
10673 In outline, the function will look like this:
10674
10675 @smallexample
10676 @group
10677 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
10678 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
10679 (let (@var{varlist})
10680 (while (@var{true-or-false-test})
10681 @var{body-of-while}@dots{} )
10682 @dots{} )) ; @r{Need final expression here.}
10683 @end group
10684 @end smallexample
10685
10686 The result of evaluating the @code{let} is what is going to be returned
10687 by the @code{defun} since the @code{let} is not embedded within any
10688 containing list, except for the @code{defun} as a whole. However, if
10689 the @code{while} is the last element of the @code{let} expression, the
10690 function will always return @code{nil}. This is not what we want!
10691 Instead, what we want is the value of the variable @code{total}. This
10692 is returned by simply placing the symbol as the last element of the list
10693 starting with @code{let}. It gets evaluated after the preceding
10694 elements of the list are evaluated, which means it gets evaluated after
10695 it has been assigned the correct value for the total.
10696
10697 It may be easier to see this by printing the list starting with
10698 @code{let} all on one line. This format makes it evident that the
10699 @var{varlist} and @code{while} expressions are the second and third
10700 elements of the list starting with @code{let}, and the @code{total} is
10701 the last element:
10702
10703 @smallexample
10704 @group
10705 (let (@var{varlist}) (while (@var{true-or-false-test}) @var{body-of-while}@dots{} ) total)
10706 @end group
10707 @end smallexample
10708
10709 @need 1200
10710 Putting everything together, the @code{triangle} function definition
10711 looks like this:
10712
10713 @smallexample
10714 @group
10715 (defun triangle (number-of-rows) ; @r{Version with}
10716 ; @r{ incrementing counter.}
10717 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
10718 The first row has one pebble, the second row two pebbles,
10719 the third row three pebbles, and so on.
10720 The argument is NUMBER-OF-ROWS."
10721 @end group
10722 @group
10723 (let ((total 0)
10724 (row-number 1))
10725 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10726 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10727 (setq row-number (1+ row-number)))
10728 total))
10729 @end group
10730 @end smallexample
10731
10732 @need 1200
10733 After you have installed @code{triangle} by evaluating the function, you
10734 can try it out. Here are two examples:
10735
10736 @smallexample
10737 @group
10738 (triangle 4)
10739
10740 (triangle 7)
10741 @end group
10742 @end smallexample
10743
10744 @noindent
10745 The sum of the first four numbers is 10 and the sum of the first seven
10746 numbers is 28.
10747
10748 @node Decrementing Loop
10749 @subsection Loop with a Decrementing Counter
10750
10751 Another common way to write a @code{while} loop is to write the test
10752 so that it determines whether a counter is greater than zero. So long
10753 as the counter is greater than zero, the loop is repeated. But when
10754 the counter is equal to or less than zero, the loop is stopped. For
10755 this to work, the counter has to start out greater than zero and then
10756 be made smaller and smaller by a form that is evaluated
10757 repeatedly.
10758
10759 The test will be an expression such as @code{(> counter 0)} which
10760 returns @code{t} for true if the value of @code{counter} is greater
10761 than zero, and @code{nil} for false if the value of @code{counter} is
10762 equal to or less than zero. The expression that makes the number
10763 smaller and smaller can be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq
10764 counter (1- counter))}, where @code{1-} is a built-in function in
10765 Emacs Lisp that subtracts 1 from its argument.
10766
10767 @need 1250
10768 The template for a decrementing @code{while} loop looks like this:
10769
10770 @smallexample
10771 @group
10772 (while (> counter 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10773 @var{body}@dots{}
10774 (setq counter (1- counter))) ; @r{decrementer}
10775 @end group
10776 @end smallexample
10777
10778 @menu
10779 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
10780 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10781 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10782 @end menu
10783
10784 @node Decrementing Example
10785 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with decrementing counter
10786
10787 To illustrate a loop with a decrementing counter, we will rewrite the
10788 @code{triangle} function so the counter decreases to zero.
10789
10790 This is the reverse of the earlier version of the function. In this
10791 case, to find out how many pebbles are needed to make a triangle with
10792 3 rows, add the number of pebbles in the third row, 3, to the number
10793 in the preceding row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to
10794 the row that precedes them, which is 1.
10795
10796 Likewise, to find the number of pebbles in a triangle with 7 rows, add
10797 the number of pebbles in the seventh row, 7, to the number in the
10798 preceding row, which is 6, and then add the total of those two rows to
10799 the row that precedes them, which is 5, and so on. As in the previous
10800 example, each addition only involves adding two numbers, the total of
10801 the rows already added up and the number of pebbles in the row that is
10802 being added to the total. This process of adding two numbers is
10803 repeated again and again until there are no more pebbles to add.
10804
10805 We know how many pebbles to start with: the number of pebbles in the
10806 last row is equal to the number of rows. If the triangle has seven
10807 rows, the number of pebbles in the last row is 7. Likewise, we know how
10808 many pebbles are in the preceding row: it is one less than the number in
10809 the row.
10810
10811 @node Dec Example parts
10812 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10813
10814 We start with three variables: the total number of rows in the
10815 triangle; the number of pebbles in a row; and the total number of
10816 pebbles, which is what we want to calculate. These variables can be
10817 named @code{number-of-rows}, @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}, and
10818 @code{total}, respectively.
10819
10820 Both @code{total} and @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} are used only
10821 inside the function and are declared with @code{let}. The initial
10822 value of @code{total} should, of course, be zero. However, the
10823 initial value of @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be equal to
10824 the number of rows in the triangle, since the addition will start with
10825 the longest row.
10826
10827 @need 1250
10828 This means that the beginning of the @code{let} expression will look
10829 like this:
10830
10831 @smallexample
10832 @group
10833 (let ((total 0)
10834 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
10835 @var{body}@dots{})
10836 @end group
10837 @end smallexample
10838
10839 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10840 of pebbles in a row to the total already found, that is, by repeatedly
10841 evaluating the following expression:
10842
10843 @smallexample
10844 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10845 @end smallexample
10846
10847 @noindent
10848 After the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is added to the @code{total},
10849 the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be decremented by one, since
10850 the next time the loop repeats, the preceding row will be
10851 added to the total.
10852
10853 The number of pebbles in a preceding row is one less than the number of
10854 pebbles in a row, so the built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1-} can be
10855 used to compute the number of pebbles in the preceding row. This can be
10856 done with the following expression:
10857
10858 @smallexample
10859 @group
10860 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
10861 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10862 @end group
10863 @end smallexample
10864
10865 Finally, we know that the @code{while} loop should stop making repeated
10866 additions when there are no pebbles in a row. So the test for
10867 the @code{while} loop is simply:
10868
10869 @smallexample
10870 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
10871 @end smallexample
10872
10873 @node Dec Example altogether
10874 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10875
10876 We can put these expressions together to create a function definition
10877 that works. However, on examination, we find that one of the local
10878 variables is unneeded!
10879
10880 @need 1250
10881 The function definition looks like this:
10882
10883 @smallexample
10884 @group
10885 ;;; @r{First subtractive version.}
10886 (defun triangle (number-of-rows)
10887 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
10888 (let ((total 0)
10889 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
10890 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
10891 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10892 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
10893 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row)))
10894 total))
10895 @end group
10896 @end smallexample
10897
10898 As written, this function works.
10899
10900 However, we do not need @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}.
10901
10902 @cindex Argument as local variable
10903 When the @code{triangle} function is evaluated, the symbol
10904 @code{number-of-rows} will be bound to a number, giving it an initial
10905 value. That number can be changed in the body of the function as if
10906 it were a local variable, without any fear that such a change will
10907 effect the value of the variable outside of the function. This is a
10908 very useful characteristic of Lisp; it means that the variable
10909 @code{number-of-rows} can be used anywhere in the function where
10910 @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is used.
10911
10912 @need 800
10913 Here is a second version of the function written a bit more cleanly:
10914
10915 @smallexample
10916 @group
10917 (defun triangle (number) ; @r{Second version.}
10918 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
10919 (let ((total 0))
10920 (while (> number 0)
10921 (setq total (+ total number))
10922 (setq number (1- number)))
10923 total))
10924 @end group
10925 @end smallexample
10926
10927 In brief, a properly written @code{while} loop will consist of three parts:
10928
10929 @enumerate
10930 @item
10931 A test that will return false after the loop has repeated itself the
10932 correct number of times.
10933
10934 @item
10935 An expression the evaluation of which will return the value desired
10936 after being repeatedly evaluated.
10937
10938 @item
10939 An expression to change the value passed to the true-or-false-test so
10940 that the test returns false after the loop has repeated itself the right
10941 number of times.
10942 @end enumerate
10943
10944 @node dolist dotimes
10945 @section Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
10946
10947 In addition to @code{while}, both @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
10948 provide for looping. Sometimes these are quicker to write than the
10949 equivalent @code{while} loop. Both are Lisp macros. (@xref{Macros, ,
10950 Macros, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. )
10951
10952 @code{dolist} works like a @code{while} loop that ``@sc{cdr}s down a
10953 list'': @code{dolist} automatically shortens the list each time it
10954 loops---takes the @sc{cdr} of the list---and binds the @sc{car} of
10955 each shorter version of the list to the first of its arguments.
10956
10957 @code{dotimes} loops a specific number of times: you specify the number.
10958
10959 @menu
10960 * dolist::
10961 * dotimes::
10962 @end menu
10963
10964 @node dolist
10965 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{dolist} Macro
10966 @findex dolist
10967
10968 Suppose, for example, you want to reverse a list, so that
10969 ``first'' ``second'' ``third'' becomes ``third'' ``second'' ``first''.
10970
10971 @need 1250
10972 In practice, you would use the @code{reverse} function, like this:
10973
10974 @smallexample
10975 @group
10976 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10977
10978 (reverse animals)
10979 @end group
10980 @end smallexample
10981
10982 @need 800
10983 @noindent
10984 Here is how you could reverse the list using a @code{while} loop:
10985
10986 @smallexample
10987 @group
10988 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10989
10990 (defun reverse-list-with-while (list)
10991 "Using while, reverse the order of LIST."
10992 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
10993 (while list
10994 (setq value (cons (car list) value))
10995 (setq list (cdr list)))
10996 value))
10997
10998 (reverse-list-with-while animals)
10999 @end group
11000 @end smallexample
11001
11002 @need 800
11003 @noindent
11004 And here is how you could use the @code{dolist} macro:
11005
11006 @smallexample
11007 @group
11008 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11009
11010 (defun reverse-list-with-dolist (list)
11011 "Using dolist, reverse the order of LIST."
11012 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11013 (dolist (element list value)
11014 (setq value (cons element value)))))
11015
11016 (reverse-list-with-dolist animals)
11017 @end group
11018 @end smallexample
11019
11020 @need 1250
11021 @noindent
11022 In Info, you can place your cursor after the closing parenthesis of
11023 each expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}; in each case, you should see
11024
11025 @smallexample
11026 (tiger lion giraffe gazelle)
11027 @end smallexample
11028
11029 @noindent
11030 in the echo area.
11031
11032 For this example, the existing @code{reverse} function is obviously best.
11033 The @code{while} loop is just like our first example (@pxref{Loop
11034 Example, , A @code{while} Loop and a List}). The @code{while} first
11035 checks whether the list has elements; if so, it constructs a new list
11036 by adding the first element of the list to the existing list (which in
11037 the first iteration of the loop is @code{nil}). Since the second
11038 element is prepended in front of the first element, and the third
11039 element is prepended in front of the second element, the list is reversed.
11040
11041 In the expression using a @code{while} loop,
11042 the @w{@code{(setq list (cdr list))}}
11043 expression shortens the list, so the @code{while} loop eventually
11044 stops. In addition, it provides the @code{cons} expression with a new
11045 first element by creating a new and shorter list at each repetition of
11046 the loop.
11047
11048 The @code{dolist} expression does very much the same as the
11049 @code{while} expression, except that the @code{dolist} macro does some
11050 of the work you have to do when writing a @code{while} expression.
11051
11052 Like a @code{while} loop, a @code{dolist} loops. What is different is
11053 that it automatically shortens the list each time it loops---it
11054 ``@sc{cdr}s down the list'' on its own---and it automatically binds
11055 the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list to the first of its
11056 arguments.
11057
11058 In the example, the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list is
11059 referred to using the symbol @samp{element}, the list itself is called
11060 @samp{list}, and the value returned is called @samp{value}. The
11061 remainder of the @code{dolist} expression is the body.
11062
11063 The @code{dolist} expression binds the @sc{car} of each shorter
11064 version of the list to @code{element} and then evaluates the body of
11065 the expression; and repeats the loop. The result is returned in
11066 @code{value}.
11067
11068 @node dotimes
11069 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{dotimes} Macro
11070 @findex dotimes
11071
11072 The @code{dotimes} macro is similar to @code{dolist}, except that it
11073 loops a specific number of times.
11074
11075 The first argument to @code{dotimes} is assigned the numbers 0, 1, 2
11076 and so forth each time around the loop, and the value of the third
11077 argument is returned. You need to provide the value of the second
11078 argument, which is how many times the macro loops.
11079
11080 @need 1250
11081 For example, the following binds the numbers from 0 up to, but not
11082 including, the number 3 to the first argument, @var{number}, and then
11083 constructs a list of the three numbers. (The first number is 0, the
11084 second number is 1, and the third number is 2; this makes a total of
11085 three numbers in all, starting with zero as the first number.)
11086
11087 @smallexample
11088 @group
11089 (let (value) ; otherwise a value is a void variable
11090 (dotimes (number 3 value)
11091 (setq value (cons number value))))
11092
11093 @result{} (2 1 0)
11094 @end group
11095 @end smallexample
11096
11097 @noindent
11098 @code{dotimes} returns @code{value}, so the way to use
11099 @code{dotimes} is to operate on some expression @var{number} number of
11100 times and then return the result, either as a list or an atom.
11101
11102 @need 1250
11103 Here is an example of a @code{defun} that uses @code{dotimes} to add
11104 up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
11105
11106 @smallexample
11107 @group
11108 (defun triangle-using-dotimes (number-of-rows)
11109 "Using ‘dotimes’, add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11110 (let ((total 0)) ; otherwise a total is a void variable
11111 (dotimes (number number-of-rows total)
11112 (setq total (+ total (1+ number))))))
11113
11114 (triangle-using-dotimes 4)
11115 @end group
11116 @end smallexample
11117
11118 @node Recursion
11119 @section Recursion
11120 @cindex Recursion
11121
11122 A recursive function contains code that tells the Lisp interpreter to
11123 call a program that runs exactly like itself, but with slightly
11124 different arguments. The code runs exactly the same because it has
11125 the same name. However, even though the program has the same name, it
11126 is not the same entity. It is different. In the jargon, it is a
11127 different ``instance''.
11128
11129 Eventually, if the program is written correctly, the ``slightly
11130 different arguments'' will become sufficiently different from the first
11131 arguments that the final instance will stop.
11132
11133 @menu
11134 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
11135 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
11136 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
11137 * Recursive triangle function::
11138 * Recursion with cond::
11139 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
11140 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
11141 * No deferment solution::
11142 @end menu
11143
11144 @node Building Robots
11145 @subsection Building Robots: Extending the Metaphor
11146 @cindex Building robots
11147 @cindex Robots, building
11148
11149 It is sometimes helpful to think of a running program as a robot that
11150 does a job. In doing its job, a recursive function calls on a second
11151 robot to help it. The second robot is identical to the first in every
11152 way, except that the second robot helps the first and has been
11153 passed different arguments than the first.
11154
11155 In a recursive function, the second robot may call a third; and the
11156 third may call a fourth, and so on. Each of these is a different
11157 entity; but all are clones.
11158
11159 Since each robot has slightly different instructions---the arguments
11160 will differ from one robot to the next---the last robot should know
11161 when to stop.
11162
11163 Let's expand on the metaphor in which a computer program is a robot.
11164
11165 A function definition provides the blueprints for a robot. When you
11166 install a function definition, that is, when you evaluate a
11167 @code{defun} macro, you install the necessary equipment to build
11168 robots. It is as if you were in a factory, setting up an assembly
11169 line. Robots with the same name are built according to the same
11170 blueprints. So they have, as it were, the same ``model number'', but a
11171 different ``serial number''.
11172
11173 We often say that a recursive function ``calls itself''. What we mean
11174 is that the instructions in a recursive function cause the Lisp
11175 interpreter to run a different function that has the same name and
11176 does the same job as the first, but with different arguments.
11177
11178 It is important that the arguments differ from one instance to the
11179 next; otherwise, the process will never stop.
11180
11181 @node Recursive Definition Parts
11182 @subsection The Parts of a Recursive Definition
11183 @cindex Parts of a Recursive Definition
11184 @cindex Recursive Definition Parts
11185
11186 A recursive function typically contains a conditional expression which
11187 has three parts:
11188
11189 @enumerate
11190 @item
11191 A true-or-false-test that determines whether the function is called
11192 again, here called the @dfn{do-again-test}.
11193
11194 @item
11195 The name of the function. When this name is called, a new instance of
11196 the function---a new robot, as it were---is created and told what to do.
11197
11198 @item
11199 An expression that returns a different value each time the function is
11200 called, here called the @dfn{next-step-expression}. Consequently, the
11201 argument (or arguments) passed to the new instance of the function
11202 will be different from that passed to the previous instance. This
11203 causes the conditional expression, the @dfn{do-again-test}, to test
11204 false after the correct number of repetitions.
11205 @end enumerate
11206
11207 Recursive functions can be much simpler than any other kind of
11208 function. Indeed, when people first start to use them, they often look
11209 so mysteriously simple as to be incomprehensible. Like riding a
11210 bicycle, reading a recursive function definition takes a certain knack
11211 which is hard at first but then seems simple.
11212
11213 @need 1200
11214 There are several different common recursive patterns. A very simple
11215 pattern looks like this:
11216
11217 @smallexample
11218 @group
11219 (defun @var{name-of-recursive-function} (@var{argument-list})
11220 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
11221 (if @var{do-again-test}
11222 @var{body}@dots{}
11223 (@var{name-of-recursive-function}
11224 @var{next-step-expression})))
11225 @end group
11226 @end smallexample
11227
11228 Each time a recursive function is evaluated, a new instance of it is
11229 created and told what to do. The arguments tell the instance what to do.
11230
11231 An argument is bound to the value of the next-step-expression. Each
11232 instance runs with a different value of the next-step-expression.
11233
11234 The value in the next-step-expression is used in the do-again-test.
11235
11236 The value returned by the next-step-expression is passed to the new
11237 instance of the function, which evaluates it (or some
11238 transmogrification of it) to determine whether to continue or stop.
11239 The next-step-expression is designed so that the do-again-test returns
11240 false when the function should no longer be repeated.
11241
11242 The do-again-test is sometimes called the @dfn{stop condition},
11243 since it stops the repetitions when it tests false.
11244
11245 @node Recursion with list
11246 @subsection Recursion with a List
11247
11248 The example of a @code{while} loop that printed the elements of a list
11249 of numbers can be written recursively. Here is the code, including
11250 an expression to set the value of the variable @code{animals} to a list.
11251
11252 If you are reading this in Info in Emacs, you can evaluate this
11253 expression directly in Info. Otherwise, you must copy the example
11254 to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate each expression there.
11255 Use @kbd{C-u C-x C-e} to evaluate the
11256 @code{(print-elements-recursively animals)} expression so that the
11257 results are printed in the buffer; otherwise the Lisp interpreter will
11258 try to squeeze the results into the one line of the echo area.
11259
11260 Also, place your cursor immediately after the last closing parenthesis
11261 of the @code{print-elements-recursively} function, before the comment.
11262 Otherwise, the Lisp interpreter will try to evaluate the comment.
11263
11264 @findex print-elements-recursively
11265 @smallexample
11266 @group
11267 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11268
11269 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11270 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11271 Uses recursion."
11272 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11273 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11274 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11275 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11276
11277 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11278 @end group
11279 @end smallexample
11280
11281 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function first tests whether
11282 there is any content in the list; if there is, the function prints the
11283 first element of the list, the @sc{car} of the list. Then the
11284 function ``invokes itself'', but gives itself as its argument, not the
11285 whole list, but the second and subsequent elements of the list, the
11286 @sc{cdr} of the list.
11287
11288 Put another way, if the list is not empty, the function invokes
11289 another instance of code that is similar to the initial code, but is a
11290 different thread of execution, with different arguments than the first
11291 instance.
11292
11293 Put in yet another way, if the list is not empty, the first robot
11294 assembles a second robot and tells it what to do; the second robot is
11295 a different individual from the first, but is the same model.
11296
11297 When the second evaluation occurs, the @code{when} expression is
11298 evaluated and if true, prints the first element of the list it
11299 receives as its argument (which is the second element of the original
11300 list). Then the function ``calls itself'' with the @sc{cdr} of the list
11301 it is invoked with, which (the second time around) is the @sc{cdr} of
11302 the @sc{cdr} of the original list.
11303
11304 Note that although we say that the function ``calls itself'', what we
11305 mean is that the Lisp interpreter assembles and instructs a new
11306 instance of the program. The new instance is a clone of the first,
11307 but is a separate individual.
11308
11309 Each time the function ``invokes itself'', it invokes itself on a
11310 shorter version of the original list. It creates a new instance that
11311 works on a shorter list.
11312
11313 Eventually, the function invokes itself on an empty list. It creates
11314 a new instance whose argument is @code{nil}. The conditional expression
11315 tests the value of @code{list}. Since the value of @code{list} is
11316 @code{nil}, the @code{when} expression tests false so the then-part is
11317 not evaluated. The function as a whole then returns @code{nil}.
11318
11319 @need 1200
11320 When you evaluate the expression @code{(print-elements-recursively
11321 animals)} in the @file{*scratch*} buffer, you see this result:
11322
11323 @smallexample
11324 @group
11325 gazelle
11326
11327 giraffe
11328
11329 lion
11330
11331 tiger
11332 nil
11333 @end group
11334 @end smallexample
11335
11336 @need 2000
11337 @node Recursive triangle function
11338 @subsection Recursion in Place of a Counter
11339 @findex triangle-recursively
11340
11341 @need 1200
11342 The @code{triangle} function described in a previous section can also
11343 be written recursively. It looks like this:
11344
11345 @smallexample
11346 @group
11347 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11348 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11349 Uses recursion."
11350 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11351 1 ; @r{then-part}
11352 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11353 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11354 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11355
11356 (triangle-recursively 7)
11357 @end group
11358 @end smallexample
11359
11360 @noindent
11361 You can install this function by evaluating it and then try it by
11362 evaluating @code{(triangle-recursively 7)}. (Remember to put your
11363 cursor immediately after the last parenthesis of the function
11364 definition, before the comment.) The function evaluates to 28.
11365
11366 To understand how this function works, let's consider what happens in the
11367 various cases when the function is passed 1, 2, 3, or 4 as the value of
11368 its argument.
11369
11370 @menu
11371 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
11372 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
11373 @end menu
11374
11375 @ifnottex
11376 @node Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2
11377 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 1 or 2
11378 @end ifnottex
11379
11380 First, what happens if the value of the argument is 1?
11381
11382 The function has an @code{if} expression after the documentation
11383 string. It tests whether the value of @code{number} is equal to 1; if
11384 so, Emacs evaluates the then-part of the @code{if} expression, which
11385 returns the number 1 as the value of the function. (A triangle with
11386 one row has one pebble in it.)
11387
11388 Suppose, however, that the value of the argument is 2. In this case,
11389 Emacs evaluates the else-part of the @code{if} expression.
11390
11391 @need 1200
11392 The else-part consists of an addition, the recursive call to
11393 @code{triangle-recursively} and a decrementing action; and it looks like
11394 this:
11395
11396 @smallexample
11397 (+ number (triangle-recursively (1- number)))
11398 @end smallexample
11399
11400 When Emacs evaluates this expression, the innermost expression is
11401 evaluated first; then the other parts in sequence. Here are the steps
11402 in detail:
11403
11404 @table @i
11405 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression.
11406
11407 The innermost expression is @code{(1- number)} so Emacs decrements the
11408 value of @code{number} from 2 to 1.
11409
11410 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11411
11412 The Lisp interpreter creates an individual instance of
11413 @code{triangle-recursively}. It does not matter that this function is
11414 contained within itself. Emacs passes the result Step 1 as the
11415 argument used by this instance of the @code{triangle-recursively}
11416 function
11417
11418 In this case, Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with an
11419 argument of 1. This means that this evaluation of
11420 @code{triangle-recursively} returns 1.
11421
11422 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the value of @code{number}.
11423
11424 The variable @code{number} is the second element of the list that
11425 starts with @code{+}; its value is 2.
11426
11427 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{+} expression.
11428
11429 The @code{+} expression receives two arguments, the first
11430 from the evaluation of @code{number} (Step 3) and the second from the
11431 evaluation of @code{triangle-recursively} (Step 2).
11432
11433 The result of the addition is the sum of 2 plus 1, and the number 3 is
11434 returned, which is correct. A triangle with two rows has three
11435 pebbles in it.
11436 @end table
11437
11438 @node Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4
11439 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 3 or 4
11440
11441 Suppose that @code{triangle-recursively} is called with an argument of
11442 3.
11443
11444 @table @i
11445 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the do-again-test.
11446
11447 The @code{if} expression is evaluated first. This is the do-again
11448 test and returns false, so the else-part of the @code{if} expression
11449 is evaluated. (Note that in this example, the do-again-test causes
11450 the function to call itself when it tests false, not when it tests
11451 true.)
11452
11453 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression of the else-part.
11454
11455 The innermost expression of the else-part is evaluated, which decrements
11456 3 to 2. This is the next-step-expression.
11457
11458 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11459
11460 The number 2 is passed to the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11461
11462 We already know what happens when Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with
11463 an argument of 2. After going through the sequence of actions described
11464 earlier, it returns a value of 3. So that is what will happen here.
11465
11466 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the addition.
11467
11468 3 will be passed as an argument to the addition and will be added to the
11469 number with which the function was called, which is 3.
11470 @end table
11471
11472 @noindent
11473 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 6.
11474
11475 Now that we know what will happen when @code{triangle-recursively} is
11476 called with an argument of 3, it is evident what will happen if it is
11477 called with an argument of 4:
11478
11479 @quotation
11480 @need 800
11481 In the recursive call, the evaluation of
11482
11483 @smallexample
11484 (triangle-recursively (1- 4))
11485 @end smallexample
11486
11487 @need 800
11488 @noindent
11489 will return the value of evaluating
11490
11491 @smallexample
11492 (triangle-recursively 3)
11493 @end smallexample
11494
11495 @noindent
11496 which is 6 and this value will be added to 4 by the addition in the
11497 third line.
11498 @end quotation
11499
11500 @noindent
11501 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 10.
11502
11503 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is evaluated, it evaluates a
11504 version of itself---a different instance of itself---with a smaller
11505 argument, until the argument is small enough so that it does not
11506 evaluate itself.
11507
11508 Note that this particular design for a recursive function
11509 requires that operations be deferred.
11510
11511 Before @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} can calculate its answer, it
11512 must call @code{(triangle-recursively 6)}; and before
11513 @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} can calculate its answer, it must call
11514 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)}; and so on. That is to say, the
11515 calculation that @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} makes must be
11516 deferred until @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} makes its calculation;
11517 and @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} must defer until
11518 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)} completes; and so on.
11519
11520 If each of these instances of @code{triangle-recursively} are thought
11521 of as different robots, the first robot must wait for the second to
11522 complete its job, which must wait until the third completes, and so
11523 on.
11524
11525 There is a way around this kind of waiting, which we will discuss in
11526 @ref{No Deferment, , Recursion without Deferments}.
11527
11528 @node Recursion with cond
11529 @subsection Recursion Example Using @code{cond}
11530 @findex cond
11531
11532 The version of @code{triangle-recursively} described earlier is written
11533 with the @code{if} special form. It can also be written using another
11534 special form called @code{cond}. The name of the special form
11535 @code{cond} is an abbreviation of the word @samp{conditional}.
11536
11537 Although the @code{cond} special form is not used as often in the
11538 Emacs Lisp sources as @code{if}, it is used often enough to justify
11539 explaining it.
11540
11541 @need 800
11542 The template for a @code{cond} expression looks like this:
11543
11544 @smallexample
11545 @group
11546 (cond
11547 @var{body}@dots{})
11548 @end group
11549 @end smallexample
11550
11551 @noindent
11552 where the @var{body} is a series of lists.
11553
11554 @need 800
11555 Written out more fully, the template looks like this:
11556
11557 @smallexample
11558 @group
11559 (cond
11560 (@var{first-true-or-false-test} @var{first-consequent})
11561 (@var{second-true-or-false-test} @var{second-consequent})
11562 (@var{third-true-or-false-test} @var{third-consequent})
11563 @dots{})
11564 @end group
11565 @end smallexample
11566
11567 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates the @code{cond} expression, it
11568 evaluates the first element (the @sc{car} or true-or-false-test) of
11569 the first expression in a series of expressions within the body of the
11570 @code{cond}.
11571
11572 If the true-or-false-test returns @code{nil} the rest of that
11573 expression, the consequent, is skipped and the true-or-false-test of the
11574 next expression is evaluated. When an expression is found whose
11575 true-or-false-test returns a value that is not @code{nil}, the
11576 consequent of that expression is evaluated. The consequent can be one
11577 or more expressions. If the consequent consists of more than one
11578 expression, the expressions are evaluated in sequence and the value of
11579 the last one is returned. If the expression does not have a consequent,
11580 the value of the true-or-false-test is returned.
11581
11582 If none of the true-or-false-tests test true, the @code{cond} expression
11583 returns @code{nil}.
11584
11585 @need 1250
11586 Written using @code{cond}, the @code{triangle} function looks like this:
11587
11588 @smallexample
11589 @group
11590 (defun triangle-using-cond (number)
11591 (cond ((<= number 0) 0)
11592 ((= number 1) 1)
11593 ((> number 1)
11594 (+ number (triangle-using-cond (1- number))))))
11595 @end group
11596 @end smallexample
11597
11598 @noindent
11599 In this example, the @code{cond} returns 0 if the number is less than or
11600 equal to 0, it returns 1 if the number is 1 and it evaluates @code{(+
11601 number (triangle-using-cond (1- number)))} if the number is greater than
11602 1.
11603
11604 @node Recursive Patterns
11605 @subsection Recursive Patterns
11606 @cindex Recursive Patterns
11607
11608 Here are three common recursive patterns. Each involves a list.
11609 Recursion does not need to involve lists, but Lisp is designed for lists
11610 and this provides a sense of its primal capabilities.
11611
11612 @menu
11613 * Every::
11614 * Accumulate::
11615 * Keep::
11616 @end menu
11617
11618 @node Every
11619 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{every}
11620 @cindex Every, type of recursive pattern
11621 @cindex Recursive pattern - every
11622
11623 In the @code{every} recursive pattern, an action is performed on every
11624 element of a list.
11625
11626 @need 1500
11627 The basic pattern is:
11628
11629 @itemize @bullet
11630 @item
11631 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11632 @item
11633 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list)
11634 @itemize @minus
11635 @item
11636 through a recursive call by the function on the rest (the
11637 @sc{cdr}) of the list,
11638 @item
11639 and, optionally, combine the acted-on element, using @code{cons},
11640 with the results of acting on the rest.
11641 @end itemize
11642 @end itemize
11643
11644 @need 1500
11645 Here is example:
11646
11647 @smallexample
11648 @group
11649 (defun square-each (numbers-list)
11650 "Square each of a NUMBERS LIST, recursively."
11651 (if (not numbers-list) ; do-again-test
11652 nil
11653 (cons
11654 (* (car numbers-list) (car numbers-list))
11655 (square-each (cdr numbers-list))))) ; next-step-expression
11656 @end group
11657
11658 @group
11659 (square-each '(1 2 3))
11660 @result{} (1 4 9)
11661 @end group
11662 @end smallexample
11663
11664 @need 1200
11665 @noindent
11666 If @code{numbers-list} is empty, do nothing. But if it has content,
11667 construct a list combining the square of the first number in the list
11668 with the result of the recursive call.
11669
11670 (The example follows the pattern exactly: @code{nil} is returned if
11671 the numbers' list is empty. In practice, you would write the
11672 conditional so it carries out the action when the numbers' list is not
11673 empty.)
11674
11675 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function (@pxref{Recursion with
11676 list, , Recursion with a List}) is another example of an @code{every}
11677 pattern, except in this case, rather than bring the results together
11678 using @code{cons}, we print each element of output.
11679
11680 @need 1250
11681 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function looks like this:
11682
11683 @smallexample
11684 @group
11685 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11686 @end group
11687
11688 @group
11689 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11690 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11691 Uses recursion."
11692 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11693 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11694 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11695 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11696
11697 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11698 @end group
11699 @end smallexample
11700
11701 @need 1500
11702 The pattern for @code{print-elements-recursively} is:
11703
11704 @itemize @bullet
11705 @item
11706 When the list is empty, do nothing.
11707 @item
11708 But when the list has at least one element,
11709 @itemize @minus
11710 @item
11711 act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11712 @item
11713 and make a recursive call on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11714 @end itemize
11715 @end itemize
11716
11717 @node Accumulate
11718 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}
11719 @cindex Accumulate, type of recursive pattern
11720 @cindex Recursive pattern - accumulate
11721
11722 Another recursive pattern is called the @code{accumulate} pattern. In
11723 the @code{accumulate} recursive pattern, an action is performed on
11724 every element of a list and the result of that action is accumulated
11725 with the results of performing the action on the other elements.
11726
11727 This is very like the ``every'' pattern using @code{cons}, except that
11728 @code{cons} is not used, but some other combiner.
11729
11730 @need 1500
11731 The pattern is:
11732
11733 @itemize @bullet
11734 @item
11735 If a list be empty, return zero or some other constant.
11736 @item
11737 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11738 @itemize @minus
11739 @item
11740 and combine that acted-on element, using @code{+} or
11741 some other combining function, with
11742 @item
11743 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11744 @end itemize
11745 @end itemize
11746
11747 @need 1500
11748 Here is an example:
11749
11750 @smallexample
11751 @group
11752 (defun add-elements (numbers-list)
11753 "Add the elements of NUMBERS-LIST together."
11754 (if (not numbers-list)
11755 0
11756 (+ (car numbers-list) (add-elements (cdr numbers-list)))))
11757 @end group
11758
11759 @group
11760 (add-elements '(1 2 3 4))
11761 @result{} 10
11762 @end group
11763 @end smallexample
11764
11765 @xref{Files List, , Making a List of Files}, for an example of the
11766 accumulate pattern.
11767
11768 @node Keep
11769 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{keep}
11770 @cindex Keep, type of recursive pattern
11771 @cindex Recursive pattern - keep
11772
11773 A third recursive pattern is called the @code{keep} pattern.
11774 In the @code{keep} recursive pattern, each element of a list is tested;
11775 the element is acted on and the results are kept only if the element
11776 meets a criterion.
11777
11778 Again, this is very like the ``every'' pattern, except the element is
11779 skipped unless it meets a criterion.
11780
11781 @need 1500
11782 The pattern has three parts:
11783
11784 @itemize @bullet
11785 @item
11786 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11787 @item
11788 Else, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) passes
11789 a test
11790 @itemize @minus
11791 @item
11792 act on that element and combine it, using @code{cons} with
11793 @item
11794 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11795 @end itemize
11796 @item
11797 Otherwise, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) fails
11798 the test
11799 @itemize @minus
11800 @item
11801 skip on that element,
11802 @item
11803 and, recursively call the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11804 @end itemize
11805 @end itemize
11806
11807 @need 1500
11808 Here is an example that uses @code{cond}:
11809
11810 @smallexample
11811 @group
11812 (defun keep-three-letter-words (word-list)
11813 "Keep three letter words in WORD-LIST."
11814 (cond
11815 ;; First do-again-test: stop-condition
11816 ((not word-list) nil)
11817
11818 ;; Second do-again-test: when to act
11819 ((eq 3 (length (symbol-name (car word-list))))
11820 ;; combine acted-on element with recursive call on shorter list
11821 (cons (car word-list) (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list))))
11822
11823 ;; Third do-again-test: when to skip element;
11824 ;; recursively call shorter list with next-step expression
11825 (t (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list)))))
11826 @end group
11827
11828 @group
11829 (keep-three-letter-words '(one two three four five six))
11830 @result{} (one two six)
11831 @end group
11832 @end smallexample
11833
11834 It goes without saying that you need not use @code{nil} as the test for
11835 when to stop; and you can, of course, combine these patterns.
11836
11837 @node No Deferment
11838 @subsection Recursion without Deferments
11839 @cindex Deferment in recursion
11840 @cindex Recursion without Deferments
11841
11842 Let's consider again what happens with the @code{triangle-recursively}
11843 function. We will find that the intermediate calculations are
11844 deferred until all can be done.
11845
11846 @need 800
11847 Here is the function definition:
11848
11849 @smallexample
11850 @group
11851 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11852 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11853 Uses recursion."
11854 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11855 1 ; @r{then-part}
11856 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11857 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11858 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11859 @end group
11860 @end smallexample
11861
11862 What happens when we call this function with a argument of 7?
11863
11864 The first instance of the @code{triangle-recursively} function adds
11865 the number 7 to the value returned by a second instance of
11866 @code{triangle-recursively}, an instance that has been passed an
11867 argument of 6. That is to say, the first calculation is:
11868
11869 @smallexample
11870 (+ 7 (triangle-recursively 6))
11871 @end smallexample
11872
11873 @noindent
11874 The first instance of @code{triangle-recursively}---you may want to
11875 think of it as a little robot---cannot complete its job. It must hand
11876 off the calculation for @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} to a second
11877 instance of the program, to a second robot. This second individual is
11878 completely different from the first one; it is, in the jargon, a
11879 ``different instantiation''. Or, put another way, it is a different
11880 robot. It is the same model as the first; it calculates triangle
11881 numbers recursively; but it has a different serial number.
11882
11883 And what does @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} return? It returns the
11884 number 6 added to the value returned by evaluating
11885 @code{triangle-recursively} with an argument of 5. Using the robot
11886 metaphor, it asks yet another robot to help it.
11887
11888 @need 800
11889 Now the total is:
11890
11891 @smallexample
11892 (+ 7 6 (triangle-recursively 5))
11893 @end smallexample
11894
11895 @need 800
11896 And what happens next?
11897
11898 @smallexample
11899 (+ 7 6 5 (triangle-recursively 4))
11900 @end smallexample
11901
11902 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is called, except for the last
11903 time, it creates another instance of the program---another robot---and
11904 asks it to make a calculation.
11905
11906 @need 800
11907 Eventually, the full addition is set up and performed:
11908
11909 @smallexample
11910 (+ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
11911 @end smallexample
11912
11913 This design for the function defers the calculation of the first step
11914 until the second can be done, and defers that until the third can be
11915 done, and so on. Each deferment means the computer must remember what
11916 is being waited on. This is not a problem when there are only a few
11917 steps, as in this example. But it can be a problem when there are
11918 more steps.
11919
11920 @node No deferment solution
11921 @subsection No Deferment Solution
11922 @cindex No deferment solution
11923 @cindex Solution without deferment
11924
11925 The solution to the problem of deferred operations is to write in a
11926 manner that does not defer operations@footnote{The phrase @dfn{tail
11927 recursive} is used to describe such a process, one that uses
11928 ``constant space''.}. This requires
11929 writing to a different pattern, often one that involves writing two
11930 function definitions, an ``initialization'' function and a ``helper''
11931 function.
11932
11933 The ``initialization'' function sets up the job; the ``helper'' function
11934 does the work.
11935
11936 @need 1200
11937 Here are the two function definitions for adding up numbers. They are
11938 so simple, I find them hard to understand.
11939
11940 @smallexample
11941 @group
11942 (defun triangle-initialization (number)
11943 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11944 This is the `initialization' component of a two function
11945 duo that uses recursion."
11946 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 number))
11947 @end group
11948 @end smallexample
11949
11950 @smallexample
11951 @group
11952 (defun triangle-recursive-helper (sum counter number)
11953 "Return SUM, using COUNTER, through NUMBER inclusive.
11954 This is the “helper” component of a two function duo
11955 that uses recursion."
11956 (if (> counter number)
11957 sum
11958 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum}
11959 (1+ counter) ; @r{counter}
11960 number))) ; @r{number}
11961 @end group
11962 @end smallexample
11963
11964 @need 1250
11965 Install both function definitions by evaluating them, then call
11966 @code{triangle-initialization} with 2 rows:
11967
11968 @smallexample
11969 @group
11970 (triangle-initialization 2)
11971 @result{} 3
11972 @end group
11973 @end smallexample
11974
11975 The ``initialization'' function calls the first instance of the ``helper''
11976 function with three arguments: zero, zero, and a number which is the
11977 number of rows in the triangle.
11978
11979 The first two arguments passed to the ``helper'' function are
11980 initialization values. These values are changed when
11981 @code{triangle-recursive-helper} invokes new instances.@footnote{The
11982 jargon is mildly confusing: @code{triangle-recursive-helper} uses a
11983 process that is iterative in a procedure that is recursive. The
11984 process is called iterative because the computer need only record the
11985 three values, @code{sum}, @code{counter}, and @code{number}; the
11986 procedure is recursive because the function ``calls itself''. On the
11987 other hand, both the process and the procedure used by
11988 @code{triangle-recursively} are called recursive. The word
11989 ``recursive'' has different meanings in the two contexts.}
11990
11991 Let's see what happens when we have a triangle that has one row. (This
11992 triangle will have one pebble in it!)
11993
11994 @need 1200
11995 @code{triangle-initialization} will call its helper with
11996 the arguments @w{@code{0 0 1}}. That function will run the conditional
11997 test whether @code{(> counter number)}:
11998
11999 @smallexample
12000 (> 0 1)
12001 @end smallexample
12002
12003 @need 1200
12004 @noindent
12005 and find that the result is false, so it will invoke
12006 the else-part of the @code{if} clause:
12007
12008 @smallexample
12009 @group
12010 (triangle-recursive-helper
12011 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12012 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12013 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12014 @end group
12015 @end smallexample
12016
12017 @need 800
12018 @noindent
12019 which will first compute:
12020
12021 @smallexample
12022 @group
12023 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ 0 0) ; @r{sum}
12024 (1+ 0) ; @r{counter}
12025 1) ; @r{number}
12026 @exdent which is:
12027
12028 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 1)
12029 @end group
12030 @end smallexample
12031
12032 Again, @code{(> counter number)} will be false, so again, the Lisp
12033 interpreter will evaluate @code{triangle-recursive-helper}, creating a
12034 new instance with new arguments.
12035
12036 @need 800
12037 This new instance will be;
12038
12039 @smallexample
12040 @group
12041 (triangle-recursive-helper
12042 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12043 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12044 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12045
12046 @exdent which is:
12047
12048 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 1)
12049 @end group
12050 @end smallexample
12051
12052 In this case, the @code{(> counter number)} test will be true! So the
12053 instance will return the value of the sum, which will be 1, as
12054 expected.
12055
12056 Now, let's pass @code{triangle-initialization} an argument
12057 of 2, to find out how many pebbles there are in a triangle with two rows.
12058
12059 That function calls @code{(triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 2)}.
12060
12061 @need 800
12062 In stages, the instances called will be:
12063
12064 @smallexample
12065 @group
12066 @r{sum counter number}
12067 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 2)
12068
12069 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 2)
12070
12071 (triangle-recursive-helper 3 3 2)
12072 @end group
12073 @end smallexample
12074
12075 When the last instance is called, the @code{(> counter number)} test
12076 will be true, so the instance will return the value of @code{sum},
12077 which will be 3.
12078
12079 This kind of pattern helps when you are writing functions that can use
12080 many resources in a computer.
12081
12082 @need 1500
12083 @node Looping exercise
12084 @section Looping Exercise
12085
12086 @itemize @bullet
12087 @item
12088 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} in which each row has a
12089 value which is the square of the row number. Use a @code{while} loop.
12090
12091 @item
12092 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} that multiplies instead of
12093 adds the values.
12094
12095 @item
12096 Rewrite these two functions recursively. Rewrite these functions
12097 using @code{cond}.
12098
12099 @c comma in printed title causes problem in Info cross reference
12100 @item
12101 Write a function for Texinfo mode that creates an index entry at the
12102 beginning of a paragraph for every @samp{@@dfn} within the paragraph.
12103 (In a Texinfo file, @samp{@@dfn} marks a definition. This book is
12104 written in Texinfo.)
12105
12106 Many of the functions you will need are described in two of the
12107 previous chapters, @ref{Cutting & Storing Text, , Cutting and Storing
12108 Text}, and @ref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}. If you use
12109 @code{forward-paragraph} to put the index entry at the beginning of
12110 the paragraph, you will have to use @w{@kbd{C-h f}}
12111 (@code{describe-function}) to find out how to make the command go
12112 backwards.
12113
12114 For more information, see
12115 @ifinfo
12116 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating Definitions, texinfo}.
12117 @end ifinfo
12118 @ifhtml
12119 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating, texinfo, Texinfo Manual}, which goes to
12120 a Texinfo manual in the current directory. Or, if you are on the
12121 Internet, see
12122 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/texinfo/}
12123 @end ifhtml
12124 @iftex
12125 ``Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc.''@: in @cite{Texinfo, The GNU
12126 Documentation Format}.
12127 @end iftex
12128 @end itemize
12129
12130 @node Regexp Search
12131 @chapter Regular Expression Searches
12132 @cindex Searches, illustrating
12133 @cindex Regular expression searches
12134 @cindex Patterns, searching for
12135 @cindex Motion by sentence and paragraph
12136 @cindex Sentences, movement by
12137 @cindex Paragraphs, movement by
12138
12139 Regular expression searches are used extensively in GNU Emacs. The
12140 two functions, @code{forward-sentence} and @code{forward-paragraph},
12141 illustrate these searches well. They use regular expressions to find
12142 where to move point. The phrase ``regular expression'' is often written
12143 as ``regexp''.
12144
12145 Regular expression searches are described in @ref{Regexp Search, ,
12146 Regular Expression Search, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, as well as in
12147 @ref{Regular Expressions, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
12148 Manual}. In writing this chapter, I am presuming that you have at
12149 least a mild acquaintance with them. The major point to remember is
12150 that regular expressions permit you to search for patterns as well as
12151 for literal strings of characters. For example, the code in
12152 @code{forward-sentence} searches for the pattern of possible
12153 characters that could mark the end of a sentence, and moves point to
12154 that spot.
12155
12156 Before looking at the code for the @code{forward-sentence} function, it
12157 is worth considering what the pattern that marks the end of a sentence
12158 must be. The pattern is discussed in the next section; following that
12159 is a description of the regular expression search function,
12160 @code{re-search-forward}. The @code{forward-sentence} function
12161 is described in the section following. Finally, the
12162 @code{forward-paragraph} function is described in the last section of
12163 this chapter. @code{forward-paragraph} is a complex function that
12164 introduces several new features.
12165
12166 @menu
12167 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
12168 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
12169 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
12170 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
12171 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
12172 * Regexp Review::
12173 * re-search Exercises::
12174 @end menu
12175
12176 @node sentence-end
12177 @section The Regular Expression for @code{sentence-end}
12178 @findex sentence-end
12179
12180 The symbol @code{sentence-end} is bound to the pattern that marks the
12181 end of a sentence. What should this regular expression be?
12182
12183 Clearly, a sentence may be ended by a period, a question mark, or an
12184 exclamation mark. Indeed, in English, only clauses that end with one
12185 of those three characters should be considered the end of a sentence.
12186 This means that the pattern should include the character set:
12187
12188 @smallexample
12189 [.?!]
12190 @end smallexample
12191
12192 However, we do not want @code{forward-sentence} merely to jump to a
12193 period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark, because such a character
12194 might be used in the middle of a sentence. A period, for example, is
12195 used after abbreviations. So other information is needed.
12196
12197 According to convention, you type two spaces after every sentence, but
12198 only one space after a period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark in
12199 the body of a sentence. So a period, a question mark, or an exclamation
12200 mark followed by two spaces is a good indicator of an end of sentence.
12201 However, in a file, the two spaces may instead be a tab or the end of a
12202 line. This means that the regular expression should include these three
12203 items as alternatives.
12204
12205 @need 800
12206 This group of alternatives will look like this:
12207
12208 @smallexample
12209 @group
12210 \\($\\| \\| \\)
12211 ^ ^^
12212 TAB SPC
12213 @end group
12214 @end smallexample
12215
12216 @noindent
12217 Here, @samp{$} indicates the end of the line, and I have pointed out
12218 where the tab and two spaces are inserted in the expression. Both are
12219 inserted by putting the actual characters into the expression.
12220
12221 Two backslashes, @samp{\\}, are required before the parentheses and
12222 vertical bars: the first backslash quotes the following backslash in
12223 Emacs; and the second indicates that the following character, the
12224 parenthesis or the vertical bar, is special.
12225
12226 @need 1000
12227 Also, a sentence may be followed by one or more carriage returns, like
12228 this:
12229
12230 @smallexample
12231 @group
12232 [
12233 ]*
12234 @end group
12235 @end smallexample
12236
12237 @noindent
12238 Like tabs and spaces, a carriage return is inserted into a regular
12239 expression by inserting it literally. The asterisk indicates that the
12240 @key{RET} is repeated zero or more times.
12241
12242 But a sentence end does not consist only of a period, a question mark or
12243 an exclamation mark followed by appropriate space: a closing quotation
12244 mark or a closing brace of some kind may precede the space. Indeed more
12245 than one such mark or brace may precede the space. These require a
12246 expression that looks like this:
12247
12248 @smallexample
12249 []\"')@}]*
12250 @end smallexample
12251
12252 In this expression, the first @samp{]} is the first character in the
12253 expression; the second character is @samp{"}, which is preceded by a
12254 @samp{\} to tell Emacs the @samp{"} is @emph{not} special. The last
12255 three characters are @samp{'}, @samp{)}, and @samp{@}}.
12256
12257 All this suggests what the regular expression pattern for matching the
12258 end of a sentence should be; and, indeed, if we evaluate
12259 @code{sentence-end} we find that it returns the following value:
12260
12261 @smallexample
12262 @group
12263 sentence-end
12264 @result{} "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12265 ]*"
12266 @end group
12267 @end smallexample
12268
12269 @noindent
12270 (Well, not in GNU Emacs 22; that is because of an effort to make the
12271 process simpler and to handle more glyphs and languages. When the
12272 value of @code{sentence-end} is @code{nil}, then use the value defined
12273 by the function @code{sentence-end}. (Here is a use of the difference
12274 between a value and a function in Emacs Lisp.) The function returns a
12275 value constructed from the variables @code{sentence-end-base},
12276 @code{sentence-end-double-space}, @code{sentence-end-without-period},
12277 and @code{sentence-end-without-space}. The critical variable is
12278 @code{sentence-end-base}; its global value is similar to the one
12279 described above but it also contains two additional quotation marks.
12280 These have differing degrees of curliness. The
12281 @code{sentence-end-without-period} variable, when true, tells Emacs
12282 that a sentence may end without a period, such as text in Thai.)
12283
12284 @ignore
12285 @noindent
12286 (Note that here the @key{TAB}, two spaces, and @key{RET} are shown
12287 literally in the pattern.)
12288
12289 This regular expression can be deciphered as follows:
12290
12291 @table @code
12292 @item [.?!]
12293 The first part of the pattern is the three characters, a period, a question
12294 mark and an exclamation mark, within square brackets. The pattern must
12295 begin with one or other of these characters.
12296
12297 @item []\"')@}]*
12298 The second part of the pattern is the group of closing braces and
12299 quotation marks, which can appear zero or more times. These may follow
12300 the period, question mark or exclamation mark. In a regular expression,
12301 the backslash, @samp{\}, followed by the double quotation mark,
12302 @samp{"}, indicates the class of string-quote characters. Usually, the
12303 double quotation mark is the only character in this class. The
12304 asterisk, @samp{*}, indicates that the items in the previous group (the
12305 group surrounded by square brackets, @samp{[]}) may be repeated zero or
12306 more times.
12307
12308 @item \\($\\| \\| \\)
12309 The third part of the pattern is one or other of: either the end of a
12310 line, or two blank spaces, or a tab. The double back-slashes are used
12311 to prevent Emacs from reading the parentheses and vertical bars as part
12312 of the search pattern; the parentheses are used to mark the group and
12313 the vertical bars are used to indicated that the patterns to either side
12314 of them are alternatives. The dollar sign is used to indicate the end
12315 of a line and both the two spaces and the tab are each inserted as is to
12316 indicate what they are.
12317
12318 @item [@key{RET}]*
12319 Finally, the last part of the pattern indicates that the end of the line
12320 or the whitespace following the period, question mark or exclamation
12321 mark may, but need not, be followed by one or more carriage returns. In
12322 the pattern, the carriage return is inserted as an actual carriage
12323 return between square brackets but here it is shown as @key{RET}.
12324 @end table
12325 @end ignore
12326
12327 @node re-search-forward
12328 @section The @code{re-search-forward} Function
12329 @findex re-search-forward
12330
12331 The @code{re-search-forward} function is very like the
12332 @code{search-forward} function. (@xref{search-forward, , The
12333 @code{search-forward} Function}.)
12334
12335 @code{re-search-forward} searches for a regular expression. If the
12336 search is successful, it leaves point immediately after the last
12337 character in the target. If the search is backwards, it leaves point
12338 just before the first character in the target. You may tell
12339 @code{re-search-forward} to return @code{t} for true. (Moving point
12340 is therefore a ``side effect''.)
12341
12342 Like @code{search-forward}, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes
12343 four arguments:
12344
12345 @enumerate
12346 @item
12347 The first argument is the regular expression that the function searches
12348 for. The regular expression will be a string between quotation marks.
12349
12350 @item
12351 The optional second argument limits how far the function will search; it is a
12352 bound, which is specified as a position in the buffer.
12353
12354 @item
12355 The optional third argument specifies how the function responds to
12356 failure: @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
12357 signal an error (and print a message) when the search fails; any other
12358 value causes it to return @code{nil} if the search fails and @code{t}
12359 if the search succeeds.
12360
12361 @item
12362 The optional fourth argument is the repeat count. A negative repeat
12363 count causes @code{re-search-forward} to search backwards.
12364 @end enumerate
12365
12366 @need 800
12367 The template for @code{re-search-forward} looks like this:
12368
12369 @smallexample
12370 @group
12371 (re-search-forward "@var{regular-expression}"
12372 @var{limit-of-search}
12373 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
12374 @var{repeat-count})
12375 @end group
12376 @end smallexample
12377
12378 The second, third, and fourth arguments are optional. However, if you
12379 want to pass a value to either or both of the last two arguments, you
12380 must also pass a value to all the preceding arguments. Otherwise, the
12381 Lisp interpreter will mistake which argument you are passing the value
12382 to.
12383
12384 @need 1200
12385 In the @code{forward-sentence} function, the regular expression will be
12386 the value of the variable @code{sentence-end}. In simple form, that is:
12387
12388 @smallexample
12389 @group
12390 "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12391 ]*"
12392 @end group
12393 @end smallexample
12394
12395 @noindent
12396 The limit of the search will be the end of the paragraph (since a
12397 sentence cannot go beyond a paragraph). If the search fails, the
12398 function will return @code{nil}; and the repeat count will be provided
12399 by the argument to the @code{forward-sentence} function.
12400
12401 @node forward-sentence
12402 @section @code{forward-sentence}
12403 @findex forward-sentence
12404
12405 The command to move the cursor forward a sentence is a straightforward
12406 illustration of how to use regular expression searches in Emacs Lisp.
12407 Indeed, the function looks longer and more complicated than it is; this
12408 is because the function is designed to go backwards as well as forwards;
12409 and, optionally, over more than one sentence. The function is usually
12410 bound to the key command @kbd{M-e}.
12411
12412 @menu
12413 * Complete forward-sentence::
12414 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
12415 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
12416 @end menu
12417
12418 @ifnottex
12419 @node Complete forward-sentence
12420 @unnumberedsubsec Complete @code{forward-sentence} function definition
12421 @end ifnottex
12422
12423 @need 1250
12424 Here is the code for @code{forward-sentence}:
12425
12426 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12427 @smallexample
12428 @group
12429 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12430 "Move forward to next ‘sentence-end’. With argument, repeat.
12431 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to ‘sentence-beginning’.
12432
12433 The variable ‘sentence-end’ is a regular expression that matches ends of
12434 sentences. Also, every paragraph boundary terminates sentences as well."
12435 @end group
12436 @group
12437 (interactive "p")
12438 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12439 (let ((opoint (point))
12440 (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12441 (while (< arg 0)
12442 (let ((pos (point))
12443 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12444 (if (and (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)
12445 (or (< (match-end 0) pos)
12446 (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)))
12447 (goto-char (match-end 0))
12448 (goto-char par-beg)))
12449 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12450 @end group
12451 @group
12452 (while (> arg 0)
12453 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12454 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12455 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12456 (goto-char par-end)))
12457 (setq arg (1- arg)))
12458 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)))
12459 @end group
12460 @end smallexample
12461
12462 @ignore
12463 GNU Emacs 21
12464 @smallexample
12465 @group
12466 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12467 "Move forward to next sentence-end. With argument, repeat.
12468 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to sentence-beginning.
12469 Sentence ends are identified by the value of sentence-end
12470 treated as a regular expression. Also, every paragraph boundary
12471 terminates sentences as well."
12472 @end group
12473 @group
12474 (interactive "p")
12475 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12476 (while (< arg 0)
12477 (let ((par-beg
12478 (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12479 (if (re-search-backward
12480 (concat sentence-end "[^ \t\n]") par-beg t)
12481 (goto-char (1- (match-end 0)))
12482 (goto-char par-beg)))
12483 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12484 (while (> arg 0)
12485 (let ((par-end
12486 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12487 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12488 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12489 (goto-char par-end)))
12490 (setq arg (1- arg))))
12491 @end group
12492 @end smallexample
12493 @end ignore
12494
12495 The function looks long at first sight and it is best to look at its
12496 skeleton first, and then its muscle. The way to see the skeleton is to
12497 look at the expressions that start in the left-most columns:
12498
12499 @smallexample
12500 @group
12501 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12502 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12503 (interactive "p")
12504 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12505 (let ((opoint (point)) (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12506 (while (< arg 0)
12507 (let ((pos (point))
12508 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12509 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-backwards}
12510 (while (> arg 0)
12511 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12512 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-forwards}
12513 @var{handle-forms-and-equivalent}
12514 @end group
12515 @end smallexample
12516
12517 This looks much simpler! The function definition consists of
12518 documentation, an @code{interactive} expression, an @code{or}
12519 expression, a @code{let} expression, and @code{while} loops.
12520
12521 Let's look at each of these parts in turn.
12522
12523 We note that the documentation is thorough and understandable.
12524
12525 The function has an @code{interactive "p"} declaration. This means
12526 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the
12527 function as its argument. (This will be a number.) If the function
12528 is not passed an argument (it is optional) then the argument
12529 @code{arg} will be bound to 1.
12530
12531 When @code{forward-sentence} is called non-interactively without an
12532 argument, @code{arg} is bound to @code{nil}. The @code{or} expression
12533 handles this. What it does is either leave the value of @code{arg} as
12534 it is, but only if @code{arg} is bound to a value; or it sets the
12535 value of @code{arg} to 1, in the case when @code{arg} is bound to
12536 @code{nil}.
12537
12538 Next is a @code{let}. That specifies the values of two local
12539 variables, @code{point} and @code{sentence-end}. The local value of
12540 point, from before the search, is used in the
12541 @code{constrain-to-field} function which handles forms and
12542 equivalents. The @code{sentence-end} variable is set by the
12543 @code{sentence-end} function.
12544
12545 @node fwd-sentence while loops
12546 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{while} loops
12547
12548 Two @code{while} loops follow. The first @code{while} has a
12549 true-or-false-test that tests true if the prefix argument for
12550 @code{forward-sentence} is a negative number. This is for going
12551 backwards. The body of this loop is similar to the body of the second
12552 @code{while} clause, but it is not exactly the same. We will skip
12553 this @code{while} loop and concentrate on the second @code{while}
12554 loop.
12555
12556 @need 1500
12557 The second @code{while} loop is for moving point forward. Its skeleton
12558 looks like this:
12559
12560 @smallexample
12561 @group
12562 (while (> arg 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
12563 (let @var{varlist}
12564 (if (@var{true-or-false-test})
12565 @var{then-part}
12566 @var{else-part}
12567 (setq arg (1- arg)))) ; @code{while} @r{loop decrementer}
12568 @end group
12569 @end smallexample
12570
12571 The @code{while} loop is of the decrementing kind.
12572 (@xref{Decrementing Loop, , A Loop with a Decrementing Counter}.) It
12573 has a true-or-false-test that tests true so long as the counter (in
12574 this case, the variable @code{arg}) is greater than zero; and it has a
12575 decrementer that subtracts 1 from the value of the counter every time
12576 the loop repeats.
12577
12578 If no prefix argument is given to @code{forward-sentence}, which is
12579 the most common way the command is used, this @code{while} loop will
12580 run once, since the value of @code{arg} will be 1.
12581
12582 The body of the @code{while} loop consists of a @code{let} expression,
12583 which creates and binds a local variable, and has, as its body, an
12584 @code{if} expression.
12585
12586 @need 1250
12587 The body of the @code{while} loop looks like this:
12588
12589 @smallexample
12590 @group
12591 (let ((par-end
12592 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12593 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12594 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12595 (goto-char par-end)))
12596 @end group
12597 @end smallexample
12598
12599 The @code{let} expression creates and binds the local variable
12600 @code{par-end}. As we shall see, this local variable is designed to
12601 provide a bound or limit to the regular expression search. If the
12602 search fails to find a proper sentence ending in the paragraph, it will
12603 stop on reaching the end of the paragraph.
12604
12605 But first, let us examine how @code{par-end} is bound to the value of
12606 the end of the paragraph. What happens is that the @code{let} sets the
12607 value of @code{par-end} to the value returned when the Lisp interpreter
12608 evaluates the expression
12609
12610 @smallexample
12611 @group
12612 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))
12613 @end group
12614 @end smallexample
12615
12616 @noindent
12617 In this expression, @code{(end-of-paragraph-text)} moves point to the
12618 end of the paragraph, @code{(point)} returns the value of point, and then
12619 @code{save-excursion} restores point to its original position. Thus,
12620 the @code{let} binds @code{par-end} to the value returned by the
12621 @code{save-excursion} expression, which is the position of the end of
12622 the paragraph. (The @code{end-of-paragraph-text} function uses
12623 @code{forward-paragraph}, which we will discuss shortly.)
12624
12625 @need 1200
12626 Emacs next evaluates the body of the @code{let}, which is an @code{if}
12627 expression that looks like this:
12628
12629 @smallexample
12630 @group
12631 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t) ; @r{if-part}
12632 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n") ; @r{then-part}
12633 (goto-char par-end))) ; @r{else-part}
12634 @end group
12635 @end smallexample
12636
12637 The @code{if} tests whether its first argument is true and if so,
12638 evaluates its then-part; otherwise, the Emacs Lisp interpreter
12639 evaluates the else-part. The true-or-false-test of the @code{if}
12640 expression is the regular expression search.
12641
12642 It may seem odd to have what looks like the ``real work'' of
12643 the @code{forward-sentence} function buried here, but this is a common
12644 way this kind of operation is carried out in Lisp.
12645
12646 @node fwd-sentence re-search
12647 @unnumberedsubsec The regular expression search
12648
12649 The @code{re-search-forward} function searches for the end of the
12650 sentence, that is, for the pattern defined by the @code{sentence-end}
12651 regular expression. If the pattern is found---if the end of the sentence is
12652 found---then the @code{re-search-forward} function does two things:
12653
12654 @enumerate
12655 @item
12656 The @code{re-search-forward} function carries out a side effect, which
12657 is to move point to the end of the occurrence found.
12658
12659 @item
12660 The @code{re-search-forward} function returns a value of true. This is
12661 the value received by the @code{if}, and means that the search was
12662 successful.
12663 @end enumerate
12664
12665 @noindent
12666 The side effect, the movement of point, is completed before the
12667 @code{if} function is handed the value returned by the successful
12668 conclusion of the search.
12669
12670 When the @code{if} function receives the value of true from a successful
12671 call to @code{re-search-forward}, the @code{if} evaluates the then-part,
12672 which is the expression @code{(skip-chars-backward " \t\n")}. This
12673 expression moves backwards over any blank spaces, tabs or carriage
12674 returns until a printed character is found and then leaves point after
12675 the character. Since point has already been moved to the end of the
12676 pattern that marks the end of the sentence, this action leaves point
12677 right after the closing printed character of the sentence, which is
12678 usually a period.
12679
12680 On the other hand, if the @code{re-search-forward} function fails to
12681 find a pattern marking the end of the sentence, the function returns
12682 false. The false then causes the @code{if} to evaluate its third
12683 argument, which is @code{(goto-char par-end)}: it moves point to the
12684 end of the paragraph.
12685
12686 (And if the text is in a form or equivalent, and point may not move
12687 fully, then the @code{constrain-to-field} function comes into play.)
12688
12689 Regular expression searches are exceptionally useful and the pattern
12690 illustrated by @code{re-search-forward}, in which the search is the
12691 test of an @code{if} expression, is handy. You will see or write code
12692 incorporating this pattern often.
12693
12694 @node forward-paragraph
12695 @section @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
12696 @findex forward-paragraph
12697
12698 @ignore
12699 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12700 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12701 "Move forward to end of paragraph.
12702 With argument ARG, do it ARG times;
12703 a negative argument ARG = -N means move backward N paragraphs.
12704
12705 A line which `paragraph-start' matches either separates paragraphs
12706 \(if `paragraph-separate' matches it also) or is the first line of a paragraph.
12707 A paragraph end is the beginning of a line which is not part of the paragraph
12708 to which the end of the previous line belongs, or the end of the buffer.
12709 Returns the count of paragraphs left to move."
12710 (interactive "p")
12711 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12712 (let* ((opoint (point))
12713 (fill-prefix-regexp
12714 (and fill-prefix (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12715 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12716 (regexp-quote fill-prefix)))
12717 ;; Remove ^ from paragraph-start and paragraph-sep if they are there.
12718 ;; These regexps shouldn't be anchored, because we look for them
12719 ;; starting at the left-margin. This allows paragraph commands to
12720 ;; work normally with indented text.
12721 ;; This hack will not find problem cases like "whatever\\|^something".
12722 (parstart (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-start))
12723 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-start 0)))
12724 (substring paragraph-start 1)
12725 paragraph-start))
12726 (parsep (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-separate))
12727 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-separate 0)))
12728 (substring paragraph-separate 1)
12729 paragraph-separate))
12730 (parsep
12731 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12732 (concat parsep "\\|"
12733 fill-prefix-regexp "[ \t]*$")
12734 parsep))
12735 ;; This is used for searching.
12736 (sp-parstart (concat "^[ \t]*\\(?:" parstart "\\|" parsep "\\)"))
12737 start found-start)
12738 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp)))
12739 (if (and (not (looking-at parsep))
12740 (re-search-backward "^\n" (max (1- (point)) (point-min)) t)
12741 (looking-at parsep))
12742 (setq arg (1+ arg))
12743 (setq start (point))
12744 ;; Move back over paragraph-separating lines.
12745 (forward-char -1) (beginning-of-line)
12746 (while (and (not (bobp))
12747 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12748 (looking-at parsep)))
12749 (forward-line -1))
12750 (if (bobp)
12751 nil
12752 (setq arg (1+ arg))
12753 ;; Go to end of the previous (non-separating) line.
12754 (end-of-line)
12755 ;; Search back for line that starts or separates paragraphs.
12756 (if (if fill-prefix-regexp
12757 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
12758 (let (multiple-lines)
12759 (while (and (progn (beginning-of-line) (not (bobp)))
12760 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12761 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12762 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12763 (unless (= (point) start)
12764 (setq multiple-lines t))
12765 (forward-line -1))
12766 (move-to-left-margin)
12767 ;; This deleted code caused a long hanging-indent line
12768 ;; not to be filled together with the following lines.
12769 ;; ;; Don't move back over a line before the paragraph
12770 ;; ;; which doesn't start with fill-prefix
12771 ;; ;; unless that is the only line we've moved over.
12772 ;; (and (not (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12773 ;; multiple-lines
12774 ;; (forward-line 1))
12775 (not (bobp)))
12776 (while (and (re-search-backward sp-parstart nil 1)
12777 (setq found-start t)
12778 ;; Found a candidate, but need to check if it is a
12779 ;; REAL parstart.
12780 (progn (setq start (point))
12781 (move-to-left-margin)
12782 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12783 (not (and (looking-at parstart)
12784 (or (not use-hard-newlines)
12785 (bobp)
12786 (get-text-property
12787 (1- start) 'hard)))))
12788 (setq found-start nil)
12789 (goto-char start))
12790 found-start)
12791 ;; Found one.
12792 (progn
12793 ;; Move forward over paragraph separators.
12794 ;; We know this cannot reach the place we started
12795 ;; because we know we moved back over a non-separator.
12796 (while (and (not (eobp))
12797 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12798 (looking-at parsep)))
12799 (forward-line 1))
12800 ;; If line before paragraph is just margin, back up to there.
12801 (end-of-line 0)
12802 (if (> (current-column) (current-left-margin))
12803 (forward-char 1)
12804 (skip-chars-backward " \t")
12805 (if (not (bolp))
12806 (forward-line 1))))
12807 ;; No starter or separator line => use buffer beg.
12808 (goto-char (point-min))))))
12809
12810 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
12811 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
12812 (while (and (not (eobp))
12813 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
12814 (looking-at parsep))
12815 (forward-line 1))
12816 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
12817 ;; ... and one more line.
12818 (forward-line 1)
12819 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12820 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
12821 (while (and (not (eobp))
12822 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
12823 (not (looking-at parsep))
12824 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12825 (forward-line 1))
12826 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
12827 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
12828 (goto-char start)
12829 (not (eobp)))
12830 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12831 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12832 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
12833 (and use-hard-newlines
12834 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
12835 (forward-char 1))
12836 (if (< (point) (point-max))
12837 (goto-char start))))
12838 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)
12839 ;; Return the number of steps that could not be done.
12840 arg))
12841 @end ignore
12842
12843 The @code{forward-paragraph} function moves point forward to the end
12844 of the paragraph. It is usually bound to @kbd{M-@}} and makes use of a
12845 number of functions that are important in themselves, including
12846 @code{let*}, @code{match-beginning}, and @code{looking-at}.
12847
12848 The function definition for @code{forward-paragraph} is considerably
12849 longer than the function definition for @code{forward-sentence}
12850 because it works with a paragraph, each line of which may begin with a
12851 fill prefix.
12852
12853 A fill prefix consists of a string of characters that are repeated at
12854 the beginning of each line. For example, in Lisp code, it is a
12855 convention to start each line of a paragraph-long comment with
12856 @samp{;;; }. In Text mode, four blank spaces make up another common
12857 fill prefix, creating an indented paragraph. (@xref{Fill Prefix, , ,
12858 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for more information about fill
12859 prefixes.)
12860
12861 The existence of a fill prefix means that in addition to being able to
12862 find the end of a paragraph whose lines begin on the left-most
12863 column, the @code{forward-paragraph} function must be able to find the
12864 end of a paragraph when all or many of the lines in the buffer begin
12865 with the fill prefix.
12866
12867 Moreover, it is sometimes practical to ignore a fill prefix that
12868 exists, especially when blank lines separate paragraphs.
12869 This is an added complication.
12870
12871 @menu
12872 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
12873 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
12874 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
12875 @end menu
12876
12877 @ifnottex
12878 @node forward-paragraph in brief
12879 @unnumberedsubsec Shortened @code{forward-paragraph} function definition
12880 @end ifnottex
12881
12882 Rather than print all of the @code{forward-paragraph} function, we
12883 will only print parts of it. Read without preparation, the function
12884 can be daunting!
12885
12886 @need 800
12887 In outline, the function looks like this:
12888
12889 @smallexample
12890 @group
12891 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12892 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12893 (interactive "p")
12894 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12895 (let*
12896 @var{varlist}
12897 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp))) ; @r{backward-moving-code}
12898 @dots{}
12899 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp))) ; @r{forward-moving-code}
12900 @dots{}
12901 @end group
12902 @end smallexample
12903
12904 The first parts of the function are routine: the function's argument
12905 list consists of one optional argument. Documentation follows.
12906
12907 The lower case @samp{p} in the @code{interactive} declaration means
12908 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the function.
12909 This will be a number, and is the repeat count of how many paragraphs
12910 point will move. The @code{or} expression in the next line handles
12911 the common case when no argument is passed to the function, which occurs
12912 if the function is called from other code rather than interactively.
12913 This case was described earlier. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
12914 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Now we reach the end of the
12915 familiar part of this function.
12916
12917 @node fwd-para let
12918 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{let*} expression
12919
12920 The next line of the @code{forward-paragraph} function begins a
12921 @code{let*} expression. This is a different than @code{let}. The
12922 symbol is @code{let*} not @code{let}.
12923
12924 @findex let*
12925 The @code{let*} special form is like @code{let} except that Emacs sets
12926 each variable in sequence, one after another, and variables in the
12927 latter part of the varlist can make use of the values to which Emacs
12928 set variables in the earlier part of the varlist.
12929
12930 @ignore
12931 ( refappend save-excursion, , code save-excursion in code append-to-buffer .)
12932 @end ignore
12933
12934 (@ref{append save-excursion, , @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
12935
12936 In the @code{let*} expression in this function, Emacs binds a total of
12937 seven variables: @code{opoint}, @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
12938 @code{parstart}, @code{parsep}, @code{sp-parstart}, @code{start}, and
12939 @code{found-start}.
12940
12941 The variable @code{parsep} appears twice, first, to remove instances
12942 of @samp{^}, and second, to handle fill prefixes.
12943
12944 The variable @code{opoint} is just the value of @code{point}. As you
12945 can guess, it is used in a @code{constrain-to-field} expression, just
12946 as in @code{forward-sentence}.
12947
12948 The variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is set to the value returned by
12949 evaluating the following list:
12950
12951 @smallexample
12952 @group
12953 (and fill-prefix
12954 (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12955 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12956 (regexp-quote fill-prefix))
12957 @end group
12958 @end smallexample
12959
12960 @noindent
12961 This is an expression whose first element is the @code{and} special form.
12962
12963 As we learned earlier (@pxref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new}
12964 function}), the @code{and} special form evaluates each of its
12965 arguments until one of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in
12966 which case the @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if
12967 none of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value
12968 resulting from evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such
12969 a value is not @code{nil}, it is considered true in Lisp.) In other
12970 words, an @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its
12971 arguments are true.
12972 @findex and
12973
12974 In this case, the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to a
12975 non-@code{nil} value only if the following four expressions produce a
12976 true (i.e., a non-@code{nil}) value when they are evaluated; otherwise,
12977 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to @code{nil}.
12978
12979 @table @code
12980 @item fill-prefix
12981 When this variable is evaluated, the value of the fill prefix, if any,
12982 is returned. If there is no fill prefix, this variable returns
12983 @code{nil}.
12984
12985 @item (not (equal fill-prefix "")
12986 This expression checks whether an existing fill prefix is an empty
12987 string, that is, a string with no characters in it. An empty string is
12988 not a useful fill prefix.
12989
12990 @item (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12991 This expression returns @code{nil} if the variable
12992 @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix} has been turned on by being set to a
12993 true value such as @code{t}.
12994
12995 @item (regexp-quote fill-prefix)
12996 This is the last argument to the @code{and} special form. If all the
12997 arguments to the @code{and} are true, the value resulting from
12998 evaluating this expression will be returned by the @code{and} expression
12999 and bound to the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
13000 @end table
13001
13002 @findex regexp-quote
13003 @noindent
13004 The result of evaluating this @code{and} expression successfully is that
13005 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be bound to the value of
13006 @code{fill-prefix} as modified by the @code{regexp-quote} function.
13007 What @code{regexp-quote} does is read a string and return a regular
13008 expression that will exactly match the string and match nothing else.
13009 This means that @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be set to a value that
13010 will exactly match the fill prefix if the fill prefix exists.
13011 Otherwise, the variable will be set to @code{nil}.
13012
13013 The next two local variables in the @code{let*} expression are
13014 designed to remove instances of @samp{^} from @code{parstart} and
13015 @code{parsep}, the local variables which indicate the paragraph start
13016 and the paragraph separator. The next expression sets @code{parsep}
13017 again. That is to handle fill prefixes.
13018
13019 This is the setting that requires the definition call @code{let*}
13020 rather than @code{let}. The true-or-false-test for the @code{if}
13021 depends on whether the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} evaluates to
13022 @code{nil} or some other value.
13023
13024 If @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does not have a value, Emacs evaluates
13025 the else-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to
13026 its local value. (@code{parsep} is a regular expression that matches
13027 what separates paragraphs.)
13028
13029 But if @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does have a value, Emacs evaluates
13030 the then-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to a
13031 regular expression that includes the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} as part
13032 of the pattern.
13033
13034 Specifically, @code{parsep} is set to the original value of the
13035 paragraph separate regular expression concatenated with an alternative
13036 expression that consists of the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} followed by
13037 optional whitespace to the end of the line. The whitespace is defined
13038 by @w{@code{"[ \t]*$"}}.) The @samp{\\|} defines this portion of the
13039 regexp as an alternative to @code{parsep}.
13040
13041 According to a comment in the code, the next local variable,
13042 @code{sp-parstart}, is used for searching, and then the final two,
13043 @code{start} and @code{found-start}, are set to @code{nil}.
13044
13045 Now we get into the body of the @code{let*}. The first part of the body
13046 of the @code{let*} deals with the case when the function is given a
13047 negative argument and is therefore moving backwards. We will skip this
13048 section.
13049
13050 @node fwd-para while
13051 @unnumberedsubsec The forward motion @code{while} loop
13052
13053 The second part of the body of the @code{let*} deals with forward
13054 motion. It is a @code{while} loop that repeats itself so long as the
13055 value of @code{arg} is greater than zero. In the most common use of
13056 the function, the value of the argument is 1, so the body of the
13057 @code{while} loop is evaluated exactly once, and the cursor moves
13058 forward one paragraph.
13059
13060 @ignore
13061 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13062
13063 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13064 (while (and (not (eobp))
13065 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13066 (looking-at parsep))
13067 (forward-line 1))
13068 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13069 ;; ... and one more line.
13070 (forward-line 1)
13071
13072 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13073 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13074 (while (and (not (eobp))
13075 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13076 (not (looking-at parsep))
13077 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13078 (forward-line 1))
13079
13080 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13081 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13082 (goto-char start)
13083 (not (eobp)))
13084 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13085 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13086 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13087 (and use-hard-newlines
13088 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13089 (forward-char 1))
13090
13091 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13092 (goto-char start))))
13093 @end ignore
13094
13095 This part handles three situations: when point is between paragraphs,
13096 when there is a fill prefix and when there is no fill prefix.
13097
13098 @need 800
13099 The @code{while} loop looks like this:
13100
13101 @smallexample
13102 @group
13103 ;; @r{going forwards and not at the end of the buffer}
13104 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13105
13106 ;; @r{between paragraphs}
13107 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13108 (while (and (not (eobp))
13109 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13110 (looking-at parsep))
13111 (forward-line 1))
13112 ;; @r{This decrements the loop}
13113 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13114 ;; ... and one more line.
13115 (forward-line 1)
13116 @end group
13117
13118 @group
13119 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13120 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13121 ;; we go forward line by line
13122 (while (and (not (eobp))
13123 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13124 (not (looking-at parsep))
13125 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13126 (forward-line 1))
13127 @end group
13128
13129 @group
13130 ;; There is no fill prefix;
13131 ;; we go forward character by character
13132 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13133 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13134 (goto-char start)
13135 (not (eobp)))
13136 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13137 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13138 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13139 (and use-hard-newlines
13140 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13141 (forward-char 1))
13142 @end group
13143
13144 @group
13145 ;; and if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the end,
13146 ;; go to whatever was found in the regular expression search
13147 ;; for sp-parstart
13148 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13149 (goto-char start))))
13150 @end group
13151 @end smallexample
13152
13153 @findex eobp
13154 We can see that this is a decrementing counter @code{while} loop,
13155 using the expression @code{(setq arg (1- arg))} as the decrementer.
13156 That expression is not far from the @code{while}, but is hidden in
13157 another Lisp macro, an @code{unless} macro. Unless we are at the end
13158 of the buffer---that is what the @code{eobp} function determines; it
13159 is an abbreviation of @samp{End Of Buffer P}---we decrease the value
13160 of @code{arg} by one.
13161
13162 (If we are at the end of the buffer, we cannot go forward any more and
13163 the next loop of the @code{while} expression will test false since the
13164 test is an @code{and} with @code{(not (eobp))}. The @code{not}
13165 function means exactly as you expect; it is another name for
13166 @code{null}, a function that returns true when its argument is false.)
13167
13168 Interestingly, the loop count is not decremented until we leave the
13169 space between paragraphs, unless we come to the end of buffer or stop
13170 seeing the local value of the paragraph separator.
13171
13172 That second @code{while} also has a @code{(move-to-left-margin)}
13173 expression. The function is self-explanatory. It is inside a
13174 @code{progn} expression and not the last element of its body, so it is
13175 only invoked for its side effect, which is to move point to the left
13176 margin of the current line.
13177
13178 @findex looking-at
13179 The @code{looking-at} function is also self-explanatory; it returns
13180 true if the text after point matches the regular expression given as
13181 its argument.
13182
13183 The rest of the body of the loop looks difficult at first, but makes
13184 sense as you come to understand it.
13185
13186 @need 800
13187 First consider what happens if there is a fill prefix:
13188
13189 @smallexample
13190 @group
13191 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13192 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13193 ;; we go forward line by line
13194 (while (and (not (eobp))
13195 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13196 (not (looking-at parsep))
13197 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13198 (forward-line 1))
13199 @end group
13200 @end smallexample
13201
13202 @noindent
13203 This expression moves point forward line by line so long
13204 as four conditions are true:
13205
13206 @enumerate
13207 @item
13208 Point is not at the end of the buffer.
13209
13210 @item
13211 We can move to the left margin of the text and are
13212 not at the end of the buffer.
13213
13214 @item
13215 The text following point does not separate paragraphs.
13216
13217 @item
13218 The pattern following point is the fill prefix regular expression.
13219 @end enumerate
13220
13221 The last condition may be puzzling, until you remember that point was
13222 moved to the beginning of the line early in the @code{forward-paragraph}
13223 function. This means that if the text has a fill prefix, the
13224 @code{looking-at} function will see it.
13225
13226 @need 1250
13227 Consider what happens when there is no fill prefix.
13228
13229 @smallexample
13230 @group
13231 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13232 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13233 (goto-char start)
13234 (not (eobp)))
13235 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13236 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13237 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13238 (and use-hard-newlines
13239 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13240 (forward-char 1))
13241 @end group
13242 @end smallexample
13243
13244 @noindent
13245 This @code{while} loop has us searching forward for
13246 @code{sp-parstart}, which is the combination of possible whitespace
13247 with the local value of the start of a paragraph or of a paragraph
13248 separator. (The latter two are within an expression starting
13249 @code{\(?:} so that they are not referenced by the
13250 @code{match-beginning} function.)
13251
13252 @need 800
13253 The two expressions,
13254
13255 @smallexample
13256 @group
13257 (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13258 (goto-char start)
13259 @end group
13260 @end smallexample
13261
13262 @noindent
13263 mean go to the start of the text matched by the regular expression
13264 search.
13265
13266 The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression is new. It returns a number
13267 specifying the location of the start of the text that was matched by
13268 the last search.
13269
13270 The @code{match-beginning} function is used here because of a
13271 characteristic of a forward search: a successful forward search,
13272 regardless of whether it is a plain search or a regular expression
13273 search, moves point to the end of the text that is found. In this
13274 case, a successful search moves point to the end of the pattern for
13275 @code{sp-parstart}.
13276
13277 However, we want to put point at the end of the current paragraph, not
13278 somewhere else. Indeed, since the search possibly includes the
13279 paragraph separator, point may end up at the beginning of the next one
13280 unless we use an expression that includes @code{match-beginning}.
13281
13282 @findex match-beginning
13283 When given an argument of 0, @code{match-beginning} returns the
13284 position that is the start of the text matched by the most recent
13285 search. In this case, the most recent search looks for
13286 @code{sp-parstart}. The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression returns
13287 the beginning position of that pattern, rather than the end position
13288 of that pattern.
13289
13290 (Incidentally, when passed a positive number as an argument, the
13291 @code{match-beginning} function returns the location of point at that
13292 parenthesized expression in the last search unless that parenthesized
13293 expression begins with @code{\(?:}. I don't know why @code{\(?:}
13294 appears here since the argument is 0.)
13295
13296 @need 1250
13297 The last expression when there is no fill prefix is
13298
13299 @smallexample
13300 @group
13301 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13302 (goto-char start))))
13303 @end group
13304 @end smallexample
13305
13306 @noindent
13307 This says that if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the
13308 end, point should move to the beginning of whatever was found by the
13309 regular expression search for @code{sp-parstart}.
13310
13311 The full definition for the @code{forward-paragraph} function not only
13312 includes code for going forwards, but also code for going backwards.
13313
13314 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs and you want to see the
13315 whole function, you can type @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function})
13316 and the name of the function. This gives you the function
13317 documentation and the name of the library containing the function's
13318 source. Place point over the name of the library and press the RET
13319 key; you will be taken directly to the source. (Be sure to install
13320 your sources! Without them, you are like a person who tries to drive
13321 a car with his eyes shut!)
13322
13323 @node etags
13324 @section Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File
13325 @findex etags
13326 @cindex @file{TAGS} file, create own
13327
13328 Besides @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}), another way to see the
13329 source of a function is to type @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) and the
13330 name of the function when prompted for it. This is a good habit to
13331 get into. The @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) command takes you directly
13332 to the source for a function, variable, or node. The function depends
13333 on tags tables to tell it where to go.
13334
13335 If the @code{find-tag} function first asks you for the name of a
13336 @file{TAGS} table, give it the name of a @file{TAGS} file such as
13337 @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}. (The exact path to your
13338 @file{TAGS} file depends on how your copy of Emacs was installed. I
13339 just told you the location that provides both my C and my Emacs Lisp
13340 sources.)
13341
13342 You can also create your own @file{TAGS} file for directories that
13343 lack one.
13344
13345 You often need to build and install tags tables yourself. They are
13346 not built automatically. A tags table is called a @file{TAGS} file;
13347 the name is in upper case letters.
13348
13349 You can create a @file{TAGS} file by calling the @code{etags} program
13350 that comes as a part of the Emacs distribution. Usually, @code{etags}
13351 is compiled and installed when Emacs is built. (@code{etags} is not
13352 an Emacs Lisp function or a part of Emacs; it is a C program.)
13353
13354 @need 1250
13355 To create a @file{TAGS} file, first switch to the directory in which
13356 you want to create the file. In Emacs you can do this with the
13357 @kbd{M-x cd} command, or by visiting a file in the directory, or by
13358 listing the directory with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the
13359 compile command, with @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute
13360
13361 @smallexample
13362 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
13363 @end smallexample
13364
13365 @noindent
13366 to create a @file{TAGS} file for Emacs Lisp.
13367
13368 For example, if you have a large number of files in your
13369 @file{~/emacs} directory, as I do---I have 137 @file{.el} files in it,
13370 of which I load 12---you can create a @file{TAGS} file for the Emacs
13371 Lisp files in that directory.
13372
13373 @need 1250
13374 The @code{etags} program takes all the usual shell ``wildcards''. For
13375 example, if you have two directories for which you want a single
13376 @file{TAGS} file, type @w{@code{etags *.el ../elisp/*.el}}, where
13377 @file{../elisp/} is the second directory:
13378
13379 @smallexample
13380 M-x compile RET etags *.el ../elisp/*.el RET
13381 @end smallexample
13382
13383 @need 1250
13384 Type
13385
13386 @smallexample
13387 M-x compile RET etags --help RET
13388 @end smallexample
13389
13390 @noindent
13391 to see a list of the options accepted by @code{etags} as well as a
13392 list of supported languages.
13393
13394 The @code{etags} program handles more than 20 languages, including
13395 Emacs Lisp, Common Lisp, Scheme, C, C++, Ada, Fortran, HTML, Java,
13396 LaTeX, Pascal, Perl, PostScript, Python, TeX, Texinfo, makefiles, and
13397 most assemblers. The program has no switches for specifying the
13398 language; it recognizes the language in an input file according to its
13399 file name and contents.
13400
13401 @file{etags} is very helpful when you are writing code yourself and
13402 want to refer back to functions you have already written. Just run
13403 @code{etags} again at intervals as you write new functions, so they
13404 become part of the @file{TAGS} file.
13405
13406 If you think an appropriate @file{TAGS} file already exists for what
13407 you want, but do not know where it is, you can use the @code{locate}
13408 program to attempt to find it.
13409
13410 Type @w{@kbd{M-x locate @key{RET} TAGS @key{RET}}} and Emacs will list
13411 for you the full path names of all your @file{TAGS} files. On my
13412 system, this command lists 34 @file{TAGS} files. On the other hand, a
13413 ``plain vanilla'' system I recently installed did not contain any
13414 @file{TAGS} files.
13415
13416 If the tags table you want has been created, you can use the @code{M-x
13417 visit-tags-table} command to specify it. Otherwise, you will need to
13418 create the tag table yourself and then use @code{M-x
13419 visit-tags-table}.
13420
13421 @subsubheading Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13422 @cindex Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13423 @cindex Tags in the Emacs sources
13424 @findex make tags
13425
13426 The GNU Emacs sources come with a @file{Makefile} that contains a
13427 sophisticated @code{etags} command that creates, collects, and merges
13428 tags tables from all over the Emacs sources and puts the information
13429 into one @file{TAGS} file in the @file{src/} directory. (The
13430 @file{src/} directory is below the top level of your Emacs directory.)
13431
13432 @need 1250
13433 To build this @file{TAGS} file, go to the top level of your Emacs
13434 source directory and run the compile command @code{make tags}:
13435
13436 @smallexample
13437 M-x compile RET make tags RET
13438 @end smallexample
13439
13440 @noindent
13441 (The @code{make tags} command works well with the GNU Emacs sources,
13442 as well as with some other source packages.)
13443
13444 For more information, see @ref{Tags, , Tag Tables, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13445 Manual}.
13446
13447 @node Regexp Review
13448 @section Review
13449
13450 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
13451
13452 @table @code
13453 @item while
13454 Repeatedly evaluate the body of the expression so long as the first
13455 element of the body tests true. Then return @code{nil}. (The
13456 expression is evaluated only for its side effects.)
13457
13458 @need 1250
13459 For example:
13460
13461 @smallexample
13462 @group
13463 (let ((foo 2))
13464 (while (> foo 0)
13465 (insert (format "foo is %d.\n" foo))
13466 (setq foo (1- foo))))
13467
13468 @result{} foo is 2.
13469 foo is 1.
13470 nil
13471 @end group
13472 @end smallexample
13473
13474 @noindent
13475 (The @code{insert} function inserts its arguments at point; the
13476 @code{format} function returns a string formatted from its arguments
13477 the way @code{message} formats its arguments; @code{\n} produces a new
13478 line.)
13479
13480 @item re-search-forward
13481 Search for a pattern, and if the pattern is found, move point to rest
13482 just after it.
13483
13484 @noindent
13485 Takes four arguments, like @code{search-forward}:
13486
13487 @enumerate
13488 @item
13489 A regular expression that specifies the pattern to search for.
13490 (Remember to put quotation marks around this argument!)
13491
13492 @item
13493 Optionally, the limit of the search.
13494
13495 @item
13496 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
13497 error message.
13498
13499 @item
13500 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
13501 search goes backwards.
13502 @end enumerate
13503
13504 @item let*
13505 Bind some variables locally to particular values,
13506 and then evaluate the remaining arguments, returning the value of the
13507 last one. While binding the local variables, use the local values of
13508 variables bound earlier, if any.
13509
13510 @need 1250
13511 For example:
13512
13513 @smallexample
13514 @group
13515 (let* ((foo 7)
13516 (bar (* 3 foo)))
13517 (message "‘bar’ is %d." bar))
13518 @result{} ‘bar’ is 21.
13519 @end group
13520 @end smallexample
13521
13522 @item match-beginning
13523 Return the position of the start of the text found by the last regular
13524 expression search.
13525
13526 @item looking-at
13527 Return @code{t} for true if the text after point matches the argument,
13528 which should be a regular expression.
13529
13530 @item eobp
13531 Return @code{t} for true if point is at the end of the accessible part
13532 of a buffer. The end of the accessible part is the end of the buffer
13533 if the buffer is not narrowed; it is the end of the narrowed part if
13534 the buffer is narrowed.
13535 @end table
13536
13537 @need 1500
13538 @node re-search Exercises
13539 @section Exercises with @code{re-search-forward}
13540
13541 @itemize @bullet
13542 @item
13543 Write a function to search for a regular expression that matches two
13544 or more blank lines in sequence.
13545
13546 @item
13547 Write a function to search for duplicated words, such as ``the the''.
13548 @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13549 Manual}, for information on how to write a regexp (a regular
13550 expression) to match a string that is composed of two identical
13551 halves. You can devise several regexps; some are better than others.
13552 The function I use is described in an appendix, along with several
13553 regexps. @xref{the-the, , @code{the-the} Duplicated Words Function}.
13554 @end itemize
13555
13556 @node Counting Words
13557 @chapter Counting via Repetition and Regexps
13558 @cindex Repetition for word counting
13559 @cindex Regular expressions for word counting
13560
13561 Repetition and regular expression searches are powerful tools that you
13562 often use when you write code in Emacs Lisp. This chapter illustrates
13563 the use of regular expression searches through the construction of
13564 word count commands using @code{while} loops and recursion.
13565
13566 @menu
13567 * Why Count Words::
13568 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
13569 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
13570 * Counting Exercise::
13571 @end menu
13572
13573 @ifnottex
13574 @node Why Count Words
13575 @unnumberedsec Counting words
13576 @end ifnottex
13577
13578 The standard Emacs distribution contains functions for counting the
13579 number of lines and words within a region.
13580
13581 Certain types of writing ask you to count words. Thus, if you write
13582 an essay, you may be limited to 800 words; if you write a novel, you
13583 may discipline yourself to write 1000 words a day. It seems odd, but
13584 for a long time, Emacs lacked a word count command. Perhaps people used
13585 Emacs mostly for code or types of documentation that did not require
13586 word counts; or perhaps they restricted themselves to the operating
13587 system word count command, @code{wc}. Alternatively, people may have
13588 followed the publishers' convention and computed a word count by
13589 dividing the number of characters in a document by five.
13590
13591 There are many ways to implement a command to count words. Here are
13592 some examples, which you may wish to compare with the standard Emacs
13593 command, @code{count-words-region}.
13594
13595 @node @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13596 @section The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
13597 @findex @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13598
13599 A word count command could count words in a line, paragraph, region,
13600 or buffer. What should the command cover? You could design the
13601 command to count the number of words in a complete buffer. However,
13602 the Emacs tradition encourages flexibility---you may want to count
13603 words in just a section, rather than all of a buffer. So it makes
13604 more sense to design the command to count the number of words in a
13605 region. Once you have a command to count words in a region, you can,
13606 if you wish, count words in a whole buffer by marking it with
13607 @w{@kbd{C-x h}} (@code{mark-whole-buffer}).
13608
13609 Clearly, counting words is a repetitive act: starting from the
13610 beginning of the region, you count the first word, then the second
13611 word, then the third word, and so on, until you reach the end of the
13612 region. This means that word counting is ideally suited to recursion
13613 or to a @code{while} loop.
13614
13615 @menu
13616 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
13617 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13618 @end menu
13619
13620 @ifnottex
13621 @node Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13622 @unnumberedsubsec Designing @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13623 @end ifnottex
13624
13625 First, we will implement the word count command with a @code{while}
13626 loop, then with recursion. The command will, of course, be
13627 interactive.
13628
13629 @need 800
13630 The template for an interactive function definition is, as always:
13631
13632 @smallexample
13633 @group
13634 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
13635 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13636 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
13637 @var{body}@dots{})
13638 @end group
13639 @end smallexample
13640
13641 What we need to do is fill in the slots.
13642
13643 The name of the function should be self-explanatory and similar to the
13644 existing @code{count-lines-region} name. This makes the name easier
13645 to remember. @code{count-words-region} is the obvious choice. Since
13646 that name is now used for the standard Emacs command to count words, we
13647 will name our implementation @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13648
13649 The function counts words within a region. This means that the
13650 argument list must contain symbols that are bound to the two
13651 positions, the beginning and end of the region. These two positions
13652 can be called @samp{beginning} and @samp{end} respectively. The first
13653 line of the documentation should be a single sentence, since that is
13654 all that is printed as documentation by a command such as
13655 @code{apropos}. The interactive expression will be of the form
13656 @samp{(interactive "r")}, since that will cause Emacs to pass the
13657 beginning and end of the region to the function's argument list. All
13658 this is routine.
13659
13660 The body of the function needs to be written to do three tasks:
13661 first, to set up conditions under which the @code{while} loop can
13662 count words, second, to run the @code{while} loop, and third, to send
13663 a message to the user.
13664
13665 When a user calls @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, point may be at the
13666 beginning or the end of the region. However, the counting process
13667 must start at the beginning of the region. This means we will want
13668 to put point there if it is not already there. Executing
13669 @code{(goto-char beginning)} ensures this. Of course, we will want to
13670 return point to its expected position when the function finishes its
13671 work. For this reason, the body must be enclosed in a
13672 @code{save-excursion} expression.
13673
13674 The central part of the body of the function consists of a
13675 @code{while} loop in which one expression jumps point forward word by
13676 word, and another expression counts those jumps. The true-or-false-test
13677 of the @code{while} loop should test true so long as point should jump
13678 forward, and false when point is at the end of the region.
13679
13680 We could use @code{(forward-word 1)} as the expression for moving point
13681 forward word by word, but it is easier to see what Emacs identifies as a
13682 ``word'' if we use a regular expression search.
13683
13684 A regular expression search that finds the pattern for which it is
13685 searching leaves point after the last character matched. This means
13686 that a succession of successful word searches will move point forward
13687 word by word.
13688
13689 As a practical matter, we want the regular expression search to jump
13690 over whitespace and punctuation between words as well as over the
13691 words themselves. A regexp that refuses to jump over interword
13692 whitespace would never jump more than one word! This means that
13693 the regexp should include the whitespace and punctuation that follows
13694 a word, if any, as well as the word itself. (A word may end a buffer
13695 and not have any following whitespace or punctuation, so that part of
13696 the regexp must be optional.)
13697
13698 Thus, what we want for the regexp is a pattern defining one or more
13699 word constituent characters followed, optionally, by one or more
13700 characters that are not word constituents. The regular expression for
13701 this is:
13702
13703 @smallexample
13704 \w+\W*
13705 @end smallexample
13706
13707 @noindent
13708 The buffer's syntax table determines which characters are and are not
13709 word constituents. For more information about syntax,
13710 @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
13711 Reference Manual}.
13712
13713 @need 800
13714 The search expression looks like this:
13715
13716 @smallexample
13717 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13718 @end smallexample
13719
13720 @noindent
13721 (Note that paired backslashes precede the @samp{w} and @samp{W}. A
13722 single backslash has special meaning to the Emacs Lisp interpreter.
13723 It indicates that the following character is interpreted differently
13724 than usual. For example, the two characters, @samp{\n}, stand for
13725 @samp{newline}, rather than for a backslash followed by @samp{n}. Two
13726 backslashes in a row stand for an ordinary, ``unspecial'' backslash, so
13727 Emacs Lisp interpreter ends of seeing a single backslash followed by a
13728 letter. So it discovers the letter is special.)
13729
13730 We need a counter to count how many words there are; this variable
13731 must first be set to 0 and then incremented each time Emacs goes
13732 around the @code{while} loop. The incrementing expression is simply:
13733
13734 @smallexample
13735 (setq count (1+ count))
13736 @end smallexample
13737
13738 Finally, we want to tell the user how many words there are in the
13739 region. The @code{message} function is intended for presenting this
13740 kind of information to the user. The message has to be phrased so
13741 that it reads properly regardless of how many words there are in the
13742 region: we don't want to say that ``there are 1 words in the region''.
13743 The conflict between singular and plural is ungrammatical. We can
13744 solve this problem by using a conditional expression that evaluates
13745 different messages depending on the number of words in the region.
13746 There are three possibilities: no words in the region, one word in the
13747 region, and more than one word. This means that the @code{cond}
13748 special form is appropriate.
13749
13750 @need 1500
13751 All this leads to the following function definition:
13752
13753 @smallexample
13754 @group
13755 ;;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
13756 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
13757 "Print number of words in the region.
13758 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
13759 character followed by at least one character that
13760 is not a word-constituent. The buffer’s syntax
13761 table determines which characters these are."
13762 (interactive "r")
13763 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
13764 @end group
13765
13766 @group
13767 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
13768 (save-excursion
13769 (goto-char beginning)
13770 (let ((count 0))
13771 @end group
13772
13773 @group
13774 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
13775 (while (< (point) end)
13776 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13777 (setq count (1+ count)))
13778 @end group
13779
13780 @group
13781 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
13782 (cond ((zerop count)
13783 (message
13784 "The region does NOT have any words."))
13785 ((= 1 count)
13786 (message
13787 "The region has 1 word."))
13788 (t
13789 (message
13790 "The region has %d words." count))))))
13791 @end group
13792 @end smallexample
13793
13794 @noindent
13795 As written, the function works, but not in all circumstances.
13796
13797 @node Whitespace Bug
13798 @subsection The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13799
13800 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command described in the preceding
13801 section has two bugs, or rather, one bug with two manifestations.
13802 First, if you mark a region containing only whitespace in the middle
13803 of some text, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command tells you that the
13804 region contains one word! Second, if you mark a region containing
13805 only whitespace at the end of the buffer or the accessible portion of
13806 a narrowed buffer, the command displays an error message that looks
13807 like this:
13808
13809 @smallexample
13810 Search failed: "\\w+\\W*"
13811 @end smallexample
13812
13813 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can test for these
13814 bugs yourself.
13815
13816 First, evaluate the function in the usual manner to install it.
13817 @ifinfo
13818 Here is a copy of the definition. Place your cursor after the closing
13819 parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e} to install it.
13820
13821 @smallexample
13822 @group
13823 ;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
13824 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
13825 "Print number of words in the region.
13826 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent character followed
13827 by at least one character that is not a word-constituent. The buffer’s
13828 syntax table determines which characters these are."
13829 @end group
13830 @group
13831 (interactive "r")
13832 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
13833 @end group
13834
13835 @group
13836 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
13837 (save-excursion
13838 (goto-char beginning)
13839 (let ((count 0))
13840 @end group
13841
13842 @group
13843 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
13844 (while (< (point) end)
13845 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13846 (setq count (1+ count)))
13847 @end group
13848
13849 @group
13850 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
13851 (cond ((zerop count)
13852 (message "The region does NOT have any words."))
13853 ((= 1 count) (message "The region has 1 word."))
13854 (t (message "The region has %d words." count))))))
13855 @end group
13856 @end smallexample
13857 @end ifinfo
13858
13859 @need 1000
13860 If you wish, you can also install this keybinding by evaluating it:
13861
13862 @smallexample
13863 (global-set-key "\C-c=" '@value{COUNT-WORDS})
13864 @end smallexample
13865
13866 To conduct the first test, set mark and point to the beginning and end
13867 of the following line and then type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x
13868 @value{COUNT-WORDS}} if you have not bound @kbd{C-c =}):
13869
13870 @smallexample
13871 one two three
13872 @end smallexample
13873
13874 @noindent
13875 Emacs will tell you, correctly, that the region has three words.
13876
13877 Repeat the test, but place mark at the beginning of the line and place
13878 point just @emph{before} the word @samp{one}. Again type the command
13879 @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}). Emacs should tell you
13880 that the region has no words, since it is composed only of the
13881 whitespace at the beginning of the line. But instead Emacs tells you
13882 that the region has one word!
13883
13884 For the third test, copy the sample line to the end of the
13885 @file{*scratch*} buffer and then type several spaces at the end of the
13886 line. Place mark right after the word @samp{three} and point at the
13887 end of line. (The end of the line will be the end of the buffer.)
13888 Type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}) as you did before.
13889 Again, Emacs should tell you that the region has no words, since it is
13890 composed only of the whitespace at the end of the line. Instead,
13891 Emacs displays an error message saying @samp{Search failed}.
13892
13893 The two bugs stem from the same problem.
13894
13895 Consider the first manifestation of the bug, in which the command
13896 tells you that the whitespace at the beginning of the line contains
13897 one word. What happens is this: The @code{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13898 command moves point to the beginning of the region. The @code{while}
13899 tests whether the value of point is smaller than the value of
13900 @code{end}, which it is. Consequently, the regular expression search
13901 looks for and finds the first word. It leaves point after the word.
13902 @code{count} is set to one. The @code{while} loop repeats; but this
13903 time the value of point is larger than the value of @code{end}, the
13904 loop is exited; and the function displays a message saying the number
13905 of words in the region is one. In brief, the regular expression
13906 search looks for and finds the word even though it is outside
13907 the marked region.
13908
13909 In the second manifestation of the bug, the region is whitespace at
13910 the end of the buffer. Emacs says @samp{Search failed}. What happens
13911 is that the true-or-false-test in the @code{while} loop tests true, so
13912 the search expression is executed. But since there are no more words
13913 in the buffer, the search fails.
13914
13915 In both manifestations of the bug, the search extends or attempts to
13916 extend outside of the region.
13917
13918 The solution is to limit the search to the region---this is a fairly
13919 simple action, but as you may have come to expect, it is not quite as
13920 simple as you might think.
13921
13922 As we have seen, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes a search
13923 pattern as its first argument. But in addition to this first,
13924 mandatory argument, it accepts three optional arguments. The optional
13925 second argument bounds the search. The optional third argument, if
13926 @code{t}, causes the function to return @code{nil} rather than signal
13927 an error if the search fails. The optional fourth argument is a
13928 repeat count. (In Emacs, you can see a function's documentation by
13929 typing @kbd{C-h f}, the name of the function, and then @key{RET}.)
13930
13931 In the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition, the value of the end of
13932 the region is held by the variable @code{end} which is passed as an
13933 argument to the function. Thus, we can add @code{end} as an argument
13934 to the regular expression search expression:
13935
13936 @smallexample
13937 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end)
13938 @end smallexample
13939
13940 However, if you make only this change to the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13941 definition and then test the new version of the definition on a
13942 stretch of whitespace, you will receive an error message saying
13943 @samp{Search failed}.
13944
13945 What happens is this: the search is limited to the region, and fails
13946 as you expect because there are no word-constituent characters in the
13947 region. Since it fails, we receive an error message. But we do not
13948 want to receive an error message in this case; we want to receive the
13949 message that "The region does NOT have any words."
13950
13951 The solution to this problem is to provide @code{re-search-forward}
13952 with a third argument of @code{t}, which causes the function to return
13953 @code{nil} rather than signal an error if the search fails.
13954
13955 However, if you make this change and try it, you will see the message
13956 ``Counting words in region ... '' and @dots{} you will keep on seeing
13957 that message @dots{}, until you type @kbd{C-g} (@code{keyboard-quit}).
13958
13959 Here is what happens: the search is limited to the region, as before,
13960 and it fails because there are no word-constituent characters in the
13961 region, as expected. Consequently, the @code{re-search-forward}
13962 expression returns @code{nil}. It does nothing else. In particular,
13963 it does not move point, which it does as a side effect if it finds the
13964 search target. After the @code{re-search-forward} expression returns
13965 @code{nil}, the next expression in the @code{while} loop is evaluated.
13966 This expression increments the count. Then the loop repeats. The
13967 true-or-false-test tests true because the value of point is still less
13968 than the value of end, since the @code{re-search-forward} expression
13969 did not move point. @dots{} and the cycle repeats @dots{}
13970
13971 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition requires yet another
13972 modification, to cause the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} loop
13973 to test false if the search fails. Put another way, there are two
13974 conditions that must be satisfied in the true-or-false-test before the
13975 word count variable is incremented: point must still be within the
13976 region and the search expression must have found a word to count.
13977
13978 Since both the first condition and the second condition must be true
13979 together, the two expressions, the region test and the search
13980 expression, can be joined with an @code{and} special form and embedded in
13981 the @code{while} loop as the true-or-false-test, like this:
13982
13983 @smallexample
13984 (and (< (point) end) (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
13985 @end smallexample
13986
13987 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
13988 @c also trouble with an overfull hbox
13989 @iftex
13990 @noindent
13991 (For information about @code{and}, see
13992 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
13993 @end iftex
13994 @ifinfo
13995 @noindent
13996 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
13997 information about @code{and}.)
13998 @end ifinfo
13999
14000 The @code{re-search-forward} expression returns @code{t} if the search
14001 succeeds and as a side effect moves point. Consequently, as words are
14002 found, point is moved through the region. When the search expression
14003 fails to find another word, or when point reaches the end of the
14004 region, the true-or-false-test tests false, the @code{while} loop
14005 exits, and the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function displays one or
14006 other of its messages.
14007
14008 After incorporating these final changes, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14009 works without bugs (or at least, without bugs that I have found!).
14010 Here is what it looks like:
14011
14012 @smallexample
14013 @group
14014 ;;; @r{Final version:} @code{while}
14015 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14016 "Print number of words in the region."
14017 (interactive "r")
14018 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14019 @end group
14020
14021 @group
14022 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14023 (save-excursion
14024 (let ((count 0))
14025 (goto-char beginning)
14026 @end group
14027
14028 @group
14029 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14030 (while (and (< (point) end)
14031 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14032 (setq count (1+ count)))
14033 @end group
14034
14035 @group
14036 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14037 (cond ((zerop count)
14038 (message
14039 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14040 ((= 1 count)
14041 (message
14042 "The region has 1 word."))
14043 (t
14044 (message
14045 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14046 @end group
14047 @end smallexample
14048
14049 @node recursive-count-words
14050 @section Count Words Recursively
14051 @cindex Count words recursively
14052 @cindex Recursively counting words
14053 @cindex Words, counted recursively
14054
14055 You can write the function for counting words recursively as well as
14056 with a @code{while} loop. Let's see how this is done.
14057
14058 First, we need to recognize that the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14059 function has three jobs: it sets up the appropriate conditions for
14060 counting to occur; it counts the words in the region; and it sends a
14061 message to the user telling how many words there are.
14062
14063 If we write a single recursive function to do everything, we will
14064 receive a message for every recursive call. If the region contains 13
14065 words, we will receive thirteen messages, one right after the other.
14066 We don't want this! Instead, we must write two functions to do the
14067 job, one of which (the recursive function) will be used inside of the
14068 other. One function will set up the conditions and display the
14069 message; the other will return the word count.
14070
14071 Let us start with the function that causes the message to be displayed.
14072 We can continue to call this @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14073
14074 This is the function that the user will call. It will be interactive.
14075 Indeed, it will be similar to our previous versions of this
14076 function, except that it will call @code{recursive-count-words} to
14077 determine how many words are in the region.
14078
14079 @need 1250
14080 We can readily construct a template for this function, based on our
14081 previous versions:
14082
14083 @smallexample
14084 @group
14085 ;; @r{Recursive version; uses regular expression search}
14086 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14087 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14088 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
14089 @end group
14090 @group
14091
14092 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14093 (@var{explanatory message})
14094 (@var{set-up functions}@dots{}
14095 @end group
14096 @group
14097
14098 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14099 @var{recursive call}
14100 @end group
14101 @group
14102
14103 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14104 @var{message providing word count}))
14105 @end group
14106 @end smallexample
14107
14108 The definition looks straightforward, except that somehow the count
14109 returned by the recursive call must be passed to the message
14110 displaying the word count. A little thought suggests that this can be
14111 done by making use of a @code{let} expression: we can bind a variable
14112 in the varlist of a @code{let} expression to the number of words in
14113 the region, as returned by the recursive call; and then the
14114 @code{cond} expression, using binding, can display the value to the
14115 user.
14116
14117 Often, one thinks of the binding within a @code{let} expression as
14118 somehow secondary to the ``primary'' work of a function. But in this
14119 case, what you might consider the ``primary'' job of the function,
14120 counting words, is done within the @code{let} expression.
14121
14122 @need 1250
14123 Using @code{let}, the function definition looks like this:
14124
14125 @smallexample
14126 @group
14127 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14128 "Print number of words in the region."
14129 (interactive "r")
14130 @end group
14131
14132 @group
14133 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14134 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14135 (save-excursion
14136 (goto-char beginning)
14137 @end group
14138
14139 @group
14140 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14141 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14142 @end group
14143
14144 @group
14145 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14146 (cond ((zerop count)
14147 (message
14148 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14149 ((= 1 count)
14150 (message
14151 "The region has 1 word."))
14152 (t
14153 (message
14154 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14155 @end group
14156 @end smallexample
14157
14158 Next, we need to write the recursive counting function.
14159
14160 A recursive function has at least three parts: the ``do-again-test'', the
14161 ``next-step-expression'', and the recursive call.
14162
14163 The do-again-test determines whether the function will or will not be
14164 called again. Since we are counting words in a region and can use a
14165 function that moves point forward for every word, the do-again-test
14166 can check whether point is still within the region. The do-again-test
14167 should find the value of point and determine whether point is before,
14168 at, or after the value of the end of the region. We can use the
14169 @code{point} function to locate point. Clearly, we must pass the
14170 value of the end of the region to the recursive counting function as an
14171 argument.
14172
14173 In addition, the do-again-test should also test whether the search finds a
14174 word. If it does not, the function should not call itself again.
14175
14176 The next-step-expression changes a value so that when the recursive
14177 function is supposed to stop calling itself, it stops. More
14178 precisely, the next-step-expression changes a value so that at the
14179 right time, the do-again-test stops the recursive function from
14180 calling itself again. In this case, the next-step-expression can be
14181 the expression that moves point forward, word by word.
14182
14183 The third part of a recursive function is the recursive call.
14184
14185 Somewhere, also, we also need a part that does the ``work'' of the
14186 function, a part that does the counting. A vital part!
14187
14188 @need 1250
14189 But already, we have an outline of the recursive counting function:
14190
14191 @smallexample
14192 @group
14193 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14194 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14195 @var{do-again-test}
14196 @var{next-step-expression}
14197 @var{recursive call})
14198 @end group
14199 @end smallexample
14200
14201 Now we need to fill in the slots. Let's start with the simplest cases
14202 first: if point is at or beyond the end of the region, there cannot
14203 be any words in the region, so the function should return zero.
14204 Likewise, if the search fails, there are no words to count, so the
14205 function should return zero.
14206
14207 On the other hand, if point is within the region and the search
14208 succeeds, the function should call itself again.
14209
14210 @need 800
14211 Thus, the do-again-test should look like this:
14212
14213 @smallexample
14214 @group
14215 (and (< (point) region-end)
14216 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14217 @end group
14218 @end smallexample
14219
14220 Note that the search expression is part of the do-again-test---the
14221 function returns @code{t} if its search succeeds and @code{nil} if it
14222 fails. (@xref{Whitespace Bug, , The Whitespace Bug in
14223 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}}, for an explanation of how
14224 @code{re-search-forward} works.)
14225
14226 The do-again-test is the true-or-false test of an @code{if} clause.
14227 Clearly, if the do-again-test succeeds, the then-part of the @code{if}
14228 clause should call the function again; but if it fails, the else-part
14229 should return zero since either point is outside the region or the
14230 search failed because there were no words to find.
14231
14232 But before considering the recursive call, we need to consider the
14233 next-step-expression. What is it? Interestingly, it is the search
14234 part of the do-again-test.
14235
14236 In addition to returning @code{t} or @code{nil} for the
14237 do-again-test, @code{re-search-forward} moves point forward as a side
14238 effect of a successful search. This is the action that changes the
14239 value of point so that the recursive function stops calling itself
14240 when point completes its movement through the region. Consequently,
14241 the @code{re-search-forward} expression is the next-step-expression.
14242
14243 @need 1200
14244 In outline, then, the body of the @code{recursive-count-words}
14245 function looks like this:
14246
14247 @smallexample
14248 @group
14249 (if @var{do-again-test-and-next-step-combined}
14250 ;; @r{then}
14251 @var{recursive-call-returning-count}
14252 ;; @r{else}
14253 @var{return-zero})
14254 @end group
14255 @end smallexample
14256
14257 How to incorporate the mechanism that counts?
14258
14259 If you are not used to writing recursive functions, a question like
14260 this can be troublesome. But it can and should be approached
14261 systematically.
14262
14263 We know that the counting mechanism should be associated in some way
14264 with the recursive call. Indeed, since the next-step-expression moves
14265 point forward by one word, and since a recursive call is made for
14266 each word, the counting mechanism must be an expression that adds one
14267 to the value returned by a call to @code{recursive-count-words}.
14268
14269 @need 800
14270 Consider several cases:
14271
14272 @itemize @bullet
14273 @item
14274 If there are two words in the region, the function should return
14275 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14276 the first word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14277 words in the region, which in this case is one.
14278
14279 @item
14280 If there is one word in the region, the function should return
14281 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14282 that word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14283 words in the region, which in this case is zero.
14284
14285 @item
14286 If there are no words in the region, the function should return zero.
14287 @end itemize
14288
14289 From the sketch we can see that the else-part of the @code{if} returns
14290 zero for the case of no words. This means that the then-part of the
14291 @code{if} must return a value resulting from adding one to the value
14292 returned from a count of the remaining words.
14293
14294 @need 1200
14295 The expression will look like this, where @code{1+} is a function that
14296 adds one to its argument.
14297
14298 @smallexample
14299 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14300 @end smallexample
14301
14302 @need 1200
14303 The whole @code{recursive-count-words} function will then look like
14304 this:
14305
14306 @smallexample
14307 @group
14308 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14309 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14310
14311 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14312 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14313 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14314 @end group
14315
14316 @group
14317 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14318 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14319
14320 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14321 0))
14322 @end group
14323 @end smallexample
14324
14325 @need 1250
14326 Let's examine how this works:
14327
14328 If there are no words in the region, the else part of the @code{if}
14329 expression is evaluated and consequently the function returns zero.
14330
14331 If there is one word in the region, the value of point is less than
14332 the value of @code{region-end} and the search succeeds. In this case,
14333 the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression tests true, and the
14334 then-part of the @code{if} expression is evaluated. The counting
14335 expression is evaluated. This expression returns a value (which will
14336 be the value returned by the whole function) that is the sum of one
14337 added to the value returned by a recursive call.
14338
14339 Meanwhile, the next-step-expression has caused point to jump over the
14340 first (and in this case only) word in the region. This means that
14341 when @code{(recursive-count-words region-end)} is evaluated a second
14342 time, as a result of the recursive call, the value of point will be
14343 equal to or greater than the value of region end. So this time,
14344 @code{recursive-count-words} will return zero. The zero will be added
14345 to one, and the original evaluation of @code{recursive-count-words}
14346 will return one plus zero, which is one, which is the correct amount.
14347
14348 Clearly, if there are two words in the region, the first call to
14349 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14350 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14351 remaining word---that is, it adds one to one, producing two, which is
14352 the correct amount.
14353
14354 Similarly, if there are three words in the region, the first call to
14355 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14356 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14357 remaining two words---and so on and so on.
14358
14359 @need 1250
14360 @noindent
14361 With full documentation the two functions look like this:
14362
14363 @need 1250
14364 @noindent
14365 The recursive function:
14366
14367 @findex recursive-count-words
14368 @smallexample
14369 @group
14370 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14371 "Number of words between point and REGION-END."
14372 @end group
14373
14374 @group
14375 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14376 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14377 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14378 @end group
14379
14380 @group
14381 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14382 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14383
14384 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14385 0))
14386 @end group
14387 @end smallexample
14388
14389 @need 800
14390 @noindent
14391 The wrapper:
14392
14393 @smallexample
14394 @group
14395 ;;; @r{Recursive version}
14396 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14397 "Print number of words in the region.
14398 @end group
14399
14400 @group
14401 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14402 character followed by at least one character that is
14403 not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax table
14404 determines which characters these are."
14405 @end group
14406 @group
14407 (interactive "r")
14408 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14409 (save-excursion
14410 (goto-char beginning)
14411 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14412 @end group
14413 @group
14414 (cond ((zerop count)
14415 (message
14416 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14417 @end group
14418 @group
14419 ((= 1 count)
14420 (message "The region has 1 word."))
14421 (t
14422 (message
14423 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14424 @end group
14425 @end smallexample
14426
14427 @node Counting Exercise
14428 @section Exercise: Counting Punctuation
14429
14430 Using a @code{while} loop, write a function to count the number of
14431 punctuation marks in a region---period, comma, semicolon, colon,
14432 exclamation mark, and question mark. Do the same using recursion.
14433
14434 @node Words in a defun
14435 @chapter Counting Words in a @code{defun}
14436 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14437 @cindex Word counting in a @code{defun}
14438
14439 Our next project is to count the number of words in a function
14440 definition. Clearly, this can be done using some variant of
14441 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}. @xref{Counting Words, , Counting via
14442 Repetition and Regexps}. If we are just going to count the words in
14443 one definition, it is easy enough to mark the definition with the
14444 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}) command, and then call
14445 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14446
14447 However, I am more ambitious: I want to count the words and symbols in
14448 every definition in the Emacs sources and then print a graph that
14449 shows how many functions there are of each length: how many contain 40
14450 to 49 words or symbols, how many contain 50 to 59 words or symbols,
14451 and so on. I have often been curious how long a typical function is,
14452 and this will tell.
14453
14454 @menu
14455 * Divide and Conquer::
14456 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
14457 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
14458 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14459 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
14460 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
14461 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
14462 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
14463 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
14464 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
14465 @end menu
14466
14467 @ifnottex
14468 @node Divide and Conquer
14469 @unnumberedsec Divide and Conquer
14470 @end ifnottex
14471
14472 Described in one phrase, the histogram project is daunting; but
14473 divided into numerous small steps, each of which we can take one at a
14474 time, the project becomes less fearsome. Let us consider what the
14475 steps must be:
14476
14477 @itemize @bullet
14478 @item
14479 First, write a function to count the words in one definition. This
14480 includes the problem of handling symbols as well as words.
14481
14482 @item
14483 Second, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14484 in a file. This function can use the @code{count-words-in-defun}
14485 function.
14486
14487 @item
14488 Third, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14489 in each of several files. This entails automatically finding the
14490 various files, switching to them, and counting the words in the
14491 definitions within them.
14492
14493 @item
14494 Fourth, write a function to convert the list of numbers that we
14495 created in step three to a form that will be suitable for printing as
14496 a graph.
14497
14498 @item
14499 Fifth, write a function to print the results as a graph.
14500 @end itemize
14501
14502 This is quite a project! But if we take each step slowly, it will not
14503 be difficult.
14504
14505 @node Words and Symbols
14506 @section What to Count?
14507 @cindex Words and symbols in defun
14508
14509 When we first start thinking about how to count the words in a
14510 function definition, the first question is (or ought to be) what are
14511 we going to count? When we speak of ``words'' with respect to a Lisp
14512 function definition, we are actually speaking, in large part, of
14513 ``symbols''. For example, the following @code{multiply-by-seven}
14514 function contains the five symbols @code{defun},
14515 @code{multiply-by-seven}, @code{number}, @code{*}, and @code{7}. In
14516 addition, in the documentation string, it contains the four words
14517 @samp{Multiply}, @samp{NUMBER}, @samp{by}, and @samp{seven}. The
14518 symbol @samp{number} is repeated, so the definition contains a total
14519 of ten words and symbols.
14520
14521 @smallexample
14522 @group
14523 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14524 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14525 (* 7 number))
14526 @end group
14527 @end smallexample
14528
14529 @noindent
14530 However, if we mark the @code{multiply-by-seven} definition with
14531 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}), and then call
14532 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} on it, we will find that
14533 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} claims the definition has eleven words, not
14534 ten! Something is wrong!
14535
14536 The problem is twofold: @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} does not count the
14537 @samp{*} as a word, and it counts the single symbol,
14538 @code{multiply-by-seven}, as containing three words. The hyphens are
14539 treated as if they were interword spaces rather than intraword
14540 connectors: @samp{multiply-by-seven} is counted as if it were written
14541 @samp{multiply by seven}.
14542
14543 The cause of this confusion is the regular expression search within
14544 the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition that moves point forward word
14545 by word. In the canonical version of @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, the
14546 regexp is:
14547
14548 @smallexample
14549 "\\w+\\W*"
14550 @end smallexample
14551
14552 @noindent
14553 This regular expression is a pattern defining one or more word
14554 constituent characters possibly followed by one or more characters
14555 that are not word constituents. What is meant by ``word constituent
14556 characters'' brings us to the issue of syntax, which is worth a section
14557 of its own.
14558
14559 @node Syntax
14560 @section What Constitutes a Word or Symbol?
14561 @cindex Syntax categories and tables
14562
14563 Emacs treats different characters as belonging to different
14564 @dfn{syntax categories}. For example, the regular expression,
14565 @samp{\\w+}, is a pattern specifying one or more @emph{word
14566 constituent} characters. Word constituent characters are members of
14567 one syntax category. Other syntax categories include the class of
14568 punctuation characters, such as the period and the comma, and the
14569 class of whitespace characters, such as the blank space and the tab
14570 character. (For more information, @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax
14571 Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
14572
14573 Syntax tables specify which characters belong to which categories.
14574 Usually, a hyphen is not specified as a ``word constituent character''.
14575 Instead, it is specified as being in the ``class of characters that are
14576 part of symbol names but not words.'' This means that the
14577 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function treats it in the same way it treats
14578 an interword white space, which is why @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14579 counts @samp{multiply-by-seven} as three words.
14580
14581 There are two ways to cause Emacs to count @samp{multiply-by-seven} as
14582 one symbol: modify the syntax table or modify the regular expression.
14583
14584 We could redefine a hyphen as a word constituent character by
14585 modifying the syntax table that Emacs keeps for each mode. This
14586 action would serve our purpose, except that a hyphen is merely the
14587 most common character within symbols that is not typically a word
14588 constituent character; there are others, too.
14589
14590 Alternatively, we can redefine the regexp used in the
14591 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition so as to include symbols. This
14592 procedure has the merit of clarity, but the task is a little tricky.
14593
14594 @need 1200
14595 The first part is simple enough: the pattern must match ``at least one
14596 character that is a word or symbol constituent''. Thus:
14597
14598 @smallexample
14599 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+"
14600 @end smallexample
14601
14602 @noindent
14603 The @samp{\\(} is the first part of the grouping construct that
14604 includes the @samp{\\w} and the @samp{\\s_} as alternatives, separated
14605 by the @samp{\\|}. The @samp{\\w} matches any word-constituent
14606 character and the @samp{\\s_} matches any character that is part of a
14607 symbol name but not a word-constituent character. The @samp{+}
14608 following the group indicates that the word or symbol constituent
14609 characters must be matched at least once.
14610
14611 However, the second part of the regexp is more difficult to design.
14612 What we want is to follow the first part with ``optionally one or more
14613 characters that are not constituents of a word or symbol''. At first,
14614 I thought I could define this with the following:
14615
14616 @smallexample
14617 "\\(\\W\\|\\S_\\)*"
14618 @end smallexample
14619
14620 @noindent
14621 The upper case @samp{W} and @samp{S} match characters that are
14622 @emph{not} word or symbol constituents. Unfortunately, this
14623 expression matches any character that is either not a word constituent
14624 or not a symbol constituent. This matches any character!
14625
14626 I then noticed that every word or symbol in my test region was
14627 followed by white space (blank space, tab, or newline). So I tried
14628 placing a pattern to match one or more blank spaces after the pattern
14629 for one or more word or symbol constituents. This failed, too. Words
14630 and symbols are often separated by whitespace, but in actual code
14631 parentheses may follow symbols and punctuation may follow words. So
14632 finally, I designed a pattern in which the word or symbol constituents
14633 are followed optionally by characters that are not white space and
14634 then followed optionally by white space.
14635
14636 @need 800
14637 Here is the full regular expression:
14638
14639 @smallexample
14640 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14641 @end smallexample
14642
14643 @node count-words-in-defun
14644 @section The @code{count-words-in-defun} Function
14645 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14646
14647 We have seen that there are several ways to write a
14648 @code{count-words-region} function. To write a
14649 @code{count-words-in-defun}, we need merely adapt one of these
14650 versions.
14651
14652 The version that uses a @code{while} loop is easy to understand, so I
14653 am going to adapt that. Because @code{count-words-in-defun} will be
14654 part of a more complex program, it need not be interactive and it need
14655 not display a message but just return the count. These considerations
14656 simplify the definition a little.
14657
14658 On the other hand, @code{count-words-in-defun} will be used within a
14659 buffer that contains function definitions. Consequently, it is
14660 reasonable to ask that the function determine whether it is called
14661 when point is within a function definition, and if it is, to return
14662 the count for that definition. This adds complexity to the
14663 definition, but saves us from needing to pass arguments to the
14664 function.
14665
14666 @need 1250
14667 These considerations lead us to prepare the following template:
14668
14669 @smallexample
14670 @group
14671 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14672 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14673 (@var{set up}@dots{}
14674 (@var{while loop}@dots{})
14675 @var{return count})
14676 @end group
14677 @end smallexample
14678
14679 @noindent
14680 As usual, our job is to fill in the slots.
14681
14682 First, the set up.
14683
14684 We are presuming that this function will be called within a buffer
14685 containing function definitions. Point will either be within a
14686 function definition or not. For @code{count-words-in-defun} to work,
14687 point must move to the beginning of the definition, a counter must
14688 start at zero, and the counting loop must stop when point reaches the
14689 end of the definition.
14690
14691 The @code{beginning-of-defun} function searches backwards for an
14692 opening delimiter such as a @samp{(} at the beginning of a line, and
14693 moves point to that position, or else to the limit of the search. In
14694 practice, this means that @code{beginning-of-defun} moves point to the
14695 beginning of an enclosing or preceding function definition, or else to
14696 the beginning of the buffer. We can use @code{beginning-of-defun} to
14697 place point where we wish to start.
14698
14699 The @code{while} loop requires a counter to keep track of the words or
14700 symbols being counted. A @code{let} expression can be used to create
14701 a local variable for this purpose, and bind it to an initial value of zero.
14702
14703 The @code{end-of-defun} function works like @code{beginning-of-defun}
14704 except that it moves point to the end of the definition.
14705 @code{end-of-defun} can be used as part of an expression that
14706 determines the position of the end of the definition.
14707
14708 The set up for @code{count-words-in-defun} takes shape rapidly: first
14709 we move point to the beginning of the definition, then we create a
14710 local variable to hold the count, and finally, we record the position
14711 of the end of the definition so the @code{while} loop will know when to stop
14712 looping.
14713
14714 @need 1250
14715 The code looks like this:
14716
14717 @smallexample
14718 @group
14719 (beginning-of-defun)
14720 (let ((count 0)
14721 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14722 @end group
14723 @end smallexample
14724
14725 @noindent
14726 The code is simple. The only slight complication is likely to concern
14727 @code{end}: it is bound to the position of the end of the definition
14728 by a @code{save-excursion} expression that returns the value of point
14729 after @code{end-of-defun} temporarily moves it to the end of the
14730 definition.
14731
14732 The second part of the @code{count-words-in-defun}, after the set up,
14733 is the @code{while} loop.
14734
14735 The loop must contain an expression that jumps point forward word by
14736 word and symbol by symbol, and another expression that counts the
14737 jumps. The true-or-false-test for the @code{while} loop should test
14738 true so long as point should jump forward, and false when point is at
14739 the end of the definition. We have already redefined the regular
14740 expression for this, so the loop is straightforward:
14741
14742 @smallexample
14743 @group
14744 (while (and (< (point) end)
14745 (re-search-forward
14746 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*" end t))
14747 (setq count (1+ count)))
14748 @end group
14749 @end smallexample
14750
14751 The third part of the function definition returns the count of words
14752 and symbols. This part is the last expression within the body of the
14753 @code{let} expression, and can be, very simply, the local variable
14754 @code{count}, which when evaluated returns the count.
14755
14756 @need 1250
14757 Put together, the @code{count-words-in-defun} definition looks like this:
14758
14759 @findex count-words-in-defun
14760 @smallexample
14761 @group
14762 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14763 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
14764 (beginning-of-defun)
14765 (let ((count 0)
14766 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14767 @end group
14768 @group
14769 (while
14770 (and (< (point) end)
14771 (re-search-forward
14772 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14773 end t))
14774 (setq count (1+ count)))
14775 count))
14776 @end group
14777 @end smallexample
14778
14779 How to test this? The function is not interactive, but it is easy to
14780 put a wrapper around the function to make it interactive; we can use
14781 almost the same code as for the recursive version of
14782 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}:
14783
14784 @smallexample
14785 @group
14786 ;;; @r{Interactive version.}
14787 (defun count-words-defun ()
14788 "Number of words and symbols in a function definition."
14789 (interactive)
14790 (message
14791 "Counting words and symbols in function definition ... ")
14792 @end group
14793 @group
14794 (let ((count (count-words-in-defun)))
14795 (cond
14796 ((zerop count)
14797 (message
14798 "The definition does NOT have any words or symbols."))
14799 @end group
14800 @group
14801 ((= 1 count)
14802 (message
14803 "The definition has 1 word or symbol."))
14804 (t
14805 (message
14806 "The definition has %d words or symbols." count)))))
14807 @end group
14808 @end smallexample
14809
14810 @need 800
14811 @noindent
14812 Let's re-use @kbd{C-c =} as a convenient keybinding:
14813
14814 @smallexample
14815 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-defun)
14816 @end smallexample
14817
14818 Now we can try out @code{count-words-defun}: install both
14819 @code{count-words-in-defun} and @code{count-words-defun}, and set the
14820 keybinding, and then place the cursor within the following definition:
14821
14822 @smallexample
14823 @group
14824 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14825 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14826 (* 7 number))
14827 @result{} 10
14828 @end group
14829 @end smallexample
14830
14831 @noindent
14832 Success! The definition has 10 words and symbols.
14833
14834 The next problem is to count the numbers of words and symbols in
14835 several definitions within a single file.
14836
14837 @node Several defuns
14838 @section Count Several @code{defuns} Within a File
14839
14840 A file such as @file{simple.el} may have a hundred or more function
14841 definitions within it. Our long term goal is to collect statistics on
14842 many files, but as a first step, our immediate goal is to collect
14843 statistics on one file.
14844
14845 The information will be a series of numbers, each number being the
14846 length of a function definition. We can store the numbers in a list.
14847
14848 We know that we will want to incorporate the information regarding one
14849 file with information about many other files; this means that the
14850 function for counting definition lengths within one file need only
14851 return the list of lengths. It need not and should not display any
14852 messages.
14853
14854 The word count commands contain one expression to jump point forward
14855 word by word and another expression to count the jumps. The function
14856 to return the lengths of definitions can be designed to work the same
14857 way, with one expression to jump point forward definition by
14858 definition and another expression to construct the lengths' list.
14859
14860 This statement of the problem makes it elementary to write the
14861 function definition. Clearly, we will start the count at the
14862 beginning of the file, so the first command will be @code{(goto-char
14863 (point-min))}. Next, we start the @code{while} loop; and the
14864 true-or-false test of the loop can be a regular expression search for
14865 the next function definition---so long as the search succeeds, point
14866 is moved forward and then the body of the loop is evaluated. The body
14867 needs an expression that constructs the lengths' list. @code{cons},
14868 the list construction command, can be used to create the list. That
14869 is almost all there is to it.
14870
14871 @need 800
14872 Here is what this fragment of code looks like:
14873
14874 @smallexample
14875 @group
14876 (goto-char (point-min))
14877 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
14878 (setq lengths-list
14879 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
14880 @end group
14881 @end smallexample
14882
14883 What we have left out is the mechanism for finding the file that
14884 contains the function definitions.
14885
14886 In previous examples, we either used this, the Info file, or we
14887 switched back and forth to some other buffer, such as the
14888 @file{*scratch*} buffer.
14889
14890 Finding a file is a new process that we have not yet discussed.
14891
14892 @node Find a File
14893 @section Find a File
14894 @cindex Find a File
14895
14896 To find a file in Emacs, you use the @kbd{C-x C-f} (@code{find-file})
14897 command. This command is almost, but not quite right for the lengths
14898 problem.
14899
14900 @need 1200
14901 Let's look at the source for @code{find-file}:
14902
14903 @smallexample
14904 @group
14905 (defun find-file (filename)
14906 "Edit file FILENAME.
14907 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
14908 creating one if none already exists."
14909 (interactive "FFind file: ")
14910 (switch-to-buffer (find-file-noselect filename)))
14911 @end group
14912 @end smallexample
14913
14914 @noindent
14915 (The most recent version of the @code{find-file} function definition
14916 permits you to specify optional wildcards to visit multiple files; that
14917 makes the definition more complex and we will not discuss it here,
14918 since it is not relevant. You can see its source using either
14919 @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) or @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}).)
14920
14921 @ignore
14922 In Emacs 22
14923 (defun find-file (filename &optional wildcards)
14924 "Edit file FILENAME.
14925 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
14926 creating one if none already exists.
14927 Interactively, the default if you just type RET is the current directory,
14928 but the visited file name is available through the minibuffer history:
14929 type M-n to pull it into the minibuffer.
14930
14931 Interactively, or if WILDCARDS is non-nil in a call from Lisp,
14932 expand wildcards (if any) and visit multiple files. You can
14933 suppress wildcard expansion by setting `find-file-wildcards' to nil.
14934
14935 To visit a file without any kind of conversion and without
14936 automatically choosing a major mode, use \\[find-file-literally]."
14937 (interactive (find-file-read-args "Find file: " nil))
14938 (let ((value (find-file-noselect filename nil nil wildcards)))
14939 (if (listp value)
14940 (mapcar 'switch-to-buffer (nreverse value))
14941 (switch-to-buffer value))))
14942 @end ignore
14943
14944 The definition I am showing possesses short but complete documentation
14945 and an interactive specification that prompts you for a file name when
14946 you use the command interactively. The body of the definition
14947 contains two functions, @code{find-file-noselect} and
14948 @code{switch-to-buffer}.
14949
14950 According to its documentation as shown by @kbd{C-h f} (the
14951 @code{describe-function} command), the @code{find-file-noselect}
14952 function reads the named file into a buffer and returns the buffer.
14953 (Its most recent version includes an optional wildcards argument,
14954 too, as well as another to read a file literally and an other you
14955 suppress warning messages. These optional arguments are irrelevant.)
14956
14957 However, the @code{find-file-noselect} function does not select the
14958 buffer in which it puts the file. Emacs does not switch its attention
14959 (or yours if you are using @code{find-file-noselect}) to the selected
14960 buffer. That is what @code{switch-to-buffer} does: it switches the
14961 buffer to which Emacs attention is directed; and it switches the
14962 buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer. We have discussed
14963 buffer switching elsewhere. (@xref{Switching Buffers}.)
14964
14965 In this histogram project, we do not need to display each file on the
14966 screen as the program determines the length of each definition within
14967 it. Instead of employing @code{switch-to-buffer}, we can work with
14968 @code{set-buffer}, which redirects the attention of the computer
14969 program to a different buffer but does not redisplay it on the screen.
14970 So instead of calling on @code{find-file} to do the job, we must write
14971 our own expression.
14972
14973 The task is easy: use @code{find-file-noselect} and @code{set-buffer}.
14974
14975 @node lengths-list-file
14976 @section @code{lengths-list-file} in Detail
14977
14978 The core of the @code{lengths-list-file} function is a @code{while}
14979 loop containing a function to move point forward ``defun by defun'' and
14980 a function to count the number of words and symbols in each defun.
14981 This core must be surrounded by functions that do various other tasks,
14982 including finding the file, and ensuring that point starts out at the
14983 beginning of the file. The function definition looks like this:
14984 @findex lengths-list-file
14985
14986 @smallexample
14987 @group
14988 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
14989 "Return list of definitions’ lengths within FILE.
14990 The returned list is a list of numbers.
14991 Each number is the number of words or
14992 symbols in one function definition."
14993 @end group
14994 @group
14995 (message "Working on ‘%s’ ... " filename)
14996 (save-excursion
14997 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
14998 (lengths-list))
14999 (set-buffer buffer)
15000 (setq buffer-read-only t)
15001 (widen)
15002 (goto-char (point-min))
15003 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15004 (setq lengths-list
15005 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15006 (kill-buffer buffer)
15007 lengths-list)))
15008 @end group
15009 @end smallexample
15010
15011 @noindent
15012 The function is passed one argument, the name of the file on which it
15013 will work. It has four lines of documentation, but no interactive
15014 specification. Since people worry that a computer is broken if they
15015 don't see anything going on, the first line of the body is a
15016 message.
15017
15018 The next line contains a @code{save-excursion} that returns Emacs's
15019 attention to the current buffer when the function completes. This is
15020 useful in case you embed this function in another function that
15021 presumes point is restored to the original buffer.
15022
15023 In the varlist of the @code{let} expression, Emacs finds the file and
15024 binds the local variable @code{buffer} to the buffer containing the
15025 file. At the same time, Emacs creates @code{lengths-list} as a local
15026 variable.
15027
15028 Next, Emacs switches its attention to the buffer.
15029
15030 In the following line, Emacs makes the buffer read-only. Ideally,
15031 this line is not necessary. None of the functions for counting words
15032 and symbols in a function definition should change the buffer.
15033 Besides, the buffer is not going to be saved, even if it were changed.
15034 This line is entirely the consequence of great, perhaps excessive,
15035 caution. The reason for the caution is that this function and those
15036 it calls work on the sources for Emacs and it is inconvenient if they
15037 are inadvertently modified. It goes without saying that I did not
15038 realize a need for this line until an experiment went awry and started
15039 to modify my Emacs source files @dots{}
15040
15041 Next comes a call to widen the buffer if it is narrowed. This
15042 function is usually not needed---Emacs creates a fresh buffer if none
15043 already exists; but if a buffer visiting the file already exists Emacs
15044 returns that one. In this case, the buffer may be narrowed and must
15045 be widened. If we wanted to be fully ``user-friendly'', we would
15046 arrange to save the restriction and the location of point, but we
15047 won't.
15048
15049 The @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression moves point to the
15050 beginning of the buffer.
15051
15052 Then comes a @code{while} loop in which the ``work'' of the function is
15053 carried out. In the loop, Emacs determines the length of each
15054 definition and constructs a lengths' list containing the information.
15055
15056 Emacs kills the buffer after working through it. This is to save
15057 space inside of Emacs. My version of GNU Emacs 19 contained over 300
15058 source files of interest; GNU Emacs 22 contains over a thousand source
15059 files. Another function will apply @code{lengths-list-file} to each
15060 of the files.
15061
15062 Finally, the last expression within the @code{let} expression is the
15063 @code{lengths-list} variable; its value is returned as the value of
15064 the whole function.
15065
15066 You can try this function by installing it in the usual fashion. Then
15067 place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
15068 C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}).
15069
15070 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15071 @smallexample
15072 (lengths-list-file
15073 "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el")
15074 @end smallexample
15075
15076 @noindent
15077 You may need to change the pathname of the file; the one here is for
15078 GNU Emacs version 22.1. To change the expression, copy it to
15079 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and edit it.
15080
15081 @need 1200
15082 @noindent
15083 Also, to see the full length of the list, rather than a truncated
15084 version, you may have to evaluate the following:
15085 @c We do not want to insert, so do not mention the zero prefix argument.
15086
15087 @smallexample
15088 (custom-set-variables '(eval-expression-print-length nil))
15089 @end smallexample
15090
15091 @noindent
15092 (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}}.
15093 Then evaluate the @code{lengths-list-file} expression.)
15094
15095 @need 1200
15096 The lengths' list for @file{debug.el} takes less than a second to
15097 produce and looks like this in GNU Emacs 22:
15098
15099 @smallexample
15100 (83 113 105 144 289 22 30 97 48 89 25 52 52 88 28 29 77 49 43 290 232 587)
15101 @end smallexample
15102
15103 @need 1500
15104 (Using my old machine, the version 19 lengths' list for @file{debug.el}
15105 took seven seconds to produce and looked like this:
15106
15107 @smallexample
15108 (75 41 80 62 20 45 44 68 45 12 34 235)
15109 @end smallexample
15110
15111 @noindent
15112 The newer version of @file{debug.el} contains more defuns than the
15113 earlier one; and my new machine is much faster than the old one.)
15114
15115 Note that the length of the last definition in the file is first in
15116 the list.
15117
15118 @node Several files
15119 @section Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
15120
15121 In the previous section, we created a function that returns a list of
15122 the lengths of each definition in a file. Now, we want to define a
15123 function to return a master list of the lengths of the definitions in
15124 a list of files.
15125
15126 Working on each of a list of files is a repetitious act, so we can use
15127 either a @code{while} loop or recursion.
15128
15129 @menu
15130 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
15131 * append:: Attach one list to another.
15132 @end menu
15133
15134 @ifnottex
15135 @node lengths-list-many-files
15136 @unnumberedsubsec Determine the lengths of @code{defuns}
15137 @end ifnottex
15138
15139 The design using a @code{while} loop is routine. The argument passed
15140 the function is a list of files. As we saw earlier (@pxref{Loop
15141 Example}), you can write a @code{while} loop so that the body of the
15142 loop is evaluated if such a list contains elements, but to exit the
15143 loop if the list is empty. For this design to work, the body of the
15144 loop must contain an expression that shortens the list each time the
15145 body is evaluated, so that eventually the list is empty. The usual
15146 technique is to set the value of the list to the value of the @sc{cdr}
15147 of the list each time the body is evaluated.
15148
15149 @need 800
15150 The template looks like this:
15151
15152 @smallexample
15153 @group
15154 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
15155 @var{body}@dots{}
15156 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
15157 @end group
15158 @end smallexample
15159
15160 Also, we remember that a @code{while} loop returns @code{nil} (the
15161 result of evaluating the true-or-false-test), not the result of any
15162 evaluation within its body. (The evaluations within the body of the
15163 loop are done for their side effects.) However, the expression that
15164 sets the lengths' list is part of the body---and that is the value
15165 that we want returned by the function as a whole. To do this, we
15166 enclose the @code{while} loop within a @code{let} expression, and
15167 arrange that the last element of the @code{let} expression contains
15168 the value of the lengths' list. (@xref{Incrementing Example, , Loop
15169 Example with an Incrementing Counter}.)
15170
15171 @findex lengths-list-many-files
15172 @need 1250
15173 These considerations lead us directly to the function itself:
15174
15175 @smallexample
15176 @group
15177 ;;; @r{Use @code{while} loop.}
15178 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15179 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
15180 @end group
15181 @group
15182 (let (lengths-list)
15183
15184 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
15185 (while list-of-files
15186 (setq lengths-list
15187 (append
15188 lengths-list
15189
15190 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
15191 (lengths-list-file
15192 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
15193 @end group
15194
15195 @group
15196 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
15197 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
15198
15199 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
15200 lengths-list))
15201 @end group
15202 @end smallexample
15203
15204 @code{expand-file-name} is a built-in function that converts a file
15205 name to the absolute, long, path name form. The function employs the
15206 name of the directory in which the function is called.
15207
15208 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15209 @need 1500
15210 Thus, if @code{expand-file-name} is called on @code{debug.el} when
15211 Emacs is visiting the
15212 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/} directory,
15213
15214 @smallexample
15215 debug.el
15216 @end smallexample
15217
15218 @need 800
15219 @noindent
15220 becomes
15221
15222 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15223 @smallexample
15224 /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el
15225 @end smallexample
15226
15227 The only other new element of this function definition is the as yet
15228 unstudied function @code{append}, which merits a short section for
15229 itself.
15230
15231 @node append
15232 @subsection The @code{append} Function
15233
15234 @need 800
15235 The @code{append} function attaches one list to another. Thus,
15236
15237 @smallexample
15238 (append '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15239 @end smallexample
15240
15241 @need 800
15242 @noindent
15243 produces the list
15244
15245 @smallexample
15246 (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8)
15247 @end smallexample
15248
15249 This is exactly how we want to attach two lengths' lists produced by
15250 @code{lengths-list-file} to each other. The results contrast with
15251 @code{cons},
15252
15253 @smallexample
15254 (cons '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15255 @end smallexample
15256
15257 @need 1250
15258 @noindent
15259 which constructs a new list in which the first argument to @code{cons}
15260 becomes the first element of the new list:
15261
15262 @smallexample
15263 ((1 2 3 4) 5 6 7 8)
15264 @end smallexample
15265
15266 @node Several files recursively
15267 @section Recursively Count Words in Different Files
15268
15269 Besides a @code{while} loop, you can work on each of a list of files
15270 with recursion. A recursive version of @code{lengths-list-many-files}
15271 is short and simple.
15272
15273 The recursive function has the usual parts: the ``do-again-test'', the
15274 ``next-step-expression'', and the recursive call. The ``do-again-test''
15275 determines whether the function should call itself again, which it
15276 will do if the @code{list-of-files} contains any remaining elements;
15277 the ``next-step-expression'' resets the @code{list-of-files} to the
15278 @sc{cdr} of itself, so eventually the list will be empty; and the
15279 recursive call calls itself on the shorter list. The complete
15280 function is shorter than this description!
15281 @findex recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15282
15283 @smallexample
15284 @group
15285 (defun recursive-lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15286 "Return list of lengths of each defun in LIST-OF-FILES."
15287 (if list-of-files ; @r{do-again-test}
15288 (append
15289 (lengths-list-file
15290 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))
15291 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15292 (cdr list-of-files)))))
15293 @end group
15294 @end smallexample
15295
15296 @noindent
15297 In a sentence, the function returns the lengths' list for the first of
15298 the @code{list-of-files} appended to the result of calling itself on
15299 the rest of the @code{list-of-files}.
15300
15301 Here is a test of @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}, along with
15302 the results of running @code{lengths-list-file} on each of the files
15303 individually.
15304
15305 Install @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} and
15306 @code{lengths-list-file}, if necessary, and then evaluate the
15307 following expressions. You may need to change the files' pathnames;
15308 those here work when this Info file and the Emacs sources are located
15309 in their customary places. To change the expressions, copy them to
15310 the @file{*scratch*} buffer, edit them, and then evaluate them.
15311
15312 The results are shown after the @samp{@result{}}. (These results are
15313 for files from Emacs version 22.1.1; files from other versions of
15314 Emacs may produce different results.)
15315
15316 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15317 @smallexample
15318 @group
15319 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/")
15320
15321 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/macros.el")
15322 @result{} (283 263 480 90)
15323 @end group
15324
15325 @group
15326 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el")
15327 @result{} (38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324)
15328 @end group
15329
15330 @group
15331 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/makesum.el")
15332 @result{} (85 181)
15333 @end group
15334
15335 @group
15336 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15337 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15338 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15339 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15340 @result{} (283 263 480 90 38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324 85 181)
15341 @end group
15342 @end smallexample
15343
15344 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function produces the
15345 output we want.
15346
15347 The next step is to prepare the data in the list for display in a graph.
15348
15349 @node Prepare the data
15350 @section Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
15351
15352 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a list
15353 of numbers. Each number records the length of a function definition.
15354 What we need to do now is transform this data into a list of numbers
15355 suitable for generating a graph. The new list will tell how many
15356 functions definitions contain less than 10 words and
15357 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
15358 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15359
15360 In brief, we need to go through the lengths' list produced by the
15361 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function and count the number
15362 of defuns within each range of lengths, and produce a list of those
15363 numbers.
15364
15365 @menu
15366 * Data for Display in Detail::
15367 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
15368 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
15369 * Counting function definitions::
15370 @end menu
15371
15372 @ifnottex
15373 @node Data for Display in Detail
15374 @unnumberedsubsec The Data for Display in Detail
15375 @end ifnottex
15376
15377 Based on what we have done before, we can readily foresee that it
15378 should not be too hard to write a function that ``@sc{cdr}s'' down the
15379 lengths' list, looks at each element, determines which length range it
15380 is in, and increments a counter for that range.
15381
15382 However, before beginning to write such a function, we should consider
15383 the advantages of sorting the lengths' list first, so the numbers are
15384 ordered from smallest to largest. First, sorting will make it easier
15385 to count the numbers in each range, since two adjacent numbers will
15386 either be in the same length range or in adjacent ranges. Second, by
15387 inspecting a sorted list, we can discover the highest and lowest
15388 number, and thereby determine the largest and smallest length range
15389 that we will need.
15390
15391 @node Sorting
15392 @subsection Sorting Lists
15393 @findex sort
15394
15395 Emacs contains a function to sort lists, called (as you might guess)
15396 @code{sort}. The @code{sort} function takes two arguments, the list
15397 to be sorted, and a predicate that determines whether the first of
15398 two list elements is ``less'' than the second.
15399
15400 As we saw earlier (@pxref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong
15401 Type Object as an Argument}), a predicate is a function that
15402 determines whether some property is true or false. The @code{sort}
15403 function will reorder a list according to whatever property the
15404 predicate uses; this means that @code{sort} can be used to sort
15405 non-numeric lists by non-numeric criteria---it can, for example,
15406 alphabetize a list.
15407
15408 @need 1250
15409 The @code{<} function is used when sorting a numeric list. For example,
15410
15411 @smallexample
15412 (sort '(4 8 21 17 33 7 21 7) '<)
15413 @end smallexample
15414
15415 @need 800
15416 @noindent
15417 produces this:
15418
15419 @smallexample
15420 (4 7 7 8 17 21 21 33)
15421 @end smallexample
15422
15423 @noindent
15424 (Note that in this example, both the arguments are quoted so that the
15425 symbols are not evaluated before being passed to @code{sort} as
15426 arguments.)
15427
15428 Sorting the list returned by the
15429 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function is straightforward;
15430 it uses the @code{<} function:
15431
15432 @ignore
15433 2006 Oct 29
15434 In GNU Emacs 22, eval
15435 (progn
15436 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.0.50/")
15437 (sort
15438 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15439 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15440 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15441 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15442 '<))
15443
15444 @end ignore
15445
15446 @smallexample
15447 @group
15448 (sort
15449 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15450 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15451 "./lisp/mailalias.el"
15452 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15453 '<)
15454 @end group
15455 @end smallexample
15456
15457 @need 800
15458 @noindent
15459 which produces:
15460
15461 @smallexample
15462 (29 32 38 85 90 95 178 180 181 218 263 283 321 324 480)
15463 @end smallexample
15464
15465 @noindent
15466 (Note that in this example, the first argument to @code{sort} is not
15467 quoted, since the expression must be evaluated so as to produce the
15468 list that is passed to @code{sort}.)
15469
15470 @node Files List
15471 @subsection Making a List of Files
15472
15473 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function requires a list
15474 of files as its argument. For our test examples, we constructed such
15475 a list by hand; but the Emacs Lisp source directory is too large for
15476 us to do for that. Instead, we will write a function to do the job
15477 for us. In this function, we will use both a @code{while} loop and a
15478 recursive call.
15479
15480 @findex directory-files
15481 We did not have to write a function like this for older versions of
15482 GNU Emacs, since they placed all the @samp{.el} files in one
15483 directory. Instead, we were able to use the @code{directory-files}
15484 function, which lists the names of files that match a specified
15485 pattern within a single directory.
15486
15487 However, recent versions of Emacs place Emacs Lisp files in
15488 sub-directories of the top level @file{lisp} directory. This
15489 re-arrangement eases navigation. For example, all the mail related
15490 files are in a @file{lisp} sub-directory called @file{mail}. But at
15491 the same time, this arrangement forces us to create a file listing
15492 function that descends into the sub-directories.
15493
15494 @findex files-in-below-directory
15495 We can create this function, called @code{files-in-below-directory},
15496 using familiar functions such as @code{car}, @code{nthcdr}, and
15497 @code{substring} in conjunction with an existing function called
15498 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}. This latter function not only
15499 lists all the filenames in a directory, including the names
15500 of sub-directories, but also their attributes.
15501
15502 To restate our goal: to create a function that will enable us
15503 to feed filenames to @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}
15504 as a list that looks like this (but with more elements):
15505
15506 @smallexample
15507 @group
15508 ("./lisp/macros.el"
15509 "./lisp/mail/rmail.el"
15510 "./lisp/makesum.el")
15511 @end group
15512 @end smallexample
15513
15514 The @code{directory-files-and-attributes} function returns a list of
15515 lists. Each of the lists within the main list consists of 13
15516 elements. The first element is a string that contains the name of the
15517 file---which, in GNU/Linux, may be a ``directory file'', that is to
15518 say, a file with the special attributes of a directory. The second
15519 element of the list is @code{t} for a directory, a string
15520 for symbolic link (the string is the name linked to), or @code{nil}.
15521
15522 For example, the first @samp{.el} file in the @file{lisp/} directory
15523 is @file{abbrev.el}. Its name is
15524 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/abbrev.el} and it is not a
15525 directory or a symbolic link.
15526
15527 @need 1000
15528 This is how @code{directory-files-and-attributes} lists that file and
15529 its attributes:
15530
15531 @smallexample
15532 @group
15533 ("abbrev.el"
15534 nil
15535 1
15536 1000
15537 100
15538 @end group
15539 @group
15540 (20615 27034 579989 697000)
15541 (17905 55681 0 0)
15542 (20615 26327 734791 805000)
15543 13188
15544 "-rw-r--r--"
15545 @end group
15546 @group
15547 t
15548 2971624
15549 773)
15550 @end group
15551 @end smallexample
15552
15553 @need 1200
15554 On the other hand, @file{mail/} is a directory within the @file{lisp/}
15555 directory. The beginning of its listing looks like this:
15556
15557 @smallexample
15558 @group
15559 ("mail"
15560 t
15561 @dots{}
15562 )
15563 @end group
15564 @end smallexample
15565
15566 (To learn about the different attributes, look at the documentation of
15567 @code{file-attributes}. Bear in mind that the @code{file-attributes}
15568 function does not list the filename, so its first element is
15569 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}'s second element.)
15570
15571 We will want our new function, @code{files-in-below-directory}, to
15572 list the @samp{.el} files in the directory it is told to check, and in
15573 any directories below that directory.
15574
15575 This gives us a hint on how to construct
15576 @code{files-in-below-directory}: within a directory, the function
15577 should add @samp{.el} filenames to a list; and if, within a directory,
15578 the function comes upon a sub-directory, it should go into that
15579 sub-directory and repeat its actions.
15580
15581 However, we should note that every directory contains a name that
15582 refers to itself, called @file{.}, (``dot'') and a name that refers to
15583 its parent directory, called @file{..} (``double dot''). (In
15584 @file{/}, the root directory, @file{..} refers to itself, since
15585 @file{/} has no parent.) Clearly, we do not want our
15586 @code{files-in-below-directory} function to enter those directories,
15587 since they always lead us, directly or indirectly, to the current
15588 directory.
15589
15590 Consequently, our @code{files-in-below-directory} function must do
15591 several tasks:
15592
15593 @itemize @bullet
15594 @item
15595 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that ends in
15596 @samp{.el}; and if so, add its name to a list.
15597
15598 @item
15599 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that is the name of a
15600 directory; and if so,
15601
15602 @itemize @minus
15603 @item
15604 Check to see whether it is looking at @file{.} or @file{..}; and if
15605 so skip it.
15606
15607 @item
15608 Or else, go into that directory and repeat the process.
15609 @end itemize
15610 @end itemize
15611
15612 Let's write a function definition to do these tasks. We will use a
15613 @code{while} loop to move from one filename to another within a
15614 directory, checking what needs to be done; and we will use a recursive
15615 call to repeat the actions on each sub-directory. The recursive
15616 pattern is ``accumulate''
15617 (@pxref{Accumulate}),
15618 using @code{append} as the combiner.
15619
15620 @ignore
15621 (directory-files "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15622 (shell-command "find /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15623
15624 (directory-files "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15625 (shell-command "find /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15626 @end ignore
15627
15628 @c /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/
15629
15630 @need 800
15631 Here is the function:
15632
15633 @smallexample
15634 @group
15635 (defun files-in-below-directory (directory)
15636 "List the .el files in DIRECTORY and in its sub-directories."
15637 ;; Although the function will be used non-interactively,
15638 ;; it will be easier to test if we make it interactive.
15639 ;; The directory will have a name such as
15640 ;; "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"
15641 (interactive "DDirectory name: ")
15642 @end group
15643 @group
15644 (let (el-files-list
15645 (current-directory-list
15646 (directory-files-and-attributes directory t)))
15647 ;; while we are in the current directory
15648 (while current-directory-list
15649 @end group
15650 @group
15651 (cond
15652 ;; check to see whether filename ends in '.el'
15653 ;; and if so, append its name to a list.
15654 ((equal ".el" (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -3))
15655 (setq el-files-list
15656 (cons (car (car current-directory-list)) el-files-list)))
15657 @end group
15658 @group
15659 ;; check whether filename is that of a directory
15660 ((eq t (car (cdr (car current-directory-list))))
15661 ;; decide whether to skip or recurse
15662 (if
15663 (equal "."
15664 (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -1))
15665 ;; then do nothing since filename is that of
15666 ;; current directory or parent, "." or ".."
15667 ()
15668 @end group
15669 @group
15670 ;; else descend into the directory and repeat the process
15671 (setq el-files-list
15672 (append
15673 (files-in-below-directory
15674 (car (car current-directory-list)))
15675 el-files-list)))))
15676 ;; move to the next filename in the list; this also
15677 ;; shortens the list so the while loop eventually comes to an end
15678 (setq current-directory-list (cdr current-directory-list)))
15679 ;; return the filenames
15680 el-files-list))
15681 @end group
15682 @end smallexample
15683
15684 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/")
15685 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15686
15687 The @code{files-in-below-directory} @code{directory-files} function
15688 takes one argument, the name of a directory.
15689
15690 @need 1250
15691 Thus, on my system,
15692
15693 @c (length (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15694
15695 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15696 @smallexample
15697 @group
15698 (length
15699 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"))
15700 @end group
15701 @end smallexample
15702
15703 @noindent
15704 tells me that in and below my Lisp sources directory are 1031
15705 @samp{.el} files.
15706
15707 @code{files-in-below-directory} returns a list in reverse alphabetical
15708 order. An expression to sort the list in alphabetical order looks
15709 like this:
15710
15711 @smallexample
15712 @group
15713 (sort
15714 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15715 'string-lessp)
15716 @end group
15717 @end smallexample
15718
15719 @ignore
15720 (defun test ()
15721 "Test how long it takes to find lengths of all sorted elisp defuns."
15722 (insert "\n" (current-time-string) "\n")
15723 (sit-for 0)
15724 (sort
15725 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15726 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15727 '<)
15728 (insert (format "%s" (current-time-string))))
15729 @end ignore
15730
15731 @node Counting function definitions
15732 @subsection Counting function definitions
15733
15734 Our immediate goal is to generate a list that tells us how many
15735 function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and symbols, how many
15736 contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how many contain between
15737 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15738
15739 With a sorted list of numbers, this is easy: count how many elements
15740 of the list are smaller than 10, then, after moving past the numbers
15741 just counted, count how many are smaller than 20, then, after moving
15742 past the numbers just counted, count how many are smaller than 30, and
15743 so on. Each of the numbers, 10, 20, 30, 40, and the like, is one
15744 larger than the top of that range. We can call the list of such
15745 numbers the @code{top-of-ranges} list.
15746
15747 @need 1200
15748 If we wished, we could generate this list automatically, but it is
15749 simpler to write a list manually. Here it is:
15750 @vindex top-of-ranges
15751
15752 @smallexample
15753 @group
15754 (defvar top-of-ranges
15755 '(10 20 30 40 50
15756 60 70 80 90 100
15757 110 120 130 140 150
15758 160 170 180 190 200
15759 210 220 230 240 250
15760 260 270 280 290 300)
15761 "List specifying ranges for ‘defuns-per-range’.")
15762 @end group
15763 @end smallexample
15764
15765 To change the ranges, we edit this list.
15766
15767 Next, we need to write the function that creates the list of the
15768 number of definitions within each range. Clearly, this function must
15769 take the @code{sorted-lengths} and the @code{top-of-ranges} lists
15770 as arguments.
15771
15772 The @code{defuns-per-range} function must do two things again and
15773 again: it must count the number of definitions within a range
15774 specified by the current top-of-range value; and it must shift to the
15775 next higher value in the @code{top-of-ranges} list after counting the
15776 number of definitions in the current range. Since each of these
15777 actions is repetitive, we can use @code{while} loops for the job.
15778 One loop counts the number of definitions in the range defined by the
15779 current top-of-range value, and the other loop selects each of the
15780 top-of-range values in turn.
15781
15782 Several entries of the @code{sorted-lengths} list are counted for each
15783 range; this means that the loop for the @code{sorted-lengths} list
15784 will be inside the loop for the @code{top-of-ranges} list, like a
15785 small gear inside a big gear.
15786
15787 The inner loop counts the number of definitions within the range. It
15788 is a simple counting loop of the type we have seen before.
15789 (@xref{Incrementing Loop, , A loop with an incrementing counter}.)
15790 The true-or-false test of the loop tests whether the value from the
15791 @code{sorted-lengths} list is smaller than the current value of the
15792 top of the range. If it is, the function increments the counter and
15793 tests the next value from the @code{sorted-lengths} list.
15794
15795 @need 1250
15796 The inner loop looks like this:
15797
15798 @smallexample
15799 @group
15800 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
15801 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15802 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15803 @end group
15804 @end smallexample
15805
15806 The outer loop must start with the lowest value of the
15807 @code{top-of-ranges} list, and then be set to each of the succeeding
15808 higher values in turn. This can be done with a loop like this:
15809
15810 @smallexample
15811 @group
15812 (while top-of-ranges
15813 @var{body-of-loop}@dots{}
15814 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
15815 @end group
15816 @end smallexample
15817
15818 @need 1200
15819 Put together, the two loops look like this:
15820
15821 @smallexample
15822 @group
15823 (while top-of-ranges
15824
15825 ;; @r{Count the number of elements within the current range.}
15826 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
15827 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15828 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15829
15830 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
15831 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
15832 @end group
15833 @end smallexample
15834
15835 In addition, in each circuit of the outer loop, Emacs should record
15836 the number of definitions within that range (the value of
15837 @code{number-within-range}) in a list. We can use @code{cons} for
15838 this purpose. (@xref{cons, , @code{cons}}.)
15839
15840 The @code{cons} function works fine, except that the list it
15841 constructs will contain the number of definitions for the highest
15842 range at its beginning and the number of definitions for the lowest
15843 range at its end. This is because @code{cons} attaches new elements
15844 of the list to the beginning of the list, and since the two loops are
15845 working their way through the lengths' list from the lower end first,
15846 the @code{defuns-per-range-list} will end up largest number first.
15847 But we will want to print our graph with smallest values first and the
15848 larger later. The solution is to reverse the order of the
15849 @code{defuns-per-range-list}. We can do this using the
15850 @code{nreverse} function, which reverses the order of a list.
15851 @findex nreverse
15852
15853 @need 800
15854 For example,
15855
15856 @smallexample
15857 (nreverse '(1 2 3 4))
15858 @end smallexample
15859
15860 @need 800
15861 @noindent
15862 produces:
15863
15864 @smallexample
15865 (4 3 2 1)
15866 @end smallexample
15867
15868 Note that the @code{nreverse} function is ``destructive''---that is,
15869 it changes the list to which it is applied; this contrasts with the
15870 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions, which are non-destructive. In
15871 this case, we do not want the original @code{defuns-per-range-list},
15872 so it does not matter that it is destroyed. (The @code{reverse}
15873 function provides a reversed copy of a list, leaving the original list
15874 as is.)
15875 @findex reverse
15876
15877 @need 1250
15878 Put all together, the @code{defuns-per-range} looks like this:
15879
15880 @smallexample
15881 @group
15882 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
15883 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
15884 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
15885 (number-within-range 0)
15886 defuns-per-range-list)
15887 @end group
15888
15889 @group
15890 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
15891 (while top-of-ranges
15892 @end group
15893
15894 @group
15895 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
15896 (while (and
15897 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
15898 (car sorted-lengths)
15899 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
15900 @end group
15901
15902 @group
15903 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
15904 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15905 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15906
15907 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
15908 @end group
15909
15910 @group
15911 (setq defuns-per-range-list
15912 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
15913 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
15914 @end group
15915
15916 @group
15917 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
15918 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
15919 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
15920 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
15921 @end group
15922
15923 @group
15924 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
15925 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
15926 (setq defuns-per-range-list
15927 (cons
15928 (length sorted-lengths)
15929 defuns-per-range-list))
15930 @end group
15931
15932 @group
15933 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
15934 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
15935 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
15936 @end group
15937 @end smallexample
15938
15939 @need 1200
15940 @noindent
15941 The function is straightforward except for one subtle feature. The
15942 true-or-false test of the inner loop looks like this:
15943
15944 @smallexample
15945 @group
15946 (and (car sorted-lengths)
15947 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
15948 @end group
15949 @end smallexample
15950
15951 @need 800
15952 @noindent
15953 instead of like this:
15954
15955 @smallexample
15956 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range)
15957 @end smallexample
15958
15959 The purpose of the test is to determine whether the first item in the
15960 @code{sorted-lengths} list is less than the value of the top of the
15961 range.
15962
15963 The simple version of the test works fine unless the
15964 @code{sorted-lengths} list has a @code{nil} value. In that case, the
15965 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression function returns
15966 @code{nil}. The @code{<} function cannot compare a number to
15967 @code{nil}, which is an empty list, so Emacs signals an error and
15968 stops the function from attempting to continue to execute.
15969
15970 The @code{sorted-lengths} list always becomes @code{nil} when the
15971 counter reaches the end of the list. This means that any attempt to
15972 use the @code{defuns-per-range} function with the simple version of
15973 the test will fail.
15974
15975 We solve the problem by using the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
15976 expression in conjunction with the @code{and} expression. The
15977 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression returns a non-@code{nil}
15978 value so long as the list has at least one number within it, but
15979 returns @code{nil} if the list is empty. The @code{and} expression
15980 first evaluates the @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression, and
15981 if it is @code{nil}, returns false @emph{without} evaluating the
15982 @code{<} expression. But if the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
15983 expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, the @code{and} expression
15984 evaluates the @code{<} expression, and returns that value as the value
15985 of the @code{and} expression.
15986
15987 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
15988 This way, we avoid an error.
15989 @iftex
15990 @noindent
15991 (For information about @code{and}, see
15992 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
15993 @end iftex
15994 @ifinfo
15995 @noindent
15996 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
15997 information about @code{and}.)
15998 @end ifinfo
15999
16000 Here is a short test of the @code{defuns-per-range} function. First,
16001 evaluate the expression that binds (a shortened)
16002 @code{top-of-ranges} list to the list of values, then evaluate the
16003 expression for binding the @code{sorted-lengths} list, and then
16004 evaluate the @code{defuns-per-range} function.
16005
16006 @smallexample
16007 @group
16008 ;; @r{(Shorter list than we will use later.)}
16009 (setq top-of-ranges
16010 '(110 120 130 140 150
16011 160 170 180 190 200))
16012
16013 (setq sorted-lengths
16014 '(85 86 110 116 122 129 154 176 179 200 265 300 300))
16015
16016 (defuns-per-range sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16017 @end group
16018 @end smallexample
16019
16020 @need 800
16021 @noindent
16022 The list returned looks like this:
16023
16024 @smallexample
16025 (2 2 2 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 4)
16026 @end smallexample
16027
16028 @noindent
16029 Indeed, there are two elements of the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16030 smaller than 110, two elements between 110 and 119, two elements
16031 between 120 and 129, and so on. There are four elements with a value
16032 of 200 or larger.
16033
16034 @c The next step is to turn this numbers' list into a graph.
16035 @node Readying a Graph
16036 @chapter Readying a Graph
16037 @cindex Readying a graph
16038 @cindex Graph prototype
16039 @cindex Prototype graph
16040 @cindex Body of graph
16041
16042 Our goal is to construct a graph showing the numbers of function
16043 definitions of various lengths in the Emacs lisp sources.
16044
16045 As a practical matter, if you were creating a graph, you would
16046 probably use a program such as @code{gnuplot} to do the job.
16047 (@code{gnuplot} is nicely integrated into GNU Emacs.) In this case,
16048 however, we create one from scratch, and in the process we will
16049 re-acquaint ourselves with some of what we learned before and learn
16050 more.
16051
16052 In this chapter, we will first write a simple graph printing function.
16053 This first definition will be a @dfn{prototype}, a rapidly written
16054 function that enables us to reconnoiter this unknown graph-making
16055 territory. We will discover dragons, or find that they are myth.
16056 After scouting the terrain, we will feel more confident and enhance
16057 the function to label the axes automatically.
16058
16059 @menu
16060 * Columns of a graph::
16061 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
16062 * recursive-graph-body-print::
16063 * Printed Axes::
16064 * Line Graph Exercise::
16065 @end menu
16066
16067 @ifnottex
16068 @node Columns of a graph
16069 @unnumberedsec Printing the Columns of a Graph
16070 @end ifnottex
16071
16072 Since Emacs is designed to be flexible and work with all kinds of
16073 terminals, including character-only terminals, the graph will need to
16074 be made from one of the ``typewriter'' symbols. An asterisk will do; as
16075 we enhance the graph-printing function, we can make the choice of
16076 symbol a user option.
16077
16078 We can call this function @code{graph-body-print}; it will take a
16079 @code{numbers-list} as its only argument. At this stage, we will not
16080 label the graph, but only print its body.
16081
16082 The @code{graph-body-print} function inserts a vertical column of
16083 asterisks for each element in the @code{numbers-list}. The height of
16084 each line is determined by the value of that element of the
16085 @code{numbers-list}.
16086
16087 Inserting columns is a repetitive act; that means that this function can
16088 be written either with a @code{while} loop or recursively.
16089
16090 Our first challenge is to discover how to print a column of asterisks.
16091 Usually, in Emacs, we print characters onto a screen horizontally,
16092 line by line, by typing. We have two routes we can follow: write our
16093 own column-insertion function or discover whether one exists in Emacs.
16094
16095 To see whether there is one in Emacs, we can use the @kbd{M-x apropos}
16096 command. This command is like the @kbd{C-h a} (@code{command-apropos})
16097 command, except that the latter finds only those functions that are
16098 commands. The @kbd{M-x apropos} command lists all symbols that match
16099 a regular expression, including functions that are not interactive.
16100 @findex apropos
16101
16102 What we want to look for is some command that prints or inserts
16103 columns. Very likely, the name of the function will contain either
16104 the word ``print'' or the word ``insert'' or the word ``column''.
16105 Therefore, we can simply type @kbd{M-x apropos RET
16106 print\|insert\|column RET} and look at the result. On my system, this
16107 command once too takes quite some time, and then produced a list of 79
16108 functions and variables. Now it does not take much time at all and
16109 produces a list of 211 functions and variables. Scanning down the
16110 list, the only function that looks as if it might do the job is
16111 @code{insert-rectangle}.
16112
16113 @need 1200
16114 Indeed, this is the function we want; its documentation says:
16115
16116 @smallexample
16117 @group
16118 insert-rectangle:
16119 Insert text of RECTANGLE with upper left corner at point.
16120 RECTANGLE's first line is inserted at point,
16121 its second line is inserted at a point vertically under point, etc.
16122 RECTANGLE should be a list of strings.
16123 After this command, the mark is at the upper left corner
16124 and point is at the lower right corner.
16125 @end group
16126 @end smallexample
16127
16128 We can run a quick test, to make sure it does what we expect of it.
16129
16130 Here is the result of placing the cursor after the
16131 @code{insert-rectangle} expression and typing @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
16132 (@code{eval-last-sexp}). The function inserts the strings
16133 @samp{"first"}, @samp{"second"}, and @samp{"third"} at and below
16134 point. Also the function returns @code{nil}.
16135
16136 @smallexample
16137 @group
16138 (insert-rectangle '("first" "second" "third"))first
16139 second
16140 thirdnil
16141 @end group
16142 @end smallexample
16143
16144 @noindent
16145 Of course, we won't be inserting the text of the
16146 @code{insert-rectangle} expression itself into the buffer in which we
16147 are making the graph, but will call the function from our program. We
16148 shall, however, have to make sure that point is in the buffer at the
16149 place where the @code{insert-rectangle} function will insert its
16150 column of strings.
16151
16152 If you are reading this in Info, you can see how this works by
16153 switching to another buffer, such as the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
16154 placing point somewhere in the buffer, typing @kbd{M-:}, typing the
16155 @code{insert-rectangle} expression into the minibuffer at the prompt,
16156 and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the
16157 expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the
16158 position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the
16159 keybinding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not
16160 appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is
16161 evaluated in the minibuffer.)
16162
16163 We find when we do this that point ends up at the end of the last
16164 inserted line---that is to say, this function moves point as a
16165 side-effect. If we were to repeat the command, with point at this
16166 position, the next insertion would be below and to the right of the
16167 previous insertion. We don't want this! If we are going to make a
16168 bar graph, the columns need to be beside each other.
16169
16170 So we discover that each cycle of the column-inserting @code{while}
16171 loop must reposition point to the place we want it, and that place
16172 will be at the top, not the bottom, of the column. Moreover, we
16173 remember that when we print a graph, we do not expect all the columns
16174 to be the same height. This means that the top of each column may be
16175 at a different height from the previous one. We cannot simply
16176 reposition point to the same line each time, but moved over to the
16177 right---or perhaps we can@dots{}
16178
16179 We are planning to make the columns of the bar graph out of asterisks.
16180 The number of asterisks in the column is the number specified by the
16181 current element of the @code{numbers-list}. We need to construct a
16182 list of asterisks of the right length for each call to
16183 @code{insert-rectangle}. If this list consists solely of the requisite
16184 number of asterisks, then we will have position point the right number
16185 of lines above the base for the graph to print correctly. This could
16186 be difficult.
16187
16188 Alternatively, if we can figure out some way to pass
16189 @code{insert-rectangle} a list of the same length each time, then we
16190 can place point on the same line each time, but move it over one
16191 column to the right for each new column. If we do this, however, some
16192 of the entries in the list passed to @code{insert-rectangle} must be
16193 blanks rather than asterisks. For example, if the maximum height of
16194 the graph is 5, but the height of the column is 3, then
16195 @code{insert-rectangle} requires an argument that looks like this:
16196
16197 @smallexample
16198 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16199 @end smallexample
16200
16201 This last proposal is not so difficult, so long as we can determine
16202 the column height. There are two ways for us to specify the column
16203 height: we can arbitrarily state what it will be, which would work
16204 fine for graphs of that height; or we can search through the list of
16205 numbers and use the maximum height of the list as the maximum height
16206 of the graph. If the latter operation were difficult, then the former
16207 procedure would be easiest, but there is a function built into Emacs
16208 that determines the maximum of its arguments. We can use that
16209 function. The function is called @code{max} and it returns the
16210 largest of all its arguments, which must be numbers. Thus, for
16211 example,
16212
16213 @smallexample
16214 (max 3 4 6 5 7 3)
16215 @end smallexample
16216
16217 @noindent
16218 returns 7. (A corresponding function called @code{min} returns the
16219 smallest of all its arguments.)
16220 @findex max
16221 @findex min
16222
16223 However, we cannot simply call @code{max} on the @code{numbers-list};
16224 the @code{max} function expects numbers as its argument, not a list of
16225 numbers. Thus, the following expression,
16226
16227 @smallexample
16228 (max '(3 4 6 5 7 3))
16229 @end smallexample
16230
16231 @need 800
16232 @noindent
16233 produces the following error message;
16234
16235 @smallexample
16236 Wrong type of argument: number-or-marker-p, (3 4 6 5 7 3)
16237 @end smallexample
16238
16239 @findex apply
16240 We need a function that passes a list of arguments to a function.
16241 This function is @code{apply}. This function ``applies'' its first
16242 argument (a function) to its remaining arguments, the last of which
16243 may be a list.
16244
16245 @need 1250
16246 For example,
16247
16248 @smallexample
16249 (apply 'max 3 4 7 3 '(4 8 5))
16250 @end smallexample
16251
16252 @noindent
16253 returns 8.
16254
16255 (Incidentally, I don't know how you would learn of this function
16256 without a book such as this. It is possible to discover other
16257 functions, like @code{search-forward} or @code{insert-rectangle}, by
16258 guessing at a part of their names and then using @code{apropos}. Even
16259 though its base in metaphor is clear---``apply'' its first argument to
16260 the rest---I doubt a novice would come up with that particular word
16261 when using @code{apropos} or other aid. Of course, I could be wrong;
16262 after all, the function was first named by someone who had to invent
16263 it.)
16264
16265 The second and subsequent arguments to @code{apply} are optional, so
16266 we can use @code{apply} to call a function and pass the elements of a
16267 list to it, like this, which also returns 8:
16268
16269 @smallexample
16270 (apply 'max '(4 8 5))
16271 @end smallexample
16272
16273 This latter way is how we will use @code{apply}. The
16274 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a numbers'
16275 list to which we can apply @code{max} (we could also apply @code{max} to
16276 the sorted numbers' list; it does not matter whether the list is
16277 sorted or not.)
16278
16279 @need 800
16280 Hence, the operation for finding the maximum height of the graph is this:
16281
16282 @smallexample
16283 (setq max-graph-height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16284 @end smallexample
16285
16286 Now we can return to the question of how to create a list of strings
16287 for a column of the graph. Told the maximum height of the graph
16288 and the number of asterisks that should appear in the column, the
16289 function should return a list of strings for the
16290 @code{insert-rectangle} command to insert.
16291
16292 Each column is made up of asterisks or blanks. Since the function is
16293 passed the value of the height of the column and the number of
16294 asterisks in the column, the number of blanks can be found by
16295 subtracting the number of asterisks from the height of the column.
16296 Given the number of blanks and the number of asterisks, two
16297 @code{while} loops can be used to construct the list:
16298
16299 @smallexample
16300 @group
16301 ;;; @r{First version.}
16302 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16303 "Return list of strings that is one column of a graph."
16304 (let ((insert-list nil)
16305 (number-of-top-blanks
16306 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16307 @end group
16308
16309 @group
16310 ;; @r{Fill in asterisks.}
16311 (while (> actual-height 0)
16312 (setq insert-list (cons "*" insert-list))
16313 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16314 @end group
16315
16316 @group
16317 ;; @r{Fill in blanks.}
16318 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16319 (setq insert-list (cons " " insert-list))
16320 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16321 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16322 @end group
16323
16324 @group
16325 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16326 insert-list))
16327 @end group
16328 @end smallexample
16329
16330 If you install this function and then evaluate the following
16331 expression you will see that it returns the list as desired:
16332
16333 @smallexample
16334 (column-of-graph 5 3)
16335 @end smallexample
16336
16337 @need 800
16338 @noindent
16339 returns
16340
16341 @smallexample
16342 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16343 @end smallexample
16344
16345 As written, @code{column-of-graph} contains a major flaw: the symbols
16346 used for the blank and for the marked entries in the column are
16347 ``hard-coded'' as a space and asterisk. This is fine for a prototype,
16348 but you, or another user, may wish to use other symbols. For example,
16349 in testing the graph function, you many want to use a period in place
16350 of the space, to make sure the point is being repositioned properly
16351 each time the @code{insert-rectangle} function is called; or you might
16352 want to substitute a @samp{+} sign or other symbol for the asterisk.
16353 You might even want to make a graph-column that is more than one
16354 display column wide. The program should be more flexible. The way to
16355 do that is to replace the blank and the asterisk with two variables
16356 that we can call @code{graph-blank} and @code{graph-symbol} and define
16357 those variables separately.
16358
16359 Also, the documentation is not well written. These considerations
16360 lead us to the second version of the function:
16361
16362 @smallexample
16363 @group
16364 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
16365 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
16366 @end group
16367
16368 @group
16369 (defvar graph-blank " "
16370 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
16371 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
16372 as graph-symbol.")
16373 @end group
16374 @end smallexample
16375
16376 @noindent
16377 (For an explanation of @code{defvar}, see
16378 @ref{defvar, , Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}}.)
16379
16380 @smallexample
16381 @group
16382 ;;; @r{Second version.}
16383 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16384 "Return MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings; ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
16385
16386 @end group
16387 @group
16388 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
16389 of the list.
16390 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
16391 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
16392 @end group
16393
16394 @group
16395 (let ((insert-list nil)
16396 (number-of-top-blanks
16397 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16398 @end group
16399
16400 @group
16401 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
16402 (while (> actual-height 0)
16403 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
16404 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16405 @end group
16406
16407 @group
16408 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
16409 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16410 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
16411 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16412 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16413
16414 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16415 insert-list))
16416 @end group
16417 @end smallexample
16418
16419 If we wished, we could rewrite @code{column-of-graph} a third time to
16420 provide optionally for a line graph as well as for a bar graph. This
16421 would not be hard to do. One way to think of a line graph is that it
16422 is no more than a bar graph in which the part of each bar that is
16423 below the top is blank. To construct a column for a line graph, the
16424 function first constructs a list of blanks that is one shorter than
16425 the value, then it uses @code{cons} to attach a graph symbol to the
16426 list; then it uses @code{cons} again to attach the ``top blanks'' to
16427 the list.
16428
16429 It is easy to see how to write such a function, but since we don't
16430 need it, we will not do it. But the job could be done, and if it were
16431 done, it would be done with @code{column-of-graph}. Even more
16432 important, it is worth noting that few changes would have to be made
16433 anywhere else. The enhancement, if we ever wish to make it, is
16434 simple.
16435
16436 Now, finally, we come to our first actual graph printing function.
16437 This prints the body of a graph, not the labels for the vertical and
16438 horizontal axes, so we can call this @code{graph-body-print}.
16439
16440 @node graph-body-print
16441 @section The @code{graph-body-print} Function
16442 @findex graph-body-print
16443
16444 After our preparation in the preceding section, the
16445 @code{graph-body-print} function is straightforward. The function
16446 will print column after column of asterisks and blanks, using the
16447 elements of a numbers' list to specify the number of asterisks in each
16448 column. This is a repetitive act, which means we can use a
16449 decrementing @code{while} loop or recursive function for the job. In
16450 this section, we will write the definition using a @code{while} loop.
16451
16452 The @code{column-of-graph} function requires the height of the graph
16453 as an argument, so we should determine and record that as a local variable.
16454
16455 This leads us to the following template for the @code{while} loop
16456 version of this function:
16457
16458 @smallexample
16459 @group
16460 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16461 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
16462 (let ((height @dots{}
16463 @dots{}))
16464 @end group
16465
16466 @group
16467 (while numbers-list
16468 @var{insert-columns-and-reposition-point}
16469 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))))
16470 @end group
16471 @end smallexample
16472
16473 @noindent
16474 We need to fill in the slots of the template.
16475
16476 Clearly, we can use the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression to
16477 determine the height of the graph.
16478
16479 The @code{while} loop will cycle through the @code{numbers-list} one
16480 element at a time. As it is shortened by the @code{(setq numbers-list
16481 (cdr numbers-list))} expression, the @sc{car} of each instance of the
16482 list is the value of the argument for @code{column-of-graph}.
16483
16484 At each cycle of the @code{while} loop, the @code{insert-rectangle}
16485 function inserts the list returned by @code{column-of-graph}. Since
16486 the @code{insert-rectangle} function moves point to the lower right of
16487 the inserted rectangle, we need to save the location of point at the
16488 time the rectangle is inserted, move back to that position after the
16489 rectangle is inserted, and then move horizontally to the next place
16490 from which @code{insert-rectangle} is called.
16491
16492 If the inserted columns are one character wide, as they will be if
16493 single blanks and asterisks are used, the repositioning command is
16494 simply @code{(forward-char 1)}; however, the width of a column may be
16495 greater than one. This means that the repositioning command should be
16496 written @code{(forward-char symbol-width)}. The @code{symbol-width}
16497 itself is the length of a @code{graph-blank} and can be found using
16498 the expression @code{(length graph-blank)}. The best place to bind
16499 the @code{symbol-width} variable to the value of the width of graph
16500 column is in the varlist of the @code{let} expression.
16501
16502 @need 1250
16503 These considerations lead to the following function definition:
16504
16505 @smallexample
16506 @group
16507 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16508 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16509 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16510
16511 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16512 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16513 from-position)
16514 @end group
16515
16516 @group
16517 (while numbers-list
16518 (setq from-position (point))
16519 (insert-rectangle
16520 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16521 (goto-char from-position)
16522 (forward-char symbol-width)
16523 @end group
16524 @group
16525 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16526 (sit-for 0)
16527 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
16528 @end group
16529 @group
16530 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
16531 (forward-line height)
16532 (insert "\n")
16533 ))
16534 @end group
16535 @end smallexample
16536
16537 @noindent
16538 The one unexpected expression in this function is the
16539 @w{@code{(sit-for 0)}} expression in the @code{while} loop. This
16540 expression makes the graph printing operation more interesting to
16541 watch than it would be otherwise. The expression causes Emacs to
16542 ``sit'' or do nothing for a zero length of time and then redraw the
16543 screen. Placed here, it causes Emacs to redraw the screen column by
16544 column. Without it, Emacs would not redraw the screen until the
16545 function exits.
16546
16547 We can test @code{graph-body-print} with a short list of numbers.
16548
16549 @enumerate
16550 @item
16551 Install @code{graph-symbol}, @code{graph-blank},
16552 @code{column-of-graph}, which are in
16553 @iftex
16554 @ref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph},
16555 @end iftex
16556 @ifinfo
16557 @ref{Columns of a graph},
16558 @end ifinfo
16559 and @code{graph-body-print}.
16560
16561 @need 800
16562 @item
16563 Copy the following expression:
16564
16565 @smallexample
16566 (graph-body-print '(1 2 3 4 6 4 3 5 7 6 5 2 3))
16567 @end smallexample
16568
16569 @item
16570 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
16571 want the graph to start.
16572
16573 @item
16574 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
16575
16576 @item
16577 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
16578 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
16579
16580 @item
16581 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the @code{graph-body-print} expression.
16582 @end enumerate
16583
16584 @need 800
16585 Emacs will print a graph like this:
16586
16587 @smallexample
16588 @group
16589 *
16590 * **
16591 * ****
16592 *** ****
16593 ********* *
16594 ************
16595 *************
16596 @end group
16597 @end smallexample
16598
16599 @node recursive-graph-body-print
16600 @section The @code{recursive-graph-body-print} Function
16601 @findex recursive-graph-body-print
16602
16603 The @code{graph-body-print} function may also be written recursively.
16604 The recursive solution is divided into two parts: an outside ``wrapper''
16605 that uses a @code{let} expression to determine the values of several
16606 variables that need only be found once, such as the maximum height of
16607 the graph, and an inside function that is called recursively to print
16608 the graph.
16609
16610 @need 1250
16611 The ``wrapper'' is uncomplicated:
16612
16613 @smallexample
16614 @group
16615 (defun recursive-graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16616 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16617 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16618 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16619 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16620 from-position)
16621 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16622 numbers-list
16623 height
16624 symbol-width)))
16625 @end group
16626 @end smallexample
16627
16628 The recursive function is a little more difficult. It has four parts:
16629 the ``do-again-test'', the printing code, the recursive call, and the
16630 ``next-step-expression''. The ``do-again-test'' is a @code{when}
16631 expression that determines whether the @code{numbers-list} contains
16632 any remaining elements; if it does, the function prints one column of
16633 the graph using the printing code and calls itself again. The
16634 function calls itself again according to the value produced by the
16635 ``next-step-expression'' which causes the call to act on a shorter
16636 version of the @code{numbers-list}.
16637
16638 @smallexample
16639 @group
16640 (defun recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16641 (numbers-list height symbol-width)
16642 "Print a bar graph.
16643 Used within recursive-graph-body-print function."
16644 @end group
16645
16646 @group
16647 (when numbers-list
16648 (setq from-position (point))
16649 (insert-rectangle
16650 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16651 @end group
16652 @group
16653 (goto-char from-position)
16654 (forward-char symbol-width)
16655 (sit-for 0) ; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16656 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16657 (cdr numbers-list) height symbol-width)))
16658 @end group
16659 @end smallexample
16660
16661 @need 1250
16662 After installation, this expression can be tested; here is a sample:
16663
16664 @smallexample
16665 (recursive-graph-body-print '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
16666 @end smallexample
16667
16668 @need 800
16669 Here is what @code{recursive-graph-body-print} produces:
16670
16671 @smallexample
16672 @group
16673 *
16674 ** *
16675 **** *
16676 **** ***
16677 * *********
16678 ************
16679 *************
16680 @end group
16681 @end smallexample
16682
16683 Either of these two functions, @code{graph-body-print} or
16684 @code{recursive-graph-body-print}, create the body of a graph.
16685
16686 @node Printed Axes
16687 @section Need for Printed Axes
16688
16689 A graph needs printed axes, so you can orient yourself. For a do-once
16690 project, it may be reasonable to draw the axes by hand using Emacs's
16691 Picture mode; but a graph drawing function may be used more than once.
16692
16693 For this reason, I have written enhancements to the basic
16694 @code{print-graph-body} function that automatically print labels for
16695 the horizontal and vertical axes. Since the label printing functions
16696 do not contain much new material, I have placed their description in
16697 an appendix. @xref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled Axes}.
16698
16699 @node Line Graph Exercise
16700 @section Exercise
16701
16702 Write a line graph version of the graph printing functions.
16703
16704 @node Emacs Initialization
16705 @chapter Your @file{.emacs} File
16706 @cindex @file{.emacs} file
16707 @cindex Customizing your @file{.emacs} file
16708 @cindex Initialization file
16709
16710 ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it''---this seemingly
16711 paradoxical statement is the secret of GNU Emacs. The plain, ``out of
16712 the box'' Emacs is a generic tool. Most people who use it, customize
16713 it to suit themselves.
16714
16715 GNU Emacs is mostly written in Emacs Lisp; this means that by writing
16716 expressions in Emacs Lisp you can change or extend Emacs.
16717
16718 @menu
16719 * Default Configuration::
16720 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
16721 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
16722 * Beginning init File:: How to write a @file{.emacs} init file.
16723 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
16724 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
16725 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
16726 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
16727 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
16728 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
16729 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
16730 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
16731 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
16732 * Miscellaneous::
16733 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
16734 @end menu
16735
16736 @ifnottex
16737 @node Default Configuration
16738 @unnumberedsec Emacs's Default Configuration
16739 @end ifnottex
16740
16741 There are those who appreciate Emacs's default configuration. After
16742 all, Emacs starts you in C mode when you edit a C file, starts you in
16743 Fortran mode when you edit a Fortran file, and starts you in
16744 Fundamental mode when you edit an unadorned file. This all makes
16745 sense, if you do not know who is going to use Emacs. Who knows what a
16746 person hopes to do with an unadorned file? Fundamental mode is the
16747 right default for such a file, just as C mode is the right default for
16748 editing C code. (Enough programming languages have syntaxes
16749 that enable them to share or nearly share features, so C mode is
16750 now provided by CC mode, the ``C Collection''.)
16751
16752 But when you do know who is going to use Emacs---you,
16753 yourself---then it makes sense to customize Emacs.
16754
16755 For example, I seldom want Fundamental mode when I edit an
16756 otherwise undistinguished file; I want Text mode. This is why I
16757 customize Emacs: so it suits me.
16758
16759 You can customize and extend Emacs by writing or adapting a
16760 @file{~/.emacs} file. This is your personal initialization file; its
16761 contents, written in Emacs Lisp, tell Emacs what to do.@footnote{You
16762 may also add @file{.el} to @file{~/.emacs} and call it a
16763 @file{~/.emacs.el} file. In the past, you were forbidden to type the
16764 extra keystrokes that the name @file{~/.emacs.el} requires, but now
16765 you may. The new format is consistent with the Emacs Lisp file
16766 naming conventions; the old format saves typing.}
16767
16768 A @file{~/.emacs} file contains Emacs Lisp code. You can write this
16769 code yourself; or you can use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to write
16770 the code for you. You can combine your own expressions and
16771 auto-written Customize expressions in your @file{.emacs} file.
16772
16773 (I myself prefer to write my own expressions, except for those,
16774 particularly fonts, that I find easier to manipulate using the
16775 @code{customize} command. I combine the two methods.)
16776
16777 Most of this chapter is about writing expressions yourself. It
16778 describes a simple @file{.emacs} file; for more information, see
16779 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and
16780 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
16781 Manual}.
16782
16783 @node Site-wide Init
16784 @section Site-wide Initialization Files
16785
16786 @cindex @file{default.el} init file
16787 @cindex @file{site-init.el} init file
16788 @cindex @file{site-load.el} init file
16789 In addition to your personal initialization file, Emacs automatically
16790 loads various site-wide initialization files, if they exist. These
16791 have the same form as your @file{.emacs} file, but are loaded by
16792 everyone.
16793
16794 Two site-wide initialization files, @file{site-load.el} and
16795 @file{site-init.el}, are loaded into Emacs and then ``dumped'' if a
16796 ``dumped'' version of Emacs is created, as is most common. (Dumped
16797 copies of Emacs load more quickly. However, once a file is loaded and
16798 dumped, a change to it does not lead to a change in Emacs unless you
16799 load it yourself or re-dump Emacs. @xref{Building Emacs, , Building
16800 Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, and the
16801 @file{INSTALL} file.)
16802
16803 Three other site-wide initialization files are loaded automatically
16804 each time you start Emacs, if they exist. These are
16805 @file{site-start.el}, which is loaded @emph{before} your @file{.emacs}
16806 file, and @file{default.el}, and the terminal type file, which are both
16807 loaded @emph{after} your @file{.emacs} file.
16808
16809 Settings and definitions in your @file{.emacs} file will overwrite
16810 conflicting settings and definitions in a @file{site-start.el} file,
16811 if it exists; but the settings and definitions in a @file{default.el}
16812 or terminal type file will overwrite those in your @file{.emacs} file.
16813 (You can prevent interference from a terminal type file by setting
16814 @code{term-file-prefix} to @code{nil}. @xref{Simple Extension, , A
16815 Simple Extension}.)
16816
16817 @c Rewritten to avoid overfull hbox.
16818 The @file{INSTALL} file that comes in the distribution contains
16819 descriptions of the @file{site-init.el} and @file{site-load.el} files.
16820
16821 The @file{loadup.el}, @file{startup.el}, and @file{loaddefs.el} files
16822 control loading. These files are in the @file{lisp} directory of the
16823 Emacs distribution and are worth perusing.
16824
16825 The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains a good many suggestions as to
16826 what to put into your own @file{.emacs} file, or into a site-wide
16827 initialization file.
16828
16829 @node defcustom
16830 @section Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}
16831 @findex defcustom
16832
16833 You can specify variables using @code{defcustom} so that you and
16834 others can then use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to set their
16835 values. (You cannot use @code{customize} to write function
16836 definitions; but you can write @code{defuns} in your @file{.emacs}
16837 file. Indeed, you can write any Lisp expression in your @file{.emacs}
16838 file.)
16839
16840 The @code{customize} feature depends on the @code{defcustom} macro.
16841 Although you can use @code{defvar} or @code{setq} for variables that
16842 users set, the @code{defcustom} macro is designed for the job.
16843
16844 You can use your knowledge of @code{defvar} for writing the
16845 first three arguments for @code{defcustom}. The first argument to
16846 @code{defcustom} is the name of the variable. The second argument is
16847 the variable's initial value, if any; and this value is set only if
16848 the value has not already been set. The third argument is the
16849 documentation.
16850
16851 The fourth and subsequent arguments to @code{defcustom} specify types
16852 and options; these are not featured in @code{defvar}. (These
16853 arguments are optional.)
16854
16855 Each of these arguments consists of a keyword followed by a value.
16856 Each keyword starts with the colon character @samp{:}.
16857
16858 @need 1250
16859 For example, the customizable user option variable
16860 @code{text-mode-hook} looks like this:
16861
16862 @smallexample
16863 @group
16864 (defcustom text-mode-hook nil
16865 "Normal hook run when entering Text mode and many related modes."
16866 :type 'hook
16867 :options '(turn-on-auto-fill flyspell-mode)
16868 :group 'wp)
16869 @end group
16870 @end smallexample
16871
16872 @noindent
16873 The name of the variable is @code{text-mode-hook}; it has no default
16874 value; and its documentation string tells you what it does.
16875
16876 The @code{:type} keyword tells Emacs the kind of data to which
16877 @code{text-mode-hook} should be set and how to display the value in a
16878 Customization buffer.
16879
16880 The @code{:options} keyword specifies a suggested list of values for
16881 the variable. Usually, @code{:options} applies to a hook.
16882 The list is only a suggestion; it is not exclusive; a person who sets
16883 the variable may set it to other values; the list shown following the
16884 @code{:options} keyword is intended to offer convenient choices to a
16885 user.
16886
16887 Finally, the @code{:group} keyword tells the Emacs Customization
16888 command in which group the variable is located. This tells where to
16889 find it.
16890
16891 The @code{defcustom} macro recognizes more than a dozen keywords.
16892 For more information, see @ref{Customization, , Writing Customization
16893 Definitions, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
16894
16895 Consider @code{text-mode-hook} as an example.
16896
16897 There are two ways to customize this variable. You can use the
16898 customization command or write the appropriate expressions yourself.
16899
16900 @need 800
16901 Using the customization command, you can type:
16902
16903 @smallexample
16904 M-x customize
16905 @end smallexample
16906
16907 @noindent
16908 and find that the group for editing files of data is called ``data''.
16909 Enter that group. Text Mode Hook is the first member. You can click
16910 on its various options, such as @code{turn-on-auto-fill}, to set the
16911 values. After you click on the button to
16912
16913 @smallexample
16914 Save for Future Sessions
16915 @end smallexample
16916
16917 @noindent
16918 Emacs will write an expression into your @file{.emacs} file.
16919 It will look like this:
16920
16921 @smallexample
16922 @group
16923 (custom-set-variables
16924 ;; custom-set-variables was added by Custom.
16925 ;; If you edit it by hand, you could mess it up, so be careful.
16926 ;; Your init file should contain only one such instance.
16927 ;; If there is more than one, they won't work right.
16928 '(text-mode-hook (quote (turn-on-auto-fill text-mode-hook-identify))))
16929 @end group
16930 @end smallexample
16931
16932 @noindent
16933 (The @code{text-mode-hook-identify} function tells
16934 @code{toggle-text-mode-auto-fill} which buffers are in Text mode.
16935 It comes on automatically.)
16936
16937 The @code{custom-set-variables} function works somewhat differently
16938 than a @code{setq}. While I have never learned the differences, I
16939 modify the @code{custom-set-variables} expressions in my @file{.emacs}
16940 file by hand: I make the changes in what appears to me to be a
16941 reasonable manner and have not had any problems. Others prefer to use
16942 the Customization command and let Emacs do the work for them.
16943
16944 Another @code{custom-set-@dots{}} function is @code{custom-set-faces}.
16945 This function sets the various font faces. Over time, I have set a
16946 considerable number of faces. Some of the time, I re-set them using
16947 @code{customize}; other times, I simply edit the
16948 @code{custom-set-faces} expression in my @file{.emacs} file itself.
16949
16950 The second way to customize your @code{text-mode-hook} is to set it
16951 yourself in your @file{.emacs} file using code that has nothing to do
16952 with the @code{custom-set-@dots{}} functions.
16953
16954 @need 800
16955 When you do this, and later use @code{customize}, you will see a
16956 message that says
16957
16958 @smallexample
16959 CHANGED outside Customize; operating on it here may be unreliable.
16960 @end smallexample
16961
16962 @need 800
16963 This message is only a warning. If you click on the button to
16964
16965 @smallexample
16966 Save for Future Sessions
16967 @end smallexample
16968
16969 @noindent
16970 Emacs will write a @code{custom-set-@dots{}} expression near the end
16971 of your @file{.emacs} file that will be evaluated after your
16972 hand-written expression. It will, therefore, overrule your
16973 hand-written expression. No harm will be done. When you do this,
16974 however, be careful to remember which expression is active; if you
16975 forget, you may confuse yourself.
16976
16977 So long as you remember where the values are set, you will have no
16978 trouble. In any event, the values are always set in your
16979 initialization file, which is usually called @file{.emacs}.
16980
16981 I myself use @code{customize} for hardly anything. Mostly, I write
16982 expressions myself.
16983
16984 @findex defsubst
16985 @findex defconst
16986 Incidentally, to be more complete concerning defines: @code{defsubst}
16987 defines an inline function. The syntax is just like that of
16988 @code{defun}. @code{defconst} defines a symbol as a constant. The
16989 intent is that neither programs nor users should ever change a value
16990 set by @code{defconst}. (You can change it; the value set is a
16991 variable; but please do not.)
16992
16993 @node Beginning init File
16994 @section Beginning a @file{.emacs} File
16995 @cindex @file{.emacs} file, beginning of
16996
16997 When you start Emacs, it loads your @file{.emacs} file unless you tell
16998 it not to by specifying @samp{-q} on the command line. (The
16999 @code{emacs -q} command gives you a plain, out-of-the-box Emacs.)
17000
17001 A @file{.emacs} file contains Lisp expressions. Often, these are no
17002 more than expressions to set values; sometimes they are function
17003 definitions.
17004
17005 @xref{Init File, , The Init File @file{~/.emacs}, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17006 Manual}, for a short description of initialization files.
17007
17008 This chapter goes over some of the same ground, but is a walk among
17009 extracts from a complete, long-used @file{.emacs} file---my own.
17010
17011 The first part of the file consists of comments: reminders to myself.
17012 By now, of course, I remember these things, but when I started, I did
17013 not.
17014
17015 @need 1200
17016 @smallexample
17017 @group
17018 ;;;; Bob's .emacs file
17019 ; Robert J. Chassell
17020 ; 26 September 1985
17021 @end group
17022 @end smallexample
17023
17024 @noindent
17025 Look at that date! I started this file a long time ago. I have been
17026 adding to it ever since.
17027
17028 @smallexample
17029 @group
17030 ; Each section in this file is introduced by a
17031 ; line beginning with four semicolons; and each
17032 ; entry is introduced by a line beginning with
17033 ; three semicolons.
17034 @end group
17035 @end smallexample
17036
17037 @noindent
17038 This describes the usual conventions for comments in Emacs Lisp.
17039 Everything on a line that follows a semicolon is a comment. Two,
17040 three, and four semicolons are used as subsection and section markers.
17041 (@xref{Comments, ,, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for
17042 more about comments.)
17043
17044 @smallexample
17045 @group
17046 ;;;; The Help Key
17047 ; Control-h is the help key;
17048 ; after typing control-h, type a letter to
17049 ; indicate the subject about which you want help.
17050 ; For an explanation of the help facility,
17051 ; type control-h two times in a row.
17052 @end group
17053 @end smallexample
17054
17055 @noindent
17056 Just remember: type @kbd{C-h} two times for help.
17057
17058 @smallexample
17059 @group
17060 ; To find out about any mode, type control-h m
17061 ; while in that mode. For example, to find out
17062 ; about mail mode, enter mail mode and then type
17063 ; control-h m.
17064 @end group
17065 @end smallexample
17066
17067 @noindent
17068 ``Mode help'', as I call this, is very helpful. Usually, it tells you
17069 all you need to know.
17070
17071 Of course, you don't need to include comments like these in your
17072 @file{.emacs} file. I included them in mine because I kept forgetting
17073 about Mode help or the conventions for comments---but I was able to
17074 remember to look here to remind myself.
17075
17076 @node Text and Auto-fill
17077 @section Text and Auto Fill Mode
17078
17079 Now we come to the part that ``turns on'' Text mode and
17080 Auto Fill mode.
17081
17082 @smallexample
17083 @group
17084 ;;; Text mode and Auto Fill mode
17085 ;; The next two lines put Emacs into Text mode
17086 ;; and Auto Fill mode, and are for writers who
17087 ;; want to start writing prose rather than code.
17088 (setq-default major-mode 'text-mode)
17089 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17090 @end group
17091 @end smallexample
17092
17093 Here is the first part of this @file{.emacs} file that does something
17094 besides remind a forgetful human!
17095
17096 The first of the two lines in parentheses tells Emacs to turn on Text
17097 mode when you find a file, @emph{unless} that file should go into some
17098 other mode, such as C mode.
17099
17100 @cindex Per-buffer, local variables list
17101 @cindex Local variables list, per-buffer,
17102 @cindex Automatic mode selection
17103 @cindex Mode selection, automatic
17104 When Emacs reads a file, it looks at the extension to the file name,
17105 if any. (The extension is the part that comes after a @samp{.}.) If
17106 the file ends with a @samp{.c} or @samp{.h} extension then Emacs turns
17107 on C mode. Also, Emacs looks at first nonblank line of the file; if
17108 the line says @w{@samp{-*- C -*-}}, Emacs turns on C mode. Emacs
17109 possesses a list of extensions and specifications that it uses
17110 automatically. In addition, Emacs looks near the last page for a
17111 per-buffer, ``local variables list'', if any.
17112
17113 @ifinfo
17114 @xref{Choosing Modes, , How Major Modes are Chosen, emacs, The GNU
17115 Emacs Manual}.
17116
17117 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17118 Manual}.
17119 @end ifinfo
17120 @iftex
17121 See sections ``How Major Modes are Chosen'' and ``Local Variables in
17122 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17123 @end iftex
17124
17125 Now, back to the @file{.emacs} file.
17126
17127 @need 800
17128 Here is the line again; how does it work?
17129
17130 @cindex Text Mode turned on
17131 @smallexample
17132 (setq major-mode 'text-mode)
17133 @end smallexample
17134
17135 @noindent
17136 This line is a short, but complete Emacs Lisp expression.
17137
17138 We are already familiar with @code{setq}. It sets the following variable,
17139 @code{major-mode}, to the subsequent value, which is @code{text-mode}.
17140 The single quote mark before @code{text-mode} tells Emacs to deal directly
17141 with the @code{text-mode} symbol, not with whatever it might stand for.
17142 @xref{set & setq, , Setting the Value of a Variable},
17143 for a reminder of how @code{setq} works.
17144 The main point is that there is no difference between the procedure you
17145 use to set a value in your @file{.emacs} file and the procedure you use
17146 anywhere else in Emacs.
17147
17148 @need 800
17149 Here is the next line:
17150
17151 @cindex Auto Fill mode turned on
17152 @findex add-hook
17153 @smallexample
17154 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17155 @end smallexample
17156
17157 @noindent
17158 In this line, the @code{add-hook} command adds
17159 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} to the variable.
17160
17161 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} is the name of a program, that, you guessed
17162 it!, turns on Auto Fill mode.
17163
17164 Every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs runs the commands ``hooked''
17165 onto Text mode. So every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs also
17166 turns on Auto Fill mode.
17167
17168 In brief, the first line causes Emacs to enter Text mode when you edit a
17169 file, unless the file name extension, a first non-blank line, or local
17170 variables to tell Emacs otherwise.
17171
17172 Text mode among other actions, sets the syntax table to work
17173 conveniently for writers. In Text mode, Emacs considers an apostrophe
17174 as part of a word like a letter; but Emacs does not consider a period
17175 or a space as part of a word. Thus, @kbd{M-f} moves you over
17176 @samp{it's}. On the other hand, in C mode, @kbd{M-f} stops just after
17177 the @samp{t} of @samp{it's}.
17178
17179 The second line causes Emacs to turn on Auto Fill mode when it turns
17180 on Text mode. In Auto Fill mode, Emacs automatically breaks a line
17181 that is too wide and brings the excessively wide part of the line down
17182 to the next line. Emacs breaks lines between words, not within them.
17183
17184 When Auto Fill mode is turned off, lines continue to the right as you
17185 type them. Depending on how you set the value of
17186 @code{truncate-lines}, the words you type either disappear off the
17187 right side of the screen, or else are shown, in a rather ugly and
17188 unreadable manner, as a continuation line on the screen.
17189
17190 @need 1250
17191 In addition, in this part of my @file{.emacs} file, I tell the Emacs
17192 fill commands to insert two spaces after a colon:
17193
17194 @smallexample
17195 (setq colon-double-space t)
17196 @end smallexample
17197
17198 @node Mail Aliases
17199 @section Mail Aliases
17200
17201 Here is a @code{setq} that ``turns on'' mail aliases, along with more
17202 reminders.
17203
17204 @smallexample
17205 @group
17206 ;;; Mail mode
17207 ; To enter mail mode, type 'C-x m'
17208 ; To enter RMAIL (for reading mail),
17209 ; type 'M-x rmail'
17210 (setq mail-aliases t)
17211 @end group
17212 @end smallexample
17213
17214 @cindex Mail aliases
17215 @noindent
17216 This @code{setq} command sets the value of the variable
17217 @code{mail-aliases} to @code{t}. Since @code{t} means true, the line
17218 says, in effect, ``Yes, use mail aliases.''
17219
17220 Mail aliases are convenient short names for long email addresses or
17221 for lists of email addresses. The file where you keep your ``aliases''
17222 is @file{~/.mailrc}. You write an alias like this:
17223
17224 @smallexample
17225 alias geo george@@foobar.wiz.edu
17226 @end smallexample
17227
17228 @noindent
17229 When you write a message to George, address it to @samp{geo}; the
17230 mailer will automatically expand @samp{geo} to the full address.
17231
17232 @node Indent Tabs Mode
17233 @section Indent Tabs Mode
17234 @cindex Tabs, preventing
17235 @findex indent-tabs-mode
17236
17237 By default, Emacs inserts tabs in place of multiple spaces when it
17238 formats a region. (For example, you might indent many lines of text
17239 all at once with the @code{indent-region} command.) Tabs look fine on
17240 a terminal or with ordinary printing, but they produce badly indented
17241 output when you use @TeX{} or Texinfo since @TeX{} ignores tabs.
17242
17243 @need 1250
17244 The following turns off Indent Tabs mode:
17245
17246 @smallexample
17247 @group
17248 ;;; Prevent Extraneous Tabs
17249 (setq-default indent-tabs-mode nil)
17250 @end group
17251 @end smallexample
17252
17253 Note that this line uses @code{setq-default} rather than the
17254 @code{setq} command that we have seen before. The @code{setq-default}
17255 command sets values only in buffers that do not have their own local
17256 values for the variable.
17257
17258 @ifinfo
17259 @xref{Just Spaces, , Tabs vs.@: Spaces, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17260
17261 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17262 Manual}.
17263 @end ifinfo
17264 @iftex
17265 See sections ``Tabs vs.@: Spaces'' and ``Local Variables in
17266 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17267 @end iftex
17268
17269 @need 1700
17270 @node Keybindings
17271 @section Some Keybindings
17272
17273 Now for some personal keybindings:
17274
17275 @smallexample
17276 @group
17277 ;;; Compare windows
17278 (global-set-key "\C-cw" 'compare-windows)
17279 @end group
17280 @end smallexample
17281
17282 @findex compare-windows
17283 @code{compare-windows} is a nifty command that compares the text in
17284 your current window with text in the next window. It makes the
17285 comparison by starting at point in each window, moving over text in
17286 each window as far as they match. I use this command all the time.
17287
17288 This also shows how to set a key globally, for all modes.
17289
17290 @cindex Setting a key globally
17291 @cindex Global set key
17292 @cindex Key setting globally
17293 @findex global-set-key
17294 The command is @code{global-set-key}. It is followed by the
17295 keybinding. In a @file{.emacs} file, the keybinding is written as
17296 shown: @code{\C-c} stands for ``control-c'', which means ``press the
17297 control key and the @key{c} key at the same time''. The @code{w} means
17298 ``press the @key{w} key''. The keybinding is surrounded by double
17299 quotation marks. In documentation, you would write this as
17300 @w{@kbd{C-c w}}. (If you were binding a @key{META} key, such as
17301 @kbd{M-c}, rather than a @key{CTRL} key, you would write
17302 @w{@code{\M-c}} in your @file{.emacs} file. @xref{Init Rebinding, ,
17303 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
17304 details.)
17305
17306 The command invoked by the keys is @code{compare-windows}. Note that
17307 @code{compare-windows} is preceded by a single quote; otherwise, Emacs
17308 would first try to evaluate the symbol to determine its value.
17309
17310 These three things, the double quotation marks, the backslash before
17311 the @samp{C}, and the single quote mark are necessary parts of
17312 keybinding that I tend to forget. Fortunately, I have come to
17313 remember that I should look at my existing @file{.emacs} file, and
17314 adapt what is there.
17315
17316 As for the keybinding itself: @kbd{C-c w}. This combines the prefix
17317 key, @kbd{C-c}, with a single character, in this case, @kbd{w}. This
17318 set of keys, @kbd{C-c} followed by a single character, is strictly
17319 reserved for individuals' own use. (I call these ``own'' keys, since
17320 these are for my own use.) You should always be able to create such a
17321 keybinding for your own use without stomping on someone else's
17322 keybinding. If you ever write an extension to Emacs, please avoid
17323 taking any of these keys for public use. Create a key like @kbd{C-c
17324 C-w} instead. Otherwise, we will run out of ``own'' keys.
17325
17326 @need 1250
17327 Here is another keybinding, with a comment:
17328
17329 @smallexample
17330 @group
17331 ;;; Keybinding for 'occur'
17332 ; I use occur a lot, so let's bind it to a key:
17333 (global-set-key "\C-co" 'occur)
17334 @end group
17335 @end smallexample
17336
17337 @findex occur
17338 The @code{occur} command shows all the lines in the current buffer
17339 that contain a match for a regular expression. Matching lines are
17340 shown in a buffer called @file{*Occur*}. That buffer serves as a menu
17341 to jump to occurrences.
17342
17343 @findex global-unset-key
17344 @cindex Unbinding key
17345 @cindex Key unbinding
17346 @need 1250
17347 Here is how to unbind a key, so it does not
17348 work:
17349
17350 @smallexample
17351 @group
17352 ;;; Unbind 'C-x f'
17353 (global-unset-key "\C-xf")
17354 @end group
17355 @end smallexample
17356
17357 There is a reason for this unbinding: I found I inadvertently typed
17358 @w{@kbd{C-x f}} when I meant to type @kbd{C-x C-f}. Rather than find a
17359 file, as I intended, I accidentally set the width for filled text,
17360 almost always to a width I did not want. Since I hardly ever reset my
17361 default width, I simply unbound the key.
17362
17363 @findex list-buffers, @r{rebound}
17364 @findex buffer-menu, @r{bound to key}
17365 @need 1250
17366 The following rebinds an existing key:
17367
17368 @smallexample
17369 @group
17370 ;;; Rebind 'C-x C-b' for 'buffer-menu'
17371 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17372 @end group
17373 @end smallexample
17374
17375 By default, @kbd{C-x C-b} runs the
17376 @code{list-buffers} command. This command lists
17377 your buffers in @emph{another} window. Since I
17378 almost always want to do something in that
17379 window, I prefer the @code{buffer-menu}
17380 command, which not only lists the buffers,
17381 but moves point into that window.
17382
17383 @node Keymaps
17384 @section Keymaps
17385 @cindex Keymaps
17386 @cindex Rebinding keys
17387
17388 Emacs uses @dfn{keymaps} to record which keys call which commands.
17389 When you use @code{global-set-key} to set the keybinding for a single
17390 command in all parts of Emacs, you are specifying the keybinding in
17391 @code{current-global-map}.
17392
17393 Specific modes, such as C mode or Text mode, have their own keymaps;
17394 the mode-specific keymaps override the global map that is shared by
17395 all buffers.
17396
17397 The @code{global-set-key} function binds, or rebinds, the global
17398 keymap. For example, the following binds the key @kbd{C-x C-b} to the
17399 function @code{buffer-menu}:
17400
17401 @smallexample
17402 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17403 @end smallexample
17404
17405 Mode-specific keymaps are bound using the @code{define-key} function,
17406 which takes a specific keymap as an argument, as well as the key and
17407 the command. For example, my @file{.emacs} file contains the
17408 following expression to bind the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} command
17409 to @kbd{C-c C-c g}:
17410
17411 @smallexample
17412 @group
17413 (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-c\C-cg" 'texinfo-insert-@@group)
17414 @end group
17415 @end smallexample
17416
17417 @noindent
17418 The @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function itself is a little extension
17419 to Texinfo mode that inserts @samp{@@group} into a Texinfo file. I
17420 use this command all the time and prefer to type the three strokes
17421 @kbd{C-c C-c g} rather than the six strokes @kbd{@@ g r o u p}.
17422 (@samp{@@group} and its matching @samp{@@end group} are commands that
17423 keep all enclosed text together on one page; many multi-line examples
17424 in this book are surrounded by @samp{@@group @dots{} @@end group}.)
17425
17426 @need 1250
17427 Here is the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function definition:
17428
17429 @smallexample
17430 @group
17431 (defun texinfo-insert-@@group ()
17432 "Insert the string @@group in a Texinfo buffer."
17433 (interactive)
17434 (beginning-of-line)
17435 (insert "@@group\n"))
17436 @end group
17437 @end smallexample
17438
17439 (Of course, I could have used Abbrev mode to save typing, rather than
17440 write a function to insert a word; but I prefer key strokes consistent
17441 with other Texinfo mode key bindings.)
17442
17443 You will see numerous @code{define-key} expressions in
17444 @file{loaddefs.el} as well as in the various mode libraries, such as
17445 @file{cc-mode.el} and @file{lisp-mode.el}.
17446
17447 @xref{Key Bindings, , Customizing Key Bindings, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17448 Manual}, and @ref{Keymaps, , Keymaps, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17449 Reference Manual}, for more information about keymaps.
17450
17451 @node Loading Files
17452 @section Loading Files
17453 @cindex Loading files
17454 @c findex load
17455
17456 Many people in the GNU Emacs community have written extensions to
17457 Emacs. As time goes by, these extensions are often included in new
17458 releases. For example, the Calendar and Diary packages are now part
17459 of the standard GNU Emacs, as is Calc.
17460
17461 You can use a @code{load} command to evaluate a complete file and
17462 thereby install all the functions and variables in the file into Emacs.
17463 For example:
17464
17465 @c (auto-compression-mode t)
17466
17467 @smallexample
17468 (load "~/emacs/slowsplit")
17469 @end smallexample
17470
17471 This evaluates, i.e., loads, the @file{slowsplit.el} file or if it
17472 exists, the faster, byte compiled @file{slowsplit.elc} file from the
17473 @file{emacs} sub-directory of your home directory. The file contains
17474 the function @code{split-window-quietly}, which John Robinson wrote in
17475 1989.
17476
17477 The @code{split-window-quietly} function splits a window with the
17478 minimum of redisplay. I installed it in 1989 because it worked well
17479 with the slow 1200 baud terminals I was then using. Nowadays, I only
17480 occasionally come across such a slow connection, but I continue to use
17481 the function because I like the way it leaves the bottom half of a
17482 buffer in the lower of the new windows and the top half in the upper
17483 window.
17484
17485 @need 1250
17486 To replace the key binding for the default
17487 @code{split-window-vertically}, you must also unset that key and bind
17488 the keys to @code{split-window-quietly}, like this:
17489
17490 @smallexample
17491 @group
17492 (global-unset-key "\C-x2")
17493 (global-set-key "\C-x2" 'split-window-quietly)
17494 @end group
17495 @end smallexample
17496
17497 @vindex load-path
17498 If you load many extensions, as I do, then instead of specifying the
17499 exact location of the extension file, as shown above, you can specify
17500 that directory as part of Emacs's @code{load-path}. Then, when Emacs
17501 loads a file, it will search that directory as well as its default
17502 list of directories. (The default list is specified in @file{paths.h}
17503 when Emacs is built.)
17504
17505 @need 1250
17506 The following command adds your @file{~/emacs} directory to the
17507 existing load path:
17508
17509 @smallexample
17510 @group
17511 ;;; Emacs Load Path
17512 (setq load-path (cons "~/emacs" load-path))
17513 @end group
17514 @end smallexample
17515
17516 Incidentally, @code{load-library} is an interactive interface to the
17517 @code{load} function. The complete function looks like this:
17518
17519 @findex load-library
17520 @smallexample
17521 @group
17522 (defun load-library (library)
17523 "Load the library named LIBRARY.
17524 This is an interface to the function ‘load’."
17525 (interactive
17526 (list (completing-read "Load library: "
17527 (apply-partially 'locate-file-completion-table
17528 load-path
17529 (get-load-suffixes)))))
17530 (load library))
17531 @end group
17532 @end smallexample
17533
17534 The name of the function, @code{load-library}, comes from the use of
17535 ``library'' as a conventional synonym for ``file''. The source for the
17536 @code{load-library} command is in the @file{files.el} library.
17537
17538 Another interactive command that does a slightly different job is
17539 @code{load-file}. @xref{Lisp Libraries, , Libraries of Lisp Code for
17540 Emacs, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for information on the
17541 distinction between @code{load-library} and this command.
17542
17543 @node Autoload
17544 @section Autoloading
17545 @findex autoload
17546
17547 Instead of installing a function by loading the file that contains it,
17548 or by evaluating the function definition, you can make the function
17549 available but not actually install it until it is first called. This
17550 is called @dfn{autoloading}.
17551
17552 When you execute an autoloaded function, Emacs automatically evaluates
17553 the file that contains the definition, and then calls the function.
17554
17555 Emacs starts quicker with autoloaded functions, since their libraries
17556 are not loaded right away; but you need to wait a moment when you
17557 first use such a function, while its containing file is evaluated.
17558
17559 Rarely used functions are frequently autoloaded. The
17560 @file{loaddefs.el} library contains thousands of autoloaded functions,
17561 from @code{5x5} to @code{zone}. Of course, you may
17562 come to use a ``rare'' function frequently. When you do, you should
17563 load that function's file with a @code{load} expression in your
17564 @file{.emacs} file.
17565
17566 In my @file{.emacs} file, I load 14 libraries that contain functions
17567 that would otherwise be autoloaded. (Actually, it would have been
17568 better to include these files in my ``dumped'' Emacs, but I forgot.
17569 @xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17570 Reference Manual}, and the @file{INSTALL} file for more about
17571 dumping.)
17572
17573 You may also want to include autoloaded expressions in your @file{.emacs}
17574 file. @code{autoload} is a built-in function that takes up to five
17575 arguments, the final three of which are optional. The first argument
17576 is the name of the function to be autoloaded; the second is the name
17577 of the file to be loaded. The third argument is documentation for the
17578 function, and the fourth tells whether the function can be called
17579 interactively. The fifth argument tells what type of
17580 object---@code{autoload} can handle a keymap or macro as well as a
17581 function (the default is a function).
17582
17583 @need 800
17584 Here is a typical example:
17585
17586 @smallexample
17587 @group
17588 (autoload 'html-helper-mode
17589 "html-helper-mode" "Edit HTML documents" t)
17590 @end group
17591 @end smallexample
17592
17593 @noindent
17594 (@code{html-helper-mode} is an older alternative to @code{html-mode},
17595 which is a standard part of the distribution.)
17596
17597 @noindent
17598 This expression autoloads the @code{html-helper-mode} function. It
17599 takes it from the @file{html-helper-mode.el} file (or from the byte
17600 compiled version @file{html-helper-mode.elc}, if that exists.) The
17601 file must be located in a directory specified by @code{load-path}.
17602 The documentation says that this is a mode to help you edit documents
17603 written in the HyperText Markup Language. You can call this mode
17604 interactively by typing @kbd{M-x html-helper-mode}. (You need to
17605 duplicate the function's regular documentation in the autoload
17606 expression because the regular function is not yet loaded, so its
17607 documentation is not available.)
17608
17609 @xref{Autoload, , Autoload, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17610 Manual}, for more information.
17611
17612 @node Simple Extension
17613 @section A Simple Extension: @code{line-to-top-of-window}
17614 @findex line-to-top-of-window
17615 @cindex Simple extension in @file{.emacs} file
17616
17617 Here is a simple extension to Emacs that moves the line point is on to
17618 the top of the window. I use this all the time, to make text easier
17619 to read.
17620
17621 You can put the following code into a separate file and then load it
17622 from your @file{.emacs} file, or you can include it within your
17623 @file{.emacs} file.
17624
17625 @need 1250
17626 Here is the definition:
17627
17628 @smallexample
17629 @group
17630 ;;; Line to top of window;
17631 ;;; replace three keystroke sequence C-u 0 C-l
17632 (defun line-to-top-of-window ()
17633 "Move the line point is on to top of window."
17634 (interactive)
17635 (recenter 0))
17636 @end group
17637 @end smallexample
17638
17639 @need 1250
17640 Now for the keybinding.
17641
17642 Nowadays, function keys as well as mouse button events and
17643 non-@sc{ascii} characters are written within square brackets, without
17644 quotation marks. (In Emacs version 18 and before, you had to write
17645 different function key bindings for each different make of terminal.)
17646
17647 I bind @code{line-to-top-of-window} to my @key{F6} function key like
17648 this:
17649
17650 @smallexample
17651 (global-set-key [f6] 'line-to-top-of-window)
17652 @end smallexample
17653
17654 For more information, see @ref{Init Rebinding, , Rebinding Keys in
17655 Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17656
17657 @cindex Conditional 'twixt two versions of Emacs
17658 @cindex Version of Emacs, choosing
17659 @cindex Emacs version, choosing
17660 If you run two versions of GNU Emacs, such as versions 22 and 23, and
17661 use one @file{.emacs} file, you can select which code to evaluate with
17662 the following conditional:
17663
17664 @smallexample
17665 @group
17666 (cond
17667 ((= 22 emacs-major-version)
17668 ;; evaluate version 22 code
17669 ( @dots{} ))
17670 ((= 23 emacs-major-version)
17671 ;; evaluate version 23 code
17672 ( @dots{} )))
17673 @end group
17674 @end smallexample
17675
17676 For example, recent versions blink
17677 their cursors by default. I hate such blinking, as well as other
17678 features, so I placed the following in my @file{.emacs}
17679 file@footnote{When I start instances of Emacs that do not load my
17680 @file{.emacs} file or any site file, I also turn off blinking:
17681
17682 @smallexample
17683 emacs -q --no-site-file -eval '(blink-cursor-mode nil)'
17684
17685 @exdent Or nowadays, using an even more sophisticated set of options,
17686
17687 emacs -Q -D
17688 @end smallexample
17689 }:
17690
17691 @smallexample
17692 @group
17693 (when (>= emacs-major-version 21)
17694 (blink-cursor-mode 0)
17695 ;; Insert newline when you press 'C-n' (next-line)
17696 ;; at the end of the buffer
17697 (setq next-line-add-newlines t)
17698 @end group
17699 @group
17700 ;; Turn on image viewing
17701 (auto-image-file-mode t)
17702 @end group
17703 @group
17704 ;; Turn on menu bar (this bar has text)
17705 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17706 (menu-bar-mode 1)
17707 @end group
17708 @group
17709 ;; Turn off tool bar (this bar has icons)
17710 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17711 (tool-bar-mode nil)
17712 @end group
17713 @group
17714 ;; Turn off tooltip mode for tool bar
17715 ;; (This mode causes icon explanations to pop up)
17716 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17717 (tooltip-mode nil)
17718 ;; If tooltips turned on, make tips appear promptly
17719 (setq tooltip-delay 0.1) ; default is 0.7 second
17720 )
17721 @end group
17722 @end smallexample
17723
17724 @node X11 Colors
17725 @section X11 Colors
17726
17727 You can specify colors when you use Emacs with the MIT X Windowing
17728 system.
17729
17730 I dislike the default colors and specify my own.
17731
17732 @need 1250
17733 Here are the expressions in my @file{.emacs}
17734 file that set values:
17735
17736 @smallexample
17737 @group
17738 ;; Set cursor color
17739 (set-cursor-color "white")
17740
17741 ;; Set mouse color
17742 (set-mouse-color "white")
17743
17744 ;; Set foreground and background
17745 (set-foreground-color "white")
17746 (set-background-color "darkblue")
17747 @end group
17748
17749 @group
17750 ;;; Set highlighting colors for isearch and drag
17751 (set-face-foreground 'highlight "white")
17752 (set-face-background 'highlight "blue")
17753 @end group
17754
17755 @group
17756 (set-face-foreground 'region "cyan")
17757 (set-face-background 'region "blue")
17758 @end group
17759
17760 @group
17761 (set-face-foreground 'secondary-selection "skyblue")
17762 (set-face-background 'secondary-selection "darkblue")
17763 @end group
17764
17765 @group
17766 ;; Set calendar highlighting colors
17767 (add-hook 'calendar-load-hook
17768 (lambda ()
17769 (set-face-foreground 'diary-face "skyblue")
17770 (set-face-background 'holiday-face "slate blue")
17771 (set-face-foreground 'holiday-face "white")))
17772 @end group
17773 @end smallexample
17774
17775 The various shades of blue soothe my eye and prevent me from seeing
17776 the screen flicker.
17777
17778 Alternatively, I could have set my specifications in various X
17779 initialization files. For example, I could set the foreground,
17780 background, cursor, and pointer (i.e., mouse) colors in my
17781 @file{~/.Xresources} file like this:
17782
17783 @smallexample
17784 @group
17785 Emacs*foreground: white
17786 Emacs*background: darkblue
17787 Emacs*cursorColor: white
17788 Emacs*pointerColor: white
17789 @end group
17790 @end smallexample
17791
17792 In any event, since it is not part of Emacs, I set the root color of
17793 my X window in my @file{~/.xinitrc} file, like this@footnote{I also
17794 run more modern window managers, such as Enlightenment, Gnome, or KDE;
17795 in those cases, I often specify an image rather than a plain color.}:
17796
17797 @smallexample
17798 xsetroot -solid Navy -fg white &
17799 @end smallexample
17800
17801 @need 1700
17802 @node Miscellaneous
17803 @section Miscellaneous Settings for a @file{.emacs} File
17804
17805 @need 1250
17806 Here are a few miscellaneous settings:
17807 @sp 1
17808
17809 @itemize @minus
17810 @item
17811 Set the shape and color of the mouse cursor:
17812
17813 @smallexample
17814 @group
17815 ; Cursor shapes are defined in
17816 ; '/usr/include/X11/cursorfont.h';
17817 ; for example, the 'target' cursor is number 128;
17818 ; the 'top_left_arrow' cursor is number 132.
17819 @end group
17820
17821 @group
17822 (let ((mpointer (x-get-resource "*mpointer"
17823 "*emacs*mpointer")))
17824 ;; If you have not set your mouse pointer
17825 ;; then set it, otherwise leave as is:
17826 (if (eq mpointer nil)
17827 (setq mpointer "132")) ; top_left_arrow
17828 @end group
17829 @group
17830 (setq x-pointer-shape (string-to-int mpointer))
17831 (set-mouse-color "white"))
17832 @end group
17833 @end smallexample
17834
17835 @item
17836 Or you can set the values of a variety of features in an alist, like
17837 this:
17838
17839 @smallexample
17840 @group
17841 (setq-default
17842 default-frame-alist
17843 '((cursor-color . "white")
17844 (mouse-color . "white")
17845 (foreground-color . "white")
17846 (background-color . "DodgerBlue4")
17847 ;; (cursor-type . bar)
17848 (cursor-type . box)
17849 @end group
17850 @group
17851 (tool-bar-lines . 0)
17852 (menu-bar-lines . 1)
17853 (width . 80)
17854 (height . 58)
17855 (font .
17856 "-Misc-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--20-200-75-75-C-100-ISO8859-1")
17857 ))
17858 @end group
17859 @end smallexample
17860
17861 @item
17862 Convert @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h} into @key{DEL} and @key{DEL}
17863 into @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h}.@*
17864 (Some older keyboards needed this, although I have not seen the
17865 problem recently.)
17866
17867 @smallexample
17868 @group
17869 ;; Translate 'C-h' to <DEL>.
17870 ; (keyboard-translate ?\C-h ?\C-?)
17871
17872 ;; Translate <DEL> to 'C-h'.
17873 (keyboard-translate ?\C-? ?\C-h)
17874 @end group
17875 @end smallexample
17876
17877 @item Turn off a blinking cursor!
17878
17879 @smallexample
17880 @group
17881 (if (fboundp 'blink-cursor-mode)
17882 (blink-cursor-mode -1))
17883 @end group
17884 @end smallexample
17885
17886 @noindent
17887 or start GNU Emacs with the command @code{emacs -nbc}.
17888
17889 @need 1250
17890 @item When using @command{grep}@*
17891 @samp{-i}@w{ } Ignore case distinctions@*
17892 @samp{-n}@w{ } Prefix each line of output with line number@*
17893 @samp{-H}@w{ } Print the filename for each match.@*
17894 @samp{-e}@w{ } Protect patterns beginning with a hyphen character, @samp{-}
17895
17896 @smallexample
17897 (setq grep-command "grep -i -nH -e ")
17898 @end smallexample
17899
17900 @ignore
17901 @c Evidently, no longer needed in GNU Emacs 22
17902
17903 item Automatically uncompress compressed files when visiting them
17904
17905 smallexample
17906 (load "uncompress")
17907 end smallexample
17908
17909 @end ignore
17910
17911 @item Find an existing buffer, even if it has a different name@*
17912 This avoids problems with symbolic links.
17913
17914 @smallexample
17915 (setq find-file-existing-other-name t)
17916 @end smallexample
17917
17918 @item Set your language environment and default input method
17919
17920 @smallexample
17921 @group
17922 (set-language-environment "latin-1")
17923 ;; Remember you can enable or disable multilingual text input
17924 ;; with the @code{toggle-input-method'} (@kbd{C-\}) command
17925 (setq default-input-method "latin-1-prefix")
17926 @end group
17927 @end smallexample
17928
17929 If you want to write with Chinese ``GB'' characters, set this instead:
17930
17931 @smallexample
17932 @group
17933 (set-language-environment "Chinese-GB")
17934 (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy")
17935 @end group
17936 @end smallexample
17937 @end itemize
17938
17939 @subsubheading Fixing Unpleasant Key Bindings
17940 @cindex Key bindings, fixing
17941 @cindex Bindings, key, fixing unpleasant
17942
17943 Some systems bind keys unpleasantly. Sometimes, for example, the
17944 @key{CTRL} key appears in an awkward spot rather than at the far left
17945 of the home row.
17946
17947 Usually, when people fix these sorts of keybindings, they do not
17948 change their @file{~/.emacs} file. Instead, they bind the proper keys
17949 on their consoles with the @code{loadkeys} or @code{install-keymap}
17950 commands in their boot script and then include @code{xmodmap} commands
17951 in their @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file for X Windows.
17952
17953 @need 1250
17954 @noindent
17955 For a boot script:
17956
17957 @smallexample
17958 @group
17959 loadkeys /usr/share/keymaps/i386/qwerty/emacs2.kmap.gz
17960 @exdent or
17961 install-keymap emacs2
17962 @end group
17963 @end smallexample
17964
17965 @need 1250
17966 @noindent
17967 For a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file when the @key{Caps
17968 Lock} key is at the far left of the home row:
17969
17970 @smallexample
17971 @group
17972 # Bind the key labeled 'Caps Lock' to 'Control'
17973 # (Such a broken user interface suggests that keyboard manufacturers
17974 # think that computers are typewriters from 1885.)
17975
17976 xmodmap -e "clear Lock"
17977 xmodmap -e "add Control = Caps_Lock"
17978 @end group
17979 @end smallexample
17980
17981 @need 1250
17982 @noindent
17983 In a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file, to convert an @key{ALT}
17984 key to a @key{META} key:
17985
17986 @smallexample
17987 @group
17988 # Some ill designed keyboards have a key labeled ALT and no Meta
17989 xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_L = Meta_L Alt_L"
17990 @end group
17991 @end smallexample
17992
17993 @need 1700
17994 @node Mode Line
17995 @section A Modified Mode Line
17996 @vindex mode-line-format
17997 @cindex Mode line format
17998
17999 Finally, a feature I really like: a modified mode line.
18000
18001 When I work over a network, I forget which machine I am using. Also,
18002 I tend to I lose track of where I am, and which line point is on.
18003
18004 So I reset my mode line to look like this:
18005
18006 @smallexample
18007 -:-- foo.texi rattlesnake:/home/bob/ Line 1 (Texinfo Fill) Top
18008 @end smallexample
18009
18010 I am visiting a file called @file{foo.texi}, on my machine
18011 @file{rattlesnake} in my @file{/home/bob} buffer. I am on line 1, in
18012 Texinfo mode, and am at the top of the buffer.
18013
18014 @need 1200
18015 My @file{.emacs} file has a section that looks like this:
18016
18017 @smallexample
18018 @group
18019 ;; Set a Mode Line that tells me which machine, which directory,
18020 ;; and which line I am on, plus the other customary information.
18021 (setq-default mode-line-format
18022 (quote
18023 (#("-" 0 1
18024 (help-echo
18025 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18026 mode-line-mule-info
18027 mode-line-modified
18028 mode-line-frame-identification
18029 " "
18030 @end group
18031 @group
18032 mode-line-buffer-identification
18033 " "
18034 (:eval (substring
18035 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18036 ":"
18037 default-directory
18038 #(" " 0 1
18039 (help-echo
18040 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18041 (line-number-mode " Line %l ")
18042 global-mode-string
18043 @end group
18044 @group
18045 #(" %[(" 0 6
18046 (help-echo
18047 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18048 (:eval (mode-line-mode-name))
18049 mode-line-process
18050 minor-mode-alist
18051 #("%n" 0 2 (help-echo "mouse-2: widen" local-map (keymap ...)))
18052 ")%] "
18053 (-3 . "%P")
18054 ;; "-%-"
18055 )))
18056 @end group
18057 @end smallexample
18058
18059 @noindent
18060 Here, I redefine the default mode line. Most of the parts are from
18061 the original; but I make a few changes. I set the @emph{default} mode
18062 line format so as to permit various modes, such as Info, to override
18063 it.
18064
18065 Many elements in the list are self-explanatory:
18066 @code{mode-line-modified} is a variable that tells whether the buffer
18067 has been modified, @code{mode-name} tells the name of the mode, and so
18068 on. However, the format looks complicated because of two features we
18069 have not discussed.
18070
18071 @cindex Properties, in mode line example
18072 The first string in the mode line is a dash or hyphen, @samp{-}. In
18073 the old days, it would have been specified simply as @code{"-"}. But
18074 nowadays, Emacs can add properties to a string, such as highlighting
18075 or, as in this case, a help feature. If you place your mouse cursor
18076 over the hyphen, some help information appears (By default, you must
18077 wait seven-tenths of a second before the information appears. You can
18078 change that timing by changing the value of @code{tooltip-delay}.)
18079
18080 @need 1000
18081 The new string format has a special syntax:
18082
18083 @smallexample
18084 #("-" 0 1 (help-echo "mouse-1: select window, ..."))
18085 @end smallexample
18086
18087 @noindent
18088 The @code{#(} begins a list. The first element of the list is the
18089 string itself, just one @samp{-}. The second and third
18090 elements specify the range over which the fourth element applies. A
18091 range starts @emph{after} a character, so a zero means the range
18092 starts just before the first character; a 1 means that the range ends
18093 just after the first character. The third element is the property for
18094 the range. It consists of a property list, a
18095 property name, in this case, @samp{help-echo}, followed by a value, in this
18096 case, a string. The second, third, and fourth elements of this new
18097 string format can be repeated.
18098
18099 @xref{Text Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18100 Reference Manual}, and see @ref{Mode Line Format, , Mode Line Format,
18101 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more information.
18102
18103 @code{mode-line-buffer-identification}
18104 displays the current buffer name. It is a list
18105 beginning @code{(#("%12b" 0 4 @dots{}}.
18106 The @code{#(} begins the list.
18107
18108 The @samp{"%12b"} displays the current buffer name, using the
18109 @code{buffer-name} function with which we are familiar; the @samp{12}
18110 specifies the maximum number of characters that will be displayed.
18111 When a name has fewer characters, whitespace is added to fill out to
18112 this number. (Buffer names can and often should be longer than 12
18113 characters; this length works well in a typical 80 column wide
18114 window.)
18115
18116 @code{:eval} says to evaluate the following form and use the result as
18117 a string to display. In this case, the expression displays the first
18118 component of the full system name. The end of the first component is
18119 a @samp{.} (``period''), so I use the @code{string-match} function to
18120 tell me the length of the first component. The substring from the
18121 zeroth character to that length is the name of the machine.
18122
18123 @need 1250
18124 This is the expression:
18125
18126 @smallexample
18127 @group
18128 (:eval (substring
18129 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18130 @end group
18131 @end smallexample
18132
18133 @samp{%[} and @samp{%]} cause a pair of square brackets
18134 to appear for each recursive editing level. @samp{%n} says ``Narrow''
18135 when narrowing is in effect. @samp{%P} tells you the percentage of
18136 the buffer that is above the bottom of the window, or ``Top'', ``Bottom'',
18137 or ``All''. (A lower case @samp{p} tell you the percentage above the
18138 @emph{top} of the window.) @samp{%-} inserts enough dashes to fill
18139 out the line.
18140
18141 Remember, ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it''---your own
18142 Emacs can have different colors, different commands, and different
18143 keys than a default Emacs.
18144
18145 On the other hand, if you want to bring up a plain ``out of the box''
18146 Emacs, with no customization, type:
18147
18148 @smallexample
18149 emacs -q
18150 @end smallexample
18151
18152 @noindent
18153 This will start an Emacs that does @emph{not} load your
18154 @file{~/.emacs} initialization file. A plain, default Emacs. Nothing
18155 more.
18156
18157 @node Debugging
18158 @chapter Debugging
18159 @cindex debugging
18160
18161 GNU Emacs has two debuggers, @code{debug} and @code{edebug}. The
18162 first is built into the internals of Emacs and is always with you;
18163 the second requires that you instrument a function before you can use it.
18164
18165 Both debuggers are described extensively in @ref{Debugging, ,
18166 Debugging Lisp Programs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18167 In this chapter, I will walk through a short example of each.
18168
18169 @menu
18170 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
18171 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
18172 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
18173 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
18174 * Debugging Exercises::
18175 @end menu
18176
18177 @node debug
18178 @section @code{debug}
18179 @findex debug
18180
18181 Suppose you have written a function definition that is intended to
18182 return the sum of the numbers 1 through a given number. (This is the
18183 @code{triangle} function discussed earlier. @xref{Decrementing
18184 Example, , Example with Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18185 @c xref{Decrementing Loop,, Loop with a Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18186
18187 However, your function definition has a bug. You have mistyped
18188 @samp{1=} for @samp{1-}. Here is the broken definition:
18189
18190 @findex triangle-bugged
18191 @smallexample
18192 @group
18193 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18194 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18195 (let ((total 0))
18196 (while (> number 0)
18197 (setq total (+ total number))
18198 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18199 total))
18200 @end group
18201 @end smallexample
18202
18203 If you are reading this in Info, you can evaluate this definition in
18204 the normal fashion. You will see @code{triangle-bugged} appear in the
18205 echo area.
18206
18207 @need 1250
18208 Now evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged} function with an
18209 argument of 4:
18210
18211 @smallexample
18212 (triangle-bugged 4)
18213 @end smallexample
18214
18215 @noindent
18216 In a recent GNU Emacs, you will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*}
18217 buffer that says:
18218
18219 @noindent
18220 @smallexample
18221 @group
18222 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18223 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18224 (1= number)
18225 (setq number (1= number))
18226 (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18227 (setq number (1= number)))
18228 (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18229 (setq number ...)) total)
18230 triangle-bugged(4)
18231 @end group
18232 @group
18233 eval((triangle-bugged 4))
18234 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18235 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18236 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18237 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18238 @end group
18239 @end smallexample
18240
18241 @noindent
18242 (I have reformatted this example slightly; the debugger does not fold
18243 long lines. As usual, you can quit the debugger by typing @kbd{q} in
18244 the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
18245
18246 In practice, for a bug as simple as this, the ``Lisp error'' line will
18247 tell you what you need to know to correct the definition. The
18248 function @code{1=} is ``void''.
18249
18250 @ignore
18251 @need 800
18252 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will see:
18253
18254 @smallexample
18255 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18256 @end smallexample
18257
18258 @noindent
18259 which has the same meaning as the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer line in
18260 version 21.
18261 @end ignore
18262
18263 However, suppose you are not quite certain what is going on?
18264 You can read the complete backtrace.
18265
18266 In this case, you need to run a recent GNU Emacs, which automatically
18267 starts the debugger that puts you in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer; or
18268 else, you need to start the debugger manually as described below.
18269
18270 Read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells you
18271 what Emacs did that led to the error. Emacs made an interactive call
18272 to @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}), which led to the evaluation
18273 of the @code{triangle-bugged} expression. Each line above tells you
18274 what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
18275
18276 @need 1250
18277 The third line from the top of the buffer is
18278
18279 @smallexample
18280 (setq number (1= number))
18281 @end smallexample
18282
18283 @noindent
18284 Emacs tried to evaluate this expression; in order to do so, it tried
18285 to evaluate the inner expression shown on the second line from the
18286 top:
18287
18288 @smallexample
18289 (1= number)
18290 @end smallexample
18291
18292 @need 1250
18293 @noindent
18294 This is where the error occurred; as the top line says:
18295
18296 @smallexample
18297 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18298 @end smallexample
18299
18300 @noindent
18301 You can correct the mistake, re-evaluate the function definition, and
18302 then run your test again.
18303
18304 @node debug-on-entry
18305 @section @code{debug-on-entry}
18306 @findex debug-on-entry
18307
18308 A recent GNU Emacs starts the debugger automatically when your
18309 function has an error.
18310
18311 @ignore
18312 GNU Emacs version 20 and before did not; it simply
18313 presented you with an error message. You had to start the debugger
18314 manually.
18315 @end ignore
18316
18317 Incidentally, you can start the debugger manually for all versions of
18318 Emacs; the advantage is that the debugger runs even if you do not have
18319 a bug in your code. Sometimes your code will be free of bugs!
18320
18321 You can enter the debugger when you call the function by calling
18322 @code{debug-on-entry}.
18323
18324 @need 1250
18325 @noindent
18326 Type:
18327
18328 @smallexample
18329 M-x debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18330 @end smallexample
18331
18332 @need 1250
18333 @noindent
18334 Now, evaluate the following:
18335
18336 @smallexample
18337 (triangle-bugged 5)
18338 @end smallexample
18339
18340 @noindent
18341 All versions of Emacs will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer and tell
18342 you that it is beginning to evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged}
18343 function:
18344
18345 @smallexample
18346 @group
18347 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18348 Debugger entered--entering a function:
18349 * triangle-bugged(5)
18350 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18351 @end group
18352 @group
18353 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18354 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18355 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18356 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18357 @end group
18358 @end smallexample
18359
18360 In the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, type @kbd{d}. Emacs will evaluate
18361 the first expression in @code{triangle-bugged}; the buffer will look
18362 like this:
18363
18364 @smallexample
18365 @group
18366 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18367 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18368 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18369 (setq number ...)) total)
18370 * triangle-bugged(5)
18371 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18372 @end group
18373 @group
18374 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18375 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18376 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18377 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18378 @end group
18379 @end smallexample
18380
18381 @noindent
18382 Now, type @kbd{d} again, eight times, slowly. Each time you type
18383 @kbd{d}, Emacs will evaluate another expression in the function
18384 definition.
18385
18386 @need 1750
18387 Eventually, the buffer will look like this:
18388
18389 @smallexample
18390 @group
18391 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18392 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18393 * (setq number (1= number))
18394 * (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18395 (setq number (1= number)))
18396 @group
18397 @end group
18398 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18399 (setq number ...)) total)
18400 * triangle-bugged(5)
18401 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18402 @group
18403 @end group
18404 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18405 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18406 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18407 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18408 @end group
18409 @end smallexample
18410
18411 @need 1500
18412 @noindent
18413 Finally, after you type @kbd{d} two more times, Emacs will reach the
18414 error, and the top two lines of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer will look
18415 like this:
18416
18417 @smallexample
18418 @group
18419 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18420 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18421 * (1= number)
18422 @dots{}
18423 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18424 @end group
18425 @end smallexample
18426
18427 By typing @kbd{d}, you were able to step through the function.
18428
18429 You can quit a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer by typing @kbd{q} in it; this
18430 quits the trace, but does not cancel @code{debug-on-entry}.
18431
18432 @findex cancel-debug-on-entry
18433 To cancel the effect of @code{debug-on-entry}, call
18434 @code{cancel-debug-on-entry} and the name of the function, like this:
18435
18436 @smallexample
18437 M-x cancel-debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18438 @end smallexample
18439
18440 @noindent
18441 (If you are reading this in Info, cancel @code{debug-on-entry} now.)
18442
18443 @node debug-on-quit
18444 @section @code{debug-on-quit} and @code{(debug)}
18445
18446 In addition to setting @code{debug-on-error} or calling @code{debug-on-entry},
18447 there are two other ways to start @code{debug}.
18448
18449 @findex debug-on-quit
18450 You can start @code{debug} whenever you type @kbd{C-g}
18451 (@code{keyboard-quit}) by setting the variable @code{debug-on-quit} to
18452 @code{t}. This is useful for debugging infinite loops.
18453
18454 @need 1500
18455 @cindex @code{(debug)} in code
18456 Or, you can insert a line that says @code{(debug)} into your code
18457 where you want the debugger to start, like this:
18458
18459 @smallexample
18460 @group
18461 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18462 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18463 (let ((total 0))
18464 (while (> number 0)
18465 (setq total (+ total number))
18466 (debug) ; @r{Start debugger.}
18467 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18468 total))
18469 @end group
18470 @end smallexample
18471
18472 The @code{debug} function is described in detail in @ref{Debugger, ,
18473 The Lisp Debugger, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18474
18475 @node edebug
18476 @section The @code{edebug} Source Level Debugger
18477 @cindex Source level debugger
18478 @findex edebug
18479
18480 Edebug is a source level debugger. Edebug normally displays the
18481 source of the code you are debugging, with an arrow at the left that
18482 shows which line you are currently executing.
18483
18484 You can walk through the execution of a function, line by line, or run
18485 quickly until reaching a @dfn{breakpoint} where execution stops.
18486
18487 Edebug is described in @ref{Edebug, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs
18488 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18489
18490 @need 1250
18491 Here is a bugged function definition for @code{triangle-recursively}.
18492 @xref{Recursive triangle function, , Recursion in place of a counter},
18493 for a review of it.
18494
18495 @smallexample
18496 @group
18497 (defun triangle-recursively-bugged (number)
18498 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
18499 Uses recursion."
18500 (if (= number 1)
18501 1
18502 (+ number
18503 (triangle-recursively-bugged
18504 (1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18505 @end group
18506 @end smallexample
18507
18508 @noindent
18509 Normally, you would install this definition by positioning your cursor
18510 after the function's closing parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}
18511 (@code{eval-last-sexp}) or else by positioning your cursor within the
18512 definition and typing @kbd{C-M-x} (@code{eval-defun}). (By default,
18513 the @code{eval-defun} command works only in Emacs Lisp mode or in Lisp
18514 Interaction mode.)
18515
18516 @need 1500
18517 However, to prepare this function definition for Edebug, you must
18518 first @dfn{instrument} the code using a different command. You can do
18519 this by positioning your cursor within or just after the definition
18520 and typing
18521
18522 @smallexample
18523 M-x edebug-defun RET
18524 @end smallexample
18525
18526 @noindent
18527 This will cause Emacs to load Edebug automatically if it is not
18528 already loaded, and properly instrument the function.
18529
18530 After instrumenting the function, place your cursor after the
18531 following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}):
18532
18533 @smallexample
18534 (triangle-recursively-bugged 3)
18535 @end smallexample
18536
18537 @noindent
18538 You will be jumped back to the source for
18539 @code{triangle-recursively-bugged} and the cursor positioned at the
18540 beginning of the @code{if} line of the function. Also, you will see
18541 an arrowhead at the left hand side of that line. The arrowhead marks
18542 the line where the function is executing. (In the following examples,
18543 we show the arrowhead with @samp{=>}; in a windowing system, you may
18544 see the arrowhead as a solid triangle in the window ``fringe''.)
18545
18546 @smallexample
18547 =>@point{}(if (= number 1)
18548 @end smallexample
18549
18550 @noindent
18551 @iftex
18552 In the example, the location of point is displayed with a star,
18553 @samp{@point{}} (in Info, it is displayed as @samp{-!-}).
18554 @end iftex
18555 @ifnottex
18556 In the example, the location of point is displayed as @samp{@point{}}
18557 (in a printed book, it is displayed with a five pointed star).
18558 @end ifnottex
18559
18560 If you now press @key{SPC}, point will move to the next expression to
18561 be executed; the line will look like this:
18562
18563 @smallexample
18564 =>(if @point{}(= number 1)
18565 @end smallexample
18566
18567 @noindent
18568 As you continue to press @key{SPC}, point will move from expression to
18569 expression. At the same time, whenever an expression returns a value,
18570 that value will be displayed in the echo area. For example, after you
18571 move point past @code{number}, you will see the following:
18572
18573 @smallexample
18574 Result: 3 (#o3, #x3, ?\C-c)
18575 @end smallexample
18576
18577 @noindent
18578 This means the value of @code{number} is 3, which is octal three,
18579 hexadecimal three, and @sc{ascii} ``control-c'' (the third letter of the
18580 alphabet, in case you need to know this information).
18581
18582 You can continue moving through the code until you reach the line with
18583 the error. Before evaluation, that line looks like this:
18584
18585 @smallexample
18586 => @point{}(1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18587 @end smallexample
18588
18589 @need 1250
18590 @noindent
18591 When you press @key{SPC} once again, you will produce an error message
18592 that says:
18593
18594 @smallexample
18595 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18596 @end smallexample
18597
18598 @noindent
18599 This is the bug.
18600
18601 Press @kbd{q} to quit Edebug.
18602
18603 To remove instrumentation from a function definition, simply
18604 re-evaluate it with a command that does not instrument it.
18605 For example, you could place your cursor after the definition's
18606 closing parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
18607
18608 Edebug does a great deal more than walk with you through a function.
18609 You can set it so it races through on its own, stopping only at an
18610 error or at specified stopping points; you can cause it to display the
18611 changing values of various expressions; you can find out how many
18612 times a function is called, and more.
18613
18614 Edebug is described in @ref{Edebug, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs
18615 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18616
18617 @need 1500
18618 @node Debugging Exercises
18619 @section Debugging Exercises
18620
18621 @itemize @bullet
18622 @item
18623 Install the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function and then cause it to
18624 enter the built-in debugger when you call it. Run the command on a
18625 region containing two words. You will need to press @kbd{d} a
18626 remarkable number of times. On your system, is a ``hook'' called after
18627 the command finishes? (For information on hooks, see @ref{Command
18628 Overview, , Command Loop Overview, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
18629 Manual}.)
18630
18631 @item
18632 Copy @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} into the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
18633 instrument the function for Edebug, and walk through its execution.
18634 The function does not need to have a bug, although you can introduce
18635 one if you wish. If the function lacks a bug, the walk-through
18636 completes without problems.
18637
18638 @item
18639 While running Edebug, type @kbd{?} to see a list of all the Edebug commands.
18640 (The @code{global-edebug-prefix} is usually @kbd{C-x X}, i.e.,
18641 @kbd{@key{CTRL}-x} followed by an upper case @kbd{X}; use this prefix
18642 for commands made outside of the Edebug debugging buffer.)
18643
18644 @item
18645 In the Edebug debugging buffer, use the @kbd{p}
18646 (@code{edebug-bounce-point}) command to see where in the region the
18647 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} is working.
18648
18649 @item
18650 Move point to some spot further down the function and then type the
18651 @kbd{h} (@code{edebug-goto-here}) command to jump to that location.
18652
18653 @item
18654 Use the @kbd{t} (@code{edebug-trace-mode}) command to cause Edebug to
18655 walk through the function on its own; use an upper case @kbd{T} for
18656 @code{edebug-Trace-fast-mode}.
18657
18658 @item
18659 Set a breakpoint, then run Edebug in Trace mode until it reaches the
18660 stopping point.
18661 @end itemize
18662
18663 @node Conclusion
18664 @chapter Conclusion
18665
18666 We have now reached the end of this Introduction. You have now
18667 learned enough about programming in Emacs Lisp to set values, to write
18668 simple @file{.emacs} files for yourself and your friends, and write
18669 simple customizations and extensions to Emacs.
18670
18671 This is a place to stop. Or, if you wish, you can now go onward, and
18672 teach yourself.
18673
18674 You have learned some of the basic nuts and bolts of programming. But
18675 only some. There are a great many more brackets and hinges that are
18676 easy to use that we have not touched.
18677
18678 A path you can follow right now lies among the sources to GNU Emacs
18679 and in
18680 @ifnotinfo
18681 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18682 @end ifnotinfo
18683 @ifinfo
18684 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
18685 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18686 @end ifinfo
18687
18688 The Emacs Lisp sources are an adventure. When you read the sources and
18689 come across a function or expression that is unfamiliar, you need to
18690 figure out or find out what it does.
18691
18692 Go to the Reference Manual. It is a thorough, complete, and fairly
18693 easy-to-read description of Emacs Lisp. It is written not only for
18694 experts, but for people who know what you know. (The @cite{Reference
18695 Manual} comes with the standard GNU Emacs distribution. Like this
18696 introduction, it comes as a Texinfo source file, so you can read it
18697 on your computer and as a typeset, printed book.)
18698
18699 Go to the other built-in help that is part of GNU Emacs: the built-in
18700 documentation for all functions and variables, and @code{find-tag},
18701 the program that takes you to sources.
18702
18703 Here is an example of how I explore the sources. Because of its name,
18704 @file{simple.el} is the file I looked at first, a long time ago. As
18705 it happens some of the functions in @file{simple.el} are complicated,
18706 or at least look complicated at first sight. The @code{open-line}
18707 function, for example, looks complicated.
18708
18709 You may want to walk through this function slowly, as we did with the
18710 @code{forward-sentence} function. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
18711 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Or you may want to skip that
18712 function and look at another, such as @code{split-line}. You don't
18713 need to read all the functions. According to
18714 @code{count-words-in-defun}, the @code{split-line} function contains
18715 102 words and symbols.
18716
18717 Even though it is short, @code{split-line} contains expressions
18718 we have not studied: @code{skip-chars-forward}, @code{indent-to},
18719 @code{current-column} and @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18720
18721 Consider the @code{skip-chars-forward} function. (It is part of the
18722 function definition for @code{back-to-indentation}, which is shown in
18723 @ref{Review, , Review}.)
18724
18725 In GNU Emacs, you can find out more about @code{skip-chars-forward} by
18726 typing @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and the name of the
18727 function. This gives you the function documentation.
18728
18729 You may be able to guess what is done by a well named function such as
18730 @code{indent-to}; or you can look it up, too. Incidentally, the
18731 @code{describe-function} function itself is in @file{help.el}; it is
18732 one of those long, but decipherable functions. You can look up
18733 @code{describe-function} using the @kbd{C-h f} command!
18734
18735 In this instance, since the code is Lisp, the @file{*Help*} buffer
18736 contains the name of the library containing the function's source.
18737 You can put point over the name of the library and press the RET key,
18738 which in this situation is bound to @code{help-follow}, and be taken
18739 directly to the source, in the same way as @kbd{M-.}
18740 (@code{find-tag}).
18741
18742 The definition for @code{describe-function} illustrates how to
18743 customize the @code{interactive} expression without using the standard
18744 character codes; and it shows how to create a temporary buffer.
18745
18746 (The @code{indent-to} function is written in C rather than Emacs Lisp;
18747 it is a ``built-in'' function. @code{help-follow} takes you to its
18748 source as does @code{find-tag}, when properly set up.)
18749
18750 You can look at a function's source using @code{find-tag}, which is
18751 bound to @kbd{M-.} Finally, you can find out what the Reference
18752 Manual has to say by visiting the manual in Info, and typing @kbd{i}
18753 (@code{Info-index}) and the name of the function, or by looking up the
18754 function in the index to a printed copy of the manual.
18755
18756 Similarly, you can find out what is meant by
18757 @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18758
18759 Other interesting source files include @file{paragraphs.el},
18760 @file{loaddefs.el}, and @file{loadup.el}. The @file{paragraphs.el}
18761 file includes short, easily understood functions as well as longer
18762 ones. The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains the many standard
18763 autoloads and many keymaps. I have never looked at it all; only at
18764 parts. @file{loadup.el} is the file that loads the standard parts of
18765 Emacs; it tells you a great deal about how Emacs is built.
18766 (@xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18767 Reference Manual}, for more about building.)
18768
18769 As I said, you have learned some nuts and bolts; however, and very
18770 importantly, we have hardly touched major aspects of programming; I
18771 have said nothing about how to sort information, except to use the
18772 predefined @code{sort} function; I have said nothing about how to store
18773 information, except to use variables and lists; I have said nothing
18774 about how to write programs that write programs. These are topics for
18775 another, and different kind of book, a different kind of learning.
18776
18777 What you have done is learn enough for much practical work with GNU
18778 Emacs. What you have done is get started. This is the end of a
18779 beginning.
18780
18781 @c ================ Appendix ================
18782
18783 @node the-the
18784 @appendix The @code{the-the} Function
18785 @findex the-the
18786 @cindex Duplicated words function
18787 @cindex Words, duplicated
18788
18789 Sometimes when you you write text, you duplicate words---as with ``you
18790 you'' near the beginning of this sentence. I find that most
18791 frequently, I duplicate ``the''; hence, I call the function for
18792 detecting duplicated words, @code{the-the}.
18793
18794 @need 1250
18795 As a first step, you could use the following regular expression to
18796 search for duplicates:
18797
18798 @smallexample
18799 \\(\\w+[ \t\n]+\\)\\1
18800 @end smallexample
18801
18802 @noindent
18803 This regexp matches one or more word-constituent characters followed
18804 by one or more spaces, tabs, or newlines. However, it does not detect
18805 duplicated words on different lines, since the ending of the first
18806 word, the end of the line, is different from the ending of the second
18807 word, a space. (For more information about regular expressions, see
18808 @ref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, as well as
18809 @ref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
18810 Manual}, and @ref{Regular Expressions, , Regular Expressions, elisp,
18811 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
18812
18813 You might try searching just for duplicated word-constituent
18814 characters but that does not work since the pattern detects doubles
18815 such as the two occurrences of ``th'' in ``with the''.
18816
18817 Another possible regexp searches for word-constituent characters
18818 followed by non-word-constituent characters, reduplicated. Here,
18819 @w{@samp{\\w+}} matches one or more word-constituent characters and
18820 @w{@samp{\\W*}} matches zero or more non-word-constituent characters.
18821
18822 @smallexample
18823 \\(\\(\\w+\\)\\W*\\)\\1
18824 @end smallexample
18825
18826 @noindent
18827 Again, not useful.
18828
18829 Here is the pattern that I use. It is not perfect, but good enough.
18830 @w{@samp{\\b}} matches the empty string, provided it is at the beginning
18831 or end of a word; @w{@samp{[^@@ \n\t]+}} matches one or more occurrences of
18832 any characters that are @emph{not} an @@-sign, space, newline, or tab.
18833
18834 @smallexample
18835 \\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b
18836 @end smallexample
18837
18838 One can write more complicated expressions, but I found that this
18839 expression is good enough, so I use it.
18840
18841 Here is the @code{the-the} function, as I include it in my
18842 @file{.emacs} file, along with a handy global key binding:
18843
18844 @smallexample
18845 @group
18846 (defun the-the ()
18847 "Search forward for for a duplicated word."
18848 (interactive)
18849 (message "Searching for for duplicated words ...")
18850 (push-mark)
18851 @end group
18852 @group
18853 ;; This regexp is not perfect
18854 ;; but is fairly good over all:
18855 (if (re-search-forward
18856 "\\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b" nil 'move)
18857 (message "Found duplicated word.")
18858 (message "End of buffer")))
18859 @end group
18860
18861 @group
18862 ;; Bind 'the-the' to C-c \
18863 (global-set-key "\C-c\\" 'the-the)
18864 @end group
18865 @end smallexample
18866
18867 @sp 1
18868 Here is test text:
18869
18870 @smallexample
18871 @group
18872 one two two three four five
18873 five six seven
18874 @end group
18875 @end smallexample
18876
18877 You can substitute the other regular expressions shown above in the
18878 function definition and try each of them on this list.
18879
18880 @node Kill Ring
18881 @appendix Handling the Kill Ring
18882 @cindex Kill ring handling
18883 @cindex Handling the kill ring
18884 @cindex Ring, making a list like a
18885
18886 The kill ring is a list that is transformed into a ring by the
18887 workings of the @code{current-kill} function. The @code{yank} and
18888 @code{yank-pop} commands use the @code{current-kill} function.
18889
18890 This appendix describes the @code{current-kill} function as well as
18891 both the @code{yank} and the @code{yank-pop} commands, but first,
18892 consider the workings of the kill ring.
18893
18894 @menu
18895 * What the Kill Ring Does::
18896 * current-kill::
18897 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
18898 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
18899 * ring file::
18900 @end menu
18901
18902 @ifnottex
18903 @node What the Kill Ring Does
18904 @unnumberedsec What the Kill Ring Does
18905 @end ifnottex
18906
18907 @need 1250
18908 The kill ring has a default maximum length of sixty items; this number
18909 is too large for an explanation. Instead, set it to four. Please
18910 evaluate the following:
18911
18912 @smallexample
18913 @group
18914 (setq old-kill-ring-max kill-ring-max)
18915 (setq kill-ring-max 4)
18916 @end group
18917 @end smallexample
18918
18919 @noindent
18920 Then, please copy each line of the following indented example into the
18921 kill ring. You may kill each line with @kbd{C-k} or mark it and copy
18922 it with @kbd{M-w}.
18923
18924 @noindent
18925 (In a read-only buffer, such as the @file{*info*} buffer, the kill
18926 command, @kbd{C-k} (@code{kill-line}), will not remove the text,
18927 merely copy it to the kill ring. However, your machine may beep at
18928 you. Alternatively, for silence, you may copy the region of each line
18929 with the @kbd{M-w} (@code{kill-ring-save}) command. You must mark
18930 each line for this command to succeed, but it does not matter at which
18931 end you put point or mark.)
18932
18933 @need 1250
18934 @noindent
18935 Please invoke the calls in order, so that five elements attempt to
18936 fill the kill ring:
18937
18938 @smallexample
18939 @group
18940 first some text
18941 second piece of text
18942 third line
18943 fourth line of text
18944 fifth bit of text
18945 @end group
18946 @end smallexample
18947
18948 @need 1250
18949 @noindent
18950 Then find the value of @code{kill-ring} by evaluating
18951
18952 @smallexample
18953 kill-ring
18954 @end smallexample
18955
18956 @need 800
18957 @noindent
18958 It is:
18959
18960 @smallexample
18961 @group
18962 ("fifth bit of text" "fourth line of text"
18963 "third line" "second piece of text")
18964 @end group
18965 @end smallexample
18966
18967 @noindent
18968 The first element, @samp{first some text}, was dropped.
18969
18970 @need 1250
18971 To return to the old value for the length of the kill ring, evaluate:
18972
18973 @smallexample
18974 (setq kill-ring-max old-kill-ring-max)
18975 @end smallexample
18976
18977 @node current-kill
18978 @appendixsec The @code{current-kill} Function
18979 @findex current-kill
18980
18981 The @code{current-kill} function changes the element in the kill ring
18982 to which @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points. (Also, the
18983 @code{kill-new} function sets @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to point
18984 to the latest element of the kill ring. The @code{kill-new}
18985 function is used directly or indirectly by @code{kill-append},
18986 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line},
18987 and @code{kill-region}.)
18988
18989 @menu
18990 * Code for current-kill::
18991 * Understanding current-kill::
18992 @end menu
18993
18994 @ifnottex
18995 @node Code for current-kill
18996 @unnumberedsubsec The code for @code{current-kill}
18997 @end ifnottex
18998
18999
19000 @need 1500
19001 The @code{current-kill} function is used by @code{yank} and by
19002 @code{yank-pop}. Here is the code for @code{current-kill}:
19003
19004 @smallexample
19005 @group
19006 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19007 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
19008 If N is zero, ‘interprogram-paste-function’ is set, and calling it
19009 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
19010 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
19011 @end group
19012 @group
19013 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don’t actually move the
19014 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
19015 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
19016 interprogram-paste-function
19017 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
19018 @end group
19019 @group
19020 (if interprogram-paste
19021 (progn
19022 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
19023 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
19024 ;; selection, with identical text.
19025 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
19026 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
19027 interprogram-paste)
19028 @end group
19029 @group
19030 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19031 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19032 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19033 (length kill-ring))
19034 kill-ring)))
19035 (or do-not-move
19036 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19037 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
19038 @end group
19039 @end smallexample
19040
19041 Remember also that the @code{kill-new} function sets
19042 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to the latest element of the kill
19043 ring, which means that all the functions that call it set the value
19044 indirectly: @code{kill-append}, @code{copy-region-as-kill},
19045 @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line}, and @code{kill-region}.
19046
19047 @need 1500
19048 Here is the line in @code{kill-new}, which is explained in
19049 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.
19050
19051 @smallexample
19052 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
19053 @end smallexample
19054
19055 @ifnottex
19056 @node Understanding current-kill
19057 @unnumberedsubsec @code{current-kill} in Outline
19058 @end ifnottex
19059
19060 The @code{current-kill} function looks complex, but as usual, it can
19061 be understood by taking it apart piece by piece. First look at it in
19062 skeletal form:
19063
19064 @smallexample
19065 @group
19066 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19067 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill."
19068 (let @var{varlist}
19069 @var{body}@dots{})
19070 @end group
19071 @end smallexample
19072
19073 This function takes two arguments, one of which is optional. It has a
19074 documentation string. It is @emph{not} interactive.
19075
19076 @menu
19077 * Body of current-kill::
19078 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
19079 * Determining the Element::
19080 @end menu
19081
19082 @ifnottex
19083 @node Body of current-kill
19084 @unnumberedsubsubsec The Body of @code{current-kill}
19085 @end ifnottex
19086
19087 The body of the function definition is a @code{let} expression, which
19088 itself has a body as well as a @var{varlist}.
19089
19090 The @code{let} expression declares a variable that will be only usable
19091 within the bounds of this function. This variable is called
19092 @code{interprogram-paste} and is for copying to another program. It
19093 is not for copying within this instance of GNU Emacs. Most window
19094 systems provide a facility for interprogram pasting. Sadly, that
19095 facility usually provides only for the last element. Most windowing
19096 systems have not adopted a ring of many possibilities, even though
19097 Emacs has provided it for decades.
19098
19099 The @code{if} expression has two parts, one if there exists
19100 @code{interprogram-paste} and one if not.
19101
19102 @need 2000
19103 Let us consider the ``if not'' or else-part of the @code{current-kill}
19104 function. (The then-part uses the @code{kill-new} function, which
19105 we have already described. @xref{kill-new function, , The
19106 @code{kill-new} function}.)
19107
19108 @smallexample
19109 @group
19110 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19111 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19112 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19113 (length kill-ring))
19114 kill-ring)))
19115 (or do-not-move
19116 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19117 (car ARGth-kill-element))
19118 @end group
19119 @end smallexample
19120
19121 @noindent
19122 The code first checks whether the kill ring has content; otherwise it
19123 signals an error.
19124
19125 @need 1000
19126 Note that the @code{or} expression is very similar to testing length
19127 with an @code{if}:
19128
19129 @findex zerop
19130 @findex error
19131 @smallexample
19132 @group
19133 (if (zerop (length kill-ring)) ; @r{if-part}
19134 (error "Kill ring is empty")) ; @r{then-part}
19135 ;; No else-part
19136 @end group
19137 @end smallexample
19138
19139 @noindent
19140 If there is not anything in the kill ring, its length must be zero and
19141 an error message sent to the user: @samp{Kill ring is empty}. The
19142 @code{current-kill} function uses an @code{or} expression which is
19143 simpler. But an @code{if} expression reminds us what goes on.
19144
19145 This @code{if} expression uses the function @code{zerop} which returns
19146 true if the value it is testing is zero. When @code{zerop} tests
19147 true, the then-part of the @code{if} is evaluated. The then-part is a
19148 list starting with the function @code{error}, which is a function that
19149 is similar to the @code{message} function
19150 (@pxref{message, , The @code{message} Function}) in that
19151 it prints a one-line message in the echo area. However, in addition
19152 to printing a message, @code{error} also stops evaluation of the
19153 function within which it is embedded. This means that the rest of the
19154 function will not be evaluated if the length of the kill ring is zero.
19155
19156 Then the @code{current-kill} function selects the element to return.
19157 The selection depends on the number of places that @code{current-kill}
19158 rotates and on where @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19159
19160 Next, either the optional @code{do-not-move} argument is true or the
19161 current value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is set to point to the
19162 list. Finally, another expression returns the first element of the
19163 list even if the @code{do-not-move} argument is true.
19164
19165 @ifnottex
19166 @node Digression concerning error
19167 @unnumberedsubsubsec Digression about the word ``error''
19168 @end ifnottex
19169
19170 In my opinion, it is slightly misleading, at least to humans, to use
19171 the term ``error'' as the name of the @code{error} function. A better
19172 term would be ``cancel''. Strictly speaking, of course, you cannot
19173 point to, much less rotate a pointer to a list that has no length, so
19174 from the point of view of the computer, the word ``error'' is correct.
19175 But a human expects to attempt this sort of thing, if only to find out
19176 whether the kill ring is full or empty. This is an act of
19177 exploration.
19178
19179 From the human point of view, the act of exploration and discovery is
19180 not necessarily an error, and therefore should not be labeled as one,
19181 even in the bowels of a computer. As it is, the code in Emacs implies
19182 that a human who is acting virtuously, by exploring his or her
19183 environment, is making an error. This is bad. Even though the computer
19184 takes the same steps as it does when there is an ``error'', a term such as
19185 ``cancel'' would have a clearer connotation.
19186
19187 @ifnottex
19188 @node Determining the Element
19189 @unnumberedsubsubsec Determining the Element
19190 @end ifnottex
19191
19192 Among other actions, the else-part of the @code{if} expression sets
19193 the value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to
19194 @code{ARGth-kill-element} when the kill ring has something in it and
19195 the value of @code{do-not-move} is @code{nil}.
19196
19197 @need 800
19198 The code looks like this:
19199
19200 @smallexample
19201 @group
19202 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19203 (length kill-ring))
19204 kill-ring)))
19205 @end group
19206 @end smallexample
19207
19208 This needs some examination. Unless it is not supposed to move the
19209 pointer, the @code{current-kill} function changes where
19210 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19211 That is what the
19212 @w{@code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))}}
19213 expression does. Also, clearly, @code{ARGth-kill-element} is being
19214 set to be equal to some @sc{cdr} of the kill ring, using the
19215 @code{nthcdr} function that is described in an earlier section.
19216 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.) How does it do this?
19217
19218 As we have seen before (@pxref{nthcdr}), the @code{nthcdr} function
19219 works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a list---it takes the
19220 @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} @dots{}
19221
19222 @need 800
19223 The two following expressions produce the same result:
19224
19225 @smallexample
19226 @group
19227 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (cdr kill-ring))
19228
19229 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (nthcdr 1 kill-ring))
19230 @end group
19231 @end smallexample
19232
19233 However, the @code{nthcdr} expression is more complicated. It uses
19234 the @code{mod} function to determine which @sc{cdr} to select.
19235
19236 (You will remember to look at inner functions first; indeed, we will
19237 have to go inside the @code{mod}.)
19238
19239 The @code{mod} function returns the value of its first argument modulo
19240 the second; that is to say, it returns the remainder after dividing
19241 the first argument by the second. The value returned has the same
19242 sign as the second argument.
19243
19244 @need 800
19245 Thus,
19246
19247 @smallexample
19248 @group
19249 (mod 12 4)
19250 @result{} 0 ;; @r{because there is no remainder}
19251 (mod 13 4)
19252 @result{} 1
19253 @end group
19254 @end smallexample
19255
19256 @need 1250
19257 In this case, the first argument is often smaller than the second.
19258 That is fine.
19259
19260 @smallexample
19261 @group
19262 (mod 0 4)
19263 @result{} 0
19264 (mod 1 4)
19265 @result{} 1
19266 @end group
19267 @end smallexample
19268
19269 We can guess what the @code{-} function does. It is like @code{+} but
19270 subtracts instead of adds; the @code{-} function subtracts its second
19271 argument from its first. Also, we already know what the @code{length}
19272 function does (@pxref{length}). It returns the length of a list.
19273
19274 And @code{n} is the name of the required argument to the
19275 @code{current-kill} function.
19276
19277 @need 1250
19278 So when the first argument to @code{nthcdr} is zero, the @code{nthcdr}
19279 expression returns the whole list, as you can see by evaluating the
19280 following:
19281
19282 @smallexample
19283 @group
19284 ;; kill-ring-yank-pointer @r{and} kill-ring @r{have a length of four}
19285 ;; @r{and} (mod (- 0 4) 4) @result{} 0
19286 (nthcdr (mod (- 0 4) 4)
19287 '("fourth line of text"
19288 "third line"
19289 "second piece of text"
19290 "first some text"))
19291 @end group
19292 @end smallexample
19293
19294 @need 1250
19295 When the first argument to the @code{current-kill} function is one,
19296 the @code{nthcdr} expression returns the list without its first
19297 element.
19298
19299 @smallexample
19300 @group
19301 (nthcdr (mod (- 1 4) 4)
19302 '("fourth line of text"
19303 "third line"
19304 "second piece of text"
19305 "first some text"))
19306 @end group
19307 @end smallexample
19308
19309 @cindex @samp{global variable} defined
19310 @cindex @samp{variable, global}, defined
19311 Incidentally, both @code{kill-ring} and @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
19312 are @dfn{global variables}. That means that any expression in Emacs
19313 Lisp can access them. They are not like the local variables set by
19314 @code{let} or like the symbols in an argument list.
19315 Local variables can only be accessed
19316 within the @code{let} that defines them or the function that specifies
19317 them in an argument list (and within expressions called by them).
19318
19319 @ignore
19320 @c texi2dvi fails when the name of the section is within ifnottex ...
19321 (@xref{Prevent confusion, , @code{let} Prevents Confusion}, and
19322 @ref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
19323 @end ignore
19324
19325 @node yank
19326 @appendixsec @code{yank}
19327 @findex yank
19328
19329 After learning about @code{current-kill}, the code for the
19330 @code{yank} function is almost easy.
19331
19332 The @code{yank} function does not use the
19333 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable directly. It calls
19334 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{current-kill} which sets the
19335 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
19336
19337 @need 1250
19338 The code looks like this:
19339
19340 @c in GNU Emacs 22
19341 @smallexample
19342 @group
19343 (defun yank (&optional arg)
19344 "Reinsert (\"paste\") the last stretch of killed text.
19345 More precisely, reinsert the stretch of killed text most recently
19346 killed OR yanked. Put point at end, and set mark at beginning.
19347 With just \\[universal-argument] as argument, same but put point at
19348 beginning (and mark at end). With argument N, reinsert the Nth most
19349 recently killed stretch of killed text.
19350
19351 When this command inserts killed text into the buffer, it honors
19352 ‘yank-excluded-properties’ and ‘yank-handler’ as described in the
19353 doc string for ‘insert-for-yank-1’, which see.
19354
19355 See also the command \\[yank-pop]."
19356 @end group
19357 @group
19358 (interactive "*P")
19359 (setq yank-window-start (window-start))
19360 ;; If we don't get all the way thru, make last-command indicate that
19361 ;; for the following command.
19362 (setq this-command t)
19363 (push-mark (point))
19364 @end group
19365 @group
19366 (insert-for-yank (current-kill (cond
19367 ((listp arg) 0)
19368 ((eq arg '-) -2)
19369 (t (1- arg)))))
19370 (if (consp arg)
19371 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19372 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19373 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19374 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19375 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19376 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer)))))
19377 @end group
19378 @group
19379 ;; If we do get all the way thru, make this-command indicate that.
19380 (if (eq this-command t)
19381 (setq this-command 'yank))
19382 nil)
19383 @end group
19384 @end smallexample
19385
19386 The key expression is @code{insert-for-yank}, which inserts the string
19387 returned by @code{current-kill}, but removes some text properties from
19388 it.
19389
19390 However, before getting to that expression, the function sets the value
19391 of @code{yank-window-start} to the position returned by the
19392 @code{(window-start)} expression, the position at which the display
19393 currently starts. The @code{yank} function also sets
19394 @code{this-command} and pushes the mark.
19395
19396 After it yanks the appropriate element, if the optional argument is a
19397 @sc{cons} rather than a number or nothing, it puts point at beginning
19398 of the yanked text and mark at its end.
19399
19400 (The @code{prog1} function is like @code{progn} but returns the value
19401 of its first argument rather than the value of its last argument. Its
19402 first argument is forced to return the buffer's mark as an integer.
19403 You can see the documentation for these functions by placing point
19404 over them in this buffer and then typing @kbd{C-h f}
19405 (@code{describe-function}) followed by a @kbd{RET}; the default is the
19406 function.)
19407
19408 The last part of the function tells what to do when it succeeds.
19409
19410 @node yank-pop
19411 @appendixsec @code{yank-pop}
19412 @findex yank-pop
19413
19414 After understanding @code{yank} and @code{current-kill}, you know how
19415 to approach the @code{yank-pop} function. Leaving out the
19416 documentation to save space, it looks like this:
19417
19418 @c GNU Emacs 22
19419 @smallexample
19420 @group
19421 (defun yank-pop (&optional arg)
19422 "@dots{}"
19423 (interactive "*p")
19424 (if (not (eq last-command 'yank))
19425 (error "Previous command was not a yank"))
19426 @end group
19427 @group
19428 (setq this-command 'yank)
19429 (unless arg (setq arg 1))
19430 (let ((inhibit-read-only t)
19431 (before (< (point) (mark t))))
19432 @end group
19433 @group
19434 (if before
19435 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (point) (mark t))
19436 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (mark t) (point)))
19437 (setq yank-undo-function nil)
19438 @end group
19439 @group
19440 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer))
19441 (insert-for-yank (current-kill arg))
19442 ;; Set the window start back where it was in the yank command,
19443 ;; if possible.
19444 (set-window-start (selected-window) yank-window-start t)
19445 @end group
19446 @group
19447 (if before
19448 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19449 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19450 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19451 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19452 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19453 (set-marker (mark-marker)
19454 (point)
19455 (current-buffer))))))
19456 nil)
19457 @end group
19458 @end smallexample
19459
19460 The function is interactive with a small @samp{p} so the prefix
19461 argument is processed and passed to the function. The command can
19462 only be used after a previous yank; otherwise an error message is
19463 sent. This check uses the variable @code{last-command} which is set
19464 by @code{yank} and is discussed elsewhere.
19465 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
19466
19467 The @code{let} clause sets the variable @code{before} to true or false
19468 depending whether point is before or after mark and then the region
19469 between point and mark is deleted. This is the region that was just
19470 inserted by the previous yank and it is this text that will be
19471 replaced.
19472
19473 @code{funcall} calls its first argument as a function, passing
19474 remaining arguments to it. The first argument is whatever the
19475 @code{or} expression returns. The two remaining arguments are the
19476 positions of point and mark set by the preceding @code{yank} command.
19477
19478 There is more, but that is the hardest part.
19479
19480 @node ring file
19481 @appendixsec The @file{ring.el} File
19482 @cindex @file{ring.el} file
19483
19484 Interestingly, GNU Emacs posses a file called @file{ring.el} that
19485 provides many of the features we just discussed. But functions such
19486 as @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} do not use this library, possibly
19487 because they were written earlier.
19488
19489 @node Full Graph
19490 @appendix A Graph with Labeled Axes
19491
19492 Printed axes help you understand a graph. They convey scale. In an
19493 earlier chapter (@pxref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}), we
19494 wrote the code to print the body of a graph. Here we write the code
19495 for printing and labeling vertical and horizontal axes, along with the
19496 body itself.
19497
19498 @menu
19499 * Labeled Example::
19500 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
19501 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
19502 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
19503 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
19504 @end menu
19505
19506 @ifnottex
19507 @node Labeled Example
19508 @unnumberedsec Labeled Example Graph
19509 @end ifnottex
19510
19511 Since insertions fill a buffer to the right and below point, the new
19512 graph printing function should first print the Y or vertical axis,
19513 then the body of the graph, and finally the X or horizontal axis.
19514 This sequence lays out for us the contents of the function:
19515
19516 @enumerate
19517 @item
19518 Set up code.
19519
19520 @item
19521 Print Y axis.
19522
19523 @item
19524 Print body of graph.
19525
19526 @item
19527 Print X axis.
19528 @end enumerate
19529
19530 @need 800
19531 Here is an example of how a finished graph should look:
19532
19533 @smallexample
19534 @group
19535 10 -
19536 *
19537 * *
19538 * **
19539 * ***
19540 5 - * *******
19541 * *** *******
19542 *************
19543 ***************
19544 1 - ****************
19545 | | | |
19546 1 5 10 15
19547 @end group
19548 @end smallexample
19549
19550 @noindent
19551 In this graph, both the vertical and the horizontal axes are labeled
19552 with numbers. However, in some graphs, the horizontal axis is time
19553 and would be better labeled with months, like this:
19554
19555 @smallexample
19556 @group
19557 5 - *
19558 * ** *
19559 *******
19560 ********** **
19561 1 - **************
19562 | ^ |
19563 Jan June Jan
19564 @end group
19565 @end smallexample
19566
19567 Indeed, with a little thought, we can easily come up with a variety of
19568 vertical and horizontal labeling schemes. Our task could become
19569 complicated. But complications breed confusion. Rather than permit
19570 this, it is better choose a simple labeling scheme for our first
19571 effort, and to modify or replace it later.
19572
19573 @need 1200
19574 These considerations suggest the following outline for the
19575 @code{print-graph} function:
19576
19577 @smallexample
19578 @group
19579 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
19580 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
19581 (let ((height @dots{}
19582 @dots{}))
19583 @end group
19584 @group
19585 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
19586 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
19587 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
19588 @end group
19589 @end smallexample
19590
19591 We can work on each part of the @code{print-graph} function definition
19592 in turn.
19593
19594 @node print-graph Varlist
19595 @appendixsec The @code{print-graph} Varlist
19596 @cindex @code{print-graph} varlist
19597
19598 In writing the @code{print-graph} function, the first task is to write
19599 the varlist in the @code{let} expression. (We will leave aside for the
19600 moment any thoughts about making the function interactive or about the
19601 contents of its documentation string.)
19602
19603 The varlist should set several values. Clearly, the top of the label
19604 for the vertical axis must be at least the height of the graph, which
19605 means that we must obtain this information here. Note that the
19606 @code{print-graph-body} function also requires this information. There
19607 is no reason to calculate the height of the graph in two different
19608 places, so we should change @code{print-graph-body} from the way we
19609 defined it earlier to take advantage of the calculation.
19610
19611 Similarly, both the function for printing the X axis labels and the
19612 @code{print-graph-body} function need to learn the value of the width of
19613 each symbol. We can perform the calculation here and change the
19614 definition for @code{print-graph-body} from the way we defined it in the
19615 previous chapter.
19616
19617 The length of the label for the horizontal axis must be at least as long
19618 as the graph. However, this information is used only in the function
19619 that prints the horizontal axis, so it does not need to be calculated here.
19620
19621 These thoughts lead us directly to the following form for the varlist
19622 in the @code{let} for @code{print-graph}:
19623
19624 @smallexample
19625 @group
19626 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list)) ; @r{First version.}
19627 (symbol-width (length graph-blank)))
19628 @end group
19629 @end smallexample
19630
19631 @noindent
19632 As we shall see, this expression is not quite right.
19633
19634 @need 2000
19635 @node print-Y-axis
19636 @appendixsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
19637 @cindex Axis, print vertical
19638 @cindex Y axis printing
19639 @cindex Vertical axis printing
19640 @cindex Print vertical axis
19641
19642 The job of the @code{print-Y-axis} function is to print a label for
19643 the vertical axis that looks like this:
19644
19645 @smallexample
19646 @group
19647 10 -
19648
19649
19650
19651
19652 5 -
19653
19654
19655
19656 1 -
19657 @end group
19658 @end smallexample
19659
19660 @noindent
19661 The function should be passed the height of the graph, and then should
19662 construct and insert the appropriate numbers and marks.
19663
19664 @menu
19665 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
19666 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
19667 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
19668 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
19669 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
19670 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
19671 @end menu
19672
19673 @ifnottex
19674 @node print-Y-axis in Detail
19675 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function in Detail
19676 @end ifnottex
19677
19678 It is easy enough to see in the figure what the Y axis label should
19679 look like; but to say in words, and then to write a function
19680 definition to do the job is another matter. It is not quite true to
19681 say that we want a number and a tic every five lines: there are only
19682 three lines between the @samp{1} and the @samp{5} (lines 2, 3, and 4),
19683 but four lines between the @samp{5} and the @samp{10} (lines 6, 7, 8,
19684 and 9). It is better to say that we want a number and a tic mark on
19685 the base line (number 1) and then that we want a number and a tic on
19686 the fifth line from the bottom and on every line that is a multiple of
19687 five.
19688
19689 @ifnottex
19690 @node Height of label
19691 @unnumberedsubsec What height should the label be?
19692 @end ifnottex
19693
19694 The next issue is what height the label should be? Suppose the maximum
19695 height of tallest column of the graph is seven. Should the highest
19696 label on the Y axis be @samp{5 -}, and should the graph stick up above
19697 the label? Or should the highest label be @samp{7 -}, and mark the peak
19698 of the graph? Or should the highest label be @code{10 -}, which is a
19699 multiple of five, and be higher than the topmost value of the graph?
19700
19701 The latter form is preferred. Most graphs are drawn within rectangles
19702 whose sides are an integral number of steps long---5, 10, 15, and so
19703 on for a step distance of five. But as soon as we decide to use a
19704 step height for the vertical axis, we discover that the simple
19705 expression in the varlist for computing the height is wrong. The
19706 expression is @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)}. This returns the
19707 precise height, not the maximum height plus whatever is necessary to
19708 round up to the nearest multiple of five. A more complex expression
19709 is required.
19710
19711 As usual in cases like this, a complex problem becomes simpler if it is
19712 divided into several smaller problems.
19713
19714 First, consider the case when the highest value of the graph is an
19715 integral multiple of five---when it is 5, 10, 15, or some higher
19716 multiple of five. We can use this value as the Y axis height.
19717
19718 A fairly simply way to determine whether a number is a multiple of
19719 five is to divide it by five and see if the division results in a
19720 remainder. If there is no remainder, the number is a multiple of
19721 five. Thus, seven divided by five has a remainder of two, and seven
19722 is not an integral multiple of five. Put in slightly different
19723 language, more reminiscent of the classroom, five goes into seven
19724 once, with a remainder of two. However, five goes into ten twice,
19725 with no remainder: ten is an integral multiple of five.
19726
19727 @node Compute a Remainder
19728 @appendixsubsec Side Trip: Compute a Remainder
19729
19730 @findex % @r{(remainder function)}
19731 @cindex Remainder function, @code{%}
19732 In Lisp, the function for computing a remainder is @code{%}. The
19733 function returns the remainder of its first argument divided by its
19734 second argument. As it happens, @code{%} is a function in Emacs Lisp
19735 that you cannot discover using @code{apropos}: you find nothing if you
19736 type @kbd{M-x apropos @key{RET} remainder @key{RET}}. The only way to
19737 learn of the existence of @code{%} is to read about it in a book such
19738 as this or in the Emacs Lisp sources.
19739
19740 You can try the @code{%} function by evaluating the following two
19741 expressions:
19742
19743 @smallexample
19744 @group
19745 (% 7 5)
19746
19747 (% 10 5)
19748 @end group
19749 @end smallexample
19750
19751 @noindent
19752 The first expression returns 2 and the second expression returns 0.
19753
19754 To test whether the returned value is zero or some other number, we
19755 can use the @code{zerop} function. This function returns @code{t} if
19756 its argument, which must be a number, is zero.
19757
19758 @smallexample
19759 @group
19760 (zerop (% 7 5))
19761 @result{} nil
19762
19763 (zerop (% 10 5))
19764 @result{} t
19765 @end group
19766 @end smallexample
19767
19768 Thus, the following expression will return @code{t} if the height
19769 of the graph is evenly divisible by five:
19770
19771 @smallexample
19772 (zerop (% height 5))
19773 @end smallexample
19774
19775 @noindent
19776 (The value of @code{height}, of course, can be found from @code{(apply
19777 'max numbers-list)}.)
19778
19779 On the other hand, if the value of @code{height} is not a multiple of
19780 five, we want to reset the value to the next higher multiple of five.
19781 This is straightforward arithmetic using functions with which we are
19782 already familiar. First, we divide the value of @code{height} by five
19783 to determine how many times five goes into the number. Thus, five
19784 goes into twelve twice. If we add one to this quotient and multiply by
19785 five, we will obtain the value of the next multiple of five that is
19786 larger than the height. Five goes into twelve twice. Add one to two,
19787 and multiply by five; the result is fifteen, which is the next multiple
19788 of five that is higher than twelve. The Lisp expression for this is:
19789
19790 @smallexample
19791 (* (1+ (/ height 5)) 5)
19792 @end smallexample
19793
19794 @noindent
19795 For example, if you evaluate the following, the result is 15:
19796
19797 @smallexample
19798 (* (1+ (/ 12 5)) 5)
19799 @end smallexample
19800
19801 All through this discussion, we have been using ``five'' as the value
19802 for spacing labels on the Y axis; but we may want to use some other
19803 value. For generality, we should replace ``five'' with a variable to
19804 which we can assign a value. The best name I can think of for this
19805 variable is @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
19806
19807 @need 1250
19808 Using this term, and an @code{if} expression, we produce the
19809 following:
19810
19811 @smallexample
19812 @group
19813 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19814 height
19815 ;; @r{else}
19816 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19817 Y-axis-label-spacing))
19818 @end group
19819 @end smallexample
19820
19821 @noindent
19822 This expression returns the value of @code{height} itself if the height
19823 is an even multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing} or
19824 else it computes and returns a value of @code{height} that is equal to
19825 the next higher multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
19826
19827 We can now include this expression in the @code{let} expression of the
19828 @code{print-graph} function (after first setting the value of
19829 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}):
19830 @vindex Y-axis-label-spacing
19831
19832 @smallexample
19833 @group
19834 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
19835 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
19836 @end group
19837
19838 @group
19839 @dots{}
19840 (let* ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
19841 (height-of-top-line
19842 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19843 height
19844 @end group
19845 @group
19846 ;; @r{else}
19847 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19848 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
19849 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))))
19850 @dots{}
19851 @end group
19852 @end smallexample
19853
19854 @noindent
19855 (Note use of the @code{let*} function: the initial value of height is
19856 computed once by the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression and
19857 then the resulting value of @code{height} is used to compute its
19858 final value. @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}, for
19859 more about @code{let*}.)
19860
19861 @node Y Axis Element
19862 @appendixsubsec Construct a Y Axis Element
19863
19864 When we print the vertical axis, we want to insert strings such as
19865 @w{@samp{5 -}} and @w{@samp{10 - }} every five lines.
19866 Moreover, we want the numbers and dashes to line up, so shorter
19867 numbers must be padded with leading spaces. If some of the strings
19868 use two digit numbers, the strings with single digit numbers must
19869 include a leading blank space before the number.
19870
19871 @findex number-to-string
19872 To figure out the length of the number, the @code{length} function is
19873 used. But the @code{length} function works only with a string, not with
19874 a number. So the number has to be converted from being a number to
19875 being a string. This is done with the @code{number-to-string} function.
19876 For example,
19877
19878 @smallexample
19879 @group
19880 (length (number-to-string 35))
19881 @result{} 2
19882
19883 (length (number-to-string 100))
19884 @result{} 3
19885 @end group
19886 @end smallexample
19887
19888 @noindent
19889 (@code{number-to-string} is also called @code{int-to-string}; you will
19890 see this alternative name in various sources.)
19891
19892 In addition, in each label, each number is followed by a string such
19893 as @w{@samp{ - }}, which we will call the @code{Y-axis-tic} marker.
19894 This variable is defined with @code{defvar}:
19895
19896 @vindex Y-axis-tic
19897 @smallexample
19898 @group
19899 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
19900 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
19901 @end group
19902 @end smallexample
19903
19904 The length of the Y label is the sum of the length of the Y axis tic
19905 mark and the length of the number of the top of the graph.
19906
19907 @smallexample
19908 (length (concat (number-to-string height) Y-axis-tic)))
19909 @end smallexample
19910
19911 This value will be calculated by the @code{print-graph} function in
19912 its varlist as @code{full-Y-label-width} and passed on. (Note that we
19913 did not think to include this in the varlist when we first proposed it.)
19914
19915 To make a complete vertical axis label, a tic mark is concatenated
19916 with a number; and the two together may be preceded by one or more
19917 spaces depending on how long the number is. The label consists of
19918 three parts: the (optional) leading spaces, the number, and the tic
19919 mark. The function is passed the value of the number for the specific
19920 row, and the value of the width of the top line, which is calculated
19921 (just once) by @code{print-graph}.
19922
19923 @smallexample
19924 @group
19925 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
19926 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
19927 A numbered element looks like this ‘ 5 - ’,
19928 and is padded as needed so all line up with
19929 the element for the largest number."
19930 @end group
19931 @group
19932 (let* ((leading-spaces
19933 (- full-Y-label-width
19934 (length
19935 (concat (number-to-string number)
19936 Y-axis-tic)))))
19937 @end group
19938 @group
19939 (concat
19940 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
19941 (number-to-string number)
19942 Y-axis-tic)))
19943 @end group
19944 @end smallexample
19945
19946 The @code{Y-axis-element} function concatenates together the leading
19947 spaces, if any; the number, as a string; and the tic mark.
19948
19949 To figure out how many leading spaces the label will need, the
19950 function subtracts the actual length of the label---the length of the
19951 number plus the length of the tic mark---from the desired label width.
19952
19953 @findex make-string
19954 Blank spaces are inserted using the @code{make-string} function. This
19955 function takes two arguments: the first tells it how long the string
19956 will be and the second is a symbol for the character to insert, in a
19957 special format. The format is a question mark followed by a blank
19958 space, like this, @samp{? }. @xref{Character Type, , Character Type,
19959 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a description of the
19960 syntax for characters. (Of course, you might want to replace the
19961 blank space by some other character @dots{} You know what to do.)
19962
19963 The @code{number-to-string} function is used in the concatenation
19964 expression, to convert the number to a string that is concatenated
19965 with the leading spaces and the tic mark.
19966
19967 @node Y-axis-column
19968 @appendixsubsec Create a Y Axis Column
19969
19970 The preceding functions provide all the tools needed to construct a
19971 function that generates a list of numbered and blank strings to insert
19972 as the label for the vertical axis:
19973
19974 @findex Y-axis-column
19975 @smallexample
19976 @group
19977 (defun Y-axis-column (height width-of-label)
19978 "Construct list of Y axis labels and blank strings.
19979 For HEIGHT of line above base and WIDTH-OF-LABEL."
19980 (let (Y-axis)
19981 @group
19982 @end group
19983 (while (> height 1)
19984 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19985 ;; @r{Insert label.}
19986 (setq Y-axis
19987 (cons
19988 (Y-axis-element height width-of-label)
19989 Y-axis))
19990 @group
19991 @end group
19992 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
19993 (setq Y-axis
19994 (cons
19995 (make-string width-of-label ? )
19996 Y-axis)))
19997 (setq height (1- height)))
19998 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
19999 (setq Y-axis
20000 (cons (Y-axis-element 1 width-of-label) Y-axis))
20001 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20002 @end group
20003 @end smallexample
20004
20005 In this function, we start with the value of @code{height} and
20006 repetitively subtract one from its value. After each subtraction, we
20007 test to see whether the value is an integral multiple of the
20008 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}. If it is, we construct a numbered label
20009 using the @code{Y-axis-element} function; if not, we construct a
20010 blank label using the @code{make-string} function. The base line
20011 consists of the number one followed by a tic mark.
20012
20013 @need 2000
20014 @node print-Y-axis Penultimate
20015 @appendixsubsec The Not Quite Final Version of @code{print-Y-axis}
20016
20017 The list constructed by the @code{Y-axis-column} function is passed to
20018 the @code{print-Y-axis} function, which inserts the list as a column.
20019
20020 @findex print-Y-axis
20021 @smallexample
20022 @group
20023 (defun print-Y-axis (height full-Y-label-width)
20024 "Insert Y axis using HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
20025 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
20026 Full width is the width of the highest label element."
20027 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
20028 ;; are passed by ‘print-graph’.
20029 @end group
20030 @group
20031 (let ((start (point)))
20032 (insert-rectangle
20033 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width))
20034 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
20035 (goto-char start)
20036 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
20037 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
20038 @end group
20039 @end smallexample
20040
20041 The @code{print-Y-axis} uses the @code{insert-rectangle} function to
20042 insert the Y axis labels created by the @code{Y-axis-column} function.
20043 In addition, it places point at the correct position for printing the body of
20044 the graph.
20045
20046 You can test @code{print-Y-axis}:
20047
20048 @enumerate
20049 @item
20050 Install
20051
20052 @smallexample
20053 @group
20054 Y-axis-label-spacing
20055 Y-axis-tic
20056 Y-axis-element
20057 Y-axis-column
20058 print-Y-axis
20059 @end group
20060 @end smallexample
20061
20062 @item
20063 Copy the following expression:
20064
20065 @smallexample
20066 (print-Y-axis 12 5)
20067 @end smallexample
20068
20069 @item
20070 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20071 want the axis labels to start.
20072
20073 @item
20074 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20075
20076 @item
20077 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
20078 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20079
20080 @item
20081 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20082 @end enumerate
20083
20084 Emacs will print labels vertically, the top one being @w{@samp{10 -@w{
20085 }}}. (The @code{print-graph} function will pass the value of
20086 @code{height-of-top-line}, which in this case will end up as 15,
20087 thereby getting rid of what might appear as a bug.)
20088
20089 @need 2000
20090 @node print-X-axis
20091 @appendixsec The @code{print-X-axis} Function
20092 @cindex Axis, print horizontal
20093 @cindex X axis printing
20094 @cindex Print horizontal axis
20095 @cindex Horizontal axis printing
20096
20097 X axis labels are much like Y axis labels, except that the ticks are on a
20098 line above the numbers. Labels should look like this:
20099
20100 @smallexample
20101 @group
20102 | | | |
20103 1 5 10 15
20104 @end group
20105 @end smallexample
20106
20107 The first tic is under the first column of the graph and is preceded by
20108 several blank spaces. These spaces provide room in rows above for the Y
20109 axis labels. The second, third, fourth, and subsequent ticks are all
20110 spaced equally, according to the value of @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20111
20112 The second row of the X axis consists of numbers, preceded by several
20113 blank spaces and also separated according to the value of the variable
20114 @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20115
20116 The value of the variable @code{X-axis-label-spacing} should itself be
20117 measured in units of @code{symbol-width}, since you may want to change
20118 the width of the symbols that you are using to print the body of the
20119 graph without changing the ways the graph is labeled.
20120
20121 @menu
20122 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
20123 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
20124 @end menu
20125
20126 @ifnottex
20127 @node Similarities differences
20128 @unnumberedsubsec Similarities and differences
20129 @end ifnottex
20130
20131 The @code{print-X-axis} function is constructed in more or less the
20132 same fashion as the @code{print-Y-axis} function except that it has
20133 two lines: the line of tic marks and the numbers. We will write a
20134 separate function to print each line and then combine them within the
20135 @code{print-X-axis} function.
20136
20137 This is a three step process:
20138
20139 @enumerate
20140 @item
20141 Write a function to print the X axis tic marks, @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}.
20142
20143 @item
20144 Write a function to print the X numbers, @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20145
20146 @item
20147 Write a function to print both lines, the @code{print-X-axis} function,
20148 using @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20149 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20150 @end enumerate
20151
20152 @node X Axis Tic Marks
20153 @appendixsubsec X Axis Tic Marks
20154
20155 The first function should print the X axis tic marks. We must specify
20156 the tic marks themselves and their spacing:
20157
20158 @smallexample
20159 @group
20160 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
20161 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
20162 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
20163 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
20164 @end group
20165 @end smallexample
20166
20167 @noindent
20168 (Note that the value of @code{graph-blank} is set by another
20169 @code{defvar}. The @code{boundp} predicate checks whether it has
20170 already been set; @code{boundp} returns @code{nil} if it has not. If
20171 @code{graph-blank} were unbound and we did not use this conditional
20172 construction, in a recent GNU Emacs, we would enter the debugger and
20173 see an error message saying @samp{@w{Debugger entered--Lisp error:}
20174 @w{(void-variable graph-blank)}}.)
20175
20176 @need 1200
20177 Here is the @code{defvar} for @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}:
20178
20179 @smallexample
20180 @group
20181 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
20182 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
20183 @end group
20184 @end smallexample
20185
20186 @need 1250
20187 The goal is to make a line that looks like this:
20188
20189 @smallexample
20190 | | | |
20191 @end smallexample
20192
20193 The first tic is indented so that it is under the first column, which is
20194 indented to provide space for the Y axis labels.
20195
20196 A tic element consists of the blank spaces that stretch from one tic to
20197 the next plus a tic symbol. The number of blanks is determined by the
20198 width of the tic symbol and the @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20199
20200 @need 1250
20201 The code looks like this:
20202
20203 @smallexample
20204 @group
20205 ;;; X-axis-tic-element
20206 @dots{}
20207 (concat
20208 (make-string
20209 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20210 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20211 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20212 ? )
20213 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20214 X-axis-tic-symbol)
20215 @dots{}
20216 @end group
20217 @end smallexample
20218
20219 Next, we determine how many blanks are needed to indent the first tic
20220 mark to the first column of the graph. This uses the value of
20221 @code{full-Y-label-width} passed it by the @code{print-graph} function.
20222
20223 @need 1250
20224 The code to make @code{X-axis-leading-spaces}
20225 looks like this:
20226
20227 @smallexample
20228 @group
20229 ;; X-axis-leading-spaces
20230 @dots{}
20231 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? )
20232 @dots{}
20233 @end group
20234 @end smallexample
20235
20236 We also need to determine the length of the horizontal axis, which is
20237 the length of the numbers list, and the number of ticks in the horizontal
20238 axis:
20239
20240 @smallexample
20241 @group
20242 ;; X-length
20243 @dots{}
20244 (length numbers-list)
20245 @end group
20246
20247 @group
20248 ;; tic-width
20249 @dots{}
20250 (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20251 @end group
20252
20253 @group
20254 ;; number-of-X-ticks
20255 (if (zerop (% (X-length tic-width)))
20256 (/ (X-length tic-width))
20257 (1+ (/ (X-length tic-width))))
20258 @end group
20259 @end smallexample
20260
20261 @need 1250
20262 All this leads us directly to the function for printing the X axis tic line:
20263
20264 @findex print-X-axis-tic-line
20265 @smallexample
20266 @group
20267 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
20268 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
20269 "Print ticks for X axis."
20270 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20271 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
20272 @end group
20273 @group
20274 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
20275 (insert (concat
20276 (make-string
20277 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20278 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
20279 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
20280 ? )
20281 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20282 @end group
20283 @group
20284 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
20285 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20286 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
20287 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
20288 @end group
20289 @end smallexample
20290
20291 The line of numbers is equally straightforward:
20292
20293 @need 1250
20294 First, we create a numbered element with blank spaces before each number:
20295
20296 @findex X-axis-element
20297 @smallexample
20298 @group
20299 (defun X-axis-element (number)
20300 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
20301 (let ((leading-spaces
20302 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20303 (length (number-to-string number)))))
20304 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20305 (number-to-string number))))
20306 @end group
20307 @end smallexample
20308
20309 Next, we create the function to print the numbered line, starting with
20310 the number ``1'' under the first column:
20311
20312 @findex print-X-axis-numbered-line
20313 @smallexample
20314 @group
20315 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
20316 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces)
20317 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
20318 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing))
20319 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20320 (insert "1")
20321 @end group
20322 @group
20323 (insert (concat
20324 (make-string
20325 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
20326 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing) 2)
20327 ? )
20328 (number-to-string number)))
20329 @end group
20330 @group
20331 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
20332 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20333 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20334 (insert (X-axis-element number))
20335 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20336 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
20337 @end group
20338 @end smallexample
20339
20340 Finally, we need to write the @code{print-X-axis} that uses
20341 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20342 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20343
20344 The function must determine the local values of the variables used by both
20345 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and
20346 then it must call them. Also, it must print the carriage return that
20347 separates the two lines.
20348
20349 The function consists of a varlist that specifies five local variables,
20350 and calls to each of the two line printing functions:
20351
20352 @findex print-X-axis
20353 @smallexample
20354 @group
20355 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list)
20356 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST."
20357 (let* ((leading-spaces
20358 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
20359 @end group
20360 @group
20361 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
20362 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
20363 (X-length (length numbers-list))
20364 @end group
20365 @group
20366 (X-tic
20367 (concat
20368 (make-string
20369 @end group
20370 @group
20371 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20372 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20373 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20374 ? )
20375 @end group
20376 @group
20377 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20378 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20379 @end group
20380 @group
20381 (tic-number
20382 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
20383 (/ X-length tic-width)
20384 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
20385 @end group
20386 @group
20387 (print-X-axis-tic-line tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
20388 (insert "\n")
20389 (print-X-axis-numbered-line tic-number leading-spaces)))
20390 @end group
20391 @end smallexample
20392
20393 @need 1250
20394 You can test @code{print-X-axis}:
20395
20396 @enumerate
20397 @item
20398 Install @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}, @code{X-axis-label-spacing},
20399 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}, as well as @code{X-axis-element},
20400 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and @code{print-X-axis}.
20401
20402 @item
20403 Copy the following expression:
20404
20405 @smallexample
20406 @group
20407 (progn
20408 (let ((full-Y-label-width 5)
20409 (symbol-width 1))
20410 (print-X-axis
20411 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16))))
20412 @end group
20413 @end smallexample
20414
20415 @item
20416 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20417 want the axis labels to start.
20418
20419 @item
20420 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20421
20422 @item
20423 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20424 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20425
20426 @item
20427 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20428 @end enumerate
20429
20430 @need 1250
20431 Emacs will print the horizontal axis like this:
20432 @sp 1
20433
20434 @smallexample
20435 @group
20436 | | | | |
20437 1 5 10 15 20
20438 @end group
20439 @end smallexample
20440
20441 @node Print Whole Graph
20442 @appendixsec Printing the Whole Graph
20443 @cindex Printing the whole graph
20444 @cindex Whole graph printing
20445 @cindex Graph, printing all
20446
20447 Now we are nearly ready to print the whole graph.
20448
20449 The function to print the graph with the proper labels follows the
20450 outline we created earlier (@pxref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled
20451 Axes}), but with additions.
20452
20453 @need 1250
20454 Here is the outline:
20455
20456 @smallexample
20457 @group
20458 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
20459 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
20460 (let ((height @dots{}
20461 @dots{}))
20462 @end group
20463 @group
20464 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
20465 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
20466 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
20467 @end group
20468 @end smallexample
20469
20470 @menu
20471 * The final version:: A few changes.
20472 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
20473 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
20474 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
20475 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
20476 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
20477 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
20478 @end menu
20479
20480 @ifnottex
20481 @node The final version
20482 @unnumberedsubsec Changes for the Final Version
20483 @end ifnottex
20484
20485 The final version is different from what we planned in two ways:
20486 first, it contains additional values calculated once in the varlist;
20487 second, it carries an option to specify the labels' increment per row.
20488 This latter feature turns out to be essential; otherwise, a graph may
20489 have more rows than fit on a display or on a sheet of paper.
20490
20491 @need 1500
20492 This new feature requires a change to the @code{Y-axis-column}
20493 function, to add @code{vertical-step} to it. The function looks like
20494 this:
20495
20496 @findex Y-axis-column @r{Final version.}
20497 @smallexample
20498 @group
20499 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20500 (defun Y-axis-column
20501 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
20502 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
20503 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20504 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
20505 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
20506 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
20507 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
20508 that each line is five units of the graph."
20509 @end group
20510 @group
20511 (let (Y-axis
20512 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
20513 (while (> height 1)
20514 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20515 @end group
20516 @group
20517 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20518 (setq Y-axis
20519 (cons
20520 (Y-axis-element
20521 (* height number-per-line)
20522 width-of-label)
20523 Y-axis))
20524 @end group
20525 @group
20526 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20527 (setq Y-axis
20528 (cons
20529 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20530 Y-axis)))
20531 (setq height (1- height)))
20532 @end group
20533 @group
20534 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20535 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
20536 (or vertical-step 1)
20537 width-of-label)
20538 Y-axis))
20539 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20540 @end group
20541 @end smallexample
20542
20543 The values for the maximum height of graph and the width of a symbol
20544 are computed by @code{print-graph} in its @code{let} expression; so
20545 @code{graph-body-print} must be changed to accept them.
20546
20547 @findex graph-body-print @r{Final version.}
20548 @smallexample
20549 @group
20550 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20551 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
20552 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20553 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20554 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20555 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
20556 @end group
20557 @group
20558 (let (from-position)
20559 (while numbers-list
20560 (setq from-position (point))
20561 (insert-rectangle
20562 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
20563 (goto-char from-position)
20564 (forward-char symbol-width)
20565 @end group
20566 @group
20567 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
20568 (sit-for 0)
20569 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
20570 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
20571 (forward-line height)
20572 (insert "\n")))
20573 @end group
20574 @end smallexample
20575
20576 @need 1250
20577 Finally, the code for the @code{print-graph} function:
20578
20579 @findex print-graph @r{Final version.}
20580 @smallexample
20581 @group
20582 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20583 (defun print-graph
20584 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step)
20585 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20586 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20587 @end group
20588
20589 @group
20590 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
20591 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
20592 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
20593 each row is five units."
20594 @end group
20595 @group
20596 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
20597 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
20598 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
20599 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20600 @end group
20601 @group
20602 (height-of-top-line
20603 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20604 height
20605 ;; @r{else}
20606 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20607 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20608 @end group
20609 @group
20610 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
20611 (full-Y-label-width
20612 (length
20613 @end group
20614 @group
20615 (concat
20616 (number-to-string
20617 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
20618 Y-axis-tic))))
20619 @end group
20620
20621 @group
20622 (print-Y-axis
20623 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
20624 @end group
20625 @group
20626 (graph-body-print
20627 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
20628 (print-X-axis numbers-list)))
20629 @end group
20630 @end smallexample
20631
20632 @node Test print-graph
20633 @appendixsubsec Testing @code{print-graph}
20634
20635 @need 1250
20636 We can test the @code{print-graph} function with a short list of numbers:
20637
20638 @enumerate
20639 @item
20640 Install the final versions of @code{Y-axis-column},
20641 @code{graph-body-print}, and @code{print-graph} (in addition to the
20642 rest of the code.)
20643
20644 @item
20645 Copy the following expression:
20646
20647 @smallexample
20648 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
20649 @end smallexample
20650
20651 @item
20652 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20653 want the axis labels to start.
20654
20655 @item
20656 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20657
20658 @item
20659 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20660 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20661
20662 @item
20663 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20664 @end enumerate
20665
20666 @need 1250
20667 Emacs will print a graph that looks like this:
20668
20669 @smallexample
20670 @group
20671 10 -
20672
20673
20674 *
20675 ** *
20676 5 - **** *
20677 **** ***
20678 * *********
20679 ************
20680 1 - *************
20681
20682 | | | |
20683 1 5 10 15
20684 @end group
20685 @end smallexample
20686
20687 @need 1200
20688 On the other hand, if you pass @code{print-graph} a
20689 @code{vertical-step} value of 2, by evaluating this expression:
20690
20691 @smallexample
20692 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1) 2)
20693 @end smallexample
20694
20695 @need 1250
20696 @noindent
20697 The graph looks like this:
20698
20699 @smallexample
20700 @group
20701 20 -
20702
20703
20704 *
20705 ** *
20706 10 - **** *
20707 **** ***
20708 * *********
20709 ************
20710 2 - *************
20711
20712 | | | |
20713 1 5 10 15
20714 @end group
20715 @end smallexample
20716
20717 @noindent
20718 (A question: is the @samp{2} on the bottom of the vertical axis a bug or a
20719 feature? If you think it is a bug, and should be a @samp{1} instead, (or
20720 even a @samp{0}), you can modify the sources.)
20721
20722 @node Graphing words in defuns
20723 @appendixsubsec Graphing Numbers of Words and Symbols
20724
20725 Now for the graph for which all this code was written: a graph that
20726 shows how many function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and
20727 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
20728 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
20729
20730 This is a multi-step process. First make sure you have loaded all the
20731 requisite code.
20732
20733 @need 1500
20734 It is a good idea to reset the value of @code{top-of-ranges} in case
20735 you have set it to some different value. You can evaluate the
20736 following:
20737
20738 @smallexample
20739 @group
20740 (setq top-of-ranges
20741 '(10 20 30 40 50
20742 60 70 80 90 100
20743 110 120 130 140 150
20744 160 170 180 190 200
20745 210 220 230 240 250
20746 260 270 280 290 300)
20747 @end group
20748 @end smallexample
20749
20750 @noindent
20751 Next create a list of the number of words and symbols in each range.
20752
20753 @need 1500
20754 @noindent
20755 Evaluate the following:
20756
20757 @smallexample
20758 @group
20759 (setq list-for-graph
20760 (defuns-per-range
20761 (sort
20762 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
20763 (directory-files "/usr/local/emacs/lisp"
20764 t ".+el$"))
20765 '<)
20766 top-of-ranges))
20767 @end group
20768 @end smallexample
20769
20770 @noindent
20771 On my old machine, this took about an hour. It looked though 303 Lisp
20772 files in my copy of Emacs version 19.23. After all that computing,
20773 the @code{list-for-graph} had this value:
20774
20775 @smallexample
20776 @group
20777 (537 1027 955 785 594 483 349 292 224 199 166 120 116 99
20778 90 80 67 48 52 45 41 33 28 26 25 20 12 28 11 13 220)
20779 @end group
20780 @end smallexample
20781
20782 @noindent
20783 This means that my copy of Emacs had 537 function definitions with
20784 fewer than 10 words or symbols in them, 1,027 function definitions
20785 with 10 to 19 words or symbols in them, 955 function definitions with
20786 20 to 29 words or symbols in them, and so on.
20787
20788 Clearly, just by looking at this list we can see that most function
20789 definitions contain ten to thirty words and symbols.
20790
20791 Now for printing. We do @emph{not} want to print a graph that is
20792 1,030 lines high @dots{} Instead, we should print a graph that is
20793 fewer than twenty-five lines high. A graph that height can be
20794 displayed on almost any monitor, and easily printed on a sheet of paper.
20795
20796 This means that each value in @code{list-for-graph} must be reduced to
20797 one-fiftieth its present value.
20798
20799 Here is a short function to do just that, using two functions we have
20800 not yet seen, @code{mapcar} and @code{lambda}.
20801
20802 @smallexample
20803 @group
20804 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
20805 "Return list, each number one-fiftieth of previous."
20806 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
20807 @end group
20808 @end smallexample
20809
20810 @node lambda
20811 @appendixsubsec A @code{lambda} Expression: Useful Anonymity
20812 @cindex Anonymous function
20813 @findex lambda
20814
20815 @code{lambda} is the symbol for an anonymous function, a function
20816 without a name. Every time you use an anonymous function, you need to
20817 include its whole body.
20818
20819 @need 1250
20820 @noindent
20821 Thus,
20822
20823 @smallexample
20824 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
20825 @end smallexample
20826
20827 @noindent
20828 is a function definition that says ``return the value resulting from
20829 dividing whatever is passed to me as @code{arg} by 50''.
20830
20831 @need 1200
20832 Earlier, for example, we had a function @code{multiply-by-seven}; it
20833 multiplied its argument by 7. This function is similar, except it
20834 divides its argument by 50; and, it has no name. The anonymous
20835 equivalent of @code{multiply-by-seven} is:
20836
20837 @smallexample
20838 (lambda (number) (* 7 number))
20839 @end smallexample
20840
20841 @noindent
20842 (@xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
20843
20844 @need 1250
20845 @noindent
20846 If we want to multiply 3 by 7, we can write:
20847
20848 @c clear print-postscript-figures
20849 @c lambda example diagram #1
20850 @ifnottex
20851 @smallexample
20852 @group
20853 (multiply-by-seven 3)
20854 \_______________/ ^
20855 | |
20856 function argument
20857 @end group
20858 @end smallexample
20859 @end ifnottex
20860 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20861 @sp 1
20862 @tex
20863 @center @image{lambda-1}
20864 @end tex
20865 @sp 1
20866 @end ifset
20867 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20868 @iftex
20869 @smallexample
20870 @group
20871 (multiply-by-seven 3)
20872 \_______________/ ^
20873 | |
20874 function argument
20875 @end group
20876 @end smallexample
20877 @end iftex
20878 @end ifclear
20879
20880 @noindent
20881 This expression returns 21.
20882
20883 @need 1250
20884 @noindent
20885 Similarly, we can write:
20886
20887 @c lambda example diagram #2
20888 @ifnottex
20889 @smallexample
20890 @group
20891 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
20892 \____________________________/ ^
20893 | |
20894 anonymous function argument
20895 @end group
20896 @end smallexample
20897 @end ifnottex
20898 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20899 @sp 1
20900 @tex
20901 @center @image{lambda-2}
20902 @end tex
20903 @sp 1
20904 @end ifset
20905 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20906 @iftex
20907 @smallexample
20908 @group
20909 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
20910 \____________________________/ ^
20911 | |
20912 anonymous function argument
20913 @end group
20914 @end smallexample
20915 @end iftex
20916 @end ifclear
20917
20918 @need 1250
20919 @noindent
20920 If we want to divide 100 by 50, we can write:
20921
20922 @c lambda example diagram #3
20923 @ifnottex
20924 @smallexample
20925 @group
20926 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
20927 \______________________/ \_/
20928 | |
20929 anonymous function argument
20930 @end group
20931 @end smallexample
20932 @end ifnottex
20933 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20934 @sp 1
20935 @tex
20936 @center @image{lambda-3}
20937 @end tex
20938 @sp 1
20939 @end ifset
20940 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20941 @iftex
20942 @smallexample
20943 @group
20944 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
20945 \______________________/ \_/
20946 | |
20947 anonymous function argument
20948 @end group
20949 @end smallexample
20950 @end iftex
20951 @end ifclear
20952
20953 @noindent
20954 This expression returns 2. The 100 is passed to the function, which
20955 divides that number by 50.
20956
20957 @xref{Lambda Expressions, , Lambda Expressions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
20958 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{lambda}. Lisp and lambda
20959 expressions derive from the Lambda Calculus.
20960
20961 @node mapcar
20962 @appendixsubsec The @code{mapcar} Function
20963 @findex mapcar
20964
20965 @code{mapcar} is a function that calls its first argument with each
20966 element of its second argument, in turn. The second argument must be
20967 a sequence.
20968
20969 The @samp{map} part of the name comes from the mathematical phrase,
20970 ``mapping over a domain'', meaning to apply a function to each of the
20971 elements in a domain. The mathematical phrase is based on the
20972 metaphor of a surveyor walking, one step at a time, over an area he is
20973 mapping. And @samp{car}, of course, comes from the Lisp notion of the
20974 first of a list.
20975
20976 @need 1250
20977 @noindent
20978 For example,
20979
20980 @smallexample
20981 @group
20982 (mapcar '1+ '(2 4 6))
20983 @result{} (3 5 7)
20984 @end group
20985 @end smallexample
20986
20987 @noindent
20988 The function @code{1+} which adds one to its argument, is executed on
20989 @emph{each} element of the list, and a new list is returned.
20990
20991 Contrast this with @code{apply}, which applies its first argument to
20992 all the remaining.
20993 (@xref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}, for a explanation of
20994 @code{apply}.)
20995
20996 @need 1250
20997 In the definition of @code{one-fiftieth}, the first argument is the
20998 anonymous function:
20999
21000 @smallexample
21001 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21002 @end smallexample
21003
21004 @noindent
21005 and the second argument is @code{full-range}, which will be bound to
21006 @code{list-for-graph}.
21007
21008 @need 1250
21009 The whole expression looks like this:
21010
21011 @smallexample
21012 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21013 @end smallexample
21014
21015 @xref{Mapping Functions, , Mapping Functions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21016 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{mapcar}.
21017
21018 Using the @code{one-fiftieth} function, we can generate a list in
21019 which each element is one-fiftieth the size of the corresponding
21020 element in @code{list-for-graph}.
21021
21022 @smallexample
21023 @group
21024 (setq fiftieth-list-for-graph
21025 (one-fiftieth list-for-graph))
21026 @end group
21027 @end smallexample
21028
21029 @need 1250
21030 The resulting list looks like this:
21031
21032 @smallexample
21033 @group
21034 (10 20 19 15 11 9 6 5 4 3 3 2 2
21035 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4)
21036 @end group
21037 @end smallexample
21038
21039 @noindent
21040 This, we are almost ready to print! (We also notice the loss of
21041 information: many of the higher ranges are 0, meaning that fewer than
21042 50 defuns had that many words or symbols---but not necessarily meaning
21043 that none had that many words or symbols.)
21044
21045 @node Another Bug
21046 @appendixsubsec Another Bug @dots{} Most Insidious
21047 @cindex Bug, most insidious type
21048 @cindex Insidious type of bug
21049
21050 I said ``almost ready to print''! Of course, there is a bug in the
21051 @code{print-graph} function @dots{} It has a @code{vertical-step}
21052 option, but not a @code{horizontal-step} option. The
21053 @code{top-of-range} scale goes from 10 to 300 by tens. But the
21054 @code{print-graph} function will print only by ones.
21055
21056 This is a classic example of what some consider the most insidious
21057 type of bug, the bug of omission. This is not the kind of bug you can
21058 find by studying the code, for it is not in the code; it is an omitted
21059 feature. Your best actions are to try your program early and often;
21060 and try to arrange, as much as you can, to write code that is easy to
21061 understand and easy to change. Try to be aware, whenever you can,
21062 that whatever you have written, @emph{will} be rewritten, if not soon,
21063 eventually. A hard maxim to follow.
21064
21065 It is the @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line} function that needs the
21066 work; and then the @code{print-X-axis} and the @code{print-graph}
21067 functions need to be adapted. Not much needs to be done; there is one
21068 nicety: the numbers ought to line up under the tic marks. This takes
21069 a little thought.
21070
21071 @need 1250
21072 Here is the corrected @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}:
21073
21074 @smallexample
21075 @group
21076 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21077 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21078 &optional horizontal-step)
21079 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21080 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21081 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21082 @end group
21083 @group
21084 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21085 ;; @r{Delete extra leading spaces.}
21086 (delete-char
21087 (- (1-
21088 (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21089 (insert (concat
21090 (make-string
21091 @end group
21092 @group
21093 ;; @r{Insert white space.}
21094 (- (* symbol-width
21095 X-axis-label-spacing)
21096 (1-
21097 (length
21098 (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21099 2)
21100 ? )
21101 (number-to-string
21102 (* number horizontal-step))))
21103 @end group
21104 @group
21105 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21106 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21107 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21108 (insert (X-axis-element
21109 (* number horizontal-step)))
21110 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21111 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21112 @end group
21113 @end smallexample
21114
21115 @need 1500
21116 If you are reading this in Info, you can see the new versions of
21117 @code{print-X-axis} @code{print-graph} and evaluate them. If you are
21118 reading this in a printed book, you can see the changed lines here
21119 (the full text is too much to print).
21120
21121 @iftex
21122 @smallexample
21123 @group
21124 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21125 @dots{}
21126 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21127 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step))
21128 @end group
21129 @end smallexample
21130
21131 @smallexample
21132 @group
21133 (defun print-graph
21134 (numbers-list
21135 &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21136 @dots{}
21137 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step))
21138 @end group
21139 @end smallexample
21140 @end iftex
21141
21142 @ifnottex
21143 @smallexample
21144 @group
21145 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21146 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21147 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21148 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21149 each column."
21150 @end group
21151 @group
21152 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21153 ;; are passed by ‘print-graph’.
21154 (let* ((leading-spaces
21155 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21156 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21157 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21158 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21159 @end group
21160 @group
21161 (X-tic
21162 (concat
21163 (make-string
21164 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21165 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21166 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21167 ? )
21168 @end group
21169 @group
21170 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21171 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21172 (tic-number
21173 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21174 (/ X-length tic-width)
21175 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21176 @end group
21177
21178 @group
21179 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21180 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21181 (insert "\n")
21182 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21183 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21184 @end group
21185 @end smallexample
21186
21187 @smallexample
21188 @group
21189 (defun print-graph
21190 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21191 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21192 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21193 @end group
21194
21195 @group
21196 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21197 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21198 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21199 each row is five units.
21200 @end group
21201
21202 @group
21203 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21204 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21205 each column."
21206 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21207 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21208 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21209 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21210 @end group
21211 @group
21212 (height-of-top-line
21213 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21214 height
21215 ;; @r{else}
21216 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21217 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21218 @end group
21219 @group
21220 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21221 (full-Y-label-width
21222 (length
21223 (concat
21224 (number-to-string
21225 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21226 Y-axis-tic))))
21227 @end group
21228 @group
21229 (print-Y-axis
21230 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21231 (graph-body-print
21232 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21233 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21234 @end group
21235 @end smallexample
21236 @end ifnottex
21237
21238 @c qqq
21239 @ignore
21240 Graphing Definitions Re-listed
21241
21242 @need 1250
21243 Here are all the graphing definitions in their final form:
21244
21245 @smallexample
21246 @group
21247 (defvar top-of-ranges
21248 '(10 20 30 40 50
21249 60 70 80 90 100
21250 110 120 130 140 150
21251 160 170 180 190 200
21252 210 220 230 240 250)
21253 "List specifying ranges for ‘defuns-per-range’.")
21254 @end group
21255
21256 @group
21257 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
21258 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
21259 @end group
21260
21261 @group
21262 (defvar graph-blank " "
21263 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
21264 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
21265 as graph-symbol.")
21266 @end group
21267
21268 @group
21269 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
21270 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
21271 @end group
21272
21273 @group
21274 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
21275 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
21276 @end group
21277
21278 @group
21279 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
21280 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
21281 @end group
21282
21283 @group
21284 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
21285 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
21286 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
21287 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
21288 @end group
21289 @end smallexample
21290
21291 @smallexample
21292 @group
21293 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
21294 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
21295 (beginning-of-defun)
21296 (let ((count 0)
21297 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
21298 @end group
21299
21300 @group
21301 (while
21302 (and (< (point) end)
21303 (re-search-forward
21304 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
21305 end t))
21306 (setq count (1+ count)))
21307 count))
21308 @end group
21309 @end smallexample
21310
21311 @smallexample
21312 @group
21313 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
21314 "Return list of definitions’ lengths within FILE.
21315 The returned list is a list of numbers.
21316 Each number is the number of words or
21317 symbols in one function definition."
21318 @end group
21319
21320 @group
21321 (message "Working on ‘%s’ ... " filename)
21322 (save-excursion
21323 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
21324 (lengths-list))
21325 (set-buffer buffer)
21326 (setq buffer-read-only t)
21327 (widen)
21328 (goto-char (point-min))
21329 @end group
21330
21331 @group
21332 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
21333 (setq lengths-list
21334 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
21335 (kill-buffer buffer)
21336 lengths-list)))
21337 @end group
21338 @end smallexample
21339
21340 @smallexample
21341 @group
21342 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
21343 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
21344 (let (lengths-list)
21345 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
21346 (while list-of-files
21347 (setq lengths-list
21348 (append
21349 lengths-list
21350 @end group
21351 @group
21352 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
21353 (lengths-list-file
21354 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
21355 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
21356 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
21357 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
21358 lengths-list))
21359 @end group
21360 @end smallexample
21361
21362 @smallexample
21363 @group
21364 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
21365 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
21366 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
21367 (number-within-range 0)
21368 defuns-per-range-list)
21369 @end group
21370
21371 @group
21372 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
21373 (while top-of-ranges
21374
21375 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
21376 (while (and
21377 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
21378 (car sorted-lengths)
21379 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
21380
21381 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
21382 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
21383 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
21384 @end group
21385
21386 @group
21387 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
21388
21389 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21390 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
21391 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
21392
21393 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
21394 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
21395 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
21396 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
21397 @end group
21398
21399 @group
21400 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
21401 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
21402 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21403 (cons
21404 (length sorted-lengths)
21405 defuns-per-range-list))
21406
21407 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
21408 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
21409 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
21410 @end group
21411 @end smallexample
21412
21413 @smallexample
21414 @group
21415 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
21416 "Return list of MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings;
21417 ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
21418 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
21419 of the list.
21420 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
21421 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
21422 @end group
21423
21424 @group
21425 (let ((insert-list nil)
21426 (number-of-top-blanks
21427 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
21428
21429 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
21430 (while (> actual-height 0)
21431 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
21432 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
21433 @end group
21434
21435 @group
21436 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
21437 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
21438 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
21439 (setq number-of-top-blanks
21440 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
21441
21442 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
21443 insert-list))
21444 @end group
21445 @end smallexample
21446
21447 @smallexample
21448 @group
21449 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
21450 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
21451 A numbered element looks like this ‘ 5 - ’,
21452 and is padded as needed so all line up with
21453 the element for the largest number."
21454 @end group
21455 @group
21456 (let* ((leading-spaces
21457 (- full-Y-label-width
21458 (length
21459 (concat (number-to-string number)
21460 Y-axis-tic)))))
21461 @end group
21462 @group
21463 (concat
21464 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21465 (number-to-string number)
21466 Y-axis-tic)))
21467 @end group
21468 @end smallexample
21469
21470 @smallexample
21471 @group
21472 (defun print-Y-axis
21473 (height full-Y-label-width &optional vertical-step)
21474 "Insert Y axis by HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
21475 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
21476 Full width is the width of the highest label element.
21477 Optionally, print according to VERTICAL-STEP."
21478 @end group
21479 @group
21480 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
21481 ;; are passed by ‘print-graph’.
21482 (let ((start (point)))
21483 (insert-rectangle
21484 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width vertical-step))
21485 @end group
21486 @group
21487 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
21488 (goto-char start)
21489 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
21490 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
21491 @end group
21492 @end smallexample
21493
21494 @smallexample
21495 @group
21496 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
21497 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
21498 "Print ticks for X axis."
21499 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21500 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
21501 @end group
21502 @group
21503 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
21504 (insert (concat
21505 (make-string
21506 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21507 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
21508 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
21509 ? )
21510 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21511 @end group
21512 @group
21513 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
21514 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21515 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
21516 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
21517 @end group
21518 @end smallexample
21519
21520 @smallexample
21521 @group
21522 (defun X-axis-element (number)
21523 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
21524 (let ((leading-spaces
21525 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21526 (length (number-to-string number)))))
21527 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21528 (number-to-string number))))
21529 @end group
21530 @end smallexample
21531
21532 @smallexample
21533 @group
21534 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
21535 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21536 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21537 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21538 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
21539 @end group
21540 @group
21541 (let (from-position)
21542 (while numbers-list
21543 (setq from-position (point))
21544 (insert-rectangle
21545 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
21546 (goto-char from-position)
21547 (forward-char symbol-width)
21548 @end group
21549 @group
21550 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
21551 (sit-for 0)
21552 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
21553 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
21554 (forward-line height)
21555 (insert "\n")))
21556 @end group
21557 @end smallexample
21558
21559 @smallexample
21560 @group
21561 (defun Y-axis-column
21562 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
21563 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
21564 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21565 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
21566 @end group
21567 @group
21568 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
21569 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
21570 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
21571 that each line is five units of the graph."
21572 (let (Y-axis
21573 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
21574 @end group
21575 @group
21576 (while (> height 1)
21577 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21578 ;; @r{Insert label.}
21579 (setq Y-axis
21580 (cons
21581 (Y-axis-element
21582 (* height number-per-line)
21583 width-of-label)
21584 Y-axis))
21585 @end group
21586 @group
21587 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
21588 (setq Y-axis
21589 (cons
21590 (make-string width-of-label ? )
21591 Y-axis)))
21592 (setq height (1- height)))
21593 @end group
21594 @group
21595 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
21596 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
21597 (or vertical-step 1)
21598 width-of-label)
21599 Y-axis))
21600 (nreverse Y-axis)))
21601 @end group
21602 @end smallexample
21603
21604 @smallexample
21605 @group
21606 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21607 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21608 &optional horizontal-step)
21609 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21610 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21611 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21612 @end group
21613 @group
21614 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21615 ;; line up number
21616 (delete-char (- (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21617 (insert (concat
21618 (make-string
21619 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
21620 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21621 (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21622 2)
21623 ? )
21624 (number-to-string (* number horizontal-step))))
21625 @end group
21626 @group
21627 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21628 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21629 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21630 (insert (X-axis-element (* number horizontal-step)))
21631 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21632 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21633 @end group
21634 @end smallexample
21635
21636 @smallexample
21637 @group
21638 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21639 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21640 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21641 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21642 each column."
21643 @end group
21644 @group
21645 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21646 ;; are passed by ‘print-graph’.
21647 (let* ((leading-spaces
21648 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21649 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21650 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21651 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21652 @end group
21653 @group
21654 (X-tic
21655 (concat
21656 (make-string
21657 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21658 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21659 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21660 ? )
21661 @end group
21662 @group
21663 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21664 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21665 (tic-number
21666 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21667 (/ X-length tic-width)
21668 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21669 @end group
21670
21671 @group
21672 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21673 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21674 (insert "\n")
21675 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21676 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21677 @end group
21678 @end smallexample
21679
21680 @smallexample
21681 @group
21682 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21683 "Return list, each number of which is 1/50th previous."
21684 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21685 @end group
21686 @end smallexample
21687
21688 @smallexample
21689 @group
21690 (defun print-graph
21691 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21692 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21693 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21694 @end group
21695
21696 @group
21697 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21698 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21699 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21700 each row is five units.
21701 @end group
21702
21703 @group
21704 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21705 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21706 each column."
21707 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21708 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21709 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21710 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21711 @end group
21712 @group
21713 (height-of-top-line
21714 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21715 height
21716 ;; @r{else}
21717 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21718 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21719 @end group
21720 @group
21721 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21722 (full-Y-label-width
21723 (length
21724 (concat
21725 (number-to-string
21726 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21727 Y-axis-tic))))
21728 @end group
21729 @group
21730
21731 (print-Y-axis
21732 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21733 (graph-body-print
21734 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21735 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21736 @end group
21737 @end smallexample
21738 @c qqq
21739 @end ignore
21740
21741 @page
21742 @node Final printed graph
21743 @appendixsubsec The Printed Graph
21744
21745 When made and installed, you can call the @code{print-graph} command
21746 like this:
21747 @sp 1
21748
21749 @smallexample
21750 @group
21751 (print-graph fiftieth-list-for-graph 50 10)
21752 @end group
21753 @end smallexample
21754 @sp 1
21755
21756 @noindent
21757 Here is the graph:
21758 @sp 2
21759
21760 @smallexample
21761 @group
21762 1000 - *
21763 **
21764 **
21765 **
21766 **
21767 750 - ***
21768 ***
21769 ***
21770 ***
21771 ****
21772 500 - *****
21773 ******
21774 ******
21775 ******
21776 *******
21777 250 - ********
21778 ********* *
21779 *********** *
21780 ************* *
21781 50 - ***************** * *
21782 | | | | | | | |
21783 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
21784 @end group
21785 @end smallexample
21786
21787 @sp 2
21788
21789 @noindent
21790 The largest group of functions contain 10--19 words and symbols each.
21791
21792 @node Free Software and Free Manuals
21793 @appendix Free Software and Free Manuals
21794
21795 @strong{by Richard M. Stallman}
21796 @sp 1
21797
21798 The biggest deficiency in free operating systems is not in the
21799 software---it is the lack of good free manuals that we can include in
21800 these systems. Many of our most important programs do not come with
21801 full manuals. Documentation is an essential part of any software
21802 package; when an important free software package does not come with a
21803 free manual, that is a major gap. We have many such gaps today.
21804
21805 Once upon a time, many years ago, I thought I would learn Perl. I got
21806 a copy of a free manual, but I found it hard to read. When I asked
21807 Perl users about alternatives, they told me that there were better
21808 introductory manuals---but those were not free.
21809
21810 Why was this? The authors of the good manuals had written them for
21811 O'Reilly Associates, which published them with restrictive terms---no
21812 copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
21813 them from the free software community.
21814
21815 That wasn't the first time this sort of thing has happened, and (to
21816 our community's great loss) it was far from the last. Proprietary
21817 manual publishers have enticed a great many authors to restrict their
21818 manuals since then. Many times I have heard a GNU user eagerly tell me
21819 about a manual that he is writing, with which he expects to help the
21820 GNU project---and then had my hopes dashed, as he proceeded to explain
21821 that he had signed a contract with a publisher that would restrict it
21822 so that we cannot use it.
21823
21824 Given that writing good English is a rare skill among programmers, we
21825 can ill afford to lose manuals this way.
21826
21827 Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
21828 price. The problem with these manuals was not that O'Reilly Associates
21829 charged a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. The Free
21830 Software Foundation @uref{http://shop.fsf.org, sells printed copies} of
21831 free @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/doc.html, GNU manuals}, too.
21832 But GNU manuals are available in source code form, while these manuals
21833 are available only on paper. GNU manuals come with permission to copy
21834 and modify; the Perl manuals do not. These restrictions are the
21835 problems.
21836
21837 The criterion for a free manual is pretty much the same as for free
21838 software: it is a matter of giving all users certain
21839 freedoms. Redistribution (including commercial redistribution) must be
21840 permitted, so that the manual can accompany every copy of the program,
21841 on-line or on paper. Permission for modification is crucial too.
21842
21843 As a general rule, I don't believe that it is essential for people to
21844 have permission to modify all sorts of articles and books. The issues
21845 for writings are not necessarily the same as those for software. For
21846 example, I don't think you or I are obliged to give permission to
21847 modify articles like this one, which describe our actions and our
21848 views.
21849
21850 But there is a particular reason why the freedom to modify is crucial
21851 for documentation for free software. When people exercise their right
21852 to modify the software, and add or change its features, if they are
21853 conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can provide
21854 accurate and usable documentation with the modified program. A manual
21855 which forbids programmers to be conscientious and finish the job, or
21856 more precisely requires them to write a new manual from scratch if
21857 they change the program, does not fill our community's needs.
21858
21859 While a blanket prohibition on modification is unacceptable, some
21860 kinds of limits on the method of modification pose no problem. For
21861 example, requirements to preserve the original author's copyright
21862 notice, the distribution terms, or the list of authors, are ok. It is
21863 also no problem to require modified versions to include notice that
21864 they were modified, even to have entire sections that may not be
21865 deleted or changed, as long as these sections deal with nontechnical
21866 topics. (Some GNU manuals have them.)
21867
21868 These kinds of restrictions are not a problem because, as a practical
21869 matter, they don't stop the conscientious programmer from adapting the
21870 manual to fit the modified program. In other words, they don't block
21871 the free software community from making full use of the manual.
21872
21873 However, it must be possible to modify all the technical content of
21874 the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media,
21875 through all the usual channels; otherwise, the restrictions do block
21876 the community, the manual is not free, and so we need another manual.
21877
21878 Unfortunately, it is often hard to find someone to write another
21879 manual when a proprietary manual exists. The obstacle is that many
21880 users think that a proprietary manual is good enough---so they don't
21881 see the need to write a free manual. They do not see that the free
21882 operating system has a gap that needs filling.
21883
21884 Why do users think that proprietary manuals are good enough? Some have
21885 not considered the issue. I hope this article will do something to
21886 change that.
21887
21888 Other users consider proprietary manuals acceptable for the same
21889 reason so many people consider proprietary software acceptable: they
21890 judge in purely practical terms, not using freedom as a
21891 criterion. These people are entitled to their opinions, but since
21892 those opinions spring from values which do not include freedom, they
21893 are no guide for those of us who do value freedom.
21894
21895 Please spread the word about this issue. We continue to lose manuals
21896 to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that proprietary
21897 manuals are not sufficient, perhaps the next person who wants to help
21898 GNU by writing documentation will realize, before it is too late, that
21899 he must above all make it free.
21900
21901 We can also encourage commercial publishers to sell free, copylefted
21902 manuals instead of proprietary ones. One way you can help this is to
21903 check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and prefer
21904 copylefted manuals to non-copylefted ones.
21905
21906 @sp 2
21907 @noindent
21908 Note: The Free Software Foundation maintains a page on its Web site
21909 that lists free books available from other publishers:@*
21910 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/other-free-books.html}
21911
21912 @node GNU Free Documentation License
21913 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
21914
21915 @cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
21916 @include doclicense.texi
21917
21918 @node Index
21919 @unnumbered Index
21920
21921 @ignore
21922 MENU ENTRY: NODE NAME.
21923 @end ignore
21924
21925 @printindex cp
21926
21927 @iftex
21928 @c Place biographical information on right-hand (verso) page
21929
21930 @tex
21931 \par\vfill\supereject
21932 \ifodd\pageno
21933 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
21934 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
21935 %\page\hbox{}\page
21936 \else
21937 % \par\vfill\supereject
21938 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
21939 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
21940 %\page\hbox{}%\page
21941 %\page\hbox{}%\page
21942 \fi
21943 @end tex
21944
21945 @c page
21946 @w{ }
21947
21948 @c ================ Biographical information ================
21949
21950 @w{ }
21951 @sp 8
21952 @center About the Author
21953 @sp 1
21954 @end iftex
21955
21956 @ifnottex
21957 @node About the Author
21958 @unnumbered About the Author
21959 @end ifnottex
21960
21961 @quotation
21962 Robert J. Chassell has worked with GNU Emacs since 1985. He writes
21963 and edits, teaches Emacs and Emacs Lisp, and speaks throughout the
21964 world on software freedom. Chassell was a founding Director and
21965 Treasurer of the Free Software Foundation, Inc. He is co-author of
21966 the @cite{Texinfo} manual, and has edited more than a dozen other
21967 books. He graduated from Cambridge University, in England. He has an
21968 abiding interest in social and economic history and flies his own
21969 airplane.
21970 @end quotation
21971
21972 @c @page
21973 @c @w{ }
21974 @c
21975 @c @c Prevent page number on blank verso, so eject it first.
21976 @c @tex
21977 @c \par\vfill\supereject
21978 @c @end tex
21979
21980 @c @iftex
21981 @c @headings off
21982 @c @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thistitle
21983 @c @oddheading @| @| @thispage
21984 @c @end iftex
21985
21986 @bye